SIPROTEC-5-Catalog-EN .pdf

siemens.com/siprotec
SIPROTEC 5
Protection, Control, Automation,
Monitoring, Power Quality – Basic
Catalog • Edition 7

SIPROTEC 5 Device
Series
Protection, Control,
Automation,
Monitoring, and Power
Quality – Basic
SIPROTEC 5 – V8.4 – Catalog Edition 7
I n v a l i d :
E d i t i o n 6
SIPROTEC 5
Introduction
Innovation Highlights
SIPROTEC 5 Devices and Fields of Application
Device Types
Device Selection Table
Application Examples
Overcurrent and Feeder Protection
Line Protection
Distance Protection
Line Differential Protection
Line Differential and Distance Protection
Circuit-Breaker Management Device
Overcurrent Protection as Backup Protection for Line Protec-
tion
Transformer Differential Protection
Motor Protection
Generator Protection
Paralleling Device
Busbar Protection
Bay Controllers
Fault Recorder
Merging Unit
SIPROTEC 5 System
Functional Integration
Protection
Control
Automation
Monitoring
Data Acquisition and Logging
1
1.1
1.2
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
2.11
2.12
2.13
2.14
2.15
2.16
2.17
2.18
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
Content
SIPROTEC 5 Device Series ⋅ Protection, Control, Automation, Monitoring, and Power Quality – Basic ⋅ Catalog – Edition 7 3

Communication
Safety and Security Concept
Test and Diagnostics
SIPROTEC 5 – Engineering
SIPROTEC 5 Web UI
DIGSI 5
IEC 61850 System Configurator
SIGRA
SIPROTEC DigitalTwin
SIPROTEC Dashboard
SIPROTEC 5 – Hardware
Hardware Modules
Conformal Coating
Modules
Integrated Interfaces
Terminals
Input/Output Modules
Plug-In Modules
Standard Variants
Appendix
Spare Parts and Accessories
Connection Diagrams
Assembly Dimensions
Grouping Measured Values
Technical Data
Overview Document Types
Legal Notices
Index
3.7
3.8
3.9
4
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
5
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
5.8
6
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
6.7
7
Content
4 SIPROTEC 5 Device Series ⋅ Protection, Control, Automation, Monitoring, and Power Quality – Basic ⋅ Catalog – Edition 7

[E_CC_SIP5_GD_SS_LED, 2, --_--]
[E_CC_SIP5_PAS_Gruppe, 2, --_--]
[ph_Nesplen, 1, --_--]
Editorial
SIPROTEC has been a recognized brand leader in digital protec-
tion and bay units on the energy market for decades. The
Siemens high-performance SIPROTEC devices cover the entire
power spectrum and can be implemented in a wide range of
fields – from power generation to transmission of very high
voltages, distribution network, and industrial applications.
SIPROTEC 5 is an active component of the secure smart power
system, and an important building block in the complexity of
distributed energy-supply systems and networks solutions.
The SIPROTEC 5 generation of devices provides you with a
modern platform of both hardware and software. This platform
offers an excellent solution to the challenges associated with
evolving grid structures and workflows. The quality, reliability,
and proven functions of the SIPROTEC 4 device range have been
preserved. Innovative approaches including holistic workflow,
safety and security, and network-stability monitoring (PMU func-
tionality) have been added.
Integrated and upgradeable functionalities for your efficient
network operation:
• Various sensitive ground fault and ground-fault location
methods for fast fault location
• Voltage control for transformers for cost optimization – also
for parallel transformers
• PMU function for network-stability monitoring
• Adaptive adaptation of the protection parameters via
IEC 61850 to increase the network load
• Protection of complex network structures, such as capacitance
banks or multi-end topologies
• Process-bus applications according to IEC 61850-9-2 digitize
the measured data directly at the measuring point
• IoT interface to cloud applications such as MindSphere with
the standard protocol OPC UA PubSub for easy use of data
from the bay, for example SIPROTEC Dashboard
• Extensive cybersecurity functionality, such as role-based
access control (RBAC), logging of security-related events,
signed firmware, or authenticated IEEE 802.1x network
access.
With the SIPROTEC 5 generation, you are well equipped to meet
the growing economic and availability requirements imposed on
your power systems. The philosophy of SIPROTEC 5 is reflected
in the modularity and flexibility of its hardware and software
components. Perfectly tailored fit – the custom fit for your
switchgear and requirements for the application and standardi-
zation of power automation.
Ingo Erkens
Smart Infrastructure
Digital Grid
Editorial

The Benchmark for Protection, Automation, and Monitoring
The SIPROTEC 5 series is based on the long-term field experience
of the SIPROTEC device series and has specifically been designed
for the new requirements of modern power systems. For this
purpose, SIPROTEC 5 is equipped with extensive functionalities
and device types. With the integrated and consistent DIGSI 5
engineering tool, a solution has also been provided for increas-
ingly complex processes, from design through to the engi-
neering phase, up to testing and operation.
Thanks to the high degree of hardware and software modu-
larity, the functionality of the device types can be tailored to the
requested application and adjusted to the ever-changing
requirements throughout the entire lifecycle.
In addition to the reliable and selective protection and the
complete automation function, SIPROTEC 5 offers an extensive
database for operating and monitoring modern power systems.
Synchrophasors (PMU), power-quality data, and extensive
equipment data are included in the functionality.
• Powerful protection functions ensure the safety of equipment
and staff
• Individually configurable devices save money on the initial
investment and on spare-parts storage, maintenance, exten-
sion, and adaptation of your plant
• Arc protection, transient ground-fault detection, transformer
control, and process bus can easily be integrated and retro-
fitted
• Purposeful and easy handling of devices and software thanks
to a user-friendly design
• Increased reliability and quality of the engineering process
• High operational safety due to the consistent safety imple-
mentations
• Highest availability even under extreme environmental condi-
tions due to the coating on the electronic modules
• Integrated switch for low-cost and redundant optical and elec-
trical Ethernet rings
• Redundancy protocols RSTP, PRP, and HSR for maximum avail-
ability
• Efficient operating concepts due to flexible engineering of
IEC 61850 Edition 2
• Comprehensive database for monitoring modern power
systems, also with IoT cloud connection
• Optimal smart automation platform for your power systems
based on integrated Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU) and
Power Quality functions.
[SIP5_Gruppe, 2, --_--]
Figure 1.1/1 SIPROTEC 5 – Modular Hardware
[E_CC_SIP5_19Zoll_KomMod, 1, --_--]
Figure 1.1/2 SIPROTEC 5 – Modular Process Connection
SIPROTEC 5
Introduction
1.1

Holistic Workflow
End-to-end engineering from system design to operation makes
your work easier throughout the entire process.
The highlight of SIPROTEC 5 is the improved emphasis on daily
ease of operation. SIPROTEC 5 provides holistic support along all
the work steps, allowing for system-view management and
configuration down to the details of individual devices, saving
time and improving cost-effectiveness without compromising
quality (Figure 1.2/1).
Holistic workflow in SIPROTEC 5 means:
• Integrated, consistent system and device engineering – from
the single-line diagram of the unit all the way to device
parameterization
• Simple, intuitive graphical linkage of primary and secondary
equipment
• Supplied and user-defined application templates for the most
frequently used applications
• IEC 61850 System Configurator independent from manufac-
turers, for simple system engineering
• Open-circuited interfaces for seamless integration into your
process environment
• Integrated tools for testing during engineering and commis-
sioning and for simulating operational scenarios, such as
system incidents or switching operations.
• SIPROTEC DigitalTwin for virtually testing SIPROTEC 5 devices
in the cloud
[dw_Holisitic-workflow, 1, en_US]
Figure 1.2/1 End-to-End Tools – from Design to Operation
Holistic workflow in SIPROTEC 5 means for you:
An end-to-end tool from system design to operation – even
across department boundaries – saves time and ensures data
security and transparency throughout the entire lifecycle of your
plant.
Perfectly Tailored Fit
Individually configurable devices provide you with cost-effective
solutions that match your needs precisely throughout the entire
lifecycle. SIPROTEC 5 sets new standards in cost savings and
availability with its innovative modular structure and flexible
hardware, software, and communication. SIPROTEC 5 provides a
perfectly tailored fit for your switchgear and applications that is
unequaled by any other system.
Perfectly tailored fit in SIPROTEC 5 means:
• Modular system design in hardware, functionality, and
communication ensures the perfect fit to your needs
• Functional integration of various applications, such as protec-
tion, control, measurement, power quality or fault recorder,
voltage controller, ground-fault method
• Frequency-tracked protection functions over a wide frequency
range (10 Hz to 80 Hz) and the option to assign the protection
functions in a single device to different frequency tracking
groups
• The same extension and communication modules for all
devices in the family
• Innovative terminal technology ensures easy assembly and
interchangeability at the highest possible degree of safety
• Identical functions throughout the entire system family mean
fewer training requirements and increased safety.
Example: Identical automatic reclosing (AREC) for line protec-
tion devices 7SD8, 7SA8, 7SL8.
Perfectly tailored fit in SIPROTEC 5 means:
Individually configurable devices that save money on initial
investment, spare-parts storage, maintenance, extension, and
adaptation of your system.
[Innovationsschwerpunkte, 1, --_--]
Figure 1.2/2 SIPROTEC 5 – Innovation Highlights
Designed to Communicate
The trendsetting system architecture places communication
firmly under your control. Powerful, flexible, and above all, reli-
able communication is the prerequisite for distributed and
decentralized system topologies such as Smart Grids. In the
system architecture of SIPROTEC 5, we have attached immense
importance to communication, and we have gone to excep-
tional lengths to ensure that you are ideally equipped for the
communication demands of today and the future.
Designed to communicate in SIPROTEC 5 means:
• IoT interface to cloud applications such as MindSphere with
the standard protocol OPC UA PubSub for easy use of data
from the bay, for example SIPROTEC Dashboard
• Adaptation to the topology of your communication structure
using parameters (ring, star, network, etc.)
• Scalable redundancy in hardware and software (protocols to
match your requirements)
• Multiple communication channels to various higher-level
systems at station and control-center level, as well as cloud
applications
• Pluggable and upgradeable communication modules also for
process-bus solutions according to IEC 61850-9-2
SIPROTEC 5
1.2

• Hardware modules decoupled from the currently used
communication protocol
• 2 independent Ethernet protocols in one module
• Extensive routines for test connections, functions, and oper-
ating workflows
Designed to communicate in SIPROTEC 5 means for you:
Communication as an integral component of the system archi-
tecture provides you with the flexibility and security you need in
densely networked systems, today and in the future.
[SIP5_Kommunikationsschnittst, 1, --_--]
Figure 1.2/3 SIPROTEC 5 Device with Extensive Communication Inter-
faces
Safety Inside
Multilayer safety mechanisms in all links of the system safety
chain provide you with the highest possible level of safety and
availability. Human safety and plant safety, as well as maximum
availability, are the top priorities. As the plant landscape
becomes more and more open and complex, conventional
security mechanisms are no longer adequate. For this reason, a
safety concept has been integrated in the SIPROTEC 5 device
architecture that is designed to address and implement these
multilayer aspects in a holistic approach.
Safety Inside in SIPROTEC 5 means:
• Proven functions that protect plants and personnel, which
have been continuously developed over 5 generations
• Long-lasting, rugged hardware (housings, modules, plugs)
and a sophisticated layout of the entire electronics for high
resilience against voltage, EMC, climate, and mechanical
stress
• Sophisticated self-monitoring routines identify and report
device faults immediately and reliably
Comprehensive Cybersecurity
Cyberattacks on the energy infrastructure are real and are now
regularly present in the media. Cybersecurity in the case of
SIPROTEC 5 is therefore considered holistically in all cases. This
includes the processes, personnel, and technologies.
The infrastructure used to develop the SIPROTEC 5 product
family is protected in accordance with ISO/IEC 27001. Critical
data, such as the software and firmware source files, are
protected against unauthorized manipulation.
In addition, the following precautionary, continuous measures
are in place:
• Secure development
• Security-patch management
• Antivirus and Windows patch compatibility checks
• Product hardening
• Independent security validation
The cybersecurity functions implemented in the components are
state of the art and interoperable.
These include the following features:
• TLS-encrypted communication between DIGSI 5 and the
SIPROTEC 5 device
• Support on the device side for role-based access control with
central user management and emergency access
• Configurable read and write access restriction for DIGSI 5 and
IEC 61850-MMS connections at device-port tier
• Logging of security-relevant events via syslog and in a non-
erasable security buffer internal to the device
• Built-in crypto chip for secure information storage and trans-
mission
• Device uses keys stored in the crypto chip to load only firm-
ware signed by Siemens
• Separation of process and service communication
• Secure access with operation via the device display and Web
browser
Smart Automation for Grids
Climate change and dwindling fossil fuels are forcing a total re-
evaluation of the energy-supply industry, from generation to
distribution and consumption. This is having fundamental
effects on the structure and operation of the power systems.
Smart automation, the intelligent power automation system, is
a major real-time component designed to preserve the stability
of these power systems and at the same time conserve energy
and reduce costs.
With SIPROTEC 5 and the unique spectrum of integrated func-
tionality, you have the optimum smart automation platform for
your smart power systems.
Smart Automation for Grids in SIPROTEC 5 means:
• Open-circuited, scalable architecture for IT integration and
new functions
• Smart functions, for example for network operation, analysis
of faults or power quality (power-system monitoring, power-
control unit, fault location)
• Integrated automation with optimized logic blocks based on
the IEC 61131-3 standard
• High-precision acquisition and processing of process values
and power transmission to other components in Smart Grid
• Protection, automation, and monitoring in Smart Grid
SIPROTEC 5 devices have specifically been designed to meet the
requirements of the modern grid, secure the future, and offer
the necessary automation platform.
SIPROTEC 5
1.2

The elements that connect the 5 mentioned innovation high-
lights are IEC 61850 Edition 2 and its thoroughly designed, user-
oriented implementation in SIPROTEC 5.
[Systemkomponente, 1, --_--]
Figure 1.2/4 SIPROTEC 5 as a System Component of the Smart Power
System
IEC 61850 – Simply Usable
Siemens, the pioneer of IEC 61850, makes the full potential of
this global standard easily usable for you.
The IEC 61850 standard is more than just a substation automa-
tion protocol. It comprehensively defines data types, functions,
and communication in station networks. In Edition 2, the influ-
ence of the standard is extended to more domains and applica-
tions of the energy-supply industry.
Siemens was actively involved in the process of standardization
from Edition 1 to Edition 2, and with the largest number of
completed installations in the world, our experience as a manu-
facturer in the field is unsurpassed. Jointly with key customers,
we designed its implementation in SIPROTEC 5, paying close
attention to interoperability, flexibility, and compatibility
between Editions 1 and 2.
Besides the standard protocol IEC 61850-8-2 (station bus) and
IEC 61850-9-2 (process bus), SIPROTEC 5 also supports other
protocols, such as IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 60870-5-104,
DNP3 (serial or TCP), or Modbus TCP.
[IEC61850 Symbol, 1, --_--]
IEC 61850 – Simply usable means:
• A stand-alone IEC 61850 System Configurator that allows
IEC 61850 configuration of SIPROTEC 5, SIPROTEC 4,
SIPROTEC Compact, and third-party device
• Full compatibility with Editions 1 and 2
• Open-circuited interfaces to IEC 61850 ensure system config-
urations and interoperability that is independent from manu-
facturers
• Conversion of the complexity of the IEC 61850 data model
into your familiar user language
• Flexible object modeling, degrees of freedom in object
addressing, and flexible communication services warrant the
highest possible degree of interoperability and effective
exchange and extension concepts.
• Handling optimization based on many projects and close
cooperation with customers from all fields of application
• Protection settings via IEC 61850
• Using several communication modules in Edition 2
The implementation of IEC 61850 Edition 2 unleashes the full
potential of this standard by optimally supporting your opera-
tional needs and simplifying handling.
SIPROTEC 5
1.2

[IEC61850 Edition 2 Certificate Level A, 1, --_--]
Figure 1.2/5 First IEC 61850 Certificate Edition 2 Worldwide
SIPROTEC 5
1.2

2

[dw_sip5_anwendung, 5, en_US]
Figure 2.1/1 Fields of Application of the SIPROTEC 5 Devices
The graphic gives an overview of the utilization of
SIPROTEC 5 devices in the power system. With renewable-
energy producers, in particular, there is power infeed into the
grid at all voltage levels. Protected objects are busbars, over-
head lines or cables, and transformers. The corresponding
protection device are allocated to these objects.
Device Types
A short 5-digit code permits easy identification of the
SIPROTEC 5 devices. The first digit (6 or 7) stands for digital
technology. The 2 letters describe the functionality and the
last 2 digits identify typical properties (Figure 2.1/2). You can
find further details in the catalog section of the related device
description.
[dw_device_typ, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.1/2 Definition of the Device Types by their Designation
Device Types
2.1

Main Function Device Types
Overcurrent protection designed for the protection of feeders and lines in
medium-voltage and high-voltage systems; with PMU1 and control
7SJ812, 7SJ82, 7SJ85
Line Protection
Distance protection for the protection of lines in medium-voltage and high-
voltage systems; with a PMU1 and control
7SA82, 7SA86, 7SA87
Line differential protection for the selective protection of lines and cables with a
single-side and multi-side infeed in medium-voltage and high-voltage systems;
with a PMU1 and control
7SD82, 7SD86, 7SD87
Combined line differential and distance protection for the protection of lines in
medium-voltage and high-voltage systems; with a PMU1 and control
7SL82, 7SL86, 7SL87
Switch management device for managing switches; with a PMU1 and control 7VK87
Overcurrent protection for lines with PMU1 7SJ86
Transformer differential protection for the protection of two-winding and multi-
winding transformers (up to 5 sides); with a PMU1, control, and monitoring
7UT82, 7UT85, 7UT86, 7UT87
Motor Protection
Motor protection devices for the protection of motors of all sizes; with PMU1 and
control
7SK82, 7SK85
Generator protection device for the protection of generators and power units;
with PMU1
7UM85
Paralleling Device
Paralleling device for the synchronization of generators (power units) with the
electricity-supply system or synchronization of 2 electricity-supply systems
7VE85
Busbar Protection
Busbar protection for busbar short circuits in medium-voltage systems, high-
voltage systems, and systems for very high voltages
7SS85
Bay Controllers
Bay controllers for control/interlocking tasks with PMU1, monitoring, and protec-
tion functions1
6MD85, 6MD86
Merging Unit
The merging unit is the interoperable interface between the primary and secon-
dary equipment for process-bus solutions in accordance with IEC 61869 und
IEC 61850-9-2 standards
6MU85
Fault Recorder
Fault recorders with integrated measurement of synchrophasors (PMU) in
accordance with IEEE C37.118 and power-quality measurement in accordance
with IEC 61000-4-30.
7KE85
Table 2.1/1 Available Device Types in the SIPROTEC 5 System
1 Optional
2 Without PMU
Device Types
2.1

ANSI Functions Abbr.
6MD85
6MD86
6MD89
6MU85
7KE85
7SA82
7SA84
Protection functions for 3-pole tripping 3-pole ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Protection functions for 1-pole tripping 1-pole
Hardware quantity structure expandable I/O ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Process Bus Client Protocol (Note: This function requires at
least one dedicated ETH-BD-2FO plug-in module, with
V8.0)
PB client ■ ■ ■ ■
Process Bus Client Protocol 7SS85 CU (Note: This function
requires a dedicated ETH-BD-2FO, with V8.40)
PB client
IEC61850-9-2 Merging Unit stream (Note: This function
requires a dedicated ETH-BD-2FO per stream, with V8.0)
MU ■ ■ ■ ■
IEC61850-9-2 Merging Unit stream 7SS85 CU (Note: Only
for communictation with 7SS85 CU, This function requires
a dedicated ETH-BD-2FO, with V8.40)
MU ■ ■ ■ ■
14 Locked rotor I> + n<
21/21N Distance protection Z<, V< /I>/∠(V,I) ■ ■
Automatic adjustment of the synchronization voltage
when using a tap changer
21T Impedance protection for transformers Z< ■ ■
24 Overexcitation protection V/f
25 Synchrocheck, synchronization function Sync ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
25 Synchronization function with balancing commands Sync
25 Synchrocheck, synchronization function with balancing
commands (from V7.82)
Sync
25 Paralleling function 1.5 channel for each sync. location
(significant feature: up to 4 sync. locations)
Sync
25 Paralleling function 1.5 channel for each sync. location
Sync
25 Paralleling function 2 channel for each sync. location
Sync
25 Paralleling function 2 channel for each sync. location
Sync
Balancing commands for each sync. location
27 Undervoltage protection: "3-phase" or "positive-sequence
system V1" or "universal Vx"
V< ■ ■ ■
27 Undervoltage protection: "3-phase" or "universal Vx" V< ■ ■
27 Undervoltage protection: "3-phase" or "positive-sequence
system V1"
V<
27R, 59R Rate-of-voltage-change protection (from V8.30) dV/dt ■ ■ ■ ■
Undervoltage-controlled reactive power protection Q>/V< ■ ■
32, 37 Power protection active/reactive power P<>, Q<> ■ ■ ■ ■
32R Reverse-power protection - P<
37 Undercurrent I< ■ ■
37 Power-plant disconnection protection -dP
38 Temperature supervision θ> ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
40 Underexcitation protection 1/xd
46 Negative-sequence overcurrent protection I2> ■ ■ ■
46 Unbalanced-load protection (thermal) I2² t>
46 Negative-sequence overcurrent protection with direction I2>, ∠(V2,I2) ■ ■
47 Overvoltage protection, negative-sequence system V2> ■ ■
47 Overvoltage protection, negative-sequence/positive-
sequence system
V2/V1>
47 Overvoltage protection: "negative-sequence V2" or
"negativ-sequence V2/positiv-sequence V1"
V2>; V2/V1> ■
48 Starting-time supervision for motors I²start
49 Thermal overload protection θ, I²t ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
2.2

7SA86
7SA87
7SD82
7SD84
7SD86
7SD87
7SJ81
7SJ82
7SJ85
7SJ86
7SK82
7SK85
7SL82
7SL86
7SL87
7SS85
7SS85_CU
7UM85
7UT82
7UT85
7UT86
7UT87
7VE85
7VK87
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■
■ ■
■
■
■
■
■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■
■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
2.2

6MD85
6MD86
6MD89
6MU85
7KE85
7SA82
7SA84
49 Thermal overload protection, user-defined characteristic θ, I²t
49 Thermal overload protection for RLC filter elements of a
capacitor bank
θ, I²t
49H Hot spot calculation θh, I²t
49R Thermal overload rotor protection (motor) θR
49F Field-winding overload protection IF² t
49S CG Stator overload protection with cold-gas consideration θ, I²t
49R CG Rotor overload protection with cold-gas consideration θ, IR²t
50/51 TD Overcurrent protection, phases I> ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Instantaneous tripping at switch onto fault SOTF ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
50HS Instantaneous high-current tripping I>>> ■ ■ ■ ■
50/51 TD Overcurrent protection with positive-sequence current I1
(from V7.9)
I1> ■
50N/ 51N TD Overcurrent protection, ground IN> ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
50N/ 51N TD Overcurrent protection, 1-phase IN> ■ ■
50Ns/ 51Ns Sensitive ground-current detection for systems with reso-
nant or isolated neutral systems incl. a) 3I0>, b) admit-
tance Y0>, c) 3I0-harm> (from V7.8)
INs> ■ ■
50Ns/ 51Ns Sensitive ground-current detection for systems with reso-
nant or isolated neutral systems incl. a) 3I0>, b) admit-
tance Y0>
INs>
50Ns/ 51Ns Sensitive ground-current protection for systems with reso-
nant or isolated neutral systems
INs>
Ground-fault detection via pulse pattern detection; Note:
this stage additionally requires the function 50Ns/51Ns or
67Ns "Sensitive ground-fault detection for systems with
resonant or isolated neutral"
IN-pulse ■ ■
Intermittent ground-fault protection Iie> ■ ■
50/51 TD Overcurrent protection for RLC filter elements of a capa-
citor bank
I>
50GN Shaft-current protection INs>
50/27 Inadvertent energization protection I>, V<reset
50N DC, 27,59F DC Direct-current/ direct-voltage protection IDC<>, VDC <>
50 Startup overcurrent protection I-Start >
50BF Circuit-breaker failure protection, 3-pole CBFP ■ ■ ■ ■
50BF Circuit-breaker failure protection, 1-/3-pole CBFP ■ ■
50BF Inherent circuit-breaker failure protection CBFP
50EF End-fault protection ■
50EF End-fault protection (Note: Only useable for distributed
busbar protection with 7SS85 CU with V8.40)
■ ■ ■ ■
50RS Circuit-breaker restrike protection CBRS ■ ■ ■
50L Load-jam protection I>L
51V Overcurrent protection, voltage dependent t=f(I,V) ■ ■ ■ ■
59, 59N Overvoltage protection: "3-phase" or "zero-sequence
V> ■ ■ ■
59, 59N Overvoltage protection: "3-phase" or "zero-sequence
system V0"
V>
59 Overvoltage protection: "3-phase" or "positive-sequence
V> ■ ■
59C Peak overvoltage protection, 3-phase, for capacitors V> cap.
59N, 67Ns Stator ground-fault protection (non-directional, directi-
onal)
V0>, ∠(V0,I0)
27TH, 59TH, 59THD Stator ground-fault protection with 3rd harmonic V03.H<, V03.H>;
ΔV03.H
59N IT Turn-to-turn fault protection V0>
2.2

7SA86
7SA87
7SD82
7SD84
7SD86
7SD87
7SJ81
7SJ82
7SJ85
7SJ86
7SK82
7SK85
7SL82
7SL86
7SL87
7SS85
7SS85_CU
7UM85
7UT82
7UT85
7UT86
7UT87
7VE85
7VK87
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■
■
■
■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■
■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■
■
■
■
■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■
■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■
■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■
■
■
■
2.2

6MD85
6MD86
6MD89
6MU85
7KE85
7SA82
7SA84
60C Current-unbalance protection for capacitor banks Iunbal>
60 Voltage-comparison supervision ΔU> ■ ■
64S Stator ground-fault protection 100 % (20Hz) RSG<
64F, frated Rotor ground-fault protection (IRgnd>, fn) IRG>
64F, frated Rotor ground-fault protection (Rgnd<, fn) RRG<
64F (1-3Hz) Rotor ground-fault protection (1 - 3 Hz) RRG<
66 Restart inhibit for motors I²t
67 Directional overcurrent protection, phases I>, ∠(V,I) ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
67N Directional overcurrent protection, ground IN>, ∠(V,I) ■ ■ ■
67N Directional overcurrent protection for ground faults in
grounded systems
IN>, ∠(V,I) ■ ■
67Ns Dir. sensitive ground-fault detection for systems with reso-
nant or isolated neutral incl. a) 3I0>, b) V0>, c) Cos-/
SinPhi, d) Transient ground-fault fct., e) Phi(V,I), f) admit-
tance
■ ■
Directional stage with a harmonic; Note: this stage additio-
nally requires the function "67Ns Dir. sensitive ground-
fault detection for systems with resonant or isolated
neutral"
∠(V0h,I0h) ■
Directional intermittent ground-fault protection Iie dir> ■ ■
68 Power-swing blocking ΔZ/Δt ■ ■
74TC Trip-circuit supervision TCS ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
78 Out-of-step protection ΔZ/Δt ■ ■
74CC Closed-circuit supervision (from V7.9) CCS ■ ■ ■ ■
79 Automatic reclosing, 1-/3-pole AR ■ ■
79 Automatic reclosing, 3-pole AR ■ ■ ■ ■
SAD Secondary Arc Detection (SAD) during 1-pole AR-cycles
(from V8.30); Note: SAD additionally requires the function
points for "Automatic reclosing, 1-/3-pole"
SAD
81 Frequency protection: "f>" or "f<" or "df/dt" f<>; df/dt<> ■ ■ ■ ■
81 AF Abnormal frequency protection fBand
81U Underfrequency load-shedding f<(UFLS) ■ ■ ■ ■
Vector-jump protection Δφ> ■ ■
85/21 Teleprotection for distance protection ■ ■
85/27 Weak or no infeed: echo and tripping WI ■ ■
85/67N Teleprotection for directional ground fault protection ■ ■
87B Busbar differential protection ΔI
87B Busbar differential protection for 7UM85 (from V8.01) ΔI
87B Bus coupler differential protection ΔI
Bay
Cross stabilization
86 Lockout ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
87T Transformer differential protection ΔI
87T Differential protection for special transformers ΔI
87T Node Differential protection (Node protection for auto trans-
former)
ΔI Node
87T Transformer differential protection for phase angle regula-
ting transformer (single core)
ΔI
87T Differential protection for phase-angle regulating trans-
former (two core)
ΔI
87N T Restricted ground-fault protection ΔIN ■ ■
87M Motor differential protection ΔI
87G Generator differential protection ΔI
87C Differential protection, capacitor bank ΔI
2.2

7SA86
7SA87
7SD82
7SD84
7SD86
7SD87
7SJ81
7SJ82
7SJ85
7SJ86
7SK82
7SK85
7SL82
7SL86
7SL87
7SS85
7SS85_CU
7UM85
7UT82
7UT85
7UT86
7UT87
7VE85
7VK87
■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■
■
■
■
■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■
■
■ ■
■ ■
■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■
■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■
2.2

6MD85
6MD86
6MD89
6MU85
7KE85
7SA82
7SA84
87V Voltage differential protection, capacitor bank ΔV
87L Line differential protection for 2 line ends ΔI
87L Differential protection for lines with 2 ends for 7UT8
(communication with 7SD82,85,86, 7SL86,87)
ΔI
87L Differential protection for lines with 3 to 6 ends (depen-
dent on significant properties)
ΔI
87L/ 87T Option for line differential protection including power
transformer
ΔI
Option for line differential protection charging-current
compensation
ΔI
Broken-wire detection for differential protection
87 STUB Stub-fault differential protection (for breaker-and-a-half
scheme)
90V Automatic voltage controller for two-winding transformer ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
90V Automatic voltage controller for two-winding transformer
with parallel operation
■ ■ ■ ■
Number of two-winding transformers with parallel opera-
tion (Note: only together with the function "Automatic
voltage controller for two-winding transformer with
parallel operation")
■ ■ ■ ■
90V Automatic voltage controller for three-winding trans-
former
■ ■ ■ ■
90V Automatic voltage controller for grid coupling transformer ■ ■ ■ ■
FL Fault locator, single-sided FL-one ■ ■
FL Fault locator plus (from V7.9) FL plus ■
PMU Synchrophasor measurement PMU ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
AFD Arc-protection (only with plug-in module ARC-CD-3FO) ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Measured values - standard ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Measured values - extended: Min, Max, Avg ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Switching statistic counters ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
PQ-Basic measured values: THD (Total Harmonic Distor-
tion) and harmonics (from V8.01) THD voltage aggrega-
tion values (from V8.40)
■ ■ ■ ■
PQ-Basic measured values: Voltage unbalance (from
V8.40)
■ ■ ■ ■
PQ-Basic measured values: Voltage variations - voltage
dips, swells and interruptions (from V8.40)
■ ■ ■ ■
PQ-Basic measured values: TDD - Total Demand Distortion
(from V8.40)
■ ■ ■ ■
CFC (Standard, control) ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
CFC arithmetic ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Circuit-breaker wear monitoring ΣIx, I²t, 2P ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
CFC Switching sequences
Switching sequences function ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Inrush current detection ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
External trip initiation ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Control ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
PoW Point-on-wave switching (from V7.90) PoW ■ ■
Circuit-breaker ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
1 Circuit-breaker object (Qty. not extendable)
Circuit-breaker paralleling
Disconnector/Grounding switch ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
3 Disconnector/Gnd. switch objects (Qty. not extendable)
Fault recording of analog and binary signals ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Monitoring and supervision ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
2.2

7SA86
7SA87
7SD82
7SD84
7SD86
7SD87
7SJ81
7SJ82
7SJ85
7SJ86
7SK82
7SK85
7SL82
7SL86
7SL87
7SS85
7SS85_CU
7UM85
7UT82
7UT85
7UT86
7UT87
7VE85
7VK87
■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■
■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
2.2

6MD85
6MD86
6MD89
6MU85
7KE85
7SA82
7SA84
Protection interface, serial ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Protection functions for 2-pole tripping 2-pole ■
FSR Fast-scan recorder FSR ■
SSR Slow-scan recorder SSR ■
CR Continuous recorder CR ■
TR Trend recorder TR ■
PQR Power Quality recordings (functionalities) PQR ■
Splitter for harmonics and interharmonics (from V8.01) ■
Sequence of events recorder SOE ■
ExTrFct Extended trigger functions ExTrFct ■
Region France: Overload protection for lines 'PSL-PSC' ■ ■
Region France: Overcurrent protection 'MAXI-L' ■ ■
Region France: Power-system decoupling protection 'PDA' ■ ■
Region France: Overload protection for transformers ■ ■
Frequency-tracking groups (from V7.8) ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Transformer side 7UT85
Cyber Security: Role-Based Access Control (from V7.8) ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Temperature acquisition via communication protocol ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Cyber Security: IEEE 802.1X based network authentication
(from V8.3)
■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Transformer side 7UM85
2.2

7SA86
7SA87
7SD82
7SD84
7SD86
7SD87
7SJ81
7SJ82
7SJ85
7SJ86
7SK82
7SK85
7SL82
7SL86
7SL87
7SS85
7SS85_CU
7UM85
7UT82
7UT85
7UT86
7UT87
7VE85
7VK87
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■
■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■
2.2

Medium-Voltage Application for all Network Types
[dw_Mittelspg-01_Var3, 2, en_US]
Figure 2.3/1 Medium-Voltage Application for all Network Types
Properties
• Reliable detection of transient and stationary ground faults
• Cost savings thanks to integrated transient ground-fault func-
tion
• Directional and non-directional protection and control func-
tions available
• Recording and transmission of PMU parameters possible
Application Examples – Medium Voltage
2.3

Protection and Control of Several Feeders with one Device
[dw_Mittelspg-03, 3, en_US]
Figure 2.3/2 Protection and Control of Several Feeders with one Device
Properties
• Reduced investment with one device for several feeders
• Easy parameterization
• Shorter commissioning times
• Cost reduction due to protection of up to 9 feeders with a
single device
2.3

Fast Fault Clearing in Lines with Infeed at Both Ends (Closed Ring Feeders)
[dw_Mittelspg-02, 3, en_US]
Figure 2.3/3 Fast Fault Clearing in Lines with Infeed at 2 Ends
Properties
• Directional definite-time overcurrent protection/inverse-time
overcurrent protection without grading times
• Fast fault clearing
• Cost-effective due to integrated protection interface
• Monitored data exchange
• Adaptable to various communication infrastructures
2.3

Central Control of Multiple Feeders and Dedicated Protection
[dw_zentrale-Steuerung, 3, en_US]
Figure 2.3/4 Central Control of Multiple Feeders and Dedicated Protection
Properties
• Protection per bay
• Central control for several feeders
• High availability, as backup protection functions can be acti-
vated in the electronic control unit
2.3

Induction Motor: Protection and Control
[dw_Motor-01, 3, en_US]
Figure 2.3/5 Induction Motor: Protection and Control
Properties
• Reduced investment due to protection and control in one
device
• Thermal motor protection functions for safe monitoring of the
motor
• Thermal motor protection functions with direct connection of
temperature sensors
Application Examples – Motor Protection
2.3

Motor Protection with Differential Protection
Figure 2.3/6 Motor Protection with Differential Protection
Properties
• Independent differential protection functions
• Differential protection function provides high responsivity and
short tripping time
• Separate detection and monitoring of the current trans-
formers
2.3

Motor Protection and Easier Differential Protection
Figure 2.3/7 Protection and Control of Several Feeders with one Device
Properties
• Differential protection function provides high responsivity and
short tripping time
• Cost reduction due to integration of the differential protection
function in a separate function group
2.3

Differential Motor Protection with Korndörfer Starter
[dw_Motordiff-mit-starter, 4, en_US]
Figure 2.3/8 Differential Motor Protection with Korndörfer Starter
Properties
• Capturing, monitoring, and controlling all circuit breakers
• Differential protection function also available during startup
2.3

Two-Winding Transformer
[dw_Trafo1, 4, en_US]
Figure 2.3/9 Two-Winding Transformer
Properties
• Clear assignment of the functions to the primary element
• Reduced investment
• Easy parameterization
• Reduced wiring and shortened commissioning
Application Examples – Transformer Protection
2.3

Two-Winding Transformer with 2 Infeeds (for Example Dual Circuit-Breaker System)
Figure 2.3/10 Two-Winding Transformer with 2 Infeeds (for example Dual Circuit-Breaker System)
Properties
• Separate capturing, monitoring, and controlling of all circuit
breakers
• High responsivity for 1-pole restricted ground-fault protection
• Cost reduction due to 87T and 87T N in one device
2.3

Auto-Transformer Bank
Figure 2.3/11 Auto-Transformer Bank
• Reduced investment due to integration of the differential and
nodal-point protection function in one device
(87 and 87 Node)
• High sensitivity for 1-pole restricted ground-fault protection
2.3

Protection and Backup Protection Solution for Three-Winding Transformers
Figure 2.3/12 Protection and Backup Protection Solution for Three-Winding Transformers
Properties
• Free design options for the protection and backup-protection
concept
• Consultation of the line protection devices
• Increased availability
• It can be implemented in the merging units as a process-bus
solution with backup-protection functions
2.3

Three-End Line Differential Protection with Transformer in the Protection Range (87T)
Figure 2.3/13 Three-End Line Differential Protection with Transformer in the Protection Range (87T)
Properties
• Protection of a transformer far from the switchgear due to
line differential protection
• Transformer differential protection with widely spaced current
transformers
• Integrated adaptation to vector groups and different current
transformer ratios
• Cost and space reduction due to integration of the trans-
former protection function in the line protection device
2.3

Three-Winding Transformer with Differential Protection 87T and Distance Protection 21
[dw_kat-three-wind_7ut86, 3, en_US]
Figure 2.3/14 Three-Winding Transformer with Differential Protection 87T and Distance Protection 21
Properties
• Integrated backup protection function for the power system
• Easy engineering
• Increased flexibility for different plant versions
2.3

Unit Connection of a Small-Power Generator
[dw_appl-01_simplified, 3, en_US]
Figure 2.3/15 Unit Connection of a Small-Power Generator
Properties
• All functions in a device keep investments low.
• Basic hardware (1/3 x 19")
• Preconfigured with the Generator basis application template
Application Examples – Generator Protection
2.3

Unit Connection of a Medium-Power Generator
[dw_simplified_appl-03, 3, en_US]
Figure 2.3/16 Unit Connection of a Medium-Power Generator
Properties
• Preconfigured with the Generator unit connection basis
application template
• Stator ground-fault protection protects 100 % of the stator
winding by evaluating the residual voltage via the funda-
mental component and the 3rd harmonic (59N, 27TH)
• Differential protection via generator and generator trans-
former with function 87T
2.3

Unit Connection of a Generator of Medium to High Power
[dw_simplified_appl-04, 2, en_US]
Figure 2.3/17 Unit Connection of a Generator of Medium to High Power
Properties
• Minimum hardware (2/3 x 19")
• Preconfigured with the Enhanced generator unit connec-
tion application template
• Stand-alone differential protection for generator (87G) and
generator transformer (87T)
• Real 100 % stator ground-fault protection by coupling a 20-
Hz voltage
• Stator ground-fault protection possible at plant standstill
• Synchrocheck release by the device during manual synchroni-
zation
• Redundancy by device doubling
2.3

Unit Connection of a Generator with Auxiliary Transformer
[dw_simplified_appl-04_2, 3, en_US]
Figure 2.3/18 Unit Connection of a Generator with Auxiliary Transformer
Properties
• Modification of the Enhanced generator unit connection
• Stand-alone differential protection via generator (87G) and
generator transformer (87T)
• Implementation of the transformer differential protection as
teed-feeder differential protection
• Real 100 % stator ground-fault protection for coupling a 20-
Hz voltage
• Stator ground-fault protection possible at standstill
zation
2.3

Busbar Connection of a Generator
Figure 2.3/19 Busbar Connection of a Generator
Properties
• Preconfigured with the Generator busbar connection appli-
cation template
• Stand-alone differential protection for the generator (87G)
• Directional stator ground-fault protection (67Ns)
2.3

Protection of a High-Power Generator
Figure 2.3/20 Protection of a High-Power Generator
Properties
• The delivery includes the generator, excitation, and generator
protection of a plant in unit connection for a steam turbine
• Modification of the Enhanced generator unit connection
• Sensitive reverse-power protection by connection to a sepa-
rate instrument transformer
• Separate protection for the exciting transformer
zation
2.3

Separate Protection and Control
[dw_LS-getrennt, 2, en_US]
Figure 2.3/21 Separate Protection and Control
Properties
• Clear assignment of protection and control in separate devices
• Less external components due to acquisition and selection of
the bus voltage in the device
• High security due to backup protection functions in the bay
controller SIPROTEC 6MD8
• High availability due to emergency control in the protection
device SIPROTEC 7SL8
Application Examples – Line Protection
2.3

Cost-Effective Protection and Device Redundancy
[dw_LS-guenstige-variante, 2, en_US]
Figure 2.3/22 Cost-Effective Protection and Device Redundancy
Properties
• High availability due to protection and device redundancy
• Cost effective, as only 2 devices needed for 2 lines
• Safe due to parallel processing of the protection functions in
the devices
2.3

Distance Protection of 2 Parallel Lines with a Device
[dw_LS-parallel, 4, en_US]
Figure 2.3/23 Distance Protection of 2 Parallel Lines with a Device
Properties
• Cost-effective due to the protection of both lines in one
device
• Stable due to consideration of the influences of the parallel
line for the distance-protection function
2.3

Self-Repairing Multi-End Configurations
[dw_Diff-Schutz-Ringschaltung, 2, en_US]
Figure 2.3/24 Self-Repairing Multi-End Configurations
Properties
• Flexible communication of the protection interface
• Direct connection via optical fiber
• Two-wire (via communication converter)
• Communication networks on Synchronous Digital Hierarchy
(SDH) and Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) basis (optical
or electrical)
• Cost effective as existing IT infrastructure can be used
• Change from the SDH to the MPLS power system possible
without parameterization of the devices
• Redundant communication possible
• Interoperability of the protection interface of SIPROTEC 5 and
SIPROTEC 4 devices allow simple migration and expansion
solutions
2.3

Impedance Protection for the Low-Voltage Side of a Transformer
[dw_z-prot-transf-lv-side_7sa86_090115, 2, en_US]
Figure 2.3/25 Impedance Protection
Properties
• Effective backup protection with zones that reach into the
transformer
• A 2nd impedance protection device can be used in the same
function group to protect the busbar at the low-voltage side
with reverse interlocking (85-21 RI).
• Provides the imperative backup protection for the medium-
voltage feeders with highly sensitive defect detection and
stability under a heavy load.
2.3

Applications with Double Circuit Breaker
[dw_dual-breaker-applications_7sa86_090115, 2, en_US]
Figure 2.3/26 Applications with Double Circuit Breaker
Properties
• Separate measurement of the current-transformer current
from both circuit breakers allows end-fault protection
• Separate measurement of the current-transformer currents
improves stability in the case of external errors and strong
current flow from one busbar to the other when both circuit
breakers are closed.
2.3

Modular and Decentralized Protection and Control Solution
[dw_ein-einhalb-LS, 2, en_US]
Figure 2.3/27 Modular and Decentralized Protection and Control Solution
Properties
• Clearly arranged due to the clear assignment of protection
and control
• Highly available due to protection redundancy
• Simple and secure central control of the entire switching unit
• Safe due to emergency control for each line in the protection
device
• Reduced wiring effort due to integrated voltage selection
• System-wide exchange via IEC 61850:
– Isolated data exchange
– Reduced wiring effort
– Easy expandability
Application Examples – Breaker-and-a-Half
2.3

Low-Cost Device and Protection Redundancy in Breaker-and-a-Half Arrangements
[dw_kostenguenstige-geraete, 3, en_US]
Figure 2.3/28 Low-Cost Device and Protection Redundancy in Breaker-and-a-Half Arrangements
Properties
• Unambiguous allocation of the main protection function (line
differential protection 87) to a line in a device
• The distance-protection function (21) is implemented in the
protection device of the other line by a 2nd Line function
group.
• High availability and safety by device and protection redun-
dancy
• Low costs due to protection and controlling of a complete
diameter with only 2 devices
Application Examples – Breaker-and-a-Half
2.3

Point-on-Wave Switching (PoW)
[dw_Appl_point-on-wave-switching_simple, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.3/29 Application Example: Point-on-Wave Switching on/off
Properties:
• 1-pole point-on-wave switching on and off
• Minimizing electro-dynamic and dielectric loads on equipment
(overvoltages and inrush surge currents)
• Cost-effective integration of the function into SIPROTEC 5
protection devices and substation controllers
Application Examples – Point-On-Wave Switching (PoW)
2.3

Protection of a Capacitor Bank in H-Bridge Connection
[dw_CapBank_SLE_vereinfacht, 2, en_US]
Figure 2.3/30 Protection of a Capacitor Bank in H-Bridge Connection
Properties
• Precise fit due to own function group and application-specific
protection function, such as peak overvoltage protection
(ANSI 59C) and current-unbalance protection for capacitor
banks (ANSI 60C)
• Low costs due to the integration of all necessary functions in
one device
Application Examples – Capacitor Banks
2.3

Protection of an MSCDN Capacitor Bank (MSCDN = Mechanically Switched Circuit Breaker with Damping Network)
[dw_mscdn-app-temp_7sj85_090115, 2, en_US]
Figure 2.3/31 Protection of an MSCDN Capacitor Bank
Properties
• Optimum protection of complex banks and filter circuits with
flexible hardware and a flexible function design
• Low costs due to the integration of all necessary functions in
one device for up to nine 3-phase current measuring points
• Generation of current sum and current difference at the
current interface of the protection function group 3-phase V/I
• Detection of current and voltage signals up to the 50th
harmonic with a high accuracy for protection and operational
measured values.
Application Examples – Capacitor Banks
2.3

Central Protection of a Double Busbar with Bus Coupler
[dw_Verbindungen-Feld-Koppl, 3, en_US]
Figure 2.3/32 Central Protection of a Double Busbar with Bus Coupler
Properties
• Central busbar protection
• Summary of all primary components of a bay in the central
station bay
• 1 device for up to 20 measuring points
• Flexible adaptation to the topology (up to 6 busbar sections
and 6 busbar couplers are configurable)
• Integrated disconnector image
• Comfortable graphical project engineering with DIGSI 5
Application Examples – Busbar Protection
2.3

Project Engineering for a Quadruple Busbar in the Distributed Solution
[dw_4xSS-Anlagen_Verbindungen-Feld-Koppl, 1, en_US]
Properties
• Decentralized process-data acquisition using:
– SIPROTEC Merging Unit
– Every modular SIPROTEC 5 device
• Simple extension of existing SIPROTEC 5 plants using
distributed busbar protection
• Engineering using DIGSI 5 and automated routing in the
IEC 61850 system configurator
Application Examples – Busbar Protection
2.3

Process-Bus Application in Line Differential Protection
[dw_appl-exampl_line-diff-prot, 2, en_US]
Figure 2.3/33 Process-Bus Application in Line Differential Protection
Properties
• Process-bus solution for line differential protection with
digital protection interface
• Increased safety due to process-oriented connection of the
conventional current and voltage transformers to merging
units
• Interoperable process bus according to the protocols
IEC 61850-9-2 and PRP
Application Examples – Process Bus
2.3

Process_Bus Application in Line Differential Protection with SIPROTEC 5
[dw_line-diff-prot_SIP5-config, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.3/34 Process-Bus Application in Line Differential Protection with SIPROTEC 5
Properties
• Line differential protection with a digital protection interface
• A mixed solution from the process bus and conventional
connection allows simple migration by gradually converting
systems
current and voltage transformers to merging units
• Interoperable process bus according to the protocols
IEC 61850-9-2 and PRP
2.3

Decentralized Fault Recorder
[dw_decentr-fault-recorder, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.3/35 Decentralized Fault Recorder
Properties
• Interoperable fault-recorder solution based on the process bus
according to IEC 61850-9-2
• Decentralized process-data acquisition with:
– Merging units from third-party manufacturers
• Simple extension of existing SIPROTEC 5 plants using central-
ized fault recorder
• Engineering using standard IEC 61850 configuration tools and
DIGSI 5
2.3

Centralized Protection using IEC 61850-Compatible Decentralized Process Connection
[dw_decentr-busbar, 2, en_US]
Figure 2.3/36 Centralized Protection using IEC 61850-Compatible Decentralized Process Connection
Properties
• Interoperable busbar-protection solution based on the process
bus according to IEC 61850-9-2
• Decentralized process-data acquisition using:
– Every modular SIPROTEC 5 device
– Merging units from third-party manufacturers
• Simple extension of existing SIPROTEC 5 plants using
distributed busbar protection
• Engineering using standard IEC 61850 configuration tools and
DIGSI 5
2.3

Central Protection for Small Stations
[dw_appl-exampl_micro-central-prot_with_7ss85, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.3/37 Central Protection for Small Stations
Properties
• Busbar protection
• Central impedance protection (21) for the feeders
• Reduced wiring effort by decentralized data acquisition using
the merging units 6MU85
conventional current and voltage transformers to merging
units
• Redundancy due to backup protection in the merging units
• Easy to expand due to the interoperable process bus
according to the protocols IEC 61850-9-2 and PRP
2.3

Central Protection for a Small Station with a Transformer
[dw_appl-exampl_micro-central-prot, 2, en_US]
Figure 2.3/38 Central Protection for a Small Station with a Transformer
Properties
• Feeder, transformer, and line protection in a single
SIPROTEC 5 protection device for the complete station
• Reduced wiring effort by decentralized data acquisition using
the merging units 6MU85
• Measured-value acquisition and circuit-breaker control via the
process bus
• Redundancy due to backup protection in the merging units
• Easy to expand due to the interoperable process bus
according to the protocols IEC 61850-9-2 and PRP
2.3

Power-System Monitoring and PMU
[dw_netzmonitor-mit-pmu, 2, en_US]
Figure 2.3/39 Principle of the Distributed Phasor Measurement
Properties
• Every SIPROTEC 5 device can be equipped or retrofitted with
the PMU function.
• Online and offline evaluation of PMU data in the monitoring
system SIGUARD PDP
Application Examples – Power-System Monitoring and PMU
2.3

Application Examples – Power-System Monitoring and PMU
2.3

2.4

[dw_7SJ_anwendung, 4, en_US]
SIPROTEC 7SJ81, 7SJ82, 7SJ85
The main protection functions of the
SIPROTEC 7SJ81/82/85 devices are based on the overcurrent-
protection principle. Although they primarily protect feeders and
lines in the distribution system, they can also be used in a high-
voltage power system without any problems. The hardware
quantity structure can be extended flexibly and permits several
feeders to be protected with one device. Due to the large
number of available functions and the great flexibility, the
device is suitable for a multitude of additional protection and
monitoring applications. Specifically for usage as backup and
emergency protection for line protection, we recommend using
the SIPROTEC 7SJ86 device. The large number of automatic
functions allows the device to be used in all fields of energy
supply.
The devices contain all important auxiliary functions that are
necessary for safe network operation today. This includes func-
tions for protection, control, measurement, and monitoring. The
large number of communication interfaces and communication
protocols satisfies the requirements of communication-based
selective protection as well as automated operation.
Commissioning and maintenance work can be completed safely,
quickly, and thus cost-effectively with high-performance test
functions. Their modular surface mounting allows
SIPROTEC 5 devices to be always adapted flexibly to the indi-
vidual requirements.
Distinguishing features
The 3 device models differ in the configurability of their hard-
ware quantity structure.
Essential Differentiating Characteristics
7SJ81 Different hardware quantity structures for binary inputs and outputs are available in the 1/3 base module, 1 plug-in module posi-
tion; 12 LEDs; no function keys; no PMU or voltage controller
7SJ82 Different hardware quantity structures for binary inputs and outputs are available in the 1/3 base module. Adding 1/6 expansion
modules is not possible
7SJ85 Flexible configuration of the hardware quantity structure for analog inputs, binary inputs and outputs, measuring transducers, and
communications due to expandability by 1/6 expansion modules
2.4

Description
The SIPROTEC 7SJ81 has been designed for a cost-effective and
compact protection of feeders and lines in medium-voltage
systems. With its flexibility and the powerful DIGSI 5 engi-
neering tool, the SIPROTEC 5 device offers future-oriented solu-
tions for protection, control, automation, monitoring, and
Power Quality – Basic.
Main function Feeder and overcurrent protection
Inputs and outputs 4 current transformers, 11 binary inputs,
9 binary outputs
4 current transformers, 18 binary inputs,
14 binary outputs
4 current transformers, 4 voltage transformers,
11 binary inputs, 9 binary outputs
16 binary inputs, 11 binary outputs
Hardware flexibility Different hardware quantity structures for
binary inputs and outputs are available in the
1/3 base module. 1 plug-in module position,
available with large or small display
Housing width 1/3 × 19 inches
Benefits
• Compact and low-cost overcurrent protection
• Safety due to powerful protection functions
• Cybersecurity according to NERC CIP and BDEW Whitepaper
requirements (for example, logging security- related events
and alarms)
tions by standard coating of the modules
• Full compatibility between IEC 61850 Editions 1, 2.0, and 2.1
Functions
DIGSI 5 permits all functions to be configured and combined as
required and as per the functional scope that has been ordered.
• Directional and non-directional overcurrent protection with
additional functions
• Detection of ground faults of any type in isolated or arc-
suppression-coil-ground power systems using the following
functions: 3I0>, V0>, transient ground-fault function, cos φ,
sin φ, dir. detection of intermittent ground faults, harmonic
detection, and admittance measurement
• Detection of intermittent ground faults with automatic
blocking of statically measuring functions to avoid message
and fault-record flooding
• Arc protection (note the resulting communication restrictions)
• Overvoltage and undervoltage protection
• Frequency protection and frequency change protection for
load shedding applications
• Power protection, configurable as active or reactive power
protection
• Directional reactive power undervoltage protection (QU
protection)
• Control with switchgear interlocking protection
• Synchrocheck
• Circuit-breaker failure protection
• Detection of current and voltage signals up to the 50th
harmonic with high accuracy for selected protection functions
and operational measured values
• PQ – Basic: Voltage unbalance; voltage changes: overvoltage,
dip, interruption; TDD, THD, and harmonics
• Graphical logic editor to create powerful automation func-
tions in the device
• Single-line representation in small or large display
• Fixed integrated electrical Ethernet RJ45 interface for DIGSI 5
and IEC 61850 (reporting and GOOSE)
• Serial protection communication via optical fibers, two-wire
connections, and communication networks (IEEE C37.94 and
others), including automatic switchover between ring and
chain topology
• 1 optional plug-in module for either a) communication
protocol or b) for arc protection
• Redundant and simple communication protocols according to
IEC 61850, IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 60870-5-104, Modbus TCP,
DNP3 serial and TCP, PROFINET IO
• Reliable data transmission via PRP and HSR redundancy proto-
cols
signed firmware, or authenticated IEEE 802.1X network
access
• Simple, fast, and secure access to the device via a standard
Web browser to display all information and diagnostic data,
vector diagrams, single-line and device display pages
[SIP5_GD_W3, 2, --_--]
Figure 2.4/2 SIPROTEC 7SJ81
Overcurrent and Feeder Protection – SIPROTEC 7SJ81
2.4

• Time synchronization using IEEE 1588
• Standard fault recording (buffer for a max. record time of
approx. 40 sec. at 2 kHz)
• Auxiliary functions for simple tests and commissioning
Applications
• Detection and selective 3-pole tripping of short circuits in
electrical equipment of star networks, lines with infeed at one
or two ends, parallel lines and open-circuited or closed ring
systems of all voltage levels
• Detection of ground faults in isolated or arc-suppression-coil-
ground power systems in star, ring, or meshed arrangement
• Backup protection for differential protection devices of all
kind for lines, transformers, generators, motors, and busbars
• Universal power protection
• Simple load shedding applications
• Detection and recording of power-quality data in the medium-
voltage and subordinate low-voltage power system
Application Templates
Application templates are available in DIGSI 5 for standard appli-
cations. They contain basic configurations and default settings.
The following application templates are available:
• Non-directional definite-time overcurrent protection/inverse-
time overcurrent protection (4*I)
• Non-directional definite-time overcurrent protection/inverse-
time overcurrent protection (4*I, 4*V)
2.4

Application Example
Protection and Control on a Single Busbar
The following application example (Figure 2.4/3) shows the
functional scope and the basic configuration of a
SIPROTEC 7SJ81 device for busbar protection and control.
[dw_7SJ81_mit EinfachSS, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.4/3 Application Example: Overcurrent Protection 7SJ81 on a Busbar
2.4

ANSI Function Abbr.
Available
1 2
Protection functions for 3-pole tripping 3-pole ■ ■ ■
25 Synchrocheck, synchronization function Sync ■
27 Undervoltage protection: "3-phase" or "positive-
sequence system V1"
V< ■
27R, 59R Voltage change protection (starting with V8.30) dV/dt ■
Undervoltage-controlled reactive power protec-
tion
Q>/V< ■
32, 37 Power protection active/reactive power P<>, Q<> ■
37 Undercurrent I< ■
38 Temperature supervision θ> ■
46 Negative-sequence system overcurrent protection I2> ■
47 Overvoltage protection, negative-sequence
system
V2> ■
49 Thermal overload protection θ, I²t ■
50/51 TD Overcurrent protection, phases I> ■ ■ ■
Instantaneous tripping at switch onto fault SOTF ■
50HS Instantaneous high-current tripping I>>> ■
50N/ 51N TD Overcurrent protection, ground IN> ■ ■ ■
50N/ 51N TD Overcurrent protection, 1-phase IN> ■
50 Ns/ 51Ns Sensitive ground-fault detection for grounded arc
suppression coils and isolated power systems
including a) 3I0> b) admittance Y0>
INs> ■
Intermittent ground-fault protection IIE> ■
50BF Circuit-breaker failure protection, 3-pole CBFP ■
59, 59N Overvoltage protection: "3-phase" or "zero-
sequence system V0" or "positive-sequence
system V1"
V> ■
67 Directional overcurrent protection, phases I>, ∠(V, I) ■
67N Directional overcurrent protection, ground IN>, ∠(V, I) ■
67 Ns Sensitive ground-fault detection for grounded arc
including a) 3I0> b) V0>, c) cos/sine Phi, d) tran-
sient ground fault, e) Phi(V, I), f) admittance
■
Directional Intermittent Ground-Fault Protection IIEdir> ■
74TC Trip-circuit supervision ■
79 Automatic reclosing, 3-pole AREC ■
81 Frequency protection: "f>" or "f<" or "df/dt" f<>; df/dt<> ■
Vector-jump protection Δφ> ■
86 Lockout ■ ■ ■
FL Fault Locator, single-side FL-one ■
AFD Arc protection (only with plug-in module ARC-
CD-3FO)
■
Measured values, standard ■ ■ ■
Switching statistics counter ■
PQ – Basic measured values: THD (Total Harmonic
Distortion) and harmonic component (starting
with V8.01) and THD voltage average values
(starting with V8.40)
■
PQ – Basic measured values: Voltage unbalance
■
PQ – Basic measured values: Voltage changes –
monitoring of voltage dips, overvoltages and
voltage interruptions (starting with V8.40)
■
2.4

ANSI Function Abbr.
Available
1 2
PQ – Basic measured values: TDD - Total Demand
Distortion (starting with V8.40)
■
CFC (standard, control) ■ ■ ■
CFC arithmetic ■
Circuit-breaker wear monitoring ΣIx, I²t, 2P ■
Switching sequence function ■
Inrush-current detection ■ ■ ■
External trip initiation ■
Control ■ ■ ■
1 circuit breaker object (number cannot be
expanded)
■
3 disconnector/grounding conductor objects
(number cannot be expanded)
■
Fault recording of analog and binary signals ■ ■ ■
Monitoring ■ ■ ■
Cyber security: Role-Based Access Control (from
V7.8)
■
Temperature recording via communication
protocol
■
Cyber security: Authenticated network access
using IEEE 802.1X (starting from V8.3)
■
Function point class: 0 0
The configuration and function point class for your application can be determined in the SIPROTEC 5 order configurator at www.siemens.com/siprotec.
Table 2.4/1 SIPROTEC 7SJ81 - Functions, Application Templates
(1) Non-directional definite-time overcurrent protection/inverse-time overcurrent protection (4*I)
(2) Non-directional definite-time overcurrent protection/inverse-time overcurrent protection (4*I, 4*V)
2.4

Standard Variants for SIPROTEC 7SJ81
AI1 1/3, 11 BI, 9 BO, 4 I
Housing width 1/3 x 19"
11 binary inputs
9 binary outputs (1 life contact, 8 standard)
4 current-transformer inputs
Contains the following modules: base module with PS101 and IO101
AI2 1/3, 18 BI, 14 BO, 4 I
16 binary inputs
Contains the following modules: base module with IO101, PS101, IO112
AI3 1/3, 11 BI, 9 BO, 4 I, 4V
11 binary inputs
4 voltage-transformer inputs
Contains the following modules: base module with IO102 and PS101
AI4 1/3, 16 BI, 11 BO, 4 I, 4 V
10 binary inputs
Contains the following modules: base module with IO102, PS101, and
IO113
Table 2.4/2 Standard Variants for SIPROTEC 7SJ81
You can find the technical data of the devices in the manual
www.siemens.com/siprotec.
2.4

Description
The SIPROTEC 7SJ82 overcurrent protection has been designed
specifically for a cost-effective and compact protection of
feeders and lines in medium-voltage and high-voltage systems.
With its flexibility and the high-performance DIGSI 5 engineering
tool, the SIPROTEC 7SJ82 device offers future-oriented solutions
for protection, control, automation, monitoring, and Power
Quality – Basic.
Main function Feeder and overcurrent protection for all
voltage levels
Inputs and outputs 4 current transformers, 4 voltage transformers
(optional), 11 or 23 binary inputs, 9 or
16 binary outputs, or
8 current transformers, 7 binary inputs,
7 binary outputs
1/3 base module. Adding 1/6 expansion
modules is not possible; available with large or
small display.
Benefits
• Compact and low-cost overcurrent protection
• Safety due to high-performance protection functions
• Cybersecurity according to NERC CIP and BDEW Whitepaper
requirements (for example, logging security-related events
and alarms)
Functions
• Optimized tripping times due to directional comparison and
protection communication
• Detection of ground faults of any type in compensated or
isolated electrical power systems using the following func-
tions: 3I0>, V0>, transient ground-fault function, cos φ, sin φ,
dir. detection of intermittent ground faults, harmonic detec-
tion, and admittance measurement
• Ground-fault detection using the pulse-detection method
• Fault locator plus for accurate fault location with inhomoge-
nous line sections and targeted automatic overhead-line
section reclosing (AREC)
• Arc protection
• Frequency protection and frequency-change protection for
load-shedding applications
• Automatic frequency relief for underfrequency load shedding,
taking changed infeed conditions due to decentralized power
generation into consideration
• Power protection, configurable as active or reactive-power
protection
• Protection functions for capacitor banks, such as overcurrent,
overload, current-unbalance, peak overvoltage, or differential
protection
• Directional reactive-power undervoltage protection (QU
protection)
• Control, synchrocheck, and switchgear interlocking protec-
tion, circuit-breaker failure protection
• Circuit-breaker reignition monitoring
• Graphical logic editor to create high-performance automation
functions in the device
• Detection of current and voltage signals up to the
50th harmonic with high accuracy for selected protection
functions (such as peak overvoltage protection for capacitors)
• Single-line representation in the small or large display
• 2 optional, pluggable communication modules, usable for
different and redundant protocols (IEC 61850,
IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 60870-5-104, Modbus TCP, DNP3 serial
and TCP, PROFINET IO)
[SIP5_7xx82_GD_W3, 2, --_--]
Figure 2.4/4 SIPROTEC 7SJ82
2.4

chain topology
cols
access
• Whitepaper Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU) for synchro-
phasor measured values and IEEE C37.118 protocol
• Control of power transformers
• High-performance fault recording (buffer for a max. record
time of 80 s at 8 kHz or 320 s at 2 kHz)
Applications
electrical equipment of star networks, lines with infeed at 1 or
2 ends, parallel lines, and open-circuited or closed ring
ground systems in star, ring, or meshed arrangement
• Protection and monitoring of simple capacitor banks
• Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU)
• Reverse-power protection
• Load shedding applications
• Automatic switchover
• Regulation or control of power transformers (two-winding
transformers)
DIGSI 5 provides application templates for standard applications.
They include basic configurations and default settings.
Non-directional definite-time overcurrent protection/inverse-
time overcurrent protection
• Overcurrent protection (non-directional) for phases and
ground
• Transformer inrush-current detection
Directional definite-time overcurrent protection/inverse-time
overcurrent protection – grounded power system
• Overcurrent protection (directional and non-directional) for
phases and ground
• Measuring-voltage failure detection
overcurrent protection – arc-suppression-coil-ground systems/
isolated systems
phases
• Directional sensitive ground-fault detection for static ground
faults
• Directional sensitive ground-fault detection for transient and
static ground faults
Capacitor bank. H-bridge
• Overcurrent protection for phases and ground
• Capacitor-bank phase unbalance protection
• Peak overvoltage protection
• Overload protection
• Undercurrent protection
2.4

Application Example
Directional Comparison Protection via Protection Interfaces
for Power Line with an Infeed at Both Ends
With the direction determination of the directional overcurrent
protection, you can implement directional comparison protec-
tion for power line with an infeed at both ends (Figure 2.4/5).
Directional comparison protection is used for the selective isola-
tion of a faulty line section (for example, subsections of closed
rings). Sections are isolated quickly, that is, they do not suffer
the disadvantage of long grading times. This technique requires
that directional information can be exchanged between the indi-
vidual protection stations. This information exchange can, for
example, be implemented via a protection interface. Alterna-
tives for the protection interface are IEC 61850 GOOSE or
exchange via pilot wires for signal transmission, with an auxil-
iary-voltage loop.
[dw_DwDOCP07, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.4/5 Principle of Directional Comparison Protection for Power Line with Infeed at 2 Ends
The following application example (Figure 2.4/6) shows the
functional scope and the basic configuration of a
SIPROTEC 7SJ82 device for this application. The Directional
definite-time overcurrent protection/inverse-time overcur-
rent protection – grounded power system application
template is used as the basis. In addition, the device must be
equipped with a communication module for protection commu-
nication. The protection communication function group is
created automatically when the module is configured. The
Communication mapping DIGSI editor is used to determine the
information that must be transmitted to the opposite end and
received from the opposite end. The received information can
directly be combined with the binary input signals of the direc-
tional overcurrent protection. No additional logic with a CFC
chart is necessary.
2.4

[dw_7SJ82_mit WirkKom, 3, en_US]
Figure 2.4/6 Application Example: Directional Comparison Protection for Power Line with Infeed at 2 Ends and Protection Communication
2.4

ANSI Function Abbr.
Available
1 2 3 4 5
Protection functions for 3-pole tripping 3-pole ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
24 Overexcitation protection V/f ■
25 Synchrocheck, synchronization function with
adjusting commands (from V7.82)
Sync ■
sequence system V1" or "universal Vx"
V< ■
tion
Q>/V< ■
32R Reverse-power protection - P< ■
37 Undercurrent I< ■ ■
46 Negative-sequence system overcurrent protection I2> ■ ■
46 Unbalanced-load protection (thermal) I2² t> ■
46 Negative-sequence system and overcurrent
protection with direction
I2>, ∠(V2, I2) ■
47 Overvoltage protection: "Negative-sequence
system V2" or "negative-sequence system V1/posi-
tive-sequence system V1"
V2>; V2/V1> ■
49 Thermal overload protection θ, I²t ■ ■
49 Thermal overload protection, user-defined charac-
teristic curve
θ, I²t ■
49 Overload protection for RLC filter circuit elements
of a capacitor bank
θ, I²t ■
50/51 TD Overcurrent protection with positive-sequence
current I1 (from V7.9)
I1> ■
50N/ 51N TD Overcurrent protection, ground IN> ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
including a) 3I0> b) admittance Y0>, c) 3I0-harm>
(from V7.8)
INs> ■
Sensitive ground-fault detection via pulse detec-
tion; hint: this stage also requires the func-
tion 50Ns/51Ns or 67Ns "sensitive ground-fault
detection for grounded arc suppression coils and
isolated power systems"
IN pulse ■
50/51 TD Overcurrent protection for RLC filter circuit
elements of a capacitor bank
I> ■
50RS Circuit breaker restrike monitoring CBRM ■
51V Voltage-controlled overcurrent protection t=f(I, V) ■
V> ■
59C Peak overvoltage protection, 3-phase, for capaci-
tors
V> cap. ■ ■
60C Current-unbalance protection for capacitor banks Iunbal> ■ ■
60 Voltage-comparison supervision ΔV> ■
2.4

ANSI Function Abbr.
Available
1 2 3 4 5
67 Directional overcurrent protection, phases I>, ∠(V, I) ■ ■ ■
67N Directional overcurrent protection, ground IN>, ∠(V, I) ■ ■
■ ■
Directional tripping stage with one harmonic;
hint: this stage also requires the function "67Ns
sensitive ground-fault detection for grounded arc
suppression coils and isolated power systems"
∠(V0h,I0h) ■
74CC Single circuit monitoring (from V7.9) ■
81U Underfrequency load shedding f<(ULS) ■
86 Lockout ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
87N T Restricted ground-fault protection ΔIN ■
87C Differential protection for capacitor banks ΔI ■
90 V Voltage controller for two-winding transformer ■
90 V Voltage controller for two-winding transformer
with parallel control
■
Number of two-winding transformers with
parallel control (hint: only together with the func-
tion “voltage controller for two-winding trans-
former with parallel control”)
■
FL Fault Locator Plus (from V7.9) FL plus ■
PMU Synchrophasor measurement PMU ■
CD-3FO)
■
Measured values, standard ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Measured values, extended: Min, max, average ■
■
■
■
■
CFC (standard, control) ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
CFC arithmetic ■
Inrush-current detection ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Control ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Circuit breaker ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
2.4

ANSI Function Abbr.
Available
1 2 3 4 5
Disconnector/grounding conductor ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Fault recording of analog and binary signals ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Monitoring ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Protection interface, serial ■
Frequency group tracking (from V7.8) ■
V7.8)
■
protocol
■
■
Function point class: 0 0 30 50 100
Table 2.4/3 SIPROTEC 7SJ82 – Functions, Application Templates
(1) Non-directional definite-time overcurrent protection/inverse-time overcurrent protection (4*I)
(3) Directional definite-time overcurrent protection/inverse-time overcurrent protection – grounded power system
(4) Directional definite-time overcurrent protection/inverse-time overcurrent protection - grounded arc suppression coils/isolated power
systems
(5) Capacitor bank: H-bridge
2.4

V1 1/3, 11 BI, 9 BO, 4 I
11 binary inputs
V2 1/3, 23 BI, 16 BO, 4 I
23 binary inputs
Contains the following modules: base module with PS101, IO101, and
IO110
V3 1/3, 11 BI, 9 BO, 4 I, 4 V
11 binary inputs
V4 1/3, 23 BI, 16 BO, 4 I, 4 V
23 binary inputs
IO110.
V5 1/3, 7 BI, 7 BO, 8 I
7 binary inputs
2.4

Description
The SIPROTEC 7SJ85 overcurrent protection has been designed
specifically for the protection of feeders and lines. With its
modular structure, flexibility, and the high-performance DIGSI 5
engineering tool, the SIPROTEC 7SJ85 device offers future-
oriented solutions for protection, control, automation, moni-
toring, and Power Quality – Basic.
Main function Feeder and overcurrent protection for all
voltage levels
Inputs and outputs 5 predefined standard variants with 4 current
transformers, 4 voltage transformers,
11 to 59 binary inputs, 9 to 33 binary outputs
Hardware flexibility Flexibly adjustable and expandable I/O quantity
structure within the scope of the modular
SIPROTEC 5 system; 1/6 expansion modules
can be added, available with large or small
display, or without display
Housing width 1/3 × 19 inches to 2/1 × 19 inches
Benefits
• Cybersecurity in accordance with NERC CIP and BDEW White-
paper requirements
Functions
• Protection of up to 9 feeders with up to 40 analog inputs
tions: 3I0>, V0>, transient ground-fault function, cos φ, sin φ,
dir. detection of intermittent ground faults, harmonic detec-
tion, and admittance measurement
• Ground fault detection using the pulse detection method
• Arc protection
protection
• Protection functions for capacitor banks, such as overcurrent,
overload, current-unbalance, peak overvoltage, or differential
protection
protection)
functions (such as peak overvoltage protection for capacitors)
• Point-on-wave switching
• Control, synchrocheck, and switchgear interlocking protection
• 2 slots for optional communication modules, usable for
different and redundant protocols (IEC 61850-8-1,
IEC 61850-9-2 Client, IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 60870-5-104,
Modbus TCP, DNP3 serial and TCP, PROFINET IO, PROFINET IO
S2 redundancy)
• Virtual network partitioning (IEEE 802.1Q - VLAN)
[SIP5_GD_SS_W3, 2, --_--]
Figure 2.4/7 SIPROTEC 5 Device with Expansion Module
2.4

chain topology
cols
access.
• Phasor measurement unit (PMU) for synchrophasor measured
values and IEEE C37.118 protocol
• Control of power transformers
Applications
2 ends, parallel lines, and open-circuited or closed ring
systems of all voltage levels up to AC 400 V
• Protection and monitoring of capacitor banks
• Load shedding applications
• Automatic switchover
• Regulation or control of power transformers (two-winding
transformers, three-winding transformers, grid coupling
transformers)
Non-directional definite-time overcurrent protection/inverse-
time overcurrent protection
• Overcurrent protection (non-directional) for phases and
ground
• transformer inrush-current detection
overcurrent protection – grounded power system
phases and ground
• transformer inrush-current detection
overcurrent protection – arc-suppression-coil-ground systems/
isolated systems
phases
• Directional sensitive ground-fault detection for static ground
faults
• Directional sensitive ground-fault detection for transient and
static ground faults
Capacitor bank H-bridge + 1 x RLC
MSCDN capacitor bank
• Differential protection for capacitor
2.4

Directional Comparison Protection via Protection Interfaces
for Power Line with an Infeed at Both Ends
With the direction determination of the directional overcurrent
protection, you can implement directional comparison protec-
tion for power line with an infeed at both ends (Figure 2.4/8).
Directional comparison protection is used for the selective isola-
tion of a faulty line section (for example, subsections of closed
rings). Sections are isolated quickly, that is, they do not suffer
the disadvantage of long grading times. This technique requires
that directional information can be exchanged between the indi-
vidual protection stations. This information exchange can, for
example, be implemented via a protection interface. Alterna-
tives for the protection interface are IEC 61850 GOOSE or
exchange via pilot wires for signal transmission, with an auxil-
iary-voltage loop.
[dw_DwDOCP07, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.4/8 Application Example: Principle of Directional Comparison Protection for Power Line with an Infeed at Both Ends
The application example for SIPROTEC 7SJ82 (Figure 2.4/6)
shows the functional scope and the basic configuration for this
application.
Protection and Control at a Double Busbar
In the Figure 2.4/9, a double-busbar feeder is protected and
additionally controlled by a SIPROTEC 7SJ85 device. This
example is based on the application template Directional defi-
nite-time overcurrent protection/inverse-time overcurrent
protection – grounded power system. In addition to the appli-
cation template, the functions Circuit-breaker failure protection,
Automatic reclosing, and Synchrocheck in the circuit-breaker
function group are required and configured. These functions
can easily be added via drag and drop from the DIGSI 5 function
library. Operational measured values and energy metered values
are calculated in the Voltage-current 3ph function group. They
are available for the output on the display, the transmission to
the substation automation technology, and the processing in
the CFC. A switching sequence stored in the CFC that is acti-
vated via a function key starts an automatically running busbar
switchover process.
2.4

[dw_7SJ85_mit DoppelSS, 2, en_US]
Figure 2.4/9 Application Example: Overcurrent Protection 7SJ85 at a Double-Busbar Feeder
Protection of a Capacitor Bank
Figure 2.4/10 shows the protection of an H-bridge capacitor
bank. For this application, the device provides special functions
for the protection of capacitor banks. Thanks to the modular
structure and performance of SIPROTEC 5, the complete applica-
tion can be protected with one single device.
Properties:
• Short-circuit protection (ANSI 50, 50N) for phase and ground
faults
• Peak overvoltage protection (ANSI 59C) to protect the dielec-
tric medium of the bank against dangerous peak overvoltage,
in particular caused by the harmonic components with consid-
eration up to the 50th harmonic component. The peak
2.4

voltage is calculated from the current by calculating the inte-
gral.
• Overload protection (ANSI 49) to protect the bank against
thermal overload
• Highly sensitive current-unbalance protection (ANSI 60C) to
detect the failure of individual capacitor elements as moni-
toring and protection function; manual and automatic adjust-
ment in the bay. The automatic adjustment permits dynamic
unbalances (caused by temperature influence, for example) to
be considered.
• Undercurrent protection (ANSI 37) to trip the local circuit
breaker when the infeed is disconnected providing protection
against hazardous voltage at the non-discharged bank, for
example, in phase opposition
• Circuit-breaker failure protection (ANSI 50BF)
[dw_CapBank_SLE_Normal, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.4/10 Application Example: Protection of an H-Bridge Capacitor Bank
2.4

[dw_CapBank_MSCDN, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.4/11 Application Example: MSCDN Capacitor Bank
Protection of an MSCDN Capacitor Bank (MSCDN =
Mechanically Switched Circuit Breaker with Damping
Network)
In Figure 2.4/11, the SIPROTEC 7SJ85 device protects the capac-
itor bank in H-bridge connection as well as the associated
damping network. Thanks to the modular structure and
performance of SIPROTEC 5, the complete application can be
protected with a single device.
Properties:
• Acquisition of up to nine 3-phase current measuring points
• Short-circuit protection (ANSI 50, 50N) for phase and ground
faults
2.4

• Peak overvoltage protection (ANSI 59C) to protect the dielec-
tric medium of the bank against dangerous peak overvoltage,
in particular caused by the harmonic components, with
consideration up to the 50th harmonic component. The peak
voltage is calculated from the current by calculating the inte-
gral.
• Overload protection (ANSI 49) to protect the bank against
thermal overload
• Highly sensitive current-unbalance protection (ANSI 60C) to
detect the failure of individual capacitor elements as moni-
toring and protection function; manual and automatic adjust-
ment in the bay. The automatic adjustment permits dynamic
unbalances (caused by temperature influence, for example) to
be considered.
• Differential protection (87C) over the entire capacitor bank to
protect against short circuits inside the entire installation
• Overload and overcurrent protection via the 2 resistors and a
simple differential protection to detect a failure of one of the
2 resistors. For this purpose, current sum and current differ-
ence are determined with the current measuring points in the
R branches, at the inputs of the V/I 3-phase function groups.
• Undercurrent protection (ANSI 37) to trip the local circuit
breaker when the infeed is disconnected, providing protection
against hazardous voltage at the non-discharged bank, for
example, in phase opposition
2.4

ANSI Function Abbr.
Available
1 2 3 4 5
Expandable hardware quantity structure I/O ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Process bus client protocol (hint: PB client requires
a separate ETH-BD-2FO plug-in module, from
V8.0)
PB client ■
IEC61850-9-2 Merging Unit Stream (hint: Each
stream requires a separate ETH-BD-2FO plug-in
module, from V8.0)
MU ■
IEC61850-9-2 Merging Unit Stream 7SS85 CU
(hint: Only for communication with a 7SS85 CU. A
separate ETH-BD-2FO plug-in module is required
starting with V8.40)
MU ■
25 Synchrocheck, synchronization function with
adjusting commands (from V7.82)
Sync ■
V< ■
tion
Q>/V< ■
37 Undercurrent I< ■ ■ ■
46 Negative-sequence system overcurrent protection I2> ■ ■ ■
I2>, ∠(V2, I2) ■
system
V2> ■
49 Thermal overload protection θ, I²t ■ ■ ■
teristic curve
θ, I²t ■
49 Overload protection for RLC filter circuit elements
of a capacitor bank
θ, I²t ■ ■
I1> ■
(from V7.8)
INs> ■
IN pulse ■
50/51 TD Overcurrent protection for RLC filter circuit
elements of a capacitor bank
I> ■
2.4

ANSI Function Abbr.
Available
1 2 3 4 5
50BF Circuit-breaker failure protection, 3-pole CBFP ■ ■
50EF End-fault protection (hint: For use only in decen-
tralized busbar protection with a 7SS85 CU
■
V> ■ ■
59C Peak overvoltage protection, 3-phase, for capaci-
tors
V> cap. ■ ■ ■
60C Current-unbalance protection for capacitor banks Iunbal> ■ ■ ■
67 Directional overcurrent protection, phases I>, ∠(V, I) ■ ■ ■
■ ■
∠(V0h,I0h) ■
86 Lockout ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
87C Differential protection for capacitor banks ΔI ■ ■
87V Voltage differential protection for capacitor banks ΔV ■
■
■
90 V Voltage controller for three-winding transformer ■
90 V Voltage controller for grid coupling transformer ■
CD-3FO)
■
■
2.4

ANSI Function Abbr.
Available
1 2 3 4 5
■
■
■
CFC arithmetic ■
Inrush-current detection ■ ■ ■ ■
Control ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
PoW Point-on-wave switching (starting with V7.90) PoW ■
Disconnector/grounding conductor ■ ■ ■ ■
V7.8)
■
protocol
■
■
(3) Directional definite-time overcurrent protection/inverse-time overcurrent protection - grounded arc suppression coils/isolated power
systems
(4) Capacitor bank: H-bridge + 1*RLC
(5) Capacitor bank: MSCDN
2.4

S1 1/3, 11 BI, 9 BO, 4 I, 4 V
11 binary inputs
9 binary outputs (1 life contact, 2 standard, 6 fast)
S2 1/2, 17 BI, 16 BO, 4 I, 4 V
17 binary inputs
Expansion modules IO206
S3 1/2, 27 BI, 17 BO, 4 I, 4 V
27 binary inputs
S4 2/3, 43 BI, 25 BO, 4 I, 4 V
43 binary inputs
Expansion modules 2x IO207
S5 5/6, 59 BI, 33 BO, 4 I, 4 V
59 binary inputs
Expansion modules 3x IO207
2.4

[dw_LineProt_anwendung, 3, en_US]
SIPROTEC 7SA8, 7SD8, 7SL8, 7VK8, 7SJ86
SIPROTEC 5 line protection devices protect overhead lines and
cables on all voltage levels with highest possible selectivity. The
large number of available protection and automatic functions
allows their utilization in all line protection sections. The devices
contain all important auxiliary functions that are necessary for
safe network operation today. This includes control, measure-
ment, and monitoring functions. The large number of communi-
cation interfaces and communication protocols satisfies the
requirements of communication-based selective protection and
of automated operation. Commissioning and maintenance work
can be completed safely, quickly, and thus cost-effectively with
high-performance test functions. Their modular surface
mounting permits SIPROTEC 5 line protection devices to be
always adapted flexibly to the individual requirements.
The device types are defined by their main-protection functions
and by essential differentiating characteristics. For devices with
flexible configurability of the hardware quantity structure, you
can select various standard variants when ordering. Expanda-
bility through expansion modules allows for individual adapta-
tion to specific applications such as more analog channels for
breaker-and-a-half layouts, or more binary contacts (see Table
2.5/4 and Table 2.5/5).
Line Protection
2.5

7 XX YY
Main protection
7 SA Distance protection
7 SD Differential protection
7 SL Distance and differential protection
7 SJ Overcurrent protection
7 VK Circuit-breaker management
7 82 • Exclusively 3-pole tripping
• 2 hardware variants available
7 86 • Exclusively 3-pole tripping
• Hardware quantity structure flexibly configurable
7 87 • 1-pole and 3-pole tripping
• Hardware quantity structure flexibly configurable
Table 2.5/1 Differentiating Characteristics of the Line Protection Devices
Type Identification 7SA82 7SA86 7SA87 7SD82 7SD86 7SD87 7SL82 7SL86 7SL87 7VK87 7SJ86
Distance protection ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Differential protection ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Overcurrent protection
for lines
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Circuit-breaker manage-
ment
■
3-pole trip command ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
1-/3-pole trip command ■ ■ ■ ■
Point-on-wave switching ■ ■ ■ ■
Flexibly configurable
hardware
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Table 2.5/2 Essential Differentiating Characteristics of the Main Protection Types
Line Protection
2.5

Compatibility between SIPROTEC 5 Line Protection and
SIPROTEC 4 Line Protection
Introducing the firmware version V7.90 in the SIPROTEC 5 line
protection means that now, for the first time, mixed configura-
tions comprising line protection devices from the SIPROTEC 5
series and the old SIPROTEC 4 series can be operated.
A distinction can be drawn between 2 use cases:
• Replacing individual devices of an existing topology
• Expanding an existing SIPROTEC 4 topology by one or more
SIPROTEC 5 devices
Use case 1: Replacing individual devices of an existing topology
(retrofitting existing systems with SIPROTEC 5 technology)
The differential protection of the remaining differential-protec-
tion topology remains in operation due to functionally logging
off the device to be replaced from the topology. Now, the
device that has been logged off or the complete switchgear can
be upgraded to SIPROTEC 5. The complete topology is now
protected in mixed operation after activating the parameterized
SIPROTEC 5 line protection device.
The switchgears can be gradually replaced as a result, while
maintaining the differential protection. As a result, down times
and protection interruptions are reduced to a minimum.
[dw_interoper_SIP4-and-SIP5_example_step-by-step_conversion_systems, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.5/3 Replacing Individual Devices of an Existing Topology
Use case 2: Expanding existing SIPROTEC 4 topologies by
SIPROTEC 5 devices
If an existing topology is intended to be expanded by one or
more ends (up to a max. of 6), then this can be carried out with
SIPROTEC 5 devices from V7.90 upwards. This ensures that
switchgear design and engineering is focused on the future.
[dw_interoper_SIP4-and-SIP5_example_integr_single-feeder, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.5/4 Expanding Existing SIPROTEC 4 Topologies by SIPROTEC 5
Devices.
Device Type HW FW
7SA522 /FF 4.70 1)
7SA6 /EE 4.70 1)
7SD52/53 /EE 4.70
7SD610 /DD 4.70
Table 2.5/3 Hardware Releases and Firmware Versions on the
SIPROTEC 4 Side
(1) Older versions are also feasible in theory, but they have not
been tested by Siemens.
Protection-Interface Modules
The existing communication converters can remain on the
SIPROTEC 4 side for establishing the communication link. Adap-
tation can be carried out on the new SIPROTEC 5 line side in
each case.
All of the communication modules that are currently available
are supported on the SIPROTEC 4 side. Either the USART-AD-1FO
or USART-AE-2FO FO5 module is required on the SIPROTEC 5
side. FO5 modules can be connected directly to the SIPROTEC 5
devices using optical fiber in this case.
FO30 modules are also going to be supported for direct connec-
tion to communication networks in accordance with
IEEE C37.94 standard in one of the upcoming releases.
Appropriate repeaters must be used on the SIPROTEC 5 side to
connect the FO17, FO18, and FO19 long-distance modules.
Line Protection – Compatibility
2.5

Standard Variant for SIPROTEC 7SA82, 7SD82, 7SL82
Type 1 1/3,11 BI, 9 BO, 4 I, 4 V
11 binary inputs
4 current transformers
4 voltage transformers
Type 2 1/3, 23 BI, 16 BO, 4 I, 4 V
23 binary inputs
IO110
Table 2.5/4 Standard Variants for SIPROTEC 7Sx82 S Line Protection Devices
Line Protection – Standard Variants
2.5

Standard Variants for SIPROTEC 7SA86, 7SD86, 7SL86, 7SA87, 7SD87, 7SL87, 7VK87
Type 1 1/3, 7 BI, 14 BO, 16 LED, 4 I, 4 V
Housing width 1/3 × 19"
7 binary inputs
16 LEDs
Type 2 1/3, 11 BI, 9 BO, 16 LED, 4 I, 4 V
11 binary inputs
16 LEDs
Type 3 1/2, 13 BI, 21 BO, 16 LED, 4 I, 4 V
13 binary inputs
16 LEDs
Expansion module IO206
Type 4 1/2, 19 BI, 30 BO, 16 LED, 4 I, 4 V
19 binary inputs
16 LEDs
Type 6 1/2, 15 BI, 18 BO (4 HS), 16 LED, 4 I, 4 V
15 binary inputs
18 binary outputs (1 life contact, 5 standard, 8 fast, 4 high-speed)
16 LEDs
2.5

Type 7 1/2, 15 BI, 20 BO, 16 LED, 8 I, 8 V
15 binary inputs
16 LEDs
Type 8 2/3, 31 BI, 46 BO, 16 LED, 4 I, 4 V
31 binary inputs
16 LEDs
Expansion modules IO205, IO205
27 binary inputs
16 LEDs
Type 11 2/3, 27 BI, 36 BO, 16 LED, 8 I, 8 V
27 binary inputs
16 LEDs
Housing width 5/6 × 19",
27 binary inputs
16 LEDs
Expansion modules IO208, IO209, IO209
Table 2.5/5 Standard Variants for Line Protection Devices 7SA86, 7SD86, 7SL86, 7SA87, 7SD87, 7SL87, 7VK87
2.5

Type 1 1/3, 11 BI, 9 BO, 16 LED, 4 I, 4 V
11 binary inputs
16 LEDs
Type 2 1/2, 17 BI, 16 BO, 16 LED, 4 I, 4 V
17 binary inputs
16 LEDs
Type 3 1/2, 23 BI, 25 BO, 16 LED, 4 I, 4 V
23 binary inputs
16 LEDs
Table 2.5/6 Standard Variants for SIPROTEC 7SJ86 Line Protection Devices
You can find the technical data in the manual
2.5

Description
The SIPROTEC 7SA82 distance protection has been designed
particularly for the cost-optimized and compact protection of
lines in medium-voltage and high-voltage systems. With its flexi-
bility and the high-performance DIGSI 5 engineering tool, the
SIPROTEC 7SA82 device offers future-oriented solutions for
protection, control, automation, monitoring, and Power Quality
– Basic.
Main function Distance protection for medium-voltage and
high-voltage applications
Interoperability of SIPROTEC 4 and SIPROTEC 5
line protection devices
Tripping 3-pole, minimum tripping time: 19 ms
Inputs and outputs 4 current transformers, 4 voltage transformers,
11 or 23 binary inputs, 9 or 16 binary outputs
small display.
Housing width 1/3 x 19 inches
Benefits
• Compact and low-cost distance protection
paper requirements
• High investment security and low operating costs due to
future-oriented system solutions
Functions
• Minimum tripping time: 19 ms
• 6 independent measuring loops (6-system distance protec-
tion)
• Several distance-protection functions can be selected: Classic,
reactance method (RMD), impedance protection for trans-
formers
• Directional backup protection and various additional functions
tions: 3I0>, V0>, transient ground fault, cos φ, sin φ, dir.
detection of intermittent ground faults, harmonic detection,
and admittance measurement
• Adaptive power-swing blocking
• Detection of current-transformer saturation for fast tripping
with high accuracy
• Fault locator Plus for accurate fault location with inhomoge-
nous line sections and targeted automatic overhead line
• Arc protection
protection
protection)
functions (such as thermal overload protection) and opera-
tional measured values
[SIP5_GD_W3, 2, --_--]
Figure 2.6/1 SIPROTEC 7SA82
Distance Protection – SIPROTEC 7SA82
2.6

connections, and communication networks (IEEE C37.94, and
chain topology
cols
access.
• Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU) for synchrophasor measured
Applications
or 2 ends, parallel lines, and open-circuited or closed ring
• Serial protection communication with
SIPROTEC 5 and SIPROTEC 4 devices over different distances
and physical media, such as optical fiber, two-wire connec-
tions, and communication networks
• Basic
• Distance protection for resonant/isolated grounded power
systems, with automatic reclosing
• Distance protection with reactance method for overhead lines
in grounded electrical power systems
2.6

Application Example
[dw_7SA82_Ltg, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.6/2 Application Example: Distance Protection for Overhead Line
2.6

ANSI Function Abbr.
Available
1 2 3
Protection functions for 3-pole tripping 3-pole ■ ■ ■ ■
21/21N Distance Protection Z<, V< /I>/∠(V,
I)
■ ■ ■ ■
21T Impedance protection for transformers Z< ■
25 Synchrocheck, synchronization function Sync ■ ■
V< ■
tion
Q>/V< ■
I2>, ∠(V2, I2) ■
system
V2> ■
50/51 TD Overcurrent protection, phases I> ■ ■ ■ ■
I1> ■
50N/ 51N TD Overcurrent protection, ground IN> ■ ■ ■ ■
(from V7.8)
INs> ■
IN pulse ■
50BF Circuit-breaker failure protection, 3-pole CBFP ■ ■ ■
V> ■
67N Directional ground-fault protection in grounded
power systems
IN>, ∠(V, I) ■ ■
■ ■
∠(V0h,I0h) ■
2.6

ANSI Function Abbr.
Available
1 2 3
78 Out-of-step protection ΔZ/Δt ■
79 Automatic reclosing, 3-pole AREC ■ ■ ■
85/21 Teleprotection scheme for distance protection ■ ■ ■ ■
85/27 Weak or no infeed: Echo and tripping ■ ■ ■ ■
85/67N Teleprotection scheme for directional ground-
fault protection
■ ■ ■ ■
86 Lockout ■
■
■
FL Fault Locator, single-side FL-one ■ ■ ■ ■
CD-3FO)
■
Measured values, standard ■ ■ ■ ■
Switching statistics counter ■ ■ ■ ■
■
■
■
■
CFC (standard, control) ■ ■ ■ ■
CFC arithmetic ■
Inrush-current detection ■
External trip initiation ■ ■ ■ ■
Control ■ ■ ■ ■
Circuit breaker ■ ■ ■ ■
Disconnector/grounding conductor ■
Fault recording of analog and binary signals ■ ■ ■ ■
Monitoring ■ ■ ■ ■
Protection interface, serial ■ ■ ■ ■
Region, France: Overload protection for 'PSL-PSC'
lines
■
Region, France: 'MAXI-L' overcurrent protection ■
2.6

ANSI Function Abbr.
Available
1 2 3
Region, France: 'PDA' system decoupling protec-
tion
■
Region, France: Overload protection for trans-
formers
■
V7.8)
■
protocol
■
■
Function point class: 0 100 200
Table 2.6/1 SIPROTEC 7SA82 – Functions, Application Templates
(1) Basic
(2) DIS Res./Isol. Power systems, with AREC
(3) DIS RMD Overhead Line, grounded power systems
2.6

Description
specifically for the protection of lines. With its modular struc-
ture, flexibility and the high-performance DIGSI 5 engineering
tool, the SIPROTEC 7SA86 device offers future-oriented solutions
Quality – Basic.
Main function Distance protection
Inputs and outputs 12 predefined standard variants with 4/4 or
8/8 current transformers/voltage transformers,
Hardware quantity
structure
Flexibly adjustable I/O quantity structure within
the scope of the SIPROTEC 5 modular system
Benefits
paper requirements
Functions
tion)
formers
• Adaptive power-swing blocking, out-of-step protection
with high accuracy
nous line sections and targeted automatic overhead line
• Arc protection
protection
protection)
• 3-pole automatic reclosing function
• Up to 4 optional, pluggable communication modules, usable
for different and redundant protocols (IEC 61850-8-1,
S2 redundancy)
others), including automatic switchover between ring feeder
and chain topology
cols
[SIP5_GD_SS_W3, 2, --_--]
2.6

access.
• Flexibly adjustable I/O quantity structure within the scope of
the SIPROTEC 5 modular system
Applications
or 2 ends, parallel lines, and open-circuited or closed ring
• Basic
• Distance protection for resonant/isolated-grounded power
systems, with automatic reclosing
in grounded electrical power systems and applications with
breaker-and-a-half layout
• Distance protection with MHO distance zone characteristic for
overhead lines in grounded electrical power systems and
applications with breaker-and-a-half layout
2.6

2.6

[dw_7SA86_1-5LS, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.6/5 Application Example: Distance Protection for Overhead Line with Breaker-and-a-Half Layout
2.6

ANSI Function Abbr.
Available
1 2 3 4 5
V8.0)
PB client ■
module, from V8.0)
MU ■
MU ■
I)
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
25 Synchrocheck, synchronization function Sync ■ ■ ■ ■
V< ■
tion
Q>/V< ■
I2>, ∠(V2, I2) ■
system
V2> ■
50HS Instantaneous high-current tripping I>>> ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
I1> ■
50N/ 51N TD Overcurrent protection, ground IN> ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
(from V7.8)
INs> ■
IN pulse ■
50BF Circuit-breaker failure protection, 3-pole CBFP ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■
V> ■
2.6

ANSI Function Abbr.
Available
1 2 3 4 5
power systems
IN>, ∠(V, I) ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■
∠(V0h,I0h) ■
68 Power-swing blocking ΔZ/Δt ■ ■ ■ ■
79 Automatic reclosing, 3-pole AREC ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
85/21 Teleprotection scheme for distance protection ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
85/27 Weak or no infeed: Echo and tripping ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
fault protection
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
86 Lockout ■
87 STUB Stub fault differential protection (for breaker-and-
a-half layouts)
■ ■ ■
■
■
FL Fault Locator, single-side FL-one ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
CD-3FO)
■
Switching statistics counter ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■
■
■
■
2.6

ANSI Function Abbr.
Available
1 2 3 4 5
CFC arithmetic ■
External trip initiation ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Control ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Circuit breaker ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Disconnector/grounding conductor ■ ■ ■
Protection interface, serial ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
lines
■
tion
■
formers
■
V7.8)
■
protocol
■
■
(1) Basic
(2) DIS Res./Isol. Power systems, with AREC
(4) DIS RMD Overhead Line, grounded power systems, 1.5 CB
(5) DIS MHO, overhead line, grounded power systems, 1.5 CB
2.6

Description
specifically for the protection of lines. With its modular struc-
ture, flexibility and the high-performance DIGSI 5 engineering
tool, the SIPROTEC 7SA87 device offers future-oriented solutions
Quality – Basic.
Main function Distance protection
Tripping 1-pole and 3-pole, minimum tripping time:
9 ms
Hardware flexibility Flexibly adjustable I/O quantity structure within
Benefits
paper requirements
Functions
tion)
formers
with high accuracy
• Arc protection
protection
protection)
• 1-pole automatic reclosing function with secondary arc detec-
tion (SAD)
S2 redundancy)
chain topology.
[SIP5_GD_SS_W3, 2, --_--]
2.6

cols
access.
Applications
• Detection and selective 1-pole and 3-pole tripping of short
circuits in electrical equipment of star networks, lines with
infeed at one or 2 ends, parallel lines, and open-circuited or
closed ring systems of all voltage levels
• Distance protection basis
in grounded electrical power systems and applications with
2.6

2.6

[dw_7SA87_1-5LS, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.6/8 Application Example: Distance Protection for Overhead Line with Breaker-and-a-Half Layout
2.6

ANSI Function Abbr.
Available
1 2 3
Expandable hardware quantity structure I/O ■ ■ ■ ■
V8.0)
PB client ■
module, from V8.0)
MU ■
MU ■
I)
■ ■ ■ ■
25 Synchrocheck, synchronization function Sync ■ ■ ■
V< ■
tion
Q>/V< ■
I2>, ∠(V2, I2) ■
system
V2> ■
I1> ■
(from V7.8)
INs> ■
IN pulse ■
50BF Circuit-breaker failure protection 1-pole/3-pole CBFP ■ ■ ■
■
V> ■
2.6

ANSI Function Abbr.
Available
1 2 3
power systems
IN>, ∠(V, I) ■ ■ ■
■
∠(V0h,I0h) ■
68 Power-swing blocking ΔZ/Δt ■ ■ ■
79 Automatic reclosing, 1-pole/3-pole AREC ■ ■ ■
SAD Secondary arc detection (SAD) in 1-pole auto-
matic reclosing cycles starting with V8.30; note:
SAD also requires the function points for “79 auto-
matic reclosing, pole/3-pole”
SAD ■
fault protection
■ ■ ■ ■
86 Lockout ■
a-half layouts)
■ ■
■
■
CD-3FO)
■
■
■
2.6

ANSI Function Abbr.
Available
1 2 3
■
■
CFC arithmetic ■
Disconnector/grounding conductor ■ ■
lines
■
tion
■
formers
■
V7.8)
■
protocol
■
■
(1) Basic
(3) DIS RMD Overhead Line, grounded power systems, 1.5 CB
2.6

Description
The SIPROTEC 7SD82 line differential protection has been
designed particularly for the cost-optimized and compact
protection of lines in medium-voltage and high-voltage systems.
With its flexibility and the high-performance DIGSI 5 engineering
tool, the SIPROTEC 7SD82 device offers future-oriented solutions
Quality – Basic.
Main function Differential protection for medium-voltage and
high-voltage applications
Hardware flexibility 2 different quantity structures for binary inputs
and outputs are available in the 1/3 base
module. Adding 1/6 expansion modules is not
possible; housing width available with large or
small display.
Benefits
• Compact and low-cost line differential protection
paper requirements
Functions
• Main protection function is differential protection with adap-
tive algorithm for maximum sensitivity and stability even with
the most different transformer errors, current-transformer
saturation, and capacitive charging currents
• Detection of current-transformer saturation
• Arc protection
protection
protection)
• 2 optional pluggable communication modules, usable for
chain topology.
cols
access.
[SIP5_GD_W3, 2, --_--]
Figure 2.7/1 SIPROTEC 7SD82 Line Differential Protection Device
Line Differential Protection – SIPROTEC 7SD82
2.7

Applications
• Line protection for all voltage levels with 3-pole tripping
• Phase-selective protection of overhead lines and cables with
single-ended and multi-ended infeed of all lengths with up to
6 line ends
• Transformers and compensating coils in the protection zone
They include all basic configurations and default settings.
• Differential protection basis
• Differential protection for overhead line
Application Example
[dw_7SD82_Ltg, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.7/2 Application Example: Line Differential Protection for Overhead Line
2.7

ANSI Function Abbr.
Available
1 2
V< ■
tion
Q>/V< ■
I2>, ∠(V2, I2) ■
system
V2> ■
50HS Instantaneous high-current tripping I>>> ■ ■ ■
I1> ■
(from V7.8)
INs> ■
IN pulse ■
V> ■
power systems
IN>, ∠(V, I) ■
■
∠(V0h,I0h) ■
79 Automatic reclosing, 3-pole AREC ■ ■
2.7

ANSI Function Abbr.
Available
1 2
86 Lockout ■
87L Line differential protection for 2 line ends ΔI ■ ■ ■
87L Line differential protection for 3 to 6 line ends
(dependent on significant properties)
ΔI ■ ■ ■
87L/ 87T Option for line differential protection with Trans-
former in the Protection Range
ΔI ■
Option for line differential protection with
charging-current compensation
ΔI ■
Broken-wire detection for differential protection ■
■
■
FL Fault Locator, single-side FL-one ■ ■ ■
CD-3FO)
■
Switching statistics counter ■ ■ ■
■
■
■
■
CFC arithmetic ■
External trip initiation ■ ■ ■
Control ■ ■ ■
Circuit breaker ■ ■ ■
Protection interface, serial ■ ■ ■
lines
■
tion
■
2.7

ANSI Function Abbr.
Available
1 2
formers
■
V7.8)
■
protocol
■
■
Table 2.7/1 SIPROTEC 7SD82 – Functions, Application Templates
(1) Basic
(2) DIFF Overhead Line
2.7

Description
The SIPROTEC 7SD86 line differential protection has been
designed specifically for the protection of lines. With its modular
structure, flexibility and the high-performance DIGSI 5 engi-
neering tool, the SIPROTEC 7SD86 device offers future-oriented
solutions for protection, control, automation, monitoring, and
Main function Differential protection
Benefits
paper requirements
Functions
• Ground-fault detection using the pulse detection method
• Arc protection
protection
protection)
PQ – Basic: Voltage unbalance; voltage changes: overvoltage,
S2 redundancy)
chain topology.
cols
access
[SIP5_GD_SS_W3, 2, --_--]
2.7

• Flexibly adjustable I/O quantity structure
Applications
6 line ends
• Also used in switchgear with breaker-and-a-half layout
• Differential protection for overhead line with transformer in
the protection range
• Differential protection for overhead line, for applications with
2.7

2.7

[dw_7SD86_1-5LS, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.7/5 Application Example: Line Differential Protection for Overhead Line with Breaker-and-a-Half Layout
2.7

ANSI Function Abbr.
Available
1 2 3 4
Expandable hardware quantity structure I/O ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
V8.0)
PB client ■
module, from V8.0)
MU ■
MU ■
V< ■
tion
Q>/V< ■
I2>, ∠(V2, I2) ■
system
V2> ■
49 Thermal overload protection θ, I²t ■ ■ ■ ■
50/51 TD Overcurrent protection, phases I> ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
50HS Instantaneous high-current tripping I>>> ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
I1> ■
(from V7.8)
INs> ■
IN pulse ■
50BF Circuit-breaker failure protection, 3-pole CBFP ■ ■ ■ ■
■
V> ■
power systems
IN>, ∠(V, I) ■
2.7

ANSI Function Abbr.
Available
1 2 3 4
■
∠(V0h,I0h) ■
79 Automatic reclosing, 3-pole AREC ■ ■ ■ ■
86 Lockout ■
87L Line differential protection for 2 line ends ΔI ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
ΔI ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
ΔI ■ ■
ΔI ■
a-half layouts)
■ ■
■
■
FL Fault Locator, single-side FL-one ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
CD-3FO)
■
Measured values, standard ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Switching statistics counter ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■
■
■
■
CFC (standard, control) ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
2.7

ANSI Function Abbr.
Available
1 2 3 4
CFC arithmetic ■
External trip initiation ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Control ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Fault recording of analog and binary signals ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Monitoring ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Protection interface, serial ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
lines
■
tion
■
formers
■
V7.8)
■
protocol
■
■
Function point class: 0 150 250 300
(1) Basic
(3) DIFF Overhead Line with Transformer
(4) DIFF Overhead Line, breaker-and-a-half layout
2.7

Description
The SIPROTEC 7SD87 differential protection device is suitable for
the selective protection of overhead lines and cables with single-
ended and multi-ended infeed of all lengths with up to 6 ends.
Transformers and compensating coils in the protection range
are also possible. With its modular structure, flexibility and the
high-performance DIGSI 5 engineering tool, the SIPROTEC
7SD87 device offers future-oriented solutions for protection,
control, automation, monitoring, and Power Quality – Basic.
Main function Differential protection
Tripping 1-pole and 3-pole, minimum tripping time:
9 ms
Benefits
paper requirements
Functions
• Arc protection
protection
protection)
tion (SAD)
S2 redundancy)
chain topology.
cols
[SIP5_GD_SS_W3, 2, --_--]
2.7

access
Applications
• Line protection for all voltage levels with 1-pole and 3-pole
tripping
6 line ends
• Differential protection for overhead line, for applications with
2.7

2.7

[dw_7SD87_1-5LS, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.7/8 Application Example: Line Differential Protection for Overhead Line with Breaker-and-a-Half Layout
2.7

ANSI Function Abbr.
Available
1 2 3
V8.0)
PB client ■
module, from V8.0)
MU ■
MU ■
V< ■
tion
Q>/V< ■
I2>, ∠(V2, I2) ■
system
V2> ■
I1> ■
(from V7.8)
INs> ■
IN pulse ■
■
V> ■
2.7

ANSI Function Abbr.
Available
1 2 3
power systems
IN>, ∠(V, I) ■
■
∠(V0h,I0h) ■
SAD ■
87L Line differential protection for 2 line ends ΔI ■ ■ ■ ■
ΔI ■ ■ ■ ■
ΔI ■
ΔI ■
a-half layouts)
■ ■
■
■
CD-3FO)
■
■
■
2.7

ANSI Function Abbr.
Available
1 2 3
■
■
CFC arithmetic ■
lines
■
tion
■
formers
■
V7.8)
■
protocol
■
■
(1) Basic
(3) DIFF Overhead Line, breaker-and-a-half layout
2.7

Description
The combined SIPROTEC 7SL82 line differential and distance
protection has been designed particularly for the cost-optimized
and compact protection of lines in medium-voltage and high-
voltage systems. With its flexibility and the high-performance
DIGSI 5 engineering tool, SIPROTEC 7SL82 offers future-oriented
solutions for protection, control, automation, monitoring, and
Main function Differential protection and distance protection
for medium-voltage and high-voltage applica-
tions
small display.
Benefits
• Compact and low-cost line differential and distance protection
paper requirements
Functions
• Several distance-protection functions selectable as backup
protection or secondary main protection: Classic, reactance
method (RMD), impedance protection for transformers
with high accuracy
• Adaptive power-swing blocking
• Arc protection
protection)
chain topology.
cols
[SIP5_GD_W3, 2, --_--]
Figure 2.8/1 SIPROTEC 5 Device
Line Differential and Distance Protection – SIPROTEC 7SL82
2.8

access
Applications
6 line ends
• Basic differential and distance protection
• Differential and distance protection for overhead line in
grounded power systems
2.8

Application Example
[dw_7SL82_Ltg, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.8/2 Application Example: Combined Line Differential and Distance Protection for Overhead Line
2.8

ANSI Function Abbr.
Available
1 2
I)
■ ■ ■
V< ■
tion
Q>/V< ■
I2>, ∠(V2, I2) ■
system
V2> ■
50HS Instantaneous high-current tripping I>>> ■ ■ ■
I1> ■
(from V7.8)
INs> ■
IN pulse ■
V> ■
power systems
IN>, ∠(V, I) ■ ■
■
∠(V0h,I0h) ■
2.8

ANSI Function Abbr.
Available
1 2
79 Automatic reclosing, 3-pole AREC ■ ■
85/21 Teleprotection scheme for distance protection ■ ■ ■
85/27 Weak or no infeed: Echo and tripping ■ ■ ■
fault protection
■ ■ ■
86 Lockout ■
87L Line differential protection for 2 line ends ΔI ■ ■ ■
ΔI ■ ■ ■
ΔI ■
ΔI ■
FL Fault Locator, single-side FL-one ■ ■ ■
CD-3FO)
■
■
■
■
■
CFC arithmetic ■
Control ■ ■ ■
Protection interface, serial ■ ■ ■
2.8

ANSI Function Abbr.
Available
1 2
lines
■
tion
■
formers
■
V7.8)
■
protocol
■
■
Table 2.8/1 SIPROTEC 7SL82 – Functions, Application Templates
(1) Basic
(2) DIFF/DIS RMD Overhead Line, grounded power systems
2.8

Description
The combined SIPROTEC 7SL86 line differential and distance
protection has been designed specifically for the protection of
lines. With its modular structure, flexibility and the high-
performance DIGSI 5 engineering tool, the SIPROTEC 7SL86
device offers future-oriented solutions for protection, control,
automation, monitoring, and Power Quality – Basic.
Main function Differential and distance protection
Benefits
paper requirements
Functions
with high accuracy
• Arc protection
protection)
S2 redundancy)
chain topology.
cols
[SIP5_GD_SS_W3, 2, --_--]
2.8

access.
Applications
6 line ends
• Basic
• Differential protection and distance protection with reactance
method for overhead lines in grounded electrical power
systems
systems and applications with breaker-and-a-half layout
2.8

2.8

[dw_7SL86_1-5LS, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.8/5 Application Example: Combined Line Differential and Distance Protection for Overhead Line with Breaker-and-a-Half Layout
2.8

ANSI Function Abbr.
Available
1 2 3
V8.0)
PB client ■
module, from V8.0)
MU ■
MU ■
I)
■ ■ ■ ■
V< ■
tion
Q>/V< ■
I2>, ∠(V2, I2) ■
system
V2> ■
I1> ■
(from V7.8)
INs> ■
IN pulse ■
■
V> ■ ■ ■
2.8

ANSI Function Abbr.
Available
1 2 3
power systems
IN>, ∠(V, I) ■ ■ ■
■
∠(V0h,I0h) ■
79 Automatic reclosing, 3-pole AREC ■ ■ ■
fault protection
■ ■ ■ ■
86 Lockout ■
ΔI ■ ■ ■ ■
ΔI ■
ΔI ■
a-half layouts)
■ ■
CD-3FO)
■
■
■
2.8

ANSI Function Abbr.
Available
1 2 3
■
■
CFC arithmetic ■
lines
■
tion
■
formers
■
V7.8)
■
protocol
■
■
(1) Basic
(3) DIFF/DIS RMD Overhead Line, grounded power systems, 1.5 CB
2.8

Description
The combined SIPROTEC 7SL87 differential and distance protec-
tion has specifically been designed for the protection of lines.
With its modular structure, flexibility and the powerful DIGSI 5
engineering tool, the SIPROTEC 7SL87 device offers future-
Main function Differential and distance protection
Tripping 1-pole and 3-pole, minimum tripping time: 9
ms
Benefits
• Safety due to powerful protection functions
paper requirements
Functions
tions: 3I0>, V0>, transient ground fault, cos φ, sin φ,
harmonic, dir. detection of intermittent ground faults,
harmonic detection, and admittance measurement
with high accuracy
• Arc protection
• Directional reactive power undervoltage protection (QU
protection)
tion (SAD)
tions in the device
S2 redundancy)
chain topology.
cols
[SIP5_GD_SS_W3, 2, --_--]
2.8

access.
• Powerful fault recording (buffer for a max. record time of 80 s
at 8 kHz or 320 s at 2 kHz)
Applications
• Line protection for all voltage levels with 1-pole and 3-pole
tripping
6 line ends
• Basic differential and distance protection
systems
systems and applications with breaker-and-a-half layout
2.8

2.8

[dw_7SL87_1-5LS, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.8/8 Application Example: Combined Line Differential and Distance Protection for Overhead Line with Breaker-and-a-Half Layout
2.8

ANSI Function Abbr.
Available
1 2 3
V8.0)
PB client ■
module, from V8.0)
MU ■
MU ■
I)
■ ■ ■ ■
V< ■
tion
Q>/V< ■
I2>, ∠(V2, I2) ■
system
V2> ■
I1> ■
(from V7.8)
INs> ■
IN pulse ■
■
V> ■
2.8

ANSI Function Abbr.
Available
1 2 3
power systems
IN>, ∠(V, I) ■ ■ ■
■
∠(V0h,I0h) ■
SAD ■
fault protection
■ ■ ■ ■
86 Lockout ■
ΔI ■ ■ ■ ■
ΔI ■
ΔI ■
a-half layouts)
■ ■
CD-3FO)
■
■
2.8

ANSI Function Abbr.
Available
1 2 3
■
■
■
CFC arithmetic ■
lines
■
tion
■
formers
■
V7.8)
■
protocol
■
■
(1) Basic
(3) DIFF/DIS RMD Overhead Line, grounded power systems, 1.5 CB
2.8

Description
The circuit-breaker management device SIPROTEC 7VK87 has
specifically been designed for circuit-breaker management. With
its modular structure, flexibility and the high-performance
DIGSI 5 engineering tool, the SIPROTEC 7VK87 device offers
future-oriented solutions for protection, control, automation,
monitoring, and Power Quality – Basic.
Main function Automatic reclosing function, synchrocheck,
circuit-breaker failure protection
Tripping 1-pole and 3-pole or 3-pole
Benefits
• Safe and reliable automation and control of your systems
paper requirements
Functions
tion (SAD)
• Circuit-breaker failure protection for 1-pole and 3-pole trip-
ping
• Voltage controller for transformers
• Arc protection
• Voltage protection
S2 redundancy)
chain topology.
cols
access
Applications
• Automatic reclosing after 1/3-pole tripping
• Synchrocheck before reclosing
• Backup overcurrent and voltage protection
[SIP5_GD_SS_W3, 2, --_--]
Circuit-Breaker Management Device – SIPROTEC 7VK87
2.9

Application Template
For SIPROTEC 7VK87, the following application template exists:
• Basic Circuit-breaker management device
Application Example
[dw_7VK87_Ltg, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.9/2 Application Example: Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection
2.9

ANSI Function Abbr.
Available
1
Protection functions for 3-pole tripping 3-pole ■ ■
Expandable hardware quantity structure I/O ■ ■
V8.0)
PB client ■
module, from V8.0)
MU ■
MU ■
V< ■
I2>, ∠(V2, I2) ■
system
V2> ■
50/51 TD Overcurrent protection, phases I> ■
I1> ■
50N/ 51N TD Overcurrent protection, ground IN> ■
50BF Circuit-breaker failure protection 1-pole/3-pole CBFP ■ ■
■
V> ■
power systems
IN>, ∠(V, I) ■
79 Automatic reclosing, 1-pole/3-pole AREC ■ ■
SAD ■
86 Lockout ■
2.9

ANSI Function Abbr.
Available
1
■
■
CD-3FO)
■
Measured values, standard ■ ■
Switching statistics counter ■ ■
■
■
■
■
CFC (standard, control) ■ ■
CFC arithmetic ■
External trip initiation ■ ■
Control ■ ■
Circuit breaker ■ ■
Fault recording of analog and binary signals ■ ■
Monitoring ■ ■
lines
■
tion
■
formers
■
V7.8)
■
protocol
■
■
2.9

ANSI Function Abbr.
Available
1
Function point class: 0
Table 2.9/1 SIPROTEC 7VK87 – Functions, Application Templates
(1) Basic (AREC, Sync., Circuit-breaker failure protection)
2.9

Description
The SIPROTEC 7SJ86 overcurrent protection has specifically been
designed as backup or emergency protection for the line protec-
tion devices. With its modular structure, flexibility and the high-
performance DIGSI 5 engineering tool, the SIPROTEC 7SJ86
device offers future-oriented solutions for protection, control,
automation, monitoring, and Power Quality – Basic.
Main function Overcurrent protection (definite-time overcur-
rent protection/inverse-time overcurrent
protection)
Tripping 3-pole
Inputs and outputs 3 predefined standard variants with 4/4 current
transformers/voltage transformers, 11 to
23 binary inputs, 9 to 25 binary outputs
structure within the scope of the SIPROTEC 5
modular system.
Benefits
paper requirements
Functions
• Overcurrent protection as backup / emergency line protection
for all voltage levels with 3-pole tripping
• Arc protection
protection
protection)
S2 redundancy)
chain topology
cols
access
[SIP5_GD_SS_W3, 2, --_--]
Overcurrent Protection as Backup Protection for Line Protection – SIPROTEC 7SJ86
2.10

Applications
• Backup and emergency protection for line protection
2 ends, parallel lines and open-circuited or closed ring
• Used in switchgear with breaker-and-a-half layout configura-
tion
• Serial protection communication with SIPROTEC 5
and SIPROTEC 4 devices over different distances and physical
media, such as optical fiber, two-wire connections, and
communication networks
• SIPROTEC 7SJ86 Non-directional overcurrent protection
• SIPROTEC 7SJ86 Directional overcurrent protection
Application Example
Figure 2.10/2 shows an application example for directional
protection of an overhead line. The functional scope is based on
the application template Directional overcurrent protection.
The functions Instantaneous high-current tripping, Fault
locator, and Automatic reclosing from the DIGSI 5 library are
also used.
2.10

[dw_7SJ86_Ltg, 2, en_US]
Figure 2.10/2 Application Example: Directional Overcurrent Protection for Overhead Line
2.10

ANSI Function Abbr.
Available
1 2
Expandable hardware quantity structure I/O ■ ■ ■
V8.0)
PB client ■
module, from V8.0)
MU ■
MU ■
V< ■
tion
Q>/V< ■
I2>, ∠(V2, I2) ■
system
V2> ■
I1> ■
(from V7.8)
INs> ■
IN pulse ■
■
V> ■
67 Directional overcurrent protection, phases I>, ∠(V, I) ■ ■
power systems
IN>, ∠(V, I) ■ ■
2.10

ANSI Function Abbr.
Available
1 2
■
∠(V0h,I0h) ■
fault protection
■
86 Lockout ■ ■
CD-3FO)
■
■
■
■
■
CFC arithmetic ■
Control ■ ■ ■
Protection interface, serial ■ ■
lines
■
2.10

ANSI Function Abbr.
Available
1 2
tion
■
formers
■
V7.8)
■
protocol
■
■
2.10

[dw_7UT_anwendung, 4, en_US]
SIPROTEC 7UT82, 7UT85, 7UT86, 7UT87
SIPROTEC 5 transformer differential protection devices are multi-
functional devices whose main protection functions are based
on the differential protection principle. They protect different
types of transformer variants, such as two-winding, three-
winding, and multi-winding transformers with different
numbers of measuring points and, besides standard power
transformers, also auto transformers.
The devices can be used at all voltage levels. The large number
of protection and automatic functions allows the usage in all
sections of electric power supply. The devices contain all impor-
tant auxiliary functions that are necessary for safe network oper-
ation today. This includes control, measurement, and moni-
toring functions. The large number of communication interfaces
and communication protocols satisfies the requirements of
communication-based selective protection and of automated
operation.
SIPROTEC 5 transformer differential protection devices always to
be adapted flexibly to the requirements.
When ordering, you can select the devices from various
standard variants. Additional expansion modules allow you to
adapt the device to your specific applications (see Tables of the
Standard Variants).
2.11

Device
Number of Measuring Points
I-3ph I-1ph V-3ph V-1ph
7TU82 Two-winding transformer (2 sides and a maximum of 2 measuring points) 2 2 - -
7TU85 Two-winding transformer (2 sides and a maximum of 5 measuring points; expandable
to 3 sides)
5 3 3 2
7TU86 Three-winding transformer (3 sides and a maximum of 6 measuring points; expandable
to 4 sides)
6 4 4 3
7TU87 Multi-winding transformer (5 sides and a maximum of 9 measuring points) 9 5 5 3
Table 2.11/1 Essential Differentiating Characteristics
2.11

Description
The SIPROTEC 7UT82 transformer differential protection has
been designed specifically for the protection of two-winding
transformers. It is the main protection for the transformer and
contains many other protection and monitoring functions. The
additional protection functions can also be used as backup
protection for subsequent protected objects (such as short
cables and lines, reactance coil (shunt reactors)). The modular
expandability of the hardware supports you in this process. With
its modular structure, flexibility, and the high-performance
DIGSI 5 engineering tool, SIPROTEC 7UT82 offers future-
Main function 1 differential protection function (standard or
auto transformer) with additional stabilization;
up to 2 restricted ground-fault protection func-
tions
Usable measuring
points
2 x 3-phase current measuring points, 2 x
1-phase current measuring points
Inputs and outputs 1 predefined standard variant with 8 current
transformers, 7 binary inputs, 7 binary outputs
Hardware flexibility The 1/3 base module is available with the
IO103 module; it is not possible to add 1/6
expansion modules, available with large and
small display
Benefits
• Compact and low-cost transformer differential protection
paper requirements
Functions
• Transformer differential protection for two-winding trans-
formers with versatile, additional protection functions
• Transformer differential protection for phase-angle regulating
transformers of the single-core transformer type
• Universal usability of the permissible measuring points
• Applicable from average up to extra-high voltage
• Protection of standard power transformers, auto trans-
formers, short lines, cables, shunt reactor and motors
• Increased sensitivity with ground faults near the neutral point
through a separate restricted ground-fault protection
• Flexible adaptation to the transformer vector group
• Controlling closing and overexcitation processes
• Safe behavior in case of current-transformer saturation with
different degrees of saturation
• Adaptive adaptation of the operate curve to the transformer
tap position
• Arc protection
• Single line representation in the small or large display
• Up to 2 optional pluggable communication modules, usable
for different and redundant protocols (IEC 61850,
chain topology
cols
access
[ph_SIPROTEC 7UT82, 3, --_--]
Figure 2.11/3 SIPROTEC 7UT82 Transformer Differential Protection (1/3
Device = Standard Variant W1)
Transformer Differential Protection – SIPROTEC 7UT82
2.11

Applications
• Protection of special transformers (phase shifters, FACTS and
converter transformers, electric arc furnace transformers,
HVDC transformers)
• As backup protection for motor and generator differential
protection applications
• For the protection of short cables and lines
cations. These include basic configurations and default settings
that you can use straight away, or as a template for adjustments
depending on the application. The available measuring points
make varied applications possible. Before ordering a device,
please configure the application with DIGSI 5. The table Func-
tion overview shows the functional scope of the device. Use
the configurator to determine the necessary function points.
The following application templates are available for the
device 7UT82 in the DIGSI 5 function library:
• Two-winding transformer base (Diff. protection)
• Two-winding transformer with restricted ground-fault protec-
tion (Diff. protection, CBFP, REF)
• Motor (DIFF protection)
The following examples show the typical structure of an applica-
tion template, the measuring points used, the function groups
used, their internal circuiting, and the predefined functions.
Two-winding transformer basis
• Differential protection
• Overload protection, backup protection for the downstream
power system
Two-winding transformer with restricted ground-fault protec-
tion (REF) Figure 2.11/5
• Restricted ground-fault protection on the neutral side
power system
2.11

[dw_two-winding-temp_01, 2, en_US]
Figure 2.11/4 Application Example: Protection of a Two-Winding Transformer
2.11

Figure 2.11/5 Application Example: Protection of a Two-Winding Transformer with Restricted Ground-Fault Protection
2.11

ANSI Function Abbr.
Available
1 2 3
teristic curve
θ, I²t ■
49H Hotspot calculation θh, I²t ■
I1> ■
50N/ 51N TD Overcurrent protection, ground IN> ■ ■
(from V7.8)
INs> ■
74TC Trip-circuit supervision ■ ■ ■ ■
86 Lockout ■ ■ ■ ■
87T Transformer Differential Protection ΔI ■ ■ ■
87T Node Differential protection (nodal point protection for
auto transformer)
ΔI nodes ■
87T Differential protection for phase-angle regulating
transformers (single core)
ΔI ■
87N T Restricted ground-fault protection ΔIN ■ ■
87M Differential motor protection ΔI ■ ■
87G Generator differential protection ΔI ■
CD-3FO)
■
■
■
■
■
CFC arithmetic ■
2.11

ANSI Function Abbr.
Available
1 2 3
V7.8)
■
protocol
■
■
Table 2.11/2 SIPROTEC 7UT82 – Functions, Application Templates
(1) 2-Winding Transformer Base (DIFF protection)
(2) 2-Winding Transformer (DIFF protection, SVS, REF)
(3) Motor (DIFF protection)
Standard Variant for SIPROTEC 7UT82
W1 1/3, 7 BI, 7 BO, 8 I
7 binary inputs
Contains the following modules: Base module with PS101 and IO103
Table 2.11/3 Standard Variants for Transformer Differential Protection Devices
2.11

Description
The SIPROTEC 7UT85 transformer differential protection device
has been designed specifically for the protection of two-winding
transformers (2 sides). It is the main protection for the trans-
former and contains many other protection and monitoring
functions. The additional protection functions can also be used
as backup protection for subsequent protected objects (such as
short cables and lines, reactance coil (shunt reactors)).
With its modular structure, flexibility, and the high-performance
DIGSI 5 engineering tool, SIPROTEC 7UT85 offers future-
Main function 1 differential protection function (standard or
auto transformer) with additional stabilization;
up to 2 restricted ground-fault protection func-
tions
line protection devices when using the line
differential protection function in the 7UT85,
86, 87
Usable measuring
points
5 x 3-phase current measuring points, 3 x
1-phase current measuring points, 3 x 3-phase
voltage measuring points; expandable to 3
sides
transformers, 7 to 19 binary inputs, 7 to
23 binary outputs
modular system.
Benefits
paper requirements
Functions
With the Disconnection of measuring points function, you can
disconnect the I-3ph measuring point from a protection function
group. If the measuring point has been disconnected, you can
perform any work without influencing the work of the protec-
tion functions that have been assigned to the measuring point.
After disconnection of the measuring point, the differential
protection, for example, stops taking the measured values of
this measuring point into account for calculating the differential
current.
• Transformer differential protection for two-winding trans-
formers with versatile, additional protection functions;
expandable to 3 windings
transformers of the single-core type and special transformers
formers, short lines, cables, shunt reactor, and motors
• Typical properties of a transformer differential protection such
as flexible adaptation to the transformer vector group, control
of inrush and overexcitation processes, safe behavior in case
of current-transformer saturation with different degrees of
saturation
tap position
• Additional current and voltage inputs can be added for
standard protection functions, such as overcurrent, voltage,
frequency protection, etc.
• Arc protection
• Voltage-controller function ANSI 90V for two-winding trans-
formers, three-winding transformers, and grid coupling trans-
formers with parallel control (master/follower, circulating
reactive current minimization)
[SIP5_GD_SS_W3, 2, --_--]
Figure 2.11/6 SIPROTEC 7UT85 Transformer Differential Protection (1/2
Device = Standard Variant P1)
2.11

• Dynamic voltage control (DSR) for adaptation of the voltage
set point value using a characteristic curve that depends on
the power direction with a large infeed of renewable ener-
gies.
• Up to 4 pluggable communication modules, usable for
S2 redundancy)
cols
access
chain topology
• Detecting operational measured variables and protection-
function measured values to evaluate the systems, to support
commissioning, and to analyze faults
• Frequency tracked protection functions over a wide frequency
groups.
Applications
HVDC transformers)
• Voltage control for two-winding and three-winding trans-
formers with parallel control
• As additional line protection function such as distance and
device 7UT85 in the DIGSI 5 function library:
• Two-winding-transformer base (Diff. protection)
• Two-winding transformer with restricted ground-fault protec-
tion (Diff. protection, CBFP, REF)
• Two-winding transformer 1.5 CB (DIFF protection, CBFP, REF)
• Two-winding-transformer (Diff. protection, voltage controller)
• Motor (DIFF. protection, CBFP)
Two-winding transformer basis (Figure 2.11/7)
power system
Two-winding transformer with restricted ground-fault protec-
tion (REF) (Figure 2.11/8)
power system
Two-winding transformer in breaker-and-a-half layout (Figure
2.11/9)
power system
2.11

Figure 2.11/7 Application Example: Protection of a Two-Winding Transformer
2.11

Figure 2.11/8 Application Example: Protection of a Two-Winding Transformer with Restricted Ground-Fault Protection
2.11

Figure 2.11/9 Application Example: Protection of a Two-Winding Transformer in Breaker-and-a-Half Layout
2.11

ANSI Function Abbr.
Available
1 2 3 4 5
Expandable hardware quantity structure I/O ■
V8.0)
PB client ■
module, from V8.0)
MU ■
MU ■
I)
■
V< ■ ■
tion
Q>/V< ■
37 Power-plant disconnection protection -dP ■
46 Negative-sequence system overcurrent protection I2> ■ ■
system
V2> ■
system/positive-sequence system
V2/V1> ■
49 Thermal overload protection θ, I²t ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
teristic curve
θ, I²t ■
I1> ■
50N/ 51N TD Overcurrent protection, 1-phase IN> ■ ■
(from V7.8)
INs> ■
IN pulse ■
50BF Circuit-breaker failure protection, 3-pole CBFP ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
2.11

ANSI Function Abbr.
Available
1 2 3 4 5
■
V> ■ ■ ■
59 Overvoltage protection: "3-phase" or "positive-
V> ■
power systems
IN>, ∠(V, I) ■
■
∠(V0h,I0h) ■
68 Power-swing blocking ΔZ/Δt ■
74TC Trip-circuit supervision ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
81 Frequency protection: "f>" or "f<" or "df/dt" f<>; df/dt<> ■ ■
81 AF Abnormal frequency protection fBand ■
85/21 Teleprotection scheme for distance protection ■
85/27 Weak or no infeed: Echo and tripping ■
fault protection
■
86 Lockout ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
87T Transformer Differential Protection ΔI ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
87T Differential protection for special transformers ΔI ■
auto transformer)
ΔI nodes ■
ΔI ■
87N T Restricted ground-fault protection ΔIN ■ ■ ■
87L Line differential protection for 2 line ends
for 7UT8 (communication
with 7SD82, 85, 86, 7SL86, 87)
ΔI ■
ΔI ■
a-half layouts)
■
90 V Voltage controller for two-winding transformer ■ ■
■
2.11

ANSI Function Abbr.
Available
1 2 3 4 5
■
CD-3FO)
■
■
■
■
■
CFC arithmetic ■
Inrush-current detection ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
External trip initiation ■ ■
Control ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Transformer side 7UT85 ■
V7.8)
■
protocol
■
■
(3) 2-Winding Transformer 1.5 CB (DIFF protection, SVS, REF)
2.11

(4) 2-Winding Transformer (DIFF. Protection, Voltage Controller)
(5) Motor (DIFF protection, CBFP, voltage protection)
2.11

Standard Variants for SIPROTEC 7UT85
O1 1/3, 7 BI, 7 BO, 8 I
7 binary inputs
O2 1/2, 19 BI, 23 BO, 8 I
19 binary inputs,
2.11

Description
been designed specifically for the protection of three-winding
transformers (3 sides). It is the main protection for the trans-
former and contains many other protection and monitoring
short cables and lines, reactance coil (shunt reactors)). The
modular expandability of the hardware also supports you in this
process. The device supports all SIPROTEC 5 system characteris-
tics. With its modular structure, flexibility, and the high-perform-
ance DIGSI 5 engineering tool, SIPROTEC 7UT86 offers future-
Main function 1 differential protection function (standard)
with additional stabilization; up to 3 restricted
ground-fault protection functions
For auto transformer applications, 2 differen-
tial protection functions can be processed in an
auto transformer function group.
86, 87
Usable measuring
points
7 x 3-phase current measuring points, 7 x 1-
phase current measuring points, 7 x 3-phase
and 7 x 1-phase voltage measuring points;
expandable to 4 sides
transformers, 4 voltage transformers, 11 to
modular system.
Benefits
paper requirements
Functions
• Transformer differential protection for three-winding trans-
formers with versatile, additional protection functions;
expandable to 4 sides
transformers of the single-core type and special transformers
of inrush, and overexcitation processes, safe behavior in case
saturation
tap position
frequency, protection etc.
gies.
• Arc protection
[SIP5_GD_SS_W3, 2, --_--]
Figure 2.11/10 SIPROTEC 7UT86 Transformer Differential Protection
(1/2 Device = Standard Variant P1)
2.11

S2 redundancy)
cols
access
• Secure serial protection communication, also over great
distances and all available physical media (optical fiber, two-
wire connections, and communication networks)
dip, interruptions; TDD, THD, and harmonics
groups.
Applications
HVDC transformers)
Besides the application templates for SIPROTEC 7UT85, the
following application templates are also available:
• Three-winding transformer base (DIFF protection)
• Three-winding transformer 1.5 CB (DIFF. protection, CBFP,
REF)
• Three-winding transformer (DIFF. protection, CBFP, REF, DIS)
• Auto transformer (DIFF. protection, CBFP, REF)
• Auto transformer 1.5 CB (2 DIFF. protection, CBFP, voltage
protection, frequency protection)
Three-winding transformer basis
Auto transformer with stabilizing winding
• Differential protection for the complete transformer (auto
transformer winding + stabilizing winding)
• Restricted ground-fault protection (neutral point + maximum
side current)
power system
Three-winding transformer in breaker-and-a-half layout
• Ground-current protection on the neutral side as backup
protection for the electrical power system
• Frequency and voltage protection on the neutral side
Figure 2.11/11 shows the template for the protection of a three-
winding transformer in a breaker-and-a-half layout. You can
recognize the 3 required function groups for the transformer
side, the integration of the restricted ground-fault protection,
the internal circuiting, and selected functions. In addition, a
voltage transformer is available on the upper-voltage side. Here,
for example, voltage and frequency limits can be monitored.
The required protection settings are made as required by the
system.
2.11

[dw_Kat-three-wind, 2, en_US]
Figure 2.11/11 Application Example: Protection of a Three-Winding Transformer in Breaker-and-a-Half Layout
2.11

ANSI Function Abbr.
Available
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
V8.0)
PB client ■
module, from V8.0)
MU ■
MU ■
I)
■ ■
V< ■
tion
Q>/V< ■
system
V2> ■
V2/V1> ■
49 Thermal overload protection θ, I²t ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
teristic curve
θ, I²t ■
50/51 TD Overcurrent protection, phases I> ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
I1> ■
50N/ 51N TD Overcurrent protection, 1-phase IN> ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
(from V7.8)
INs> ■
IN pulse ■
50BF Circuit-breaker failure protection, 3-pole CBFP ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
2.11

ANSI Function Abbr.
Available
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
■
V> ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
V> ■
power systems
IN>, ∠(V, I) ■
■
∠(V0h,I0h) ■
74TC Trip-circuit supervision ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
fault protection
■
86 Lockout ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
87T Transformer Differential Protection ΔI ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
auto transformer)
ΔI nodes ■ ■
ΔI ■
87N T Restricted ground-fault protection ΔIN ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
87M Differential motor protection ΔI ■
with 7SD82, 85, 86, 7SL86, 87)
ΔI ■
ΔI ■
a-half layouts)
■
■
2.11

ANSI Function Abbr.
Available
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
■
CD-3FO)
■
Measured values, standard ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■
■
■
■
CFC (standard, control) ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
CFC arithmetic ■
Inrush-current detection ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Control ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Circuit breaker ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Fault recording of analog and binary signals ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Monitoring ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
V7.8)
■
protocol
■
■
Function point class: 0 50 150 30 30 0 30 30 175
(1) 3-winding transformer Base (DIFF protection)
(2) 3-winding transformer 1.5 CB (DIFF protection, SVS, REF)
(3) 3-winding transformer (DIFF protection, SVS, REF, DIS)
2.11

(4) Auto transformer (DIFF protection, SVS, REF)
(5) Auto transformer, 1.5 CB (2 DIFF protection, SVS, voltage protection, frequency protection)
2.11

P1 1/2, 11 BI, 18 BO, 12 I, 4 V
11 binary inputs
Contains the following modules: Base module with PS201 and IO203,
expansion module IO208
P2 2/3, 23 BI, 34 BO, 12 I, 4 V
23 binary inputs
2.11

Description
been designed specifically for the protection of multi-winding
transformers (up to 5 sides). Furthermore, it is to be used where
numerous measuring points (up to 11 3-phase current meas-
uring points) are required. Another application is simultaneous
protection of 2 parallel transformers (additional fast backup
protection). The SIPROTEC 7UT87 is the main protection for the
transformer and contains many other protection and monitoring
short cables and lines, reactance coil (shunt reactors)). With its
modular structure, flexibility, and the high-performance DIGSI 5
engineering tool, SIPROTEC 7UT87 offers future-oriented solu-
tions for protection, control, automation, monitoring, and
Main function Up to 3 differential protection functions with
additional stabilization (in different trans-
former function groups); up to 5 restricted
ground-fault protection functions.
For auto transformer applications, 2 differen-
tial protection functions can be processed in an
Auto transformer function group.
86, 87
Usable measuring
points
11 x 3-phase current measuring points, 11 x 1-
phase current measuring points, 11 x 3-phase
and 11 x 1-phase voltage measuring points
modular system.
Benefits
paper requirements
Functions
In SIPROTEC 7UT87, 2 transformer function groups can be used.
• Transformer differential protection for multi-winding trans-
formers with versatile, additional protection functions (multi-
winding transformers are typical in power-converter applica-
tions (such as HVDC))
transformers of the single-core and 2-core types, and special
transformers
• Transformer-protection applications with up to 11 3-phase
current measuring points
• Simultaneous differential protection for 3 parallel trans-
formers (such as 3 two-winding transformers)
of inrush and overexcitation processes, safe behavior in case
saturation
• Arc protection
tap position
[SIP5_GD_SS_LED_W3, 2, --_--]
Figure 2.11/12 SIPROTEC 7UT87 Transformer Differential Protection
(2/3 Device = Standard Variant Q1)
2.11

frequency, protection etc.
gies.
S2 redundancy)
cols
access
function measured values for the evaluation of the system, to
support commissioning, and to analyze faults
groups.
Applications
HVDC transformers)
Application templates are available in DIGSI 5 for the applica-
tions of the device 7UT87. The application templates contain
the basic configurations, required functions, and default
settings. All application templates, which were described for the
devices 7UT82, 7UT85, and 7UT86, can be implemented
in 7UT87.
• Auto transformer with stabilizing winding in a breaker-and-a-
half layout (Figure 2.11/13)
• Possible application of SIPROTEC 7UT87 in a power plant (up
to 7 3-phase current measuring points) (Figure 2.11/14)
• Protection of 2 parallel transformers with one
SIPROTEC 7UT87 (Figure 2.11/15)
• Protection of an inverter transformer (Figure 2.11/16)
2.11

[dw_autotrans, 2, en_US]
Figure 2.11/13 Application Example: Protection of an Auto Transformer with Stabilizing Winding in Breaker-and-a-Half Layout
the Figure 2.11/13 shows the template for the protection of an
auto transformer that is connected to a breaker-and-a-half
layout. The special feature of this application is that the current
on the neutral-point side is directly recorded per phase. A sepa-
rate nodal-point differential protection via the auto winding reli-
ably records ground faults and turn-to-turn faults. The classic
differential protection is assigned over the entire transformer
(auto and stabilizing winding). Both functions run in the Auto
transformer function group. This type of execution gives you a
redundant differential protection with supplementing respon-
sivity. A separate restricted ground-fault protection is not
required. In addition, a voltage transformer is available on the
upper-voltage side. Here, for example, voltage and frequency
limits can be monitored. The required protection settings are
made as required by the system.
2.11

Since the SIPROTEC 7UT87 is intended to be used for special
applications, you must create your own application template as
a function of the application. Save this template with the device.
To ease your work, you can use an available template and
modify it as required. The following examples may help you:
Example 1:
This example requires a large number of 3-phase current meas-
uring points for a complex application in the power-plant area.
Figure 2.11/14 shows a possible configuration.
[dw_7-messstellen, 2, en_US]
Figure 2.11/14 Possible Application of SIPROTEC 7UT87 in a Power Plant (up to Seven 3-Phase Current Measuring Points)
2.11

Example 2:
Another example (Figure 2.11/15) is a powerful functional
redundancy with parallel transformers. The differential protec-
tion function is doubled. 1 protection device is used for each
transformer. 2 differential protection functions run in each
protection device. The 2nd differential protection function is the
backup protection for the parallel transformer. For example,
start with an application template of the two-winding trans-
former and duplicate it. An alternative cost-optimized variant is
the use of one device to protect both transformers.
[dw_two-transformer, 2, en_US]
Figure 2.11/15 Protection of Two Parallel Transformers with One SIPROTEC 7UT87
2.11

Example 3:
The last example (Figure 2.11/16) shows the protection of an
inverter transformer. 4 sides and 6 measuring points are
required here.
[dw_umrichter-transf, 3, en_US]
Figure 2.11/16 Protection of an Inverter Transformer
2.11

ANSI Function Abbr.
Available
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
V8.0)
PB client ■
module, from V8.0)
MU ■
MU ■
I)
■ ■
V< ■
tion
Q>/V< ■
system
V2> ■
V2/V1> ■
49 Thermal overload protection θ, I²t ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
teristic curve
θ, I²t ■
50/51 TD Overcurrent protection, phases I> ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
I1> ■
50N/ 51N TD Overcurrent protection, 1-phase IN> ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
(from V7.8)
INs> ■
IN pulse ■
50BF Circuit-breaker failure protection, 3-pole CBFP ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
2.11

ANSI Function Abbr.
Available
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
■
V> ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
V> ■
power systems
IN>, ∠(V, I) ■
■
∠(V0h,I0h) ■
74TC Trip-circuit supervision ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
fault protection
■
86 Lockout ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
87T Transformer Differential Protection ΔI ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
auto transformer)
ΔI nodes ■ ■
ΔI ■
transformers (two core)
ΔI ■
87N T Restricted ground-fault protection ΔIN ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
with 7SD82, 85, 86, 7SL86, 87)
ΔI ■
ΔI ■
a-half layouts)
■
2.11

ANSI Function Abbr.
Available
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
■
■
CD-3FO)
■
Measured values, standard ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■
■
■
■
CFC (standard, control) ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
CFC arithmetic ■
Inrush-current detection ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Control ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Circuit breaker ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Fault recording of analog and binary signals ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Monitoring ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
V7.8)
■
protocol
■
■
Function point class: 0 30 30 175 0 50 150 30 30
2.11

(5) 3-winding transformer Base (DIFF protection)
(6) 3-winding transformer 1.5 CB (DIFF protection, SVS, REF)
(7) 3-winding transformer (DIFF protection, SVS, REF, DIS)
(8) Auto transformer (DIFF protection, SVS, REF)
(9) Auto transformer, 1.5 CB (2 DIFF protection, SVS, voltage protection, frequency protection)
2.11

Q1 2/3, 15 BI, 22 BO, 20 I, 4 V
15 binary inputs,
Expansion modules IO208 and IO203.
Q2 5/6, 27 BI, 38 BO, 20 I, 4 V
27 binary inputs,
Expansion modules IO208, IO203, and IO205.
2.11

[dw_7SK_anwendung, 4, en_US]
SIPROTEC 7SK82, 7SK85
SIPROTEC 5 motor protection devices have been designed
specifically for the protection of asynchronous motors of small
and medium power.
selective protection, as well as automated operation.
The difference between the 2 device models
SIPROTEC 7SK82 and SIPROTEC 7SK85 is in the configurability of
their hardware quantity structure.
7SK82 Different hardware quantity structures for binary inputs and outputs are available in the 1/3 base module
7SK85 Flexible configuration of the hardware quantity structure for analog inputs, binary inputs and outputs, measuring transducers, and
communications due to expandability with 1/6 expansion modules
Motor Protection
2.12

Description
The SIPROTEC 7SK82 motor protection has been designed
specifically for a cost-optimized and compact utilization of small-
sized to medium-sized motors. With its flexibility and the high-
performance DIGSI 5 engineering tool, SIPROTEC 7SK82 offers
For motors in explosive environments, the SIPROTEC 7SK82 is
also available with EN 60079-14 or VDE (Verband der Elektro-
technik, Elektronik und Informationstechnik) 0165, Part 1
(ATEX) certification.
Main function Motor protection for small-sized to medium-
sized motors (100 KW to 2 MW)
Inputs and outputs 4 current transformers, 4 voltage transformers
(optional), 11 or 23 binary inputs, 9 or
16 binary outputs, 12 RTD inputs (optional)
small display.
Benefits
• Compact and low-cost motor protection
paper requirements
Functions
• Motor protection functions: Starting time supervision, thermal
overload protection for stator and rotor, restart inhibit, unbal-
anced-load protection, load-jam protection
• Stator and storage-temperature monitoring via temperature
sensors with optional temperature inputs or with external RTD
unit.
• Sensitive ground-fault protection (non-directional, directional)
to detect stator ground faults
• Directional and non-directional overcurrent protection (short-
circuit protection) with additional functions
tions: 3I0>, V0>, transient ground fault, cos φ, sinφ, dir.
• Arc protection
protection
cols
• Certification for use in environments at risk of explosion
(EN 60079-14 or VDE 0165, Part 1, ATEX)
access.
[SIP5_GD_W3, 2, --_--]
Figure 2.12/2 SIPROTEC 7SK82 Motor Protection
Motor Protection – SIPROTEC 7SK82
2.12

function measured values to evaluate of the systems, to
• Integrated RTD inputs (optional) for thermal motor moni-
toring
Applications
• Protection against thermal overload of the stator from over-
current, cooling problems, or pollution
• Protection against thermal overload of the rotor during
startup due to frequent startups, excessively long startups, or
blocked rotor
• Monitoring for voltage unbalance or phase outage
• Monitoring the thermal state and the storage temperatures
with temperature measurement
• Detection of idling drives of pumps and compressors, for
example
• Detection of ground faults in the motor
• Protection against motor short circuits
• Protection against instability due to undervoltage
• Current measurement
– Thermal overload protection for stator and rotor
– Starting time supervision
– Restart inhibit
– Unbalanced-load protection (thermal)
– Temperature supervision
– Load-jam protection
– Overcurrent protection (non-directional) for phases and
ground
– Transformer inrush-current detection
• Current and voltage measurement
– Restart inhibit
ground
– Directional sensitive ground-fault detection for isolated or
grounded power systems and for detection of stator ground
faults
– Overvoltage protection with zero-sequence system V0
– Undervoltage protection with positive-sequence system V1
– Measuring-voltage failure detection
Application Example
SIPROTEC 7SK82 – Protection of a medium-power Motor
The motor protection functions and the overcurrent protection
of the SIPROTEC 7SK82 protect an asynchronous motor of
medium power (up to approximately 2 MW) against thermal and
mechanical overload and short circuits. The directional sensitive
ground-fault detection and the overvoltage protection with
zero-sequence voltage V0 detect stator ground faults in the
motor. Integrated temperature measuring inputs allow the
thermal state of the motor and the storage temperatures to be
captured and monitored. The temperature sensors (for example
PT100) are connected directly to the integrated RTD measuring
inputs.
Figure 2.12/3 shows the functional scope and the basic configu-
ration of a SIPROTEC 7SK82 for this application. It is based on
the application template "Current and voltage measurement". In
addition, the device must be equipped with a plug-in module for
communication with the RTD unit.
2.12

[dw_motor-protection-7SK82, 2, en_US]
Figure 2.12/3 Protection of a Medium-Power Motor
2.12

ANSI Function Abbr.
Available
1 2
14 Locked rotor I> + n< ■ ■ ■
V< ■ ■
tion
Q>/V< ■
38 Temperature supervision θ> ■ ■ ■
46 Unbalanced-load protection (thermal) I2² t> ■ ■ ■
I2>, ∠(V2, I2) ■
system
V2> ■
V2>; V2/V1> ■
48 Starting time monitoring for motors I²start ■ ■ ■
teristic curve
θ, I²t ■
49R Thermal overload protection, rotor (motor) θR ■ ■ ■
I1> ■
(from V7.8)
INs> ■
IN pulse ■
50L Load-jam protection I>L ■ ■ ■
V> ■
66 Restart inhibit for motors I²t ■ ■ ■
2.12

ANSI Function Abbr.
Available
1 2
■ ■
∠(V0h,I0h) ■
■
■
CD-3FO)
■
■
■
■
■
CFC arithmetic ■
Control ■ ■ ■
2.12

ANSI Function Abbr.
Available
1 2
V7.8)
■
protocol
■
■
Table 2.12/1 SIPROTEC 7SK82 – Functions, Application Templates
(1) Current measurement
(2) Current and voltage measurement
2.12

Standard Variants for SIPROTEC 7SK82
T1 1/3, 11 BI, 9 BO, 4 I
Housing width 1/3 x 19",
11 binary inputs
T2 1/3, 23 BI, 16 BO, 4 I
23 binary inputs
IO110
T3 1/3, 11 BI, 9 BO, 2 I, 12 RTDs
11 binary inputs
12 temperature inputs
IO111
T4 1/3, 11 BI, 9 BO, 4 I, 4 V
11 binary inputs
T5 1/3, 23 BI, 16 BO, 4 I, 4 V
23 binary inputs
IO110
T6 1/3, 11 BI, 9 BO, 4 I, 4 V, 12 RTDs
11 binary inputs
12 temperature inputs
IO111
Table 2.12/2 Standard Variants for SIPROTEC 7SK82 Motor Protection Devices
www.siemens.com/siprotec
2.12

Description
The SIPROTEC 7SK85 motor protection device is designed for the
protection of motors of all sizes. With its modular structure, flex-
ibility and the high-performance DIGSI 5 engineering tool,
SIPROTEC 7SK85 offers future-oriented solutions for protection,
control, automation, monitoring, and Power Quality – Basic.
For motors in explosive environments, the SIPROTEC 7SK85 is
also available with EN 60079-14 or VDE 0165, Part 1, ATEX
(Verband der Elektrotechnik, Elektronik und Information-
stechnik) certification.
Main function Motor protection for motors of all sizes
SIPROTEC 5 system. 1/6 expansion modules
Benefits
paper requirements
Functions
• Motor protection functions: Starting time supervision, thermal
overload protection for stator and rotor, restart inhibit, unbal-
anced-load protection, load-jam protection
• Stator and storage-temperature monitoring via temperature
sensors with external RTD unit.
• Differential motor protection as fast short-circuit protection
for motors of high power
• Sensitive ground-fault protection (non-directional, directional)
to detect stator ground faults
• Directional and non-directional overcurrent protection (short-
circuit protection) with additional functions
tions: 3I0>, V0>, transient ground fault, cos φ, sin φ,
harmonic, dir. detection of intermittent ground faults and
admittance
• Arc protection
protection
dip, open circuit; TDD, THD, and harmonics
S2 redundancy)
cols
• Certification for use in environments at risk of explosion (EN
60079-14 or VDE 0165, Part 1, ATEX)
access.
[SIP5_GD_SS_W3, 2, --_--]
2.12

• Synchrophasor measured values with the IEEE C37.118
protocol integrated (PMU)
Applications
• Protection against thermal overload of the stator from over-
current, cooling problems, or pollution
• Protection against thermal overload of the rotor during
startup due to: Frequent startups, excessively long startups, or
blocked rotor
• Monitoring for voltage unbalance or phase outage
• Monitoring the thermal state and the storage temperatures
with temperature measurement
• Detection of idling drives of pumps and compressors, for
example
• Detection of ground faults in the motor
• Protection against motor short circuits
• Protection against instability due to undervoltage
• Current measurement
– Restart inhibit
ground
• Current and voltage measurement
– Restart inhibit
ground
faults
• Motor differential protection, current and voltage measure-
ment
– Motor differential protection
– Restart inhibit
ground
faults
Application Example
SIPROTEC 7SK85 – Protection of a medium-power motor
The motor protection functions and the overcurrent protection
of the SIPROTEC 7SK85 protect an asynchronous motor of
medium power (up to approximately 2 MW) against thermal and
mechanical overload and short circuits. The directional sensitive
ground-fault detection and the overvoltage protection with
zero-sequence voltage V0 detect stator ground faults in the
motor. An external RTD unit captures and monitors the thermal
state of the motor and the storage temperatures. The RTD unit is
connected to the device via Ethernet or serial communication.
Figure 2.12/5 shows the functional scope and the basic configu-
ration of a SIPROTEC 7SK85 for this application. It is based on
the application template "Current and voltage measurement". In
addition, the device must be equipped with a plug-in module for
communication with the RTD unit.
2.12

[Motorschutz-7SK85, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.12/5 Protection of a Medium-Power Motor
2.12

ANSI Function Abbr.
Available
1 2 3
V8.0)
PB client ■
module, from V8.0)
MU ■
MU ■
14 Locked rotor I> + n< ■ ■ ■ ■
V< ■ ■ ■
tion
Q>/V< ■
38 Temperature supervision θ> ■ ■ ■ ■
46 Unbalanced-load protection (thermal) I2² t> ■ ■ ■ ■
I2>, ∠(V2, I2) ■
system
V2> ■
V2>; V2/V1> ■
48 Starting time monitoring for motors I²start ■ ■ ■ ■
teristic curve
θ, I²t ■
49R Thermal overload protection, rotor (motor) θR ■ ■ ■ ■
I1> ■
(from V7.8)
INs> ■
IN pulse ■
2.12

ANSI Function Abbr.
Available
1 2 3
■
50L Load-jam protection I>L ■ ■ ■ ■
V> ■
66 Restart inhibit for motors I²t ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■
∠(V0h,I0h) ■
86 Lockout ■ ■ ■ ■
■
■
CD-3FO)
■
■
■
■
2.12

ANSI Function Abbr.
Available
1 2 3
■
CFC arithmetic ■
V7.8)
■
protocol
■
■
Table 2.12/3 SIPROTEC 7SK85 – Functions, Application Templates
(1) Current measurement
(2) Current and voltage measurement
(3) Differential protection with current and voltage measurement
2.12

Standard Variants for SIPROTEC 7SK85
R1 1/3, 11 BI, 9 BO, 4 I, 4 V
11 binary inputs,
R2 1/2, 17 BI, 16 BO, 4 I, 4 V
17 binary inputs,
Contains the following modules: base module with PS201 and IO202,
R3 1/2, 27 BI, 17 BO, 4 I, 4 V
27 binary inputs,
Contains the following modules: base module with PS201 and IO202,
Table 2.12/4 Standard Variants for SIPROTEC 7SK85 Motor Protection Devices
2.12

[dw_7UM8_anwendung, 3, en_US]
SIPROTEC 7UM85
The main protection functions of the SIPROTEC 5 7UM85 gener-
ator protection devices are based on typical generator protec-
tion functions (stator and rotor ground-fault protection, reverse-
power protection, unbalanced-load protection, differential
protection, underexcitation protection, and many others). They
protect generators and power units in bus and unit connection.
The protection functions are implemented in such a way that
they satisfy the requirements of different power-plant versions.
These can be conventional run-of-river power plants or pumped-
storage hydropower plants with phase-rotation reversal in pump
operation. Besides standard unit-type power plants (different
raw-material sources), complete protection is also possible for
nuclear power plants and for power plants that are started with
a starting-frequency converter (for example, gas turbine power
plants). The scalability of the devices regarding to hardware
design and functionality opens a wide field of applications. By
selecting hardware and functionality as required, you can thus
cover the entire power range of the machines (starting at
approximately 1 MVA) at low costs. The devices are also
perfectly suited for industrial applications. The large number of
protection and automatic functions allows the device to be used
in all fields of power generation.
necessary for safe network operation today. This includes
control, measurement, and monitoring functions. The large
number of communication interfaces and communication proto-
cols satisfies the requirements of communication-based selec-
tive protection and of automated operation.
The SIPROTEC 7UM85 devices are characterized by their special-
ized hardware scalability and functionality. Using the configu-
rator, you can create the hardware configuration (number of V, I
measuring points, binary inputs and outputs, communication
interfaces, etc.) as required by the application. Using the
DIGSI 5 engineering tool, you can download the required func-
tions from the library into the 7UM85 device. The usable func-
tional scope is limited by the ordered function points. You can
order additional points without any problems.
When ordering, you can select the devices from various
standard variants. Additional expansion modules allow the
device to be adapted to your specific applications (see Table
2.13/2).
Significant Features
7UM85 Flexible configuration of the hardware quantity structure for
analog inputs, binary inputs and outputs, measuring trans-
ducers, and communication due to expandability
with 1/6 expansion modules
2.13

Description
The generator protection device SIPROTEC 7UM85 has been
designed specifically for the protection of generators and power
units. It contains all necessary main protection functions and a
large number of other protection and monitoring functions.
With its modular structure, flexibility, and the high-performance
DIGSI 5 engineering tool, SIPROTEC 7UM85 offers future-
For motors in explosive environments, the SIPROTEC 7UM85 is
also available with EN 60079-14 or VDE 0165, Part 1, ATEX
(Verband der Elektrotechnik, Elektronik und Information-
stechnik) certification.
Main function Typical generator protection functions
Inputs and outputs 5 predefined standard variants with up to
16 current transformers and 8 voltage trans-
formers, 7 to 15 binary inputs, 9 to 20 binary
outputs
4 fast measuring transducer inputs (10 V or
20 mA)
Housing width 1/3 × 19 inches to 2 × 19 inches
Benefits
paper requirements
tions by standard coating of the populated printed circuit
boards
Functions
• Short-circuit protection (overcurrent protection, impedance
protection, differential protection)
• Stator ground-fault protection (90 % non-directional or direc-
tional, 100 % with 3rd harmonic, real 100 % protection with
20-Hz voltage interference)
• Rotor ground-fault protection with different measuring
methods (ground-current or ground-resistance monitoring)
• High-precision reverse-power protection and universal power
protection
• Underexcitation and overexcitation protection
• Unbalanced-load protection
• Overload protection and temperature supervision via external
RTD unit (with PT 100, for example)
• Out-of-step protection
• Rotor and stator overload protection with cold-gas considera-
tion (coolant temperature)
• Power-plant disconnection protection
• Shaft-current protection (in particular with hydropower appli-
cations)
• Universal overvoltage and undervoltage protection with
different measuring methods
• Overfrequency and underfrequency protection, frequency
change protection, and supervision of duration time in
frequency bands as turbine protection (protection against
abnormal frequencies)
• Protection functions for network decoupling (voltage and
frequency protection, directional reactive-power undervoltage
protection (QU protection), and vector-jump protection)
• Inadvertent energization protection to detect incorrect activa-
tion of the circuit breaker
• Circuit-breaker failure protection (CBFP)
• Single-channel parallel connection function (synchronization)
with adjustment commands for speed (frequency) and
voltage
• Optional, pluggable communication modules, usable for
S2 redundancy)
[SIP5_GD_SS_LED_W3, 2, --_--]
Figure 2.13/2 SIPROTEC 7UM85 Generator Protection (Width: 1/3 x 19”
to 2 x 19”)
Generator Protection – SIPROTEC 7UM85
2.13

cols
• Certification for use in environments at risk of explosion
(EN 60079-14 or VDE 0165, Part 1, ATEX)
access.
function measured values to evaluate the system, to support
groups.
Applications
• Protection of generators in busbar connection of different
power, with directional stator ground-fault protection.
• Protection of generators in unit connection of different power
(using the 100 % stator ground fault (20 Hz) with larger
generators)
• Protection of power units with one device per protection
group. In the generator transformer variant, the 7UM85
implements both generator and transformer protection.
• In more complex power units (unit connection with generator
circuit breaker and several auxiliary transformers), additional
SIPROTEC 5 devices are used, for example, 7UT8x, 7SJ82, or
7SJ85 and 7SA, SD, SL86, at the upper-voltage side of the
generator transformer.
• Using motor and generator protection functions (for example,
underexcitation protection) to protect synchronous motors
• Generator basis
– Basic protection functions (overcurrent protection, stator
ground-fault protection, reverse-power protection, overex-
citation protection, voltage protection, frequency protec-
tion, and unbalanced-load protection),
– Rotor ground-fault protection (ground-current measure-
ment)
• Generator bus connection basis
– Basic protection functions
– Generator differential protection
– Underexcitation protection
• Generator unit connection basis
– Transformer differential protection as overall protection
(transformer + generator)
– 100 % stator ground-fault protection with 3rd harmonic
• Enhanced generator unit connection
– Transformer differential protection
– Generator differential protection
– Out-of-step protection
– 100 % stator ground-fault protection with 20-Hz coupling
– Synchronization function (without adjusting commands)
– Circuit-breaker failure protection
2.13

SIPROTEC 7UM85 – Generator Protection in Bus Connection
(Figure 2.13/3) is based on the application template Generator
busbar connection, basis and shows the single-line diagram,
the connection to the 7UM85, and the logic structure in the
device. The ground current for the stator ground-fault protec-
tion is generated via a neutral-point transformer. Sensitive
ground-fault detection must be implemented via a different
connection to the ground-current transformer (same transfor-
mation ratio). The rotor ground-fault protection is implemented
as a power-frequency coupling and is based on the rotor
ground-current measurement. 7XR61 + 3PP1336 must be
provided as accessories. A base module and an expansion
module (such as standard variant AA2 + IO201) are required as
minimum device hardware.
The figure also shows the internal functional structure of the
device. The measuring points are connected with the function
groups. The function groups are also interconnected. Functions
are routed to function groups and interconnected automatically.
The FG Generator stator is the main function group. The differ-
ential protection requires additional function groups. The rotor
ground-fault protection runs in the FG VI 1ph. The circuit-
breaker function group controls the entire interaction with the
circuit breaker. Additional functions, such as activating quick
stop and actuating de-excitation, are activated via a direct
routing of the tripping signal to the relay contacts. Alternatively,
you may use additional circuit breaker FGs. All connections are
preset in the application template. 100 function points are
required for the application template. To use additional func-
tions, the number of function points may need to be increased.
2.13

[dw_appl-02_legend, 2, en_US]
Figure 2.13/3 Generator Protection in a Bus Connection (Application Template: Generator Bus Connection Basis)
2.13

SIPROTEC 7UM85 – Generator Protection in Unit Connection
[dw_appl-03_legend, 2, en_US]
Figure 2.13/4 Generator Protection in Unit Connection (Application Template: Generator Unit Connection Basis)
Figure 2.13/4 shows the typical implementation of a plant for
small to medium-sized generators (1 MVA to 50 MVA, for
example) in unit connection. The generator feeds power into
the power system via the generator step-up transformer. The
figure shows the single-line diagram, the connection to
the 7UM85, and the logic structure in the device. The protection
range of the 90 % stator ground-fault protection is guaranteed
by the neutral-point transformer with load resistor. The rotor
ground-fault protection is implemented as a power-frequency
coupling and is based on the rotor ground current measure-
2.13

ment. A 7XR61 + 3PP1336 must be provided as accessory. A
base module and an expansion module (such as standard
variant AA2 + IO201) are required as minimum device hardware.
The example also shows the internal functional structure of the
device. It is almost identical to the busbar version. The differen-
tial protection was changed. It is to protect the generator and
the transformer. The transformer differential protection must
therefore be used with the associated function groups.
All connections are preset in the application template. 125 func-
tion points are required for the application template. To use
additional functions, the number of function points may need to
be increased.
SIPROTEC 7UM85 – Protection of a Power Unit
Figure 2.13/5 shows a more complex version of a plant for
medium-sized to large generators (for example, 20
MVA to 200 MVA) in unit connection. The auxiliary system is
supplied via a separate infeed. This example is intended to
demonstrate the performance of the system. An extension for
plants with an auxiliary transformer is possible. If necessary, an
additional transformer differential protection can be provided.
The maximum number of differential protection functions is
limited to 3. The example also shows the single-line diagram,
the connection to the 7UM85, and the logic structure in the
device.
The protection range of the 90 % stator ground-fault protection
is guaranteed by the neutral-point transformer with load
resistor. The 100 % stator ground fault with 20-Hz infeed is
provided, in order to warrant 100 % protection range. This
requires the accessories 7XT33 and 7XT34 and a miniature
current transformer. The rotor ground-fault protection is imple-
mented as a power-frequency coupling and is based on a resis-
tance measurement. A 7XR61 + 3PP1336 must be provided as
accessory. 1 base module and 2 expansion modules (such as
standard variant AA3 + an additional IO201) are required as
minimum device hardware. Figure 2.13/5 also shows the
internal functional structure of the device. To locate the faulty
piece of equipment more rapidly, stand-alone differential
protection is provided for the generator and for the transformer.
This affects the function-group size and circuiting. In addition,
the circuit-breaker failure protection and the synchronization
function are provided in the FG Circuit breaker. A 1-channel
parallel connection function (synchronization) with adjustment
commands for speed (frequency) and voltage is available. The
synchronization function can be used to release manual
synchronization.
All connections are preset in the application template. 350 func-
tion points are required for the application template. To use
additional functions, the number of function points may need to
be increased.
2.13

[dw_appl_04_legend, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.13/5 Protection of a Power Unit (Application Template: Enhanced Generator Unit Connection)
2.13

ANSI Function Abbr.
Available
1 2 3 4 5
V8.0)
PB client ■
module, from V8.0)
MU ■
21T Impedance protection for transformers Z< ■ ■ ■
24 Overexcitation protection V/f ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
25 Synchronization function with adjusting
commands
Sync ■
V< ■ ■ ■
27 Undervoltage protection: "3-phase" or "universal
Vx"
V< ■
tion
Q>/V< ■
32R Reverse-power protection - P< ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
40 Underexcitation protection 1/xd ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
46 Unbalanced-load protection (thermal) I2² t> ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
I2>, ∠(V2, I2) ■
system
V2> ■
V2/V1> ■
48 Starting time monitoring for motors I²start ■
teristic curve
θ, I²t ■
49R Thermal overload protection, rotor (motor) θR ■
49F Field-winding overload protection IL² t ■
49S CG Stator overload protection with cold gas consider-
ation
θ, I²t ■
49R CG Field-winding overload protection with cold gas
consideration
θ, IL²t ■
I1> ■
2.13

ANSI Function Abbr.
Available
1 2 3 4 5
(from V7.8)
INs> ■
50 Ns/ 51Ns Sensitive ground-current protection for power
systems with resonant or isolated neutral
INs> ■
50GN Shaft-current protection INs> ■
50/27 Inadvertent energization protection (to halted
generator)
I>, V< dropout ■
50N
DC, 27.59F DC
Direct current/direct-voltage protection IDC<>, VDC <> ■ ■
50 Startup overcurrent protection I-Anf> ■
50L Load-jam protection I>L ■
51V Voltage-controlled overcurrent protection t=f(I, V) ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
V> ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
59N, 67Ns Stator ground-fault protection (non-directional,
directional)
V0>, ∠(V0, I0) ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
27TH, 59TH, 59
THD
Stator ground-fault protection with 3rd harmonic V03.H<,
V03.H>;
ΔV03.H
■ ■
59N IT Turn-to-turn Fault Protection V0> ■
64S 100 % stator ground-fault protection (20 Hz) RSE< ■ ■ ■
64F, frated Rotor ground-fault protection (IRE>, fn) IRE> ■ ■ ■ ■
64F, frated Rotor ground-fault protection (RE<, fn) IRE< ■ ■
64F (1-3Hz) Rotor ground-fault protection (1 - 3 Hz) IRE< ■ ■
66 Restart inhibit for motors I²t ■
power systems
IN>, ∠(V, I) ■
■
∠(V0h,I0h) ■
74TC Trip-circuit supervision ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
78 Out-of-step protection ΔZ/Δt ■ ■ ■
81 Frequency protection: "f>" or "f<" or "df/dt" f<>; df/dt<> ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
87B Busbar differential protection for the 7UM85
ΔI ■
2.13

ANSI Function Abbr.
Available
1 2 3 4 5
Bay ■
86 Lockout ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
87T Transformer Differential Protection ΔI ■ ■ ■
87G Generator differential protection ΔI ■ ■ ■ ■
CD-3FO)
■
Switching statistics counter ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■
■
■
■
CFC arithmetic ■
Control ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
V7.8)
■
protocol
■
■
Transformer side 7UM85 ■
Table 2.13/1 SIPROTEC 7UM85 – Functions, Application Templates
(1) Generator basis
(2) Generator bus connection
(3) Generator unit connection basis
(4) Enhanced generator unit connection
(5) Large generator
2.13

Standard Variants for SIPROTEC 7UM85
AA1 1/3, 11 BI, 9 BO, 4 V, 4 I,
11 binary inputs
1 sensitive ground-current input
AA2 1/3, 7 BI, 14 BO, 4 V, 4 I,
7 binary inputs
AA3 1/2, 15 BI, 20 BO, 8 V, 8 I,
15 binary inputs
20 binary outputs (1 life contact, 7 standard, 12 fast),
2 sensitive ground-current inputs
AA4 1/2, 11 BI, 16 BO, 7 V, 8 I, 4 MU
11 binary inputs
4 fast measuring-transducer inputs (alternatively 20 mA, 10 V)
AA5 2/3, 15 BI, 20 BO, 7 V, 16 I, 4 MU
15 binary inputs
4 fast measuring-transducer inputs (alternatively 20 mA, 10 V)
Expansion modules IO210 and IO203
Table 2.13/2 Standard Variants for SIPROTEC 7UM85
2.13

[dw_7VE85_anwendung, 2, en_US]
SIPROTEC 7VE85
In their main functions, the SIPROTEC 5 paralleling
devices 7VE85 are based on the 1.5-channel and 2-channel
synchronization paralleling.
selective protection and of automated operation.
SIPROTEC 7VE85 device are characterized by their specialized
hardware scalability and functionality. Using the configurator,
you can create the hardware configuration (number of V, I
measuring points, binary inputs and outputs, communication
interfaces, etc.) as required by the application. Using the
DIGSI 5 engineering tool, you can download the required func-
tions from the library into the 7VE85 device. The usable func-
tional scope is limited by the ordered function points. You may
order additional points without any problems.
When ordering, you can select the devices from 2 different
standard variants. Additional expansion modules allow the
device to be adapted to your specific application (see Standard
VariantsTable 2.14/2).
The SIPROTEC 7VE85 differs due to the selection of the signifi-
cant functions. The significant function L can be selected for up
to 4 synchronizing points and the significant function M can be
selected for up to 8 synchronizing points.
Significant Features
7VE85 Flexible configuration of the hardware quantity structure for
analog inputs, binary inputs and outputs, measuring trans-
ducers, and communication due to expandability
with 1/6 expansion modules
Paralleling Device
2.14

Description
The paralleling device SIPROTEC 7VE85 is specifically designed
for the synchronization of generators (power units) with the
power grid or synchronization of 2 electricity-supply systems.
The 1.5-channel and 2-channel paralleling function is the main
function of the SIPROTEC 7VE85. To achieve a high level of
security and reliability, the software works with various moni-
toring functions. In addition, the most important hardware
components are duplicated. 2 different measuring algorithms
are used in accordance with the multi-channel redundancy. This
avoids overfunction due to systematic errors. At the same time,
the different methods of measurement are applied and
processed independently of each other with different memory
areas. The high level of reliability and flexible options to adapt
to the equipment requirements allow a wide variety of applica-
tions.
Main function 1.5-channel and 2-channel paralleling function
Housing width 1/3 × 19 inches to 2 × 19 inches
The SIPROTEC 7VE85 recognizes the operating conditions auto-
matically and reacts in accordance with the settings. In the
Switching synchronous electrical power systems operating
mode, the frequency difference is measured with a high level of
accuracy. If the frequency difference is almost 0 for a long time,
this is referred to as a synchronous electrical power system for
which a wider switching angle can be permitted.
If asynchronous conditions occur, such as when synchronizing
the generators, the speed is automatically adjusted to the power
frequency and the generator voltage is adjusted to the voltage
in an electrical power system. It is then switched in the synchro-
nization point, considering the circuit-breaker closing time.
The 1.5-channel parallel switching function (synchronization
function and synchrocheck) is provided for use in small to
medium-sized generators and in electrical power systems. This
function is more secure than a 1-channel paralleling device and
can also be used for synchrocheck applications. For larger gener-
ators and electrical power systems with high safety require-
ments, the 2-channel parallel switching function is recom-
mended. In this example, 2 distinctly independent methods of
measurement decide on the switching conditions.
Furthermore, SIPROTEC 7VE85 offers additional current,
frequency, power, and voltage protection functions and many
other control and monitoring functions. As a result, the paralle-
ling device offers synchronization and protection functions in a
single device. With its modular structure, flexibility, and the
high-performance DIGSI 5 engineering tool, the SIPROTEC
7VE85 device offers future-oriented solutions for protection,
control, automation, monitoring, and power quality.
The following modes of operation are covered:
• Switching synchronous/asynchronous electrical power
systems
• Switching to de-energized line or dead busbar
• Synchrocheck function
• Adjusting commands for voltage and frequency (speed)
Benefits
• Safe and reliable synchronization of generators and elec-
tricity-supply systems by multichannel redundancy
• Cost savings as no external switchover of synchronization and
voltage measuring points is required
paper requirements
Functions
• Stabilization function for the output of adaptive frequency
control pulses
• Synchrocheck function for manual synchronization
• Analog output of operational measured values
• Commissioning aids (measurement of the circuit-breaker
closing time, sample synchronization)
• Functionality for protection and network decoupling tasks
• Undervoltage protection (ANSI 27)
• Overvoltage protection (ANSI 59)
• Voltage differential protection (ANSI 60)
[SIP5_GD_SS_LED_W3, 2, --_--]
Figure 2.14/2 SIPROTEC 7VE85 (Width: 1/3 x 19” to 2 x 19”)
Paralleling Device – SIPROTEC 7VE85
2.14

• Overcurrent protection (ANSI 50/51)
• Vector jump
• Overfrequency (ANSI 81)
• Underfrequency (ANSI 81)
• Rate-of-frequency-change protection (ANSI 81R)
• Instantaneous high-current tripping (ANSI 50HS)
• Instantaneous tripping at switch upon error
• Power protection active/reactive power (ANSI 32/37)
• Power-plant disconnection (ANSI 37)
• Circuit-breaker reignition monitoring (RBRF)
access.
• Optional, pluggable communication modules, usable for
S2 redundancy)
Applications
• Synchronization of generators (power units) with the elec-
tricity-supply system under consideration of the vector group
of transformers and transformer tap
• Synchronization of 2 electricity-supply systems
• Operation of up to 8 synchronizing points without external
switchover
Application templates are available in DIGSI 5 for the applica-
tions of the device 7VE85. The application templates contain
the basic configurations, required functions, and default
settings.
The following application templates are available for the device
7VE85 in the DIGSI 5 function library:
• Paralleling only synchrocheck 4 V, 4 I
• Paralleling basic 1.5 channels with balancing commands 4 V,
4 I
• Paralleling basic 2 channels with balancing commands 4 V, 4 I
• Paralleling extended 2 channels with balancing commands 8
V, 8 I
• Paralleling 2 channels for 1 synchronization location with
voltage selection and balancing commands 12 V, 4 I
• Paralleling extended 2 channels for 2 synchronization loca-
tions with balancing commands 8 V, 8 I
Application Template: Paralleling only Synchrocheck 4 V, 4 I
Figure 2.14/3 shows an extract of the 1st basic application
template for the device 7VE85 without function points. The
application template is suitable for applications in generator
systems or network-coupling tasks with 1 synchronization loca-
tion. The synchrocheck function is used in the Circuit-breaker
function group and is realized in a 1-channel design. Therefore,
no additional inverse voltage needs to be connected to the
device.
This application can realize the following operations:
• Synchrocheck for systems and the manual synchronization
The maximum number of synchronization locations is 8.
• Paralleling switching for systems
• Visualization of the system conditions through a graphic
display and the local control
This application is a cost-efficient solution with the base module
connecting with 2-phase isolated voltage transformers on both
sides.
Extra protection functions for this application are available. Due
to the flexibility of the SIPROTEC 5 hardware, you can use the
current inputs:
• To supervise the open-pole threshold
• To operate immediately with the Instantaneous high-current
tripping function when switching onto an existing fault
The default functions in this application template are without
function points. If you want to add extra functions into this
application template, the corresponding number of function
points is required.
2.14

[dw_7VE85-Appl_parall-only synchrocheck, 2, en_US]
Figure 2.14/3 Application Template: Paralleling only Synchrocheck 4 V, 4 I
Application Template: Paralleling Basic 1.5 Channels with
Balancing Commands 4 V, 4 I
Figure 2.14/4 shows an extract of the 2nd basic application
template for the device 7VE85. The application template is suit-
able for applications in small to medium generator systems in
unit connection with one synchronization location.
This application can realize the following operations:
• Synchrocheck for systems and the manual synchronization
• Paralleling switching for systems
• System disconnection and automatic resynchronization
connecting with 2-phase isolated voltage transformers on both
sides.
current inputs:
2.14

[dw_7VE85-Appl_parall-basic-1.5ch_with_balancing, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.14/4 Application Template: Paralleling Basic 1.5 Channels with Balancing Commands 4 V, 4 I
Application Template: Paralleling Basic 2 Channels with
Figure 2.14/5 shows an extract of the 3rd basic application
template for the device 7VE85. The application template is suit-
able for applications in medium to large generator systems in
unit connection with one synchronization location.
This application can realize the following operations with the
increased safety requirements via a 2-channel feature:
• Paralleling switching for high-voltage and extra-high voltage
systems
• Automatic synchronization of generators with large power
• Operation of several synchronization locations by a device
This application is a cost-efficient solution with the basic hard-
ware connecting with 2-phase isolated voltage transformers on
both sides. This connection can fully ensure the 2-channel
redundancy of the Paralleling function.
current inputs:
2.14

[dw_7VE85-Appl_parall-basic-2ch_with_balancing, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.14/5 Application Template: Paralleling Basic 2 Channels with Balancing Commands 4 V, 4 I
Application Template: Paralleling Extended 2 Channels with
Figure 2.14/6 shows an extract of the 4th application template
for the device 7VE85 with an expansion module IO202. The
application template is suitable for applications in medium to
large generator systems in unit connection with one synchroni-
zation location.
systems
The base module and the expansion module can connect with
the V-connected voltage transformers. On the basis of elec-
tricity, the connection with V-connected voltage transformers
has no difference from the connection with the
3 star-connected voltage transformers for the Paralleling func-
tion. This connection can fully ensure the 2-channel redundancy
of the Paralleling function.
current inputs:
2.14

[dw_7VE85-Appl_ext-2channel_with_adjusting-comm, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.14/6 Application Template: Paralleling Extended 2 Channels with Balancing Commands 8 V, 8 I
Application Template: Paralleling Extended 2 Channels for 2
Synchronization Locations with Balancing Commands 8 V, 8 I
large generator systems in unit connection with 2 synchroniza-
tion locations (generator circuit breaker and high-voltage circuit
breaker).
systems
and an expansion module IO202 connecting separately with
two 2-phase isolated voltage transformers on the generator
circuit breaker synchronization location and the high-voltage
circuit-breaker synchronization location. This connection can
fully ensure the 2-channel redundancy of the Paralleling func-
tion.
current inputs:
2.14

[dw_7VE85-2channel_for_2synch_with_adjusting-com, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.14/7 Application Template: Paralleling Extended 2 Channels for 2 Synchronization Locations with Balancing Commands 8 V, 8 I
Application Template: Paralleling 2 Channels for 1
Synchronization Location with Voltage Selection and
large generator systems in unit connection with 1 synchroniza-
tion location in a double busbar connection.
The synchronization voltage Vsync1 is selectable via binary inputs.
Therefore, the function block Voltage measuring-point selec-
tion for paralleling is needed to select the correct synchroniza-
tion voltage (busbar voltage) depending on the switch positions
of the disconnectors.
The function block Voltage measuring-point selection for
paralleling is used to switch the synchronization voltages and
their inverse voltages of the routed voltage measuring points.
No additional equipment is needed. This solution reduces the
wiring and commissioning effort.
2.14

In order to check the currently used busbar voltage on the oper-
ation panel, special display pages are introduced in this
template:
[sc_display pages for VMP_01, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.14/8 Display Page 1 on the Large Screen for the Voltage Selec-
tion and the Synchronization Functional Values
[sc_display pages for VMP_02, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.14/9 Display Page 2 on the Large Screen for the Voltage Selec-
tion and the Synchronization Functional Values
systems
• Voltage selection via binary input (disconnector auxiliary
contacts)
The base module and the expansion module can connect with
the V-connected voltage transformers. On the basis of elec-
tricity, the connection with V-connected voltage transformers
has no difference from the connection with the
3 star-connected voltage transformers for the Paralleling func-
tion. This connection can fully ensure the 2-channel redundancy
of the Paralleling function.
current inputs:
2.14

[dw_7VE85-Appl_parall_2ch_VMP, 2, en_US]
Figure 2.14/10 Application Template: Paralleling 2 Channels for 1 Synchronization Location with Voltage Selection and Balancing Commands 12 V, 4 I
2.14

ANSI Function Abbr.
Available
1 2 3 4 5 6
V8.0)
PB client ■
module, from V8.0)
MU ■
MU ■
Automatic matching of the synchronization
voltage when using a tap changer
■
25 Synchronization function 1.5-channel per
synchronizing location (Significant Property: up
to 4 synchronizing locations)
Sync ■ ■
25 Synchronization function 1.5-channel per
synchronizing location (Significant Property: up
Sync ■
25 Synchronization function 2-channel per synchro-
nization location (Significant Property: up
Sync ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
25 Synchronization function 2-channel per synchro-
nization location (Significant Property: up
Sync ■
Adjusting commands per synchronization location ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
V< ■
Vx"
V< ■
50HS Instantaneous high-current tripping I>>> ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■
V> ■
CD-3FO)
■
Measured values, standard ■
2.14

ANSI Function Abbr.
Available
1 2 3 4 5 6
■
■
■
■
CFC (standard, control) ■
CFC arithmetic ■
Control ■
Circuit breaker ■
Circuit-breaker paralleling ■
Fault recording of analog and binary signals ■
Monitoring ■
V7.8)
■
protocol
■
■
Function point class: 0 125 225 225 425 225
Table 2.14/1 SIPROTEC 7VE85 - Functions, Application Templates
(1) Parallel switching only for Synchrocheck 4V 4I (base device)
(2) Parallel switching 1.5-channel with 1 synchronizing location and adjusting commands 4V 4I (base device)
(3) Parallel switching 2-channel with 1 synchronizing location and adjusting commands 4V 4I (base device)
(4) Parallel switching 2-channel with 1 synchronizing location and adjusting commands 8V 8I (base device + extension)
(5) Parallel switching 2-channel with 2 synchronizing locations and adjusting commands 8V 8I (base device + extension)
(6) Parallel switching 2-channel with 1 synchronizing location, voltage selection and adjusting commands 12V 12I
2.14

Standard Variants for SIPROTEC 7VE85
AF1 1/3, 7 BI, 14 BO, 4 V, 4 I,
7 binary inputs
AF2 1/2, 15 BI, 20 BO, 8 V, 8 I,
15 binary inputs
Contains the following modules:base module with PS201 and IO208
Table 2.14/2 Standard Variants for SIPROTEC 7VE85
2.14

[dw_7SS85_anwendung, 4, en_US]
SIPROTEC 7SS85
The SIPROTEC 7SS85 busbar protection has been designed with
the highest selectivity possible for a large variety of different
busbars and all voltage levels. Additional protection and control
functions extend the field of application to a complete station
protection.
Busbar Protection
2.15

SIPROTEC 7SS85
The SIPROTEC 7SS85 busbar protection is a selective, safe, and
fast protection against busbar short circuits in medium-voltage
systems, high-voltage systems, and systems for very high
voltage. The proven, fast, and reliable algorithms from the
SIPROTEC 7SS52 in conjunction with the flexible, scalable, open,
and user-friendly SIPROTEC 5 platform set the new bar for the
SIPROTEC 7SS85 busbar protection.
The SIPROTEC 7SS85 is the right solution for interoperable,
compatible busbar protection as per IEC 61850, a cost-effective
extension of your electrical power system with busbar protec-
tion or as the replacement for the SIPROTEC 7SS52.
ONE platform, ONE device, ONE configuration tool for all appli-
cations, voltage levels, and busbar-protection systems. The new
SIPROTEC 7SS85 offers various options for the busbar-protection
architecture: Centralized, distributed or – for the 1st time in the
history of busbar protection – a hybrid busbar-protection system
where process information can be connected directly as well as
measured by distributed bay devices.
The selection of the device base functionalities (significant
features) and the modular hardware structure allow optimum
adaptation of the SIPROTEC 7SS85 to a large variety of system
configurations and functional requirements up to a complete
station protection.
Benefits
• Fast and secure – Proven and reliable algorithms since 1989
• Cyber Secure – Compliant with NERC CIP and BDEW white
paper requirements
• Robust – Highest availability even under extreme environ-
mental conditions
• Consistent – One platform, one device, one configuration tool
• User-friendly – Configuration by the user during the entire
service life
• Clear – Fully graphical engineering and online plant visualiza-
tion with DIGSI 5
• Flexibility – Centralized, decentralized or combined (hybrid)
architecture
• Universal – SIPROTEC 5 protection devices and merging units
as a bay unit
• Powerful – Busbar protection device as centralized feeder
protection
• Economical – Extension of power-system protection with
busbar protection
• Interoperable – Compatible with merging units according to
IEC 61850 Rev. 2.1
The performance and flexibility of the SIPROTEC 7SS85 allow the
implementation of the most varied, customer-specific secon-
dary-equipment concepts and solutions, such as:
• IEC 61850 compatible and interoperable distributed busbar
protection
• Cost-efficient extension of power-system protection using
busbar protection
• Replacement solution for the proven SIPROTEC 7SS52 in the
electrical power system
Functions
Characteristic Key Values of SIPROTEC 7SS85
• Phase-selective measurement and display
• Selective tripping of faulty bus zones
• Disconnector-independent check zone as additional tripping
criterion
• Shortest tripping times to ensure network stability and mini-
mize damage to the system:
– Centralized busbar protection: 3 ms/7 ms (relay type HS/
type F)
– Distributed busbar protection: 8 ms/12 ms (relay type HS/
type F)
• Highest stability in case of external faults, even in case of
transformer saturation, through stabilization with flowing
currents
• Operate curve with freely adjustable characteristic curve
sections
• Additional operate curve with increased sensitivity for low-
current errors, for example in resistance-grounded power
systems
• Fast recognition of internal or external errors requires only
2 ms of saturation-free time of the current transformers
[SIP5_GD_SS_LED_LED_LED_W3, 2, --_--]
Figure 2.15/2 SIPROTEC 7SS85 – Centralized Busbar Protection
Busbar Protection – SIPROTEC 7SS85
2.15

• Using closed iron core or linearized current transformers in a
plant is possible
• Adaptation of different current transformer ratios per parame-
terization
• Straight-forward dimensioning of current transformers and
stabilization factor
• 3 interacting methods of measurement allow minimum trip-
ping times after busbar faults and ensure maximum stability
in case of large short-circuit currents
• The integrated circuit-breaker failure protection (CBFP)
detects circuit-breaker faults in case of a busbar short circuit
and provides a trip signal for the circuit breaker at the line
end. The adjacent busbar trips if a circuit breaker in the bus
coupler fails.
• Expensive monitoring of current-transformer circuits, meas-
ured-value acquisition and processing, and trip circuits to
avoid overfunction and underfunction of the protection and
effort reduction for routine testing.
• Various control possibilities, such as bay out of order, acquisi-
tion blocking from disconnectors and circuit breakers,
blocking of protection zones, or circuit-breaker failure protec-
tion make the adaptation to operationally-caused special
states of your plant easier.
• 1/3-pole or 3-pole circuit-breaker failure protection using the
integrated disconnector image for tripping all circuit breakers
of the busbar section affected
• End-fault protection for the protection of the section between
circuit breaker and current transformer for feeders and bus
couplers
• Direct tripping of protection zones through external signals
• Release of the tripping of a protection zone through addi-
tional external signals
• Release of tripping through additional, external phase-selec-
tive signals
• Cross stabilization against overfunctions in case of
transformer influence on the secondary side
• Bus coupler differential protection for fault clearing in
couplers with 2 current transformers
• With distributed busbar protection, any feeder protection
function can also be implemented using any modular
SIPROTEC 5 device as the bay device.
access
Applications
The SIPROTEC 7SS85 busbar protection is the solution for the
following plant layouts:
• Single busbars up to quintuple busbars with or without a
transfer busbar
• Breaker-and-a-half layout
• Dual circuit breaker systems and one or 2 current trans-
former(s) per feeder
• Truck-type switchgear
• Systems with combined busbars (alternatively main/transfer
busbar)
• H-bridge arrangement with bus coupler or disconnection
• Ring busbars
2.15

Central Protection Central Protection with
IEC 61850 Compatible
Distributed Process Connec-
tion
Distributed Protection
Significant features 9, A, B, C, D, E F, G, H, J, K
Centralized process connection yes yes no
Distributed process connection no yes yes
Hybrid: central and distributed process connection no yes no
Number of bars (max.) 3 3 6
3-phase current measuring points (max.) 20 20 / 24 (with EFP, without
further backup protection
function in 7SS85)
45
3-phase voltage measuring points 4 4 central and in the Merging
Units
In the bay units
Number of busbar sections (max.) 6 6 20
Number couplers (max.) 6 6 20
Number reserve busbar (without measuring function)
(max.)
3 3 12
Interoperable measured-value acquisition yes (1/5A) yes (IEC 61850-9-2,
IEC 61869)
yes (IEC 61850-9-2,
IEC 61869, 4000 Hz, 1 ASDU)
Backup protection function 20 x CBFP, 20 x EFP,
20 x definite-time overcur-
rent protection,
10 x Z<(transformer),
10 x overcurrent protection
dir., 10 x V>, 10 x V<
24 x CBFP, 24 x EFP,
24 x definite-time overcur-
rent protection,
10 x Z<(transformer),
10 x overcurrent protection
dir., 10 x V>, 10 x V< plus all
protection functions of the
individual merging unit
all protection functions of
the individual bay unit
Bay Units
Merging Units SIPROTEC 6MU85 no yes yes
SIPROTEC 5 protection device (modular) no yes yes
Interoperable Merging Units according to IEC 61850 Rev.
2.1 (third-party devices)
no yes no
Engineering of the protection functionality
DIGSI 5 yes yes yes
IEC 61850 system configurator - yes yes/automated routing
according to single-line
editor
Table 2.15/1 Selection Table of the Matching Significant Features
Significant Features Centralized Protection
Short description 9 A B C D E
Main function
Busbar differential protection
Only Circuit-breaker failure protec-
tion
Busbar sections 1 2 2 6 6 6
Disconnector image No No Yes No Yes Yes
Measuring points centralized, 3-phase
(maximum)
20 20 20 20 20 20
or…
Measuring points distributed, 3-phase
(maximum)
24 24 24 24 24 24
Bays (maximum) 26 26 26 26 26 26
Bays (included in the basic scope)3 3 4 4 6 6 6
Recommended standard hardware variant
centralized
V1 V2 V2 V3 V3 V3
3 For further bays, you need function points.
2.15

Significant Features Centralized Protection
Included measuring points 3-phase
centralized
3 4 4 6 6 6
Related standard hardware variant
distributed
V4 V4 V4 V4 V4 V4
Table 2.15/2 Significant Features Centralized Protection
Significant Features Distributed Protection
Short description F G J K H
Main function
Busbar differential protection
Only Circuit-breaker failure protec-
tion
Busbar sections 6 20 6 20 20
Disconnector image No No Yes Yes Yes
Measuring points distributed, 3-phase
(maximum)
45 45 45 45 45
Related standard hardware variant V4 V4 V4 V4 V4
Table 2.15/3 Significant Features Distributed Protection
The significant properties E and H only Circuit-breaker
failure protection are a special feature. Here, the main
protection function is the Circuit-breaker failure protection. The
device permits the implementation of an independent,
complete backup protection for a circuit-breaker failure in the
station.
Configuration and Parameterization
The busbar protection is configured and engineered graphically
using the primary topology of your plant. That is where you add
the SIPROTEC 7SS85 and other devices. Use drag and drop to
add the required functions from the DIGSI 5 library to the
devices. Then, connect the primary elements of the single-line
diagram (busbars, current transformers, disconnectors, circuit
breakers) to the function blocks of the devices. The primary
topology is now connected to the secondary equipment. This
ensures a flexible adaptation to changes and extensions over
the entire lifecycle of the plant. You adapt the protection to the
various operating states and requirements by means of parame-
terization.
Online visualization for commissioning, operation, and analysis
of important information occurs in the same single-line
diagram. The switch positions are shown in addition to the
measured values of the feeders and the protection ranges. Addi-
tionally, you get information about special operating states, for
example in the case of Bay out of service or reduced
selectivity of protection, for example, with a direct busbar
coupler via disconnector switches (busbar shunt by disconnec-
tors).
Disconnector Image
With the integrated SIPROTEC 7SS85 disconnector image, the
bay currents are assigned dynamically to the protection zones
based on the disconnector-switch position. In case of a failure,
selective tripping of the feeders and bus couplers involved takes
place by way of the disconnector image. This ensures the availa-
bility of the healthy system part for network operation.
SIPROTEC 7SS85 in general has a check zone that is independent
of the disconnector. This ensures system stability, even in case
of an incorrect assignment of the currents.
This function is characterized by the following product features:
• Processing of up to 20 or 24 current measuring points and
6 busbar sections in the centralized SIPROTEC 7SS85
• Processing of up to 45 current measuring points and
20 busbar sections in the distributed busbar protection
• Disconnector runtime and position monitoring
• Due to the program assignment Disconnector NOT off =
Disconnector on, calibrated disconnector auxiliary contacts
are not necessary.
• Storage of the disconnector-switch positions in case of an
auxiliary-voltage failure
• Convenient graphical project engineering using DIGSI 5
• Dynamic graphical visualization using DIGSI 5 in online mode
2.15

[dw_01_config_centr-busbar, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.15/3 Centralized Busbar Protection
2.15

[dw_02_config_decentr-busbar_IEC61850, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.15/4 Centralized Busbar Protection using IEC 61850 Compatible Distributed Process Connection
2.15

[dw_03_config_decentr-busbar_hybrid, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.15/5 Centralized Busbar Protection using Hybrid Process Connection
2.15

[dw_04_config_decentr-busbar, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.15/6 Distributed Busbar Protection
2.15

ANSI Function Abbr.
Available
1
V8.0)
PB client ■
module, from V8.0)
MU ■
V< ■
system
V2> ■
50BF Circuit-breaker failure protection 1-pole/3-pole CBFP ■
50BF Inherent circuit-breaker failure protection CBFP ■
50EF End-Fault Protection ■
V> ■
87B Busbar differential protection ΔI ■
87B Bus coupler differential protection ΔI ■
Bay ■
Cross Stabilization ■
86 Lockout ■
a-half layouts)
■
CD-3FO)
■
Measured values, standard ■
■
■
■
■
CFC (standard, control) ■
CFC arithmetic ■
2.15

ANSI Function Abbr.
Available
1
Control ■
Circuit breaker ■
Fault recording of analog and binary signals ■
Monitoring ■
V7.8)
■
protocol
■
■
Table 2.15/4 SIPROTEC 7SS85 – Functions, Application Templates
(1) Standard busbar
2.15

Standard Variants for SIPROTEC 7SS85
V1 1/2, 15 BI, 13 BO, 12 I
15 binary inputs
V2 1/2, 11 BI, 11 BO, 16 I
11 binary inputs
V3 2/3, 15 BI, 15 BO, 24 I
15 binary inputs
2 expansion modules IO203
V4 1/3, 19 BI, 11 BO
15 binary inputs
1 communication module ETH_BD_2FO
Table 2.15/5 Standard Variants for SIPROTEC 7SS85
Standard Variant for SIPROTEC 6MU85
AJ1 1/3, 11 BI, 9 BO, 4 I
Housing width 1/3
11 binary inputs
1 communication module ETH-BD-2FO
Table 2.15/6 Standard Variant for Decentralized Busbar Protection SIPROTEC 6MU85
2.15

[dw_6md_anwendung, 4, en_US]
SIPROTEC 6MD85, 6MD86
SIPROTEC 5 Bay Controllers control and monitor plants of all
voltage levels. The large number of automatic functions allows
the device to be used in all fields of energy supply.
selective protection and of automated operation.
functions. Their modular surface mounting permits
SIPROTEC 5 bay controllers to always be adapted flexibly to the
individual requirements.
Overview of the SIPROTEC 6MD85 and 6MD86 devices
The SIPROTEC 5 bay controllers are based on the flexible and
powerful SIPROTEC 5 modular system. When ordering, you can
select from among various standard variants. The expandability
through expansion modules allows individual adaptation to
specific applications.
Sets of devices
The bay controllers are differentiated into the
SIPROTEC 6MD85 and SIPROTEC 6MD86 product groups.
Although the SIPROTEC 6MD85 devices are tailored for applica-
tions in distribution systems, they can also be used in high-
voltage and extra-high voltage applications.
The SIPROTEC 6MD86 devices are designed for applications in
the power transmission system. They can be used with a
maximum variety of auxiliary functions. Both device types can
be configured flexibly in your hardware variant.
Essential Differentiating Character-
istics
6MD85 6MD86
Circuit-breaker failure protection – Optional
Automatic reclosing – Optional
Point-on-Wave Switching (PoW) – Optional
Switching sequences Optional ■
CFC arithmetic Optional ■
Measured-value processing Optional ■
Number of switching devices
greater than 4
Optional ■
Synchrocheck Optional ■
Table 2.16/1 Essential Differentiating Characteristics
Common points:
• Configuration of a large number of protection functions
• Modular expansion of the quantity structure
• Optionally usable as Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU)
• High-performance automation with CFC
Bay Controllers
2.16

Description
The SIPROTEC 6MD85 bay controller is a general-purpose control
and automation device with protection function. It is designed
for use in all voltage levels from distribution to transmission. As
part of the SIPROTEC 5 family, it enables a wealth of protection
functions from the SIPROTEC library. The modular hardware
permits integration of the IOs depending on the application.
Adapt the hardware exactly to your requirements and rely on
Main function Bay controller for medium and high to extra-
high voltage switchgear with integrated opera-
tion and comprehensive protection functions.
Powerful automation, simple configuration
with DIGSI 5
modular system. If high requirements are
placed on the quantity structure, the device
can be extended in the 2nd row. For example,
240 (and more) binary inputs are possible with
the IO230.
Benefits
• Safe and reliable automation and control of your plants
• Purposeful and simple operation of the devices and software
thanks to user-friendly design
• Cybersecurity to NERC CIP and BDEW Whitepaper require-
ments
boards
Functions
• Integrated bay controller with versatile protection function
from medium to extra-high voltage
• Control of switching devices
• Synchrocheck and switchgear interlocking protection
S2 redundancy)
cols
• Arc protection
access
tions in the device
• Optional overcurrent protection for all voltage levels with 3-
pole tripping
• Selective protection of overhead lines and cables with single-
ended and multi-ended feeders using protection communica-
tion
• Overcurrent protection also configurable as emergency func-
tion
wire connections and communication networks)
• Detecting operational measured variables and protection
function measured values to evaluate the plant state, to
• Powerful fault recording (buffer for a max. record time of 80
sec. at 8 kHz and 320 sec. at 2 kHz)
the SIPROTEC 5 modular system.
[SIP5_GD_SS_W3, 2, --_--]
Figure 2.16/2 Bay Controller SIPROTEC 6MD85 (1/3 Device with 1/6
Expansion Module with Key Switch Operation Panel)
Bay Controllers – SIPROTEC 6MD85
2.16

Applications
and automation device with a protection function based on the
SIPROTEC 5 system. The standard variants of the SIPROTEC
6MD85 device are delivered with instrument transformers.
Furthermore, protection-class current transformers are also
possible in SIPROTEC 6MD85 devices, thus allowing protection
functions to be used. Due to its high flexibility, the device is suit-
able as selective protection equipment for overhead lines and
cables with single-ended and multi-ended infeeds when protec-
tion communication is used. The device supports all SIPROTEC 5
system characteristics as well as detection and recording of
power-quality data in the medium-voltage and subordinate low-
voltage power system.
• SIPROTEC 6MD85 Standard
– Double busbar feeder with switchgear interlocking protec-
tion
• SIPROTEC 6MD85 Not preconfigured
• SIPROTEC 6MD85 Extended control
– In addition to the SIPROTEC 6MD85 Standard application
template, this template also includes the CFC building
blocks for switching sequences and arithmetic.
– Switching sequence for automatic busbar switchover is
preconfigured (triggered by function key)
2.16

Application Example
Double Busbar with Switching Sequences
Figure 2.16/3 shows a simple typical application with a
SIPROTEC 6MD85 on a double busbar. The FG Circuit breaker
function group includes the synchrocheck. The disconnectors
are also controlled by 1 function group each. Operational meas-
ured values and energy metered values are calculated in the FG
VI-3-ph function group. They are available for output on the
display, transfer to the substation automation technology, and
processing in the CFC. A switching sequence stored in the CFC
that is activated via a function key starts an automatic busbar
switchover process.
[dw_6MD8-Bsp-Application-1, 2, en_US]
Figure 2.16/3 SIPROTEC 6MD85 Bay Controller for Double Busbars with Switching Sequence for Busbar Switchover
2.16

ANSI Function Abbr.
Available
1 2 3
V8.0)
PB client ■
module, from V8.0)
MU ■
MU ■
Vx"
V< ■
■
V> ■
86 Lockout ■
■
■
CD-3FO)
■
Measured values, extended: Min, max, average ■ ■
2.16

ANSI Function Abbr.
Available
1 2 3
■
■
■
■
CFC arithmetic ■
Switching sequence function ■ ■
Control ■ ■ ■
Disconnector/grounding conductor ■ ■ ■
V7.8)
■
protocol
■
■
Table 2.16/2 SIPROTEC 6MD85 – Functions, Application Templates
(1) Standard
(2) Not preconfigured
(3) Control expanded
2.16

Standard Variants for SIPROTEC 6MD85
J1 1/3, 11 BI, 9 BO, 4 I, 4 V
11 binary inputs
4 sensitive current-transformer inputs
J2 1/2, 27 BI, 17 BO, 4 I, 4 V
27 binary inputs
J4 2/3, 43 BI, 25 BO, 4 I, 4 V
43 binary inputs
Expansion modules 2 x IO207
J5 5/6, 59 BI, 33 BO, 4 I, 4 V
59 binary inputs
J7 1/1, 75 BI, 41 BO, 4 I, 4 V
75 binary inputs
Table 2.16/3 Standard Variants for Bay Controllers SIPROTEC 6MD85
2.16

Description
and automation device with protection function. It is designed
for use in all voltage levels from distribution to transmission. As
part of the SIPROTEC 5 family, it enables a wealth of protection
functions from the SIPROTEC library. The modular hardware
permits integration of the I/Os depending on the application.
Adapt the hardware precisely to your requirements and rely on
the future-oriented solutions for protection, control, automa-
tion, monitoring, and Power Quality – Basic.
Main function Bay controller for medium and high to extra-
high voltage switchgear with integrated opera-
tion and comprehensive protection functions;
performance automation, simple configuration
with DIGSI 5
modular system. If high requirements are
placed on the quantity structure, the device
can be extended in the 2nd row. For example,
240 (and more) binary inputs are possible with
the IO230 (see Hardware section).
Benefits
• Safe and reliable automation and control of your plants
• Purposeful and simple operation of the devices and software
thanks to user-friendly design
paper requirements
boards
Functions
• Integrated bay controller with versatile protection function
from medium to extra-high voltage
• Control of switching devices
• Synchrocheck, switchgear interlocking protection and switch-
related protection functions, such as circuit-breaker failure
protection and automatic reclosing
S2 redundancy)
cols
access
• Arc protection
tions in the device
• Optional overcurrent protection with 3-pole tripping
• Overcurrent protection also configurable as emergency func-
tion
wire connections and communication networks)
• Capturing operational measured variables and protection
function measured values to evaluate the plant state, to
• Powerful fault recording (buffer for a max. record time of 80
sec. at 8 kHz and 320 sec. at 2 kHz)
• Point-on-wave switching (PoW)
[SIP5_GD_SS_W3, 2, --_--]
Figure 2.16/4 SIPROTEC 6MD86 (1/3 Device with 1/6 Expansion Module
with Key Switch Operation Panel)
2.16

Applications
and automation device with a protection function on the basis
of the SIPROTEC 5 system. The standard variants of the
SIPROTEC 6MD86 device are delivered with instrument trans-
formers. Furthermore, protection-class current transformers are
also possible in SIPROTEC 6MD86 devices, allowing protection
functions to be used. Due to its high flexibility, the device is suit-
able as selective protection equipment for overhead lines and
cables with single-ended and multi-ended infeeds when protec-
tion communication is used. The device supports all SIPROTEC 5
system characteristics as well as detection and recording of
power-quality data in the medium-voltage and subordinate low-
voltage power system.
• SIPROTEC 6MD86 standard double busbar
– Double busbar feeder with switchgear interlocking protec-
tion
– Synchrocheck for circuit breaker
– Switching sequence for automatic busbar switchover
preconfigured (triggered by function key)
• SIPROTEC 6MD86 breaker-and-a-half type 1
– Control of a breaker-and-a-half layout (3 circuit
breakers, 14 disconnectors)
– Synchrocheck for the 3 circuit breakers with dynamic meas-
uring-point switchover
• SIPROTEC 6MD86 breaker-and-a-half type 2
– Control of a part of a breaker-and-a-half layout
– Supports concepts with multiple bay controllers per bay
– Circuit-breaker failure protection and automatic reclosing
SIPROTEC 6MD86 point-on-wave switching
• Controlled switching (Point-on-Wave (PoW)) for precise activa-
tion of the 3 individual phases of a switch to minimize the
load placed on the equipment.
2.16

Double Busbar with Protection Functions
In Figure 2.16/5 the double busbar feeder is controlled and also
protected by a 6MD86. For this purpose, circuit-breaker failure
protection and the automatic reclosing are activated in the
Circuit breaker function group. The VI 3ph function group
includes the protection functions overvoltage protection,
frequency protection, and power protection. In contrast to
Figure 2.16/3, it is therefore connected to the circuit breaker so
that the resulting trip signals have a destination. Such linkages
can be created quickly and flexibly in the DIGSI 5 Editor Func-
tion-group connections (Figure 2.16/6).
Figure 2.16/5 Bay Controller 6MD86 for Double Busbar with Protection Functions
2.16

[sc_Schutzobjekt, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.16/6 Assignment of the Function Group with Protection Func-
tions to the Switch (Protected Object)
Breaker-and-a-Half Scheme with Protection and Systems
Control
Figure 2.16/7 shows a breaker-and-a-half scheme with protec-
tion and systems control. The protection is achieved by
2 SIPROTEC 7SL87 line protection devices which also assume
circuit-breaker failure protection and the automatic reclosing of
the 3 circuit breakers. The control of all switches and the
synchrocheck of the circuit breakers is assumed by the
SIPROTEC 6MD86 bay controller. Figure 2.16/8 provides an
insight view of the functions of the SIPROTEC 6MD86.
2.16

[dw_1-5_CB-Feldleit-, 2, en_US]
Figure 2.16/7 Breaker-and-a-Half Layout with a Bay Controller and 2 Line Protection Devices (Overview)
Figure 2.16/8 shows the principle of the dynamic switchover of
the voltage measurements for the synchrocheck functions of
the 3 circuit breakers in the SIPROTEC 6MD86 bay controller.
Each synchrocheck function (ANSI number 25) requires both
voltages Vsync1 and Vsync2 (feeder voltage and reference
voltage). With the middle QA2 circuit breaker, there are 2 possi-
bilities for each of the 2 voltages depending on the position of
the disconnector and circuit breaker. For the 2 outer QA1 and
QA3 circuit breakers, there is 1 one possibility for a voltage (that
is, the neighboring busbar), while the other voltage is
connected by means of 1 of 3 possibilities (likewise depending
on the switch position).
2.16

Figure 2.16/8 Breaker-and-a-Half Layout with 1 Bay Controller and 2 Line Protection Devices (Detail for Bay Controller)
2.16

[sc_Spannungskanäle, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.16/9 Routing of the Possible Voltage Terminals to the 3 Circuit-Breaker Function Groups
Figure 2.16/9 shows the routing in the Function Group
Connections editor. All voltages which are considered as a
feeder or reference voltage for the synchrocheck are assigned to
the Vsync1 or Vsync2 inputs.
The ID number of the measured values is used to select the
voltages which are currently operationally attached in a CFC
chart (Figure 2.16/10).
[sc_CFC, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.16/10 CFC Chart to Select the Synchrocheck Reference Voltages
2.16

Use as a Phasor Measurement Unit
At selected stations of the transmission system, a measurement
of current and voltage for absolute value and phase is carried
out using PMUs. Due to the high-precision time synchronization
(via GPS), the measured values from different substations that
are far away from each other are compared, and conclusions
about the system state and dynamic events, such as power fluc-
tuations, are drawn from the phase angles and dynamic curves.
[Zeigermessung (PMU), 1, --_--]
If you select the Phasor Measurement Unit option, the devices
determine current and voltage phasors, add high-precision time
stamps, and send these together with other measured values
(frequency, rate of change of frequency) to an evaluation
station via the communication protocol IEEE C37.118, see
Figure 2.16/12. With the aid of the synchrophasor and a suitable
analysis program (for example, SIGUARD PDP), it is possible to
detect power swings and trip alarms automatically which are
sent to the network control center, for example.
2.16

[dw_struct_WAM, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.16/12 Connecting 3 Phasor Measurement Units with 2 Phasor Data Concentrators (PDCs) SIGUARD PDP
When the PMU function is used, a FG PMU function group is
created in the device. This function group calculates the phasor
and analog values, add time stamps, and transmits the data to
the selected Ethernet interface via the protocol IEEE C37.118.
There, they can be received, saved, and processed by one or
more clients. Up to 3 IP addresses from clients can be assigned
in the device.
2.16

Figure 2.16/13 Application Example: Double Busbar with SIPROTEC 6MD86 Used as a Bay Controller and Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU)
2.16

ANSI Function Abbr.
Available
1 2 3 4 5
V8.0)
PB client ■
module, from V8.0)
MU ■
MU ■
Vx"
V< ■
50BF Circuit-breaker failure protection 1-pole/3-pole CBFP ■ ■
■
V> ■
79 Automatic reclosing, 1-pole/3-pole AREC ■ ■
86 Lockout ■
■
■
CD-3FO)
■
2.16

ANSI Function Abbr.
Available
1 2 3 4 5
■
■
■
■
CFC arithmetic ■ ■ ■ ■
Switching sequence function ■ ■
Control ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
PoW Point-on-wave switching (starting with V7.90) PoW ■ ■
Disconnector/grounding conductor ■ ■ ■ ■
V7.8)
■
protocol
■
■
Table 2.16/4 SIPROTEC 6MD86 – Functions, Application Templates
(1) Not preconfigured
(2) Breaker-and-a-half type 1
(3) Double busbar
(4) Breaker-and-a-half type 2
(5) Point-on-wave switching
2.16

Standard Variants for SIPROTEC 6MD86
The standard variants of the 6MD86 also include an Ethernet communication module, a large display, and key switch (starting with type K2)
K1 1/3, 11 BI, 9BO, 4 I, 4 V
1 electrical Ethernet module ETH-BA-2EL
11 binary inputs
K2 1/2, 27 BI, 17 BO, 4 I, 4 V
27 binary inputs
K4 2/3, 43 BI, 25 BO, 4 I, 4 V
43 binary inputs
K5 5/6, 59 BI, 33 BO, 4 I, 4 V
59 binary inputs
4 sensitive current-transformer inputs,
K7 1/1, 75 BI, 41 BO, 4 I, 4 V
75 binary inputs
2.16

K8 1/1, 67 BI, 39 BO, 8 I, 8 V
67 binary inputs
Expansion modules IO202, 3 x IO207
K9 5/6, 35BI, 17BO(8HS), 4I, 4V, 8 MT-F
35 binary inputs
17 binary outputs (1 life contact, 2 standard, 6 fast, 8 high-speed relays
with semiconductor acceleration)
4 current transformers (protection)
8 fast measuring-transducer inputs for current (20 mA) or voltage (10 V)
Table 2.16/5 Standard Variants for Bay Controllers SIPROTEC 6MD86
2.16

[dw_7KE85_anwendung, 3, en_US]
SIPROTEC 7KE85
SIPROTEC fault recorders are a component of the
SIPROTEC 5 modular system and support all SIPROTEC 5 system
properties. They can be used individually as well as universally
within the scope of system solutions.
The SIPROTEC 7KE85 fault recorder is designed to suit present
and future requirements in a changing energy market. High-
performance and reliable monitoring combined with flexible
engineering and communication features provide the basis for
maximum supply reliability.
functions. Due to their modular surface mounting,
SIPROTEC 5 fault recorders can always be flexibly adapted to
specific requirements.
The SIPROTEC 7KE85 fault recorder has the following additional
functionalities compared to the SIPROTEC 5 protection devices
and bay controllers:
• Sampling configurable from 1 kHz to 16 kHz
• Mass storage of 16 GB
• All recorders can run parallel
• Individually triggered recorders
• Continuous recorders
• Separate activation of the recorders
• Freely configurable memory for each recorder
• Additional quality information supplements the records
• Power Quality recordings
• Recording of GOOSE messages in a continuous recorder
• Sequence-of-events recorder functionality
• Freely configurable channel names, LEDs, binary inputs and
outputs
• Freely configurable channel-name sequence
• LCD display on the device available as an option
The SIPROTEC 7KE85 fault recorder can be configured with
different basic functions.
Basic functions
Fault recorder Comprehensive flexible, event-triggered, and
continuous recording options
PMU Synchrophasor measurement (PMU) according
to IEEE C37.118-2011
Power Quality record-
ings
Continuous measurement of events and fail-
ures in the electrical distribution system to
IEC 61000-4-30
SOE Message printer functionality or sequence-of-
events recorder
Fault Recorder
2.17

Description
Powerful Fault Recorder with integrated measurement of
synchrophasors (PMU) in accordance with IEEE C37.118 and
power-quality measurement in accordance with
IEC 61000-4-30. Due to the great flexibility of trigger functions,
the SIPROTEC 7KE85 is ideally suited for monitoring the entire
energy value added chain, from generation to distribution. The
high-performance automation and flexible configuration with
DIGSI 5 complements the range of functions.
Main function Fault recorder
40 analog channels, 43 binary inputs,
33 binary outputs
modular system.
Housing width 1/3 to 1/1 x 19 inches
Benefits
• Clearly organized documentation and focused analysis of
power-system processes and failures
• Increased reliability and quality of the engineering process
• Cyber security in accordance with NERC CIP and BDEW White-
paper requirements
• Siemens supports the interface in accordance with
IEC 61850-9-2 for process-bus solutions
Functions
• Up to 40 analog channels
• Fast-scan recorder
• Up to 2 slow-scan recorders
• Up to 5 continuous recorders and 2 trend recorders
• Power Quality recordings in accordance with IEC 61000-4-30
• Sequence-of-events recorder for continuous recording of
binary status changes and IEC 61850 GOOSE messages
• Usable as Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU) in accordance with
IEEE C37.118 protocol
• Transmission of the records and triggering via IEC 61850
GOOSE messages
• Variable sampling frequencies parameterizable between 1 kHz
and 16 kHz
• Distribution of the mass storage of 16 GB to the various
recorders by the user as desired
• Intelligent monitoring routines of the storage medium ensure
a high level of availability and completeness for the archived
data
• Data compression without loss
• Time synchronization via the Precision Time Protocol (PTP)
IEEE 1588, IRIG-B, DCF77, and SNTP
• Routing of the measured values to the individual recorders as
desired
• Combination of the measuring groups for the power calcula-
tion as desired
• Quality attributes for representing the instantaneous signal
quality in the time-signal view
• The Trigger functions of a function block are fundamental
component value, RMS value, zero-sequence system power,
positive-sequence system power, negative-sequence system
power, frequency power, Σ active power, Σ reactive power
and Σ apparent power
• Level trigger and gradient trigger for every trigger function
• Flexible cross trigger and system trigger, manual trigger
• Creation of independent trigger functions with the graphic
automation editor CFC (continuous function chart)
• Trigger functions via a combination of single-point indica-
tions, double-point indications, analog values, binary signals,
Boolean signals, and GOOSE messages, including for trig-
gering on individual harmonics or the THD
• Consistent monitoring concept
• Special test mode for commissioning
• Data transmission via IEC 61850 of fault recordings in accord-
ance with COMTRADE 2013, 1999 standard and continuous
recording in accordance with IEEE Std 1159.3-2003
[ph_SIPROTEC 7KE85, 1, --_--]
Figure 2.17/2 SIPROTEC 7KE85 Device with Expansion Module
Fault Recorder – SIPROTEC 7KE85
2.17

cols
signed firmware, or authenticated IEEE 802.1x network
access.
S2 redundancy)
• Intelligent terminal technology enables prewiring and an easy
device replacement
Applications
The fault recorder is for use in medium-voltage systems, high-
voltage systems, and systems for very high voltage and in power
plants with comprehensive trigger and recording functions. With
the SIPROTEC 7KE85 fault recorder, you receive a clearly organ-
ized and event-related evaluation and documentation of your
power-system processes. You are thereby able to analyze fail-
ures in a targeted manner and optimize your power system.
Typical processes to be monitored and documented:
• System incidents, such as critical load cases or short circuits
• Failures of the supply quality
• Dynamic behavior of generators
• Closing and breaking operations of transformers (saturation
response)
• Power fluctuations and power-swing cycles
• Test runs during commissioning
Fault recorder 4 V/4 I/11BI
• Application templates related to the monitoring of a total
of 8 current/voltage transformers
Fault recorder 8 V/11 BI
of 8 voltage transformers
Fault recorder 8 V/8 I/19 BI
Fault recorder 20 V/20 I/43 BI
2.17

[dwanwsto-031212-01.tif, 3, en_US]
Figure 2.17/3 Fault Recorder SIPROTEC 7KE85 for Monitoring a Feeder
Fault Recorder for Monitoring Feeders
Figure 2.17/3 and Figure 2.17/4 show simple application exam-
ples with a SIPROTEC 7KE85, which is connected for monitoring
feeders. In these examples, the various triggers are provided via
function group FG VI_3-phase and are available to the function
group FG Recorder and, thus, to the event-triggered recorders.
In parallel, individually generated trigger functions (combination
of GOOSE messages, single-point/double-point indications,
binary signals, etc.) can start a recorder via the CFC and thus
generate a fault record.
2.17

[dwrecfee-031212-01.tif, 3, en_US]
Figure 2.17/4 Application Example: Fault Recorder for Several Feeders
2.17

[dwrecpmu-031212-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 2.17/5 Double Busbar with SIPROTEC 7KE85 Used as a Fault Recorder and Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU)
Fault Recorder with PMU
When the PMU function is used, a “FG PMU” function group is
created in the device, see Figure 2.17/5. This function group
calculates the phasor and analog values, performs time
stamping and transmits the data to the selected Ethernet inter-
face via the protocol IEEE C37.118. There, they can be received,
saved, and processed by one or more clients. Up to 3 IP
addresses from clients can be assigned in the device.
Use as a Phasor Measurement Unit
At selected stations of the transmission system, a measurement
of current and voltage for absolute value and phase is carried
out using PMUs. Due to the high-precision time synchronization
(via GPS), the measured values from different substations that
are far away from each other are compared, and conclusions
about the system state and dynamic events, such as power fluc-
tuations, are drawn from the phase angles and dynamic curves.
2.17

[Zeigermessung (PMU), 1, --_--]
If you select the Phasor Measurement Unit option, the devices
determine current and voltage phasors, add high-precision time
stamps, and send these together with other measured values
(frequency, rate of change of frequency) to an evaluation
station via the communication protocol IEEE C37.118, see
Figure 2.16/12. With the aid of the synchrophasor and a suitable
analysis program (for example, SIGUARD PDP), it is possible to
detect power swings and trip alarms automatically which are
sent to the network control center, for example.
Figure 2.17/7 Connecting 3 Phasor Measurement Units with 2 Phasor Data Concentrators (PDCs) SIGUARD PDP
When the PMU function is used, a FG PMU function group is
created in the device. This function group calculates the phasor
and analog values, add time stamps, and transmits the data to
the selected Ethernet interface via the protocol IEEE C37.118.
There, they can be received, saved, and processed by one or
more clients. Up to 3 IP addresses from clients can be assigned
in the device.
2.17

Recorder
Fast-scan recorder
Transient processes, short circuits, or ground faults and also the
behavior of protection devices can be analyzed with the fast-
scan recorder. Transient processes can be tripped, for example,
by switching operations. The fast-scan recorder can record the
history of the sampled values of all analog inputs, internally
calculated measured values, and binary signals when an error
occurs for over 90 s with a pre-trigger time of 3 s. The sampling
rate can be set from 20 to 320 sampled values per cycle. This
corresponds to a sampling frequency of 1 kHz to 16 kHz.
Binary changes are recorded at a resolution of 1 ms. The input
signals are analyzed according to the specified trigger condi-
tions and recorded if the limiting values are violated. This
recorded fault record includes the pre-trigger time, the trigger
point, and the fault recording. In addition, the cause that trips
the trigger is saved. The trigger limiting values and record times
can easily be set with DIGSI 5.
Slow-scan recorder
The function principal is similar to that of the fast-scan recorder,
but the values are calculated every 10 ms and averaged over a
configurable interval. The averaging time can be configured
from a rated period up to 3000 rated periods. The averaged
values are stored by the slow-scan recorder as a recording in the
mass storage. Binary changes are recorded, in a similar way to
the fast-scan recorder, with a resolution of 1 ms.
Slow-scan recorders are therefore well-suited for detecting, for
example, the load conditions before, during, and after a failure
and, thus, also power-swing cycles.
The slow-scan recorder can record the history of sampled values
from all analog inputs, internally calculated measured values,
and binary signals when an error occurs for over 90 minutes
with a pre-trigger time of 90 s. Here, too, the input signals are
analyzed according to the specified trigger conditions and
recorded if the limiting values are violated. These fault records
include the pre-trigger time, the trigger point, and the fault
recording. In addition, the cause that trips the trigger is saved.
The user sets trigger values and record times in DIGSI 5 for this
purpose. Furthermore, up to 2 independent instances of the
slow-scan recorder can be created.
Continuous recorder
The SIPROTEC 7KE85 has up to 5 continuous recorders. They are
used for data acquisition of analog parameters and internally
calculated measured values over longer time frames. This makes
it possible to perform an exact long-term analysis of the system
behavior.
An average value is formed over an adjustable time range and
stored in memory for each recorded quantity of the continuous
recorder. Each of these recorders can be activated separately.
The user can set the available storage capacity in the ring
archive specifically for each recorder.
Trend recorder
The SIPROTEC 7KE85 has up to 2 trend recorders that are used
for long-term recording and monitoring of the process of
voltage change within parameterizable tolerance ranges. The
flicker measurement can be determined and stored in the trend
recorder. The trend recorder can also be used as sequence-of-
events recorder. The sequence-of-events or status change of
binary signals, GOOSE messages, or messages (SPS) for example
is stored in chronological sequence in the recorder. The user can
set the available storage capacity in the ring archive specifically
for each recorder.
Common Data Class
(IEC 61850)
Pre-Trigger Time
(Max.)
Seal-in Time (Max.) Sampling/Resolution Posting Time
Fast-scan recorder
SMV/MV 3 s 90 s 1 kHz to 16 kHz –
SPS 3 s 90 s 1 ms –
Slow-scan recorder
MV 90 s 5400 s MVs every 10 ms 1 period to 3000 per
iods
SPS 90 s 5400 s 1 ms -
Continuous recorder MV – – MVs every 10 ms 1 s to 900 s
Trend recorder SPS – – – –
MV – – – –
SMV = Sample Measured Values
SPS = Single Point Status
MV = Measured Values
Table 2.17/1 Overview of the Recorders
Trigger Functions
The event-triggered recorders (fast-scan and slow-scan) have a
large number of analog and binary triggers that enable the user
to record the particular system problem exactly and avoid
unnecessary recordings. The input signals are thus queried
corresponding to the trigger conditions and start the fault
recording. In the SIPROTEC 7KE85, all triggers can also be
assigned multiple times to the various recorders.
Analog trigger
The analog triggers are essentially subdivided into level triggers
and gradient triggers. Level triggers monitor measurands for
conformity to the configured limiting values (min/max). As soon
2.17

as the measurand exceeds or falls below the respective limiting
value, the trigger is tripped. Gradient triggers respond to the
level change over time.
Each analog trigger can be configured as primary, secondary, or
percentage value. A distinction is made here between
frequency, voltage, current, and power triggers. With current
and voltage as trigger variables, it is possible to select between
fundamental, RMS, or symmetric components.
Binary trigger
A binary trigger starts a recording via the logical status change
of a binary signal. Along with the manual trigger, which can be
tripped via the device keypad, DIGSI 5, or any IEC 61850 client
(for example, SICAM PAS/PQS), the triggering can occur via
binary input (external trigger) or IEC 61850 GOOSE messages
via the communication network. The logic triggers are imple-
mented via the powerful graphical logic editor (CFC). In this
case, the free combination of all available analog values (abso-
lute values or phases), binary signals, Boolean signals, GOOSE
messages, single-point and double-point indications is possible
via Boolean or arithmetic operations.
As a user, you can thus set the trigger conditions appropriate for
your problem and start the recording.
2.17

ANSI Function Abbr.
Available
1 2 3 4
Expandable hardware quantity structure I/O ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
V8.0)
PB client ■
module, from V8.0)
MU ■
MU ■
■
Measured values, standard ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Measured values, extended: Min, max, average ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
CFC (standard, control) ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
CFC arithmetic ■
Circuit breaker ■
Fault recording of analog and binary signals ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Monitoring ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
FSR Fast-scan recorder FSR ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
SSR Slow-scan recorder SSR ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Change request Continuous recorder Change request ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
TR Trend recorder TR ■
PQR Power Quality recordings (functions) PQR ■
Split bar for harmonic and interharmonic compo-
nents (starting with V8.01)
■
Sequence-of-events recorder SOE ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
ExTrFct Expanded trigger functions ExTrFkt ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
V7.8)
■
protocol
■
■
Function point class: 0 0 0 0
Table 2.17/2 SIPROTEC 7KE85 – Functions, Application Templates
(1) Fault recorder 4 V / 4 I / 11 BI
(2) Fault recorder 8 V / 11 BI
Hints on ANSI PQR: 150 function points per measuring point /
One measuring point = 4 V and 4 I
2.17

Standard Variants for SIPROTEC 7KE85
N1 1/3 x 19", 4 V, 4 I, 11 BI, 9 BO
11 binary inputs
N2 1/3 x 19", 8 V, 11 BI, 3 BO
8 voltage-transformer inputs,
11 binary inputs,
N5 1/2 x 19", 8 V, 8 I, 19 BI, 15 BO
19 binary inputs
N6 1 x 19", 20 V, 20 I, 43 BI, 33 BO
43 binary inputs
You can find the technical data of the device in the manual:
2.17

Description
The new merging unit SIPROTEC 6MU85 has been universally
designed based on the flexible SIPROTEC 5 system for conven-
tional and non-conventional instrument transformers (LPIT) and
enables all primary data to be digitized close to the process.
SIPROTEC 5 process-bus solutions enable a wide range of imple-
mentation options and migration concepts for new and existing
systems.
Main function Merging Unit,
Circuit-breaker and disconnector-switch func-
tions,
Backup protection functions,
Additional functions
Communication Up to 4 sampled measured value streams
according to IEC 61850-9-2LE or
IEC 61850-9-2/IEC 61869 flexible streams
can be added
Standard Coated modules
Benefits
• Can be adjusted to a wide range of current transformer,
voltage transformer, and low-power instrument transformer
(LPIT) sensors 4
• The number of binary inputs and outputs can be scaled.
• It can be expanded by a second row.
• Direct High-speed circuit-breaker tripping < 1 ms
• Additional data acquisition (temperature, pressure, tap-
changer setting, ...)
paper requirements
Functions
Merging Unit
• 1 or 2 sampled measured value streams per ETH-BD-2FO
Ethernet module
– Up to 32 analog values in every combination of current and
voltage measured values or
– 4 x current, 4 x voltage (IEC 61850-9-2LE)
• Up to 4 ETH-BD-2FO modules possible
• Reliable and redundant data transmission via PRP
• Compliant with IEC 61869-9, IEC 61869-13
• IEC 61850-8-1 GOOSE, MMS, and Merging Unit protocol on
the same Ethernet module
• Measured value and date/time synchronization via
IEEE 1588v2/PTP
• Redundant power supply
• Expanded temperature ranges (-40 ºC to 70 ºC)
Circuit-breaker and disconnector-switch functions
• Control system with switchgear interlocking
• Circuit-breaker failure protection (50BF)
• Circuit-breaker wear monitoring
• Switching statistics
• Point-on-wave switching (PoW)
• Trip-circuit supervision (74TC)
• Automatic reclosing (79)
• Synchrocheck (25)
Backup protection functions
• Non-directional overcurrent protection (50/51, 50N/51N)
• Directional overcurrent protection (67/67N)
• Overvoltage and undervoltage protection (27/59)
Additional protection functions
• Arc protection
• Utility functions for simple commissioning and tests
• Temperature acquisition using a TR1200 RTD unit
(7XV5662-6AD10 or 7XV5662-8AD10)
• 4-mA to 20-mA measuring input for a wide range of analog
process values, for example, pressure, tap-changer setting
4 In preparation
[SIP5_OD_o.LED_W3, 2, --_--]
Figure 2.18/1 Merging Unit SIPROTEC 6MU85
Merging Unit – SIPROTEC 6MU85
2.18

Communication
• Pluggable communication modules, usable for different and
redundant protocols (IEC 61850-8-1, IEC 61850-9-2 Merging
Unit, IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 60870-5-104, Modbus TCP, DNP3
serial and TCP, PROFINET IO, PROFINET IO S2 redundancy)
chain topology.
access
Applications
Merging Unit for
• Analog measured values and digital inputs and outputs
• Centralized merging unit for transformer process-data acquisi-
tion
• Centralized protection
• Bay units for decentralized busbar protection
• Process-bus fault recorder
• Centralized synchrocheck
2.18

Application templates are available in DIGSI 5 for applications of
device 6MU85. The application templates contain the basic
configurations, required functions, and default settings.
merging unit 6MU85 in the DIGSI 5 function library:
• Basic application template 6MU85 Merging Unit
• Application template 6MU85 Merging Unit – 4I
• Application template 6MU85 Merging Unit – 4I, 4U
• Appl. template 6MU85 Merging Unit – 4I, 4U, overcurrent
protection
• Application template 6MU85 Merging Unit – 8I
[dw_centr-trans-prot_with_one_merging_6MU85, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.18/2 Centralized Transformer Protection with a 6MU85 Merging Unit
2.18

[dw_centr-trans-prot_with_3-merging_6MU85, 1, en_US]
Figure 2.18/3 Centralized Transformer Protection with 3 6MU85 Merging Units
2.18

ANSI Function Abbr.
Available
1
Expandable hardware quantity structure I/O ■ ■
V8.0)
PB client ■
module, from V8.0)
MU ■ ■
MU ■
V< ■
V2>; V2/V1> ■
50BF Circuit-breaker failure protection 1-pole/3-pole CBFP ■
■
V> ■
79 Automatic reclosing, 1-pole/3-pole AREC ■
86 Lockout ■ ■
■
■
CD-3FO)
■
Measured values, standard ■ ■
2.18

ANSI Function Abbr.
Available
1
■
■
■
■
CFC (standard, control) ■ ■
CFC arithmetic ■
Control ■ ■
Circuit breaker ■ ■
Fault recording of analog and binary signals ■ ■
Monitoring ■ ■
V7.8)
■
protocol
■
■
Table 2.18/1 SIPROTEC 6MU85 – Functions, Application Templates
(1) Merging Unit
2.18

Standard Variants for SIPROTEC 6MU85
AJ1 1/3 x 19", 4 I, 11 BI, 9 BO
no display
11 binary inputs
Contains the modules: base module with PS201 and IO201
Communication module ETH-BD-2FO
AJ2 1/3 x 19", 4 V, 4 I, 11 BI, 9 BO
no display
11 binary inputs
AJ3 1/3 x 19", 8 I, 7 BI, 7 BO
no display
7 binary inputs
2.18

SIPROTEC 5 System
3

Due to the modular design of the hardware and software,
as well as the functional integration, SIPROTEC 5 devices
are suited for all tasks in the energy sector.
The SIPROTEC 5 devices include:
• Protection
• Control and automation
• Supervision and monitoring
• Data acquisition and logging
• Communication and cyber security
• Test and diagnostics
Due to the modular design of the hardware and software and
the high-performance engineering tool DIGSI 5, SIPROTEC 5 is
ideally suitable for protection, automation, measurement, and
monitoring tasks for the operation and monitoring of modern
power systems.
The devices are not only protection and electronic control units;
their performance enables them to assure functional integration
of desired depth. For example, they can also perform moni-
toring, synchrophasor measurement (phasor measurement),
powerful fault recording, a wide range of measuring functions,
and much more, in parallel, and they have been designed to
facilitate future extensions.
SIPROTEC 5 provides extensive, precise data acquisition and data
logging on bay level for these functions. In connection with its
communication flexibility, this expands the field of application
and opens up a wide variety of possibilities in meeting require-
ments for present and future power systems. With SIPROTEC 5,
you are on the safe side for your application. The following
figure shows the possible functional expansion of a
SIPROTEC 5 device.
[dw_funktionale-Integration, 4, en_US]
Figure 3.1/1 Possible Functional Expansion of SIPROTEC 5 Devices
Faster results with application templates
A common function library provides all protection, automation,
monitoring, and auxiliary functions for the SIPROTEC 5 line
protection devices. The same functions are the same for all
devices. Once established, configurations can be transmitted
from device to device. This results in substantially reduced engi-
neering effort.
DIGSI 5 provides predefined application templates for every
device type. These contain basic configurations, required func-
tions, and default settings. In addition, you can save a device as
a master template in a user-defined library and reuse it as a
template for your typical applications. This saves time and
money. Saving user-defined application templates is possible.
Figure 3.1/2 shows an example of a transformer in a system
configuration in which the functions in the application template
are combined into function groups (FGs). The function groups
correspond to the primary components (protected object, trans-
former side 1, transformer side 2, neutral point, transformer;
circuit breaker switching devices) thereby simplifying the direct
reference to the actual system. For example, if your switchgear
includes 2 circuit breakers, this is also represented by 2 "Circuit
breaker" function groups.
SIPROTEC 5 System
3.1

Figure 3.1/2 Transformer Protection
Instrument and Protection-Class Current Transformers
The flexibility of the SIPROTEC 5 family enables even greater
functional integration and parallel processing of an wide range
of functions. The modular hardware enables an application-
specific device configuration. If you also want to use the
Synchrophasor measurement function, that is, the high-preci-
sion acquisition of current and voltage phasors and the variables
derived from them such as power and frequency, this function
can be assigned to the measuring input. Another possible appli-
cation is monitoring power quality characteristic key values.
Figure 3.1/3 shows the connection to an instrument transformer
and protection-class current transformer for a feeder. The neces-
sary protection functions are assigned to the protection-class
current transformer and the measuring functions are assigned
to the instrument transformer according to the application.
The high-precision measured values and status information
provided by the SIPROTEC 5 devices can be transmitted to auto-
mation systems such as a SICAM substation automation tech-
nology and power systems control or central analysis systems
(for example, SIGUARD PDP) via the high-performance cimmuni-
cations system. In particular, the control and monitoring of
intelligent power systems require information from power
generators (conventional or renewable energy) and from
consumers (line feeders). The required information may be
measured values, switching states, or messages from protection
and monitoring functions. In addition to performing local
protection, control, and monitoring tasks, the
SIPROTEC 5 devices are an excellent data source. The flexible
communication among the devices enables them to be
combined in various communication topologies. In this context,
the widely used Ethernet-based communications standard
IEC 61850 offers many advantages.
SIPROTEC 5 System
3.1

[dw_Anschl_Feldgeraete, 1, en_US]
Figure 3.1/3 Connection of Bay Units to Instrument Transformers and
Protection-Class Current Transformers
The modular, flexible structure of the hardware and
software ensures perfectly customized solutions for all
your requirements in the power system.
With SIPROTEC 5, you have flexibility throughout the entire
product lifecycle and your investment is thus protected.
SIPROTEC 5 System
3.1

Protection
[dw_schutz, 4, en_US]
Figure 3.2/1 SIPROTEC 5 – Functional Integration – Protection
SIPROTEC 5 provides all the necessary protection functions to
address reliability and security of power systems and their
components. System configurations in multiple busbars and
breaker-and-a-half layouts are both supported. The functions are
based on decades of experience in using systems, including
suggestions from the Siemens customers.
The modular, functional structure of SIPROTEC 5 allows excep-
tional flexibility and a perfect adaptation of the protection func-
tionality to the conditions of the system and is still capable of
further changes in the future.
The available device functions are described in the following
sections.
The Distance Protection Function (ANSI 21, 21N) – Classical
Method
SIPROTEC 5 provides a 6-system distance protection featuring
algorithms that have been proven in previously supplied
SIPROTEC protection devices. This method of measurement is
referred to as the "classical method".
By parallel calculation and monitoring of all 6 impedance loops,
a high degree of responsivity and selectivity is achieved for all
types of faults. All methods of neutral-point treatment (arc-
suppression-coil-ground system, isolated, solidly or low-impe-
dance grounded) are reliably handled. Depending on the respec-
tive device type, 1-pole and 3-pole tripping are possible. The
distance protection is suitable for cables and overhead lines with
or without series compensation.
The device offers quadrilateral characteristics as well as MHO
zone characteristics. The characteristics can be used separately
for phase and ground faults.
Thus, high-impedance ground faults can, for instance, be
covered with the polygonal zone characteristics and phase faults
with the MHO characteristic. The evaluation of quadrature
voltages and the use of a voltage memory make optimal direc-
tion determination possible.
Polygonal zone characteristics
The polygonal zone characteristic permits separate setting of
the reactance X and the resistance R. The resistance portion R
can be set separately for errors with or without ground involve-
ment. This characteristic is therefore best suited for detecting
high-impedance errors. Applications with a reactance radius per
zone depending on the ground fault can be covered as well by
simply using additional distance zones. Each distance zone can
be set separately to operate for ground faults only, for phase
faults only, or for all fault types.
The distance zones can be set forward, backward, or non-direc-
tional (Figure 3.2/2).
[Dw_polygonale-zone, 1, en_US]
Figure 3.2/2 Polygonal Zone Characteristics with the Example
of 4 Zones
MHO zone characteristics
With the MHO zone characteristics, the MHO circle expansion
guarantees safe and selective protection behavior for all types of
faults. The circle expands to the source impedance but never
more than the selected impedance radius. Figure 3.2/3 shows
the characteristics for a forward fault.
SIPROTEC 5 System
Protection – Functions
3.2

[Dw_MHO-zone, 1, en_US]
Figure 3.2/3 MHO Zone Characteristics, for Example, with 6 Zones
Selectable number of distance zones
The number of distance zones can be adapted freely according
to the application requirements. For functions that use a
dependent zone, for example the permissive overreach transfer
trip scheme, all parameterized zones from the distance protec-
tion are available (the usage of the zone in the distance protec-
tion itself is not affected by this). Each distance zone has its own
timer, separately dedicated to 1-phase and multi-phase errors.
Thus, the new flexibility of the SIPROTEC 5 device family allows
optimal adaptation to each application. The distance protection
will always provide the exact number of required distance
zones.
Load zone
In order to guarantee reliable differentiation between load oper-
ation and short circuit – especially on long lines under large
loads –, an adjustable load range is used. Impedances within
this load range do not result in unwanted tripping in the
distance zones.
4 pickup methods
The following pickup methods can be used optionally:
• Overcurrent pickup I>>>
• Voltage-dependent overcurrent pickup V/I
• Voltage-dependent and phase-angle-dependent overcurrent
pickup V/I φ
• Impedance pickup Z<
Absolute phase selectivity
The distance-protection function incorporates a well-proven,
highly sophisticated phase-selection algorithm. The pickup of
healthy phases due to the negative effect of the short-circuit
currents and voltages in other phases is reliably eliminated. This
phase-selection algorithm makes appropriate trip decisions and
ensures correct distance measurement in a wide field of applica-
tion.
Arrangements for breaker-and-a-half layout
When the cores of the 2 current transformers are connected in
parallel, the resulting measured current will be the sum of the
2 currents flowing in the current transformers. This summation
current corresponds to the current flowing into the feeder and is
therefore used for the power protection functions and other
functions. This method is commonly used. SIPROTEC 5 devices
provide sufficient measuring inputs to connect 2 or several sets
of CTs separately to the device. In this case, the summation is
carried out in software internally. The distance-protection func-
tion detects possible saturation of only 1 of the current trans-
formers and can thus prevent unwanted pickup in case of an
external error with high current flowing. Through the separately
measured currents, separate circuit-breaker failure protection
functions can be activated for both switches. Moreover, the
separately measured currents allow a complete differential
protection for the "end zone" between the current transformers
if the feeder is switched off (see STUB differential protection,
ANSI 87-STUB).
Parallel-line compensation
Wrong distance-protection measurements due to the effect of
parallel lines can be compensated by detecting the parallel-line
ground current. Parallel-line compensation can be used for
distance protection as well as for fault location.
Load compensation
The distance-protection function provides options to compen-
sate the load influence on the radius measurement.
Elimination of disturbance variables
Digital filters render the classic distance-protection function
immune to disturbance variables contained in the measured
values. In particular, the influence of DC components, capacitive
voltage transformers, and frequency changes is considerably
reduced. A special method of measurement is used in order to
assure selectivity of protection during current-transformer satu-
ration.
Measuring-voltage failure detection
Tripping the distance protection is blocked automatically in the
event of a measuring-voltage outage, thus preventing
unwanted tripping. Distance protection is blocked if 1 of the
voltage monitoring functions or the auxiliary contact of the
voltage-transformer circuit breaker picks up. In this case, the
EMERGENCY definite-time overcurrent protection can be acti-
vated.
Distance Protection with the Reactance Method (RMD)
(ANSI 21, 21N)
Under extreme conditions, load currents and high fault resis-
tances can influence the selectivity. The distance protection
with the reactance method (RMD) function reduces the unfavor-
able influence of high fault resistances at high loads.
Load compensation is a part of the principle
If the electrical power system shows inhomogeneities, for
example, different impedance angles of the infeeds, this can
SIPROTEC 5 System
3.2

also affect the radius of the distance protection. The reactance
method compensates this influence via adjustable compensa-
tion angles.
The distance-protection function with the reactance method
(RMD):
• Works in power systems with a grounded neutral point
• Is a selective short-circuit protection for lines and cables
supplied from one or more ends in radial, looped, or meshed
power systems
• Is used as a backup protection for busbars, transformers, and
other lines
• Is suitable for use at all voltage levels
The distance-protection function with the reactance method
(RMD) can be used additionally or as an alternative for the
distance-protection function with the classical method.
The polygonal zone characteristic permits separate setting for
the reactance X and the fault resistance RF. Each distance zone
can be configured separately to operate for ground faults only,
for phase faults only or for all fault types. All distance zones can
be set forward, backward, or non-directional.
The RMD function calculates up to 7 impedance loops A-gnd, B-
gnd, C-gnd, A-B, B-C, C-A, and A-B-C. The pickup method is the
impedance pickup Z<. The evaluation of healthy voltages, the
use of a voltage memory, and the evaluation of delta values and
symmetric components allow the optimal direction determina-
tion.
MHO zone characteristics
With the MHO zone characteristics, the MHO circle expansion
guarantees safe and selective protection behavior. The circle
expands to the source impedance but never more than the
selected impedance radius. As an alternative to the quadrilateral
zone characteristics, the RMD function for phase errors with
MHO zone characteristics can be used if there are requirements
for the compatibility with existing distance-protection systems.
Selectable number of distance zones
The number of distance zones can be adapted freely according
to the application requirements.
Load zone
In order to guarantee reliable differentiation between load oper-
ation and short circuit – especially on long lines under large
loads –, an adjustable load range is used. Impedances within
this load range do not result in unwanted tripping in the
distance zones.
Absolute phase selectivity
The distance-protection function with reactance method (RMD)
includes a highly sophisticated algorithm for the adaptive loop
selection. Different loop-selection criteria are processed in
parallel. The loop-selection criteria work with jump detection,
delta-value detection, symmetric components, and current,
voltage and impedance permissive overreach transfer trips. The
pickup of healthy phases due to the negative influence of short-
circuit currents and voltages in other phases is thus reliably elim-
inated. This adaptive loop-selection algorithm takes appropriate
trip decisions and ensures correct distance measurement in a
wide field of application.
Arrangements for breaker-and-a-half layout
The function RMD is just as suitable as the classical distance-
protection function for breaker-and-a-half layouts.
Parallel-line compensation
The RMD function can compensate the influences on the
distance measurements resulting from parallel lines by detec-
tion of the parallel-line ground current.
Elimination of disturbance variables
Digital filters make the RMD function insensitive to disturbance
variables in the measured values. In particular, the influence of
DC components, capacitive voltage transformers, and frequency
changes is considerably reduced. A special method of measure-
ment is used in order to assure selectivity of protection during
current-transformer saturation.
Measuring-Voltage Failure Detection
The measuring-voltage failure blocks the distance-protection
tripping automatically and thus prevents unwanted tripping.
The pickup of one of the voltage monitoring functions or of the
auxiliary contact of the voltage-transformer circuit breaker
blocks the RMD function and can activate the EMERGENCY defi-
nite-time overcurrent protection.
Impedance Protection for Transformers (ANSI 21T)
SIPROTEC 5 offers a 6-system impedance protection with up
to 4 impedance zones, especially for the use as backup protec-
tion on power transformers.
The function
• Protects transformers as backup protection for transformer
differential protection
• Is used as backup protection for the generator transformer
and the generator in power units
• Functions as backup protection in the event of reverse power
flow to faults in the upstream electrical power system beyond
a transformer
Depending on the application, the loop selection can be
controlled. In active grounded power systems, all 6 measuring
loops work independently of each other. The general release is
performed via the minimum current criterion. In non-active
grounded power systems (for example, generator protection),
the measuring-loop selection is controlled by an overcurrent
pickup with undervoltage stability.
By using the frequency-tracked sampled values, the impedance
is measured over a broad frequency range. This is advantageous
for island networks or power units, for example, for startup
operations.
The polygonal zone characteristic permits separate setting of
the reactance X and the resistance R for phase-to-ground and
phase-to-phase loops. The quadrilateral characteristic is a
rectangle in the impedance plane. Within the function, a
maximum of 4 impedance zones can be operated simultane-
SIPROTEC 5 System
3.2

ously They can be set forward, backward, or non-directional.
Each impedance zone has its own timer.
Direction determination
The direction is determined with saved prefault voltages or with
negative-sequence variables.
Measuring-voltage failure detection
The quadrilateral operate curve permits separate setting of the
reactance X and the resistance R for phase-to-ground and phase-
to-phase loops. The quadrilateral characteristic is a rectangle in
the impedance plane. Within the function, a maximum
of 4 impedance zones can be operated simultaneously They can
be set forward, backward, or non-directional. Each impedance
zone has its own timer.
Overexcitation Protection (ANSI 24)
The overexcitation protection is used for detecting high induc-
tion values in generators and transformers. It protects the equip-
ment from excessive thermal loads.
The induction is recorded indirectly by the evaluation of the
V/Hz ratio. Overvoltage leads to excessive magnetizing currents,
while underfrequency leads to higher losses when resetting the
magnetization.
There is a danger of overexcitation if the power system is
disconnected and the voltage and frequency control function in
the remaining system does not react quickly or the power unbal-
ance is excessive.
Within this function, the following maximum number of stages
can be operated simultaneously: 1 dependent stage with user-
defined characteristics and 2 independent stages.
Synchrocheck, Synchronization Function (ANSI 25)
When 2 subsystems or a live equipment are connected to the
power system, the systems must be synchronous with one
another at the moment of connection. The synchronization
function monitors this requirement.
The synchronization function can be used for synchronous
power systems (galvanically coupled, no frequency difference)
as well as for asynchronous power systems (galvanically sepa-
rated, frequency difference present).
It has 3 operating modes:
• Synchrocheck (monitoring of voltage difference, frequency
difference, and phase-angle difference)
• Switching of synchronous power systems (control of equality
of frequency, voltage difference, and phase-angle difference
and continuity over a time frame)
• Switching of asynchronous power systems (voltage and
frequency difference, connection to the synchronization point
considering the circuit-breaker closing time).
Evaluation of the frequency difference causes the function to
switch automatically between the synchronous and asynchro-
nous power system functions. The synchrocheck function can be
used for pure monitoring.
The relative parameters for synchronization are derived from
voltage transformers (arranged to the left and right on the
circuit breaker). Depending on the available number of voltage-
transformer inputs, 1 or 2 synchronizing points (circuit breakers)
can be processed.
Several functions can be used per device. For these functions,
up to 2 parameter sets (stages) can be used for the synchro-
check and up to 6 parameter sets (stages) for the synchroniza-
tion function. This enables the device to always react to
different power system or plant conditions with the correct
synchronization parameters.
Adjusting Commands for the Automatic Synchronization
(ANSI 25)
The synchronization function ensures a synchronous switching
of the generator circuit breaker. Automatic synchronization is
possible via the output of the adjusting commands to the speed
or voltage controller. If the synchronization conditions are not
met, the function automatically issues adjusting signals.
Depending on the operating state, these are commands (step
up/down) to voltage or speed controllers (frequency control-
lers). The adjusting signals are proportional to the voltage or
frequency difference. This means that with a greater voltage or
frequency difference, longer adjusting commands are issued.
The gradient is adjustable. Between the adjusting commands,
there is a wait during a set dead time to settle the status
change. A quick adaptation of the generator voltage or
frequency to the target conditions is achieved with this method.
If frequency equality is established during the synchronization of
generators with the power system (stationary synchrophasor),
then a kick pulse ensures a status change.
If a voltage adaptation via the tap changer is desired, a defined
control pulse is issued.
Monitoring of the induction (V/f value) ensures that the continu-
ously permissible limiting value of V/f = 1.1 is not exceeded
when the adjusting commands are issued (for example,
"increase" voltage, "reduce speed").
Undervoltage Protection (ANSI 27)
The undervoltage protection monitors the permissible voltage
range or protects equipment from subsequent damage due to
undervoltage. It can be used in the power system for decoupling
or load-shedding tasks.
Various undervoltage protection functions are available. By
default, 2 stages are preconfigured. Up to 3 identical stages are
possible. The undervoltage protection functions can be blocked
by means of a current criterion.
SIPROTEC 5 System
3.2

The following functions are available:
• Undervoltage protection with 3-phase voltage
– Optionally, measurement of phase-to-phase voltages or
phase-to-ground voltages
– Methods of measurement: optionally, measurement of the
fundamental component or of the RMS value (true RMS
value).
• Undervoltage protection with positive-sequence voltage
– 2-phase short circuits or ground faults lead to an unbal-
anced voltage collapse. In comparison to phase-related
measuring systems, such events have no noticeable impact
on the positive-sequence voltage. Therefore, this function
particularly suitable for the assessment of stability prob-
lems.
– Methods of Measurement: Calculation of positive-sequence
voltage from the measured phase-to-ground voltages.
• Undervoltage protection with any voltage
– Detection of any 1-phase undervoltage for special applica-
tions
– Methods of Measurement: optionally, measurement of the
fundamental component or of the RMS value (true RMS
value).
• Rate-of-voltage change protection dV/dt
– Detects system states that are not secure caused by an
unbalance between generated and consumed active power
– Can be used as a criterion for load-shedding applications
Reactive-Power Undervoltage Protection (QU Protection)
The reactive-power undervoltage protection (QU protection)
represents a system protection for power-system disconnection.
To avoid a voltage collapse in energy systems, the energy
producing side, for example a generator, should be provided
with voltage and frequency protection devices. An under-
voltage-controlled reactive power direction protection (QU
protection) is required at the power-system interconnection
point. The QU protection detects critical power-system situa-
tions and ensures that the power-generation system is discon-
nected from the power system. It also ensures that reconnection
only takes place if the network conditions are stable. The criteria
for this are parameterizable and can be found in the document
Technical directive for generating plants on the medium-
voltage power system (BDEW, June 2008) and in the "FNN
requirement specification reactive power direction undervoltage
protection (FNN, Feb 2010)".
Power Protection (ANSI 32, 37)
The power protection works on a 3-phase basis and detects
exceedance or underrunning of the set active-power or reactive-
power thresholds (Figure 3.2/4). Predefined power limits are
monitored and corresponding warning indications are issued.
The power direction can be determined by measuring the angle
of the active power. Thus, for example, reverse energization in
the power systems or at electric machines can be detected.
Machines in idle state (motors, generators) are detected and can
be shut down via a message.
The power protection can be integrated into any automation
solution, for example, to monitor very specific power limits
(further logical processing in CFC).
The power protection function comes with a factory-set stage
each for the active power and the reactive power. A maximum
of 4 active-power stages and 4 reactive-power stages can be
operated simultaneously in the function. The stages have an
identical structure.
You can define thresholds for exceedance or underrunning of
the power lines. The combination of the different stages via CFC
result in various applications.
• Detection of negative active power. In this case, the reverse-
power protection can be applied using the CFC to link power
protection outputs to the "direct tripping" function.
• Detection of capacitive reactive power. If overvoltage is
detected due to long lines under no-load conditions, it is
possible to select the lines where capacitive reactive power is
measured.
[dw_Wirk_Blind_KL, 1, en_US]
Figure 3.2/4 Active-Power Characteristic Curve and Reactive-Power
Characteristic Curve
SIPROTEC 5 System
3.2

Reverse-Power Protection (ANSI 32R)
The reverse-power protection is used in generators and power
units. If the mechanical energy (for example, steam supply at
the turbine) fails, the generator obtains the driving energy from
the power system. In this operating state, the turbine can be
damaged, which is prevented by tripping of the reverse-power
protection. In order to react quicker if there is a steam outage,
the position of the quick-stop valve is coupled additionally via
binary input. It is used to switch between 2 time delays of the
trip command. Furthermore, the function is used for operational
disconnection (sequential circuit) of generators.
For other applications, the universal power protection
(ANSI 32, 37) is recommended.
The reverse-power protection works on a 3-phase basis and
monitors the absorbed active power (negative threshold value).
By evaluating the positive-sequence system power and selecting
a long measuring window, the function is insensitive to distur-
bance variables and very precise (minimum setting threshold:
-0.3 % P/Srated). The measuring accuracy is substantially affected
by the angle error. Because the SIPROTEC 5 devices are compen-
sated, the primary transformers affect the measuring accuracy.
The function can correct the angle error: You can find the angle
error in the test report of the transformer or it can be measured
using the primary system. The problem with the angle error is
bypassed if high-precision instrument transformers are used as
primary transformers (class 0.2 or 0.1). For this purpose, the
reverse-power protection should be assigned to an independent
measuring module.
Power-Plant Disconnection (ANSI 32 dP/dt; 27, 50)
3-phase close-up faults result in electrical and mechanical
stresses on the turbo-generator unit. The determining criterion
for the magnitude of the mechanical stress to be expected on a
turbo-generator unit is the negative active-power jump ΔP,
because torque and active power are proportional to each other.
The sudden force release results in an acceleration of the rotor.
At the same time, the phase situation and amplitude of the
synchronous generated voltage changes. These changes occur
on a delayed basis corresponding to the inertia constant of the
machine and the magnitude of the active-power change. The
longer this state persists, the more critical the stress on the
generator becomes when there is a sudden voltage recovery. It
is then possible to compare the effects of the subsequent opera-
tion more or less to a missynchronization. If the power system
protection does not trip the high-current short circuits close to
the power plant within the defined quick-operating time, the
stress mentioned in the preceding sections can occur.
The power-plant disconnection function intervenes in this case
and opens the main switch on the upper-voltage side. After fault
clearing, the block can be resynchronized with the paralleling
device.
The protection function evaluates the negative active-power
jump of the positive-sequence system power. This is derived
from the 3-phase voltage and current measured values. After an
admissible time delay (to be specified by the turbo-generator
unit manufacturer), the trip command is issued. Overcurrent
and undervoltage pickups act as additional restraining quanti-
ties. Additionally, the generator must be operated before with a
minimum active power and fall below an active power
threshold.
[dw_7UM8_kraftwerksentkuppl, 1, en_US]
Figure 3.2/5 Setup of the Function and Principal Logic
Undercurrent Protection (ANSI 37)
Undercurrent protection detects the falling edge or decreasing
current flow. This may be due to switching operations, for
example, from a higher-level circuit breaker, or by decreasing
loads, for example, pumps running empty.
In both situations, it may be necessary to open the local circuit
breaker in order to prevent consequential damage. The under-
current protection handles this task.
The function consists of an undercurrent stage with a current-
independent time delay. A maximum of 2 stages can be oper-
ated in parallel.
Optionally, the auxiliary contacts of the local circuit breaker are
evaluated in order to prevent overfunction.
Temperature Supervision (ANSI 38)
The temperatures (for example winding or oil temperatures) are
recorded via an external temperature-supervision device. Typical
sensors are Pt 100, Ni 100, and Ni 120. The temperatures are
transmitted via serial or Ethernet interfaces for protection and
monitored in the temperature-supervision function to ensure
that they do not exceed set limiting values. There are
2 threshold values per temperature measuring point. The func-
tion is designed so that the temperatures from up to 12 meas-
uring points can be processed. The integrated broken-wire
detection sends an alarm indication depending on the meas-
uring point.
Underexcitation Protection (ANSI 40)
The generator capability diagram describes the stability limits. In
the per-unit view, it can be transformed easily into an admit-
tance diagram by changing the axis labels. The underexcitation
protection monitors the stability limits and prevents damage in
the generator by out-of-step conditions (asynchronous opera-
tion) as a result of problems with the excitation or voltage
control during underexcited operation.
The protection function offers 3 characteristics for monitoring
the static as well as dynamic stability. A quick protection reac-
tion is achieved via binary trip initiation if there is an excitation
outage and short-time tripping is enabled. Alternatively, the
excitation voltage can be measured by a measuring transducer
and the release signal for falling below the threshold value can
be evaluated. The characteristic-curve lines enable an optimal
adaptation of the generator protection diagram (see Figure
SIPROTEC 5 System
3.2

3.2/6). The setting values can be read directly from the per-unit
view of the diagram.
The admittance is calculated from the positive-sequence varia-
bles of the 3-phase currents and voltages. This guarantees
correct behavior of the protection function even under unbal-
anced power system conditions. If the voltage deviates from the
rated voltage, the admittance calculation provides the
advantage that the characteristics run in the same direction as
the generator capability diagram shifts.
[dw_charac-underexcitation-protection, 1, en_US]
Figure 3.2/6 Characteristic of the Underexcitation Protection
Unbalanced-Load Protection (ANSI 46)
Asymmetrical current loading of the 3 windings of a generator
result in heat buildup in the rotor because of the developing
reverse field. The protection detects an asymmetrical loading of
3-phase current machines. It operates on the basis of symmetric
components. The protection function evaluates the negative-
sequence current and prevents thermal overloading of the rotor
of electric machines (generators, motors). The thermal behavior
is modeled using the integral method.
The following equation forms the basis of the protection func-
tion.
[fo_Schieflastschutz, 1, en_US]
With
K Constant of the machine (5 s to 40 s)
I2 Negative-sequence current
I N, M Rated current of the machine
An inverse-time characteristic curve results as the operate curve.
Small unbalanced load currents result in longer tripping times.
To prevent overfunction in case of large unbalanced load
currents (for example, with asymmetrical short circuits), large
negative-sequence currents (approx. 10*I permissible) are
limited. In addition, the continuous additional unbalanced load
is monitored, and if the threshold is exceeded, an alarm indica-
tion is issued after a time delay.
Negative-Sequence System Overcurrent Protection (ANSI 46)
The protection function determines the negative-sequence
current from the phase currents. It can be related to the rated
object current or to the positive-sequence current (advanta-
geous for conductor break monitoring).
The negative-sequence system overcurrent protection can be
used with the transformer as a responsive backup protection on
the supply side for detecting low-current 1-pole and 2-pole
errors. Also low-voltage side, 1-phase errors can be detected
here, which create no zero-sequence system in the current on
the upper-voltage side (for example, in vector group Dyn).
With the negative-sequence overcurrent protection system,
various monitoring and protection tasks can be realized:
• Detection of 1-pole or 2-pole short circuits in the power
system with a higher responsivity than in classic overcurrent
protection (setting under rated object current).
• Detection of phase-conductor interruptions in the primary
system and in the current-transformer secondary circuits
• Location of short circuits or reversals in the connections to the
current transformers
• Indication of unbalanced states in the energy system
• Protection of electrical machines following unbalanced loads
that are caused by unbalanced voltages or conductor interrup-
tions (for example, through a defective fuse)
The function comes factory-set with 1 stage. A maximum of
6 stages can be operated simultaneously. If the device is
equipped with the inrush-current detection function, the stages
can be stabilized against tripping due to transformer inrush
currents.
Overcurrent Protection, Negative-Sequence System with
Direction (ANSI 46, 67)
The function overcurrent protection, negative-sequence system
with direction serves as the backup short-circuit protection for
unbalanced faults.
With the negative-sequence system, various monitoring and
protection tasks can be realized:
• Detection of 1-pole or 2-pole short circuits in the power
system with a higher responsivity than in classic overcurrent
protection.
• Detection of phase conductor interruptions in the primary
system and in the current-transformer secondary circuits
• Location of short circuits or reversals in the connections to the
• Indication of unbalanced states in the energy system
• Protection of electrical machines following unbalanced loads
that are caused by unbalanced voltages or conductor interrup-
tions (for example, through a defective fuse)
The function comes factory-set with 1 stage. A maximum
of 6 stages can be operated simultaneously. If the device is
equipped with the inrush-current detection function, the stages
can be stabilized against tripping due to transformer inrush
currents.
SIPROTEC 5 System
3.2

Overvoltage Protection Functions (ANSI 59, 47, 59N)
Overvoltages occur in long lines with little or no load, for
example. The overvoltage protection monitors the permissible
voltage range, protects equipment from subsequent damage
through overvoltages, and serves to decouple systems (for
example wind-energy infeeds).
Various overvoltage protection functions are available. By
default, 2 stages are configured. Up to 3 identical stages are
possible.
The following functions are available:
Overvoltage protection with 3-phase voltage (ANSI 59)
• Optionally, measurement of phase-to-phase voltages or
phase-to-ground voltages
• Measuring methods: optionally, measurement of the funda-
mental component or of the RMS value (true RMS value).
Overvoltage protection with positive-sequence voltage
(ANSI 59)
• Detecting symmetrical, stationary overvoltages with positive-
sequence voltage
• Method of measurement: Calculation of positive-sequence
voltage from the measured phase-to-ground voltages.
Overvoltage protection with positive-sequence voltage and
compounding in line protection (ANSI 59)
• Capacitive line impedances can lead to stationary overvol-
tages at the opposite end of the line (Ferranti effect).
• Method of measurement: The positive-sequence system of
the voltage is calculated at the other end of the line by means
of the local, measured voltages and current using the equiva-
lent circuit of the line.
Overvoltage protection with negative-sequence voltage
(ANSI 47)
• Monitoring the power system and electric machines for
voltage unbalance
• Method of measurement: Calculation of negative-sequence
voltage from the measured phase-to-ground voltages
Overvoltage protection with zero-sequence system/residual
voltage (ANSI 59N/64)
ground systems, as well as in electric equipment (for example
machines)
• Detection of the faulty phase (optional)
• Method of measurement: Measurement of the residual
voltage directly at the broken-delta winding or calculation of
the zero-sequence voltage from the phase-to-ground voltages
• Measuring methods: Optionally, measurement of the funda-
mental component (standard or with especially strong attenu-
ation of harmonics and transients) or of the RMS value
Overvoltage protection with any voltage (ANSI 59)
• Detection of any 1-phase overvoltage for special applications
• Measuring methods: optionally, measurement of the funda-
mental component or of the RMS value (true RMS value)
Starting Time Supervision (ANSI 48)
The starting time supervision protects the motor from too long
startup procedures. In particular, rotor-critical high-voltage
motors can quickly be heated above their limiting temperature
when multiple starting attempts occur in a short period of time.
If the durations of these starting attempts are prolonged for
example by excessive voltage surges during motor switching, by
excessive load torque, or by blocked rotor conditions, a trip
signal will be initiated by the protection device. Figure 3.2/7
shows the thermal characteristic curve of the function. Different
maximum starting times can be taken into account for starting
with the motor cold or hot.
[dwtherms-200712-03.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3.2/7 Thermal Characteristic Curve of the Starting Time Moni-
toring
Hotspot Calculation (ANSI 49H)
The hotspot calculation function protects the transformer wind-
ings from thermal destruction at higher operating currents.
The hotspot calculation considers IEC 60076-7 and
IEEE C57.91 standards and calculates 3 relevant variables for the
protection function:
• Hotspot temperature
• Relative aging
• Load margin until warning/alarm indication.
These parameters can be used to generate an alarm. The
hotspot temperature can also initiate a tripping. The calculation
of the hotspot temperature depends on the upper transformer
oil temperature, the cooling method, the power factor, the
transformer dimension, the oil and winding time constant, and
a few other factors according to IEC 60076-7 and IEEE C57.91.
The upper oil temperature is measured using temperature meas-
uring points. In this case, up to 12 temperature measuring
points can be transmitted to the protection device via a temper-
ature coupling. One of these measuring points can be selected
for the calculation of the hotspot temperature in the oil.
The customer can set the additional factors needed such as type
of cooling and transformer dimension in the function. The rela-
tive aging is recorded cyclically and added up to make a total
aging.
SIPROTEC 5 System
3.2

Stator Overload Protection (ANSI 49S)
The function of the thermal stator overload protection protects
the motor from thermal overload by monitoring the thermal
state of the stator.
The thermal stator overload protection calculates the overtem-
perature from the measured phase current according to a
thermal single-body model. The RMS value is determined for
each phase from the highly sampled current measured values
(8 kHz). Due to the wide frequency operating range, all parame-
ters that lead to heating are taken into account.
Stages
A current and thermal alarm stage is provided for the thermal
overload protection to initiate an alarm before tripping. The trip-
ping time characteristics are exponential functions according to
IEC 60255-8. The preload is considered in the tripping times for
overloads.
Startup Overcurrent Protection (ANSI 50)
Gas turbines are powered up via starting-frequency converters.
The startup overcurrent protection detects short circuits in the
low frequency range (from about 2 Hz to 3 Hz) and is designed
as a definite-time overcurrent protection. The pickup value is set
below the rated current. The function is only active during
startup (blocking by open circuit breaker of the starting-
frequency converter). At frequencies higher than 10 Hz, the
sampling-frequency tracking activates and then the other short-
circuit functions are active.
Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection (ANSI 50BF)
The circuit-breaker failure protection consists of 2 stages and
provides phase and ground backup protection if the main circuit
breaker fails to clear a power-system incident. If the fault
current is not interrupted after a time delay has expired, a retrip
command or the busbar trip command will be generated. The
correct circuit-breaker operation is monitored via current meas-
urement and via circuit-breaker position contacts. The current
detection logic is phase-segregated and can therefore also be
used in 1-pole tripping schemes.
The circuit-breaker failure protection can be initiated by all inte-
grated protection functions as well as by external devices via
binary input signals or by serial communication via GOOSE
messages in IEC 61850 systems. To increase operational relia-
bility, an external start can be applied with 2 binary inputs in
parallel. Various delays may take place for 1-pole and 3-pole
starting.
For applications with 2 current transformers per feeder, for
example, breaker-and-a-half, ring-bus or double circuit breaker
applications, the device can be configured with 2 independent
circuit-breaker failure protection functions.
External Trip Initiations
Any signals from external protection and monitoring devices can
be coupled in via binary inputs or serial communication. These
signals can then be included in message and trigger processing
or used to start a fault record. The trip initiation acts like a
protection function. The trip command may be delayed. 1-pole
tripping is available if the device and switch are capable of
1-pole disconnection. Thus the integration of mechanical
protection equipment (for example, pressure or oil-level moni-
tors or Buchholz protection) as well as protection devices
working in parallel is possible with no problems. Depending on
the application, you can select the required number of trip initia-
tions.
Instantaneous High-Current Tripping (ANSI 50HS)
When switching on a faulty line, immediate tripping is possible.
In the case of high fault currents, this overcurrent protection
with instantaneous tripping leads to a very fast tripping when
switching onto faults.
The function comes factory-set with 1 stage. A maximum of
2 stages can be operated simultaneously within the function.
The stages have an identical structure. Actual closure detection
takes place in the switch-position recognition. It activates
directly in case of manual closure or is automatically determined
from the measured values (current, voltage) or by means of the
circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts.
When used in the transformer, the current stage must be set
above the maximum short-circuit current or inrush current
flowing through.
End-Fault Protection (ANSI 50EF)
Without particular measures, the installation site of the current
transformer defines the measuring range of the differential
protection. If the circuit breaker is open, the section between
the current transformer and the circuit breaker can be optimally
protected by the end-fault protection. A recognized current in
the case of open circuit breaker indicates a fault in the affected
section. Through corresponding tripping of the surrounding
circuit breakers, the fault can be cleared.
Together with the busbar protection, the reaction to a fault is
dependent on the installation site of the current transformer. In
case of busbar-side current transformers, the immediate and
selective tripping of the busbar section occurs. In case of line-
side current transformers, the end-fault protection can, through
a transmission device, cause the tripping of the circuit breaker
on the opposite end.
Circuit-Breaker Restrike Protection (ANSI 50RS)
The circuit-breaker restrike protection function monitors the
circuit breaker for arc reignition, which may be triggered by
overvoltage at the circuit-breaker poles after disconnection of
the capacitor bank, for example. The function generates an
auxiliary trip signal in the event of a circuit-breaker reignition.
Instantaneous Tripping at Switch-onto Fault (SOTF)
This function is available for applications in which overcurrent
protection (50HS) is not sufficient or not used. It enables instan-
taneous tripping even with low fault currents. The function has
no measuring function of its own. It is linked on the input side
with the pickup (measurement) of another protection function,
for example, the stage of an overcurrent protection, and then
trips with switching to a short circuit. Typically, such protection
stages are configured that themselves trip with a delay. Actual
closure detection takes place in the switch-position recognition.
SIPROTEC 5 System
3.2

Load-Jam Protection (ANSI 50L)
The load-jam protection function serves to protect the motor
during sudden rotor blocking. Damage to drives, bearings, and
other mechanic motor components can be avoided and reduced
by means of quick motor shutdown.
The rotor blocking results in a current jump in the phases. The
current jump is detected by the function as a recognition charac-
teristic.
The thermal overload protection can also pick up as soon as the
configured threshold values of the thermal replica are exceeded.
The load-jam protection, however, is able to detect a blocked
rotor more quickly, thus reducing possible damage to the motor
and powered equipment.
Overcurrent Protection, Phases and Ground
(ANSI 50/51, 50N/51N)
The overcurrent protection functions for phases and ground
detect short circuits on electric equipment. The non-directional
overcurrent protection is suitable as main protection for single-
side infeed radial power systems or open ring systems. As a
backup or emergency overcurrent protection, it can be used
additionally to the main protection, for example, on lines or
transformers. With transformers, the preferred application is the
backup protection for downstream parts of the electrical power
system.
2 definite-time overcurrent protection stages and an inverse-
time overcurrent protection stage are preconfigured. Addi-
tional definite-time overcurrent protection stages, and 1 stage
with a user-defined characteristic curve can be configured
within this function.
All the usual characteristic curves according to IEC and ANSI/IEEE
are available for the inverse-time overcurrent protection stages,
see for example Figure 3.2/8.
Apart from the characteristic, the stages of the overcurrent
protection are structured identically.
• They can be blocked individually via binary input or by other
functions (for example, inrush-current detection, automatic
reclosing, cold-load pickup detection)
• Each stage can be stabilized against over-responding because
of transformer inrush currents
• Each stage can be operated as an alarm stage (no operate
indication)
• You can select either the measurement of the fundamental
component and the measurement of the RMS value for the
method of measurement
• The ground function evaluates the calculated zero-sequence
current (3I0) or the measured ground current
• Dropout delays can be set individually.
[dw_IEC-kennlinie, 1, en_US]
Figure 3.2/8 IEC Characteristic Curves of the “Normal Inverse" Type
Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase (ANSI 50N/51N)
With transformers, the preferred application is the backup
protection for the parts of the electrical power system
connected to the grounded star winding. The neutral-point
current of the transformer is thus processed directly. Alterna-
tively, the function can also be used as high-impedance
restricted ground-fault protection.
Tank leakage protection for insulated transformers is another
application.
The modular design and scope of the protection function are
identical to the overcurrent protection ground function
(ANSI 50N/51N).
Sensitive Ground-Current Protection (ANSI 50Ns/51Ns)
The sensitive ground-current protection function detects
ground-fault currents in isolated and arc-suppression-coil-
ground systems. It can also be used for special applications
where a highly sensitive current measurement is required.
Responses of protection devices and trippings can be saved in
the separate ground-fault log.
SIPROTEC 5 System
3.2

Intermittent Ground-Fault Protection
Intermittent (reigniting) faults occur due to insulation weak-
nesses in cables or due to the ingress of water into cable joints.
The faults will eventually go off by themselves or expand to
permanent short-circuits. During intermittent operation,
neutral-point resistors can be thermally overloaded in the case
of low-impedance grounded power systems. The normal
ground-fault protection cannot reliably detect and switch off the
current pulses that are sometimes very brief.
The necessary selectivity of protection in the case of intermit-
tent ground faults is achieved by adding up the single pulses
over time and tripping after a reached (adjustable) total time.
The pickup threshold IIE > evaluates RMS values in relation to a
system period.
Transformer Inrush-Current Detection
When the device is used on a power transformer, large magnet-
izing inrush currents will flow when the transformer is switched
on. These inrush currents may be several times the rated trans-
former current, and, depending on the transformer size and
type of construction, may last from several tens of milliseconds
to several seconds. The inrush-current detection function
detects a transformer switch-on process and generates a
blocking signal for protection functions that are affected in
undesirable ways when transformers are switched on. This
enables a sensitive setting of these protection functions.
In order to record the switch-on processes securely, the function
uses the Harmonic Analysis method of measurement and the
CWA method (current wave shape analysis). Both methods
work in parallel and link the results through logical OR. This
means that a 1-out-of-2 decision is made which increases the
availability of the electrical plant.
Inadvertent Energization Protection (ANSI 50/27)
Accidental switching of the circuit breaker can cause damage to
generators that are stationary or already started but not yet
excited or synchronized. The protection function has the task of
limiting harm. The voltage defined by the power system allows
the generator to start with a great amount of slip as an asyn-
chronous machine. As a consequence, unacceptably high
currents are induced in the rotor. A logic consisting of sensitive
current measurement for each phase, instrument transformers,
time control, and blocking starting at a minimum voltage,
causes an immediate trip command. If the fuse-failure monitor
responds, this function is inactive.
Shaft-Current Protection (ANSI 50GN)
The protection function is required in particular for hydro gener-
ators. Because of design constraints, hydro generators have rela-
tively long shafts. Due to different causes, such as friction,
magnetic fields of the generators, and others, a voltage can
develop through the shaft, which then acts as a voltage source.
This induced voltage of approximately 10 V to 30 V depends on
load, plant, and machine. If the oil film on a bearing of the shaft
is too thin, this can result in electric breakdown. Due to the low
impedance (shaft, bearing, and grounding), greater currents can
flow that would result in the destruction of the bearing. Experi-
ence shows that currents greater than 1 A are critical for the
bearing. Because different bearings can be affected, the current
flowing in the shaft is detected by a special core balance current
transformer.
The shaft-current protection processes this current and trips
when there is a threshold-value violation. In addition to the
fundamental component, the 3rd harmonic and the current
mixture (1st and 3rd harmonics) are evaluated. The measurand
and the threshold value are set during commissioning. A high
degree of measuring accuracy (minimum secondary threshold
is 0.3 mA) is achieved by the selected measurement technology.
Voltage-Controlled Overcurrent Protection (ANSI 51V)
Short circuit and backup protection are also integrated here. It is
used where power system protection operates with current-
dependent protection equipment.
There are 3 different forms of the function (stage types):
• Controlled
• Voltage-dependent
• Undervoltage stability
The current function can be controlled via an evaluation of the
machine voltage. The controlled variant triggers the sensitively
set current stage. In the voltage-dependent variant, the current
pickup value drops in a linear relationship with dropping
voltage. The fuse-failure monitor prevents overfunction.
IEC and ANSI characteristics are supported, see Table 3.2/1.
Supported inverse-time characteristic curves
Characteristic curve ANSI/IEEE IEEE/IEC 60255-3
Inverse • •
Moderately inverse •
Very inverse • •
Extremely inverse • •
Fully inverse •
Table 3.2/1 IEC and ANSI Characteristic
For generator protection applications, the function under-
voltage stability is frequently used. If the exciting transformer
is connected directly to the generator lead and a short circuit
occurs, the excitation voltage drops. As a result, the synchro-
nous generated voltage and with it the short-circuit current are
reduced and can drop below the pickup value. With the under-
voltage stability feature, the pickup is maintained. If an external
error is cleared according to protective grading, the voltage
recovery results in the dropout of the pickup maintenance. If the
voltage fails due to an error in the voltage-transformer circuit,
this does not result in an overfunction. A pickup additionally
causes an overcurrent.
Arc Protection
The arc protection function detects arcs in switchgear via optical
sensors. Thus, the resulting arcs can be detected reliably and
quickly. The protection device can trip correspondingly quickly
and without time delays.
SIPROTEC 5 System
3.2

Detection of arcs takes place either optically only or optionally
using an additional current criterion in order to prevent an over-
function.
The arc protection function uses a self-monitoring circuit. This
circuit monitors the optical arc sensors and the fiber-optic
cables.
Peak Overvoltage Protection for Capacitors (ANSI 59C)
The dielectric medium of a capacitor is stressed by the applied
peak voltage. Hence excessively high peak voltages may lead to
destruction of the dielectric medium. IEC and IEEE standards
define how long capacitors should withstand which overvol-
tages.
The function calculates the peak voltage in a phase-segregated
way from the fundamental component and superimposed
harmonics. Integration of the phase currents then yields the
peak voltage.
The function offers different stage types with regard to the time
delay:
• Stage with inverse-time characteristic according to IEC and
IEEE standards
• Stage with user-defined characteristic curve
• Stage with independent characteristic curve
A maximum of 4 stages with independent characteristic curve
can be applied in parallel.
Turn-to-Turn Fault Protection (ANSI 59N (IT))
The turn-to-turn fault protection is used to detect short circuits
between the turns within a winding (phase) of the generator. In
this case, relatively high ring currents flow in the short-circuited
turns and result in damage to the winding and stator. The
protection function is distinguished by high responsivity. The
residual voltage across the broken-delta winding is detected
via three 2-pole isolated voltage transformers. In order to be
insensitive to ground faults, the isolated voltage-transformer
neutral point must be connected via a high-voltage cable to the
generator neutral point. The voltage-transformer neutral point
must not be grounded; otherwise, the generator neutral point
would also be grounded and every ground fault would result in
a 1-pole ground fault. In case of a turn-to-turn, the result would
be a drop in voltage in the affected phase. This ultimately leads
to a residual voltage that is detected across the broken-delta
winding. The responsivity is limited more by the winding unbal-
ance and less by the protection device. The protection function
processes the voltage across the broken-delta winding and
determines the fundamental component. The selected filter
design suppresses the effect of higher frequency oscillations
and eliminates the disruptive influence of the 3rd harmonic. In
this way, the required measuring responsivity is achieved.
[dw_7um85-Ausf-bsp, 1, en_US]
Figure 3.2/9 Implementation Example
Direct-Voltage/Direct-Current Protection
(ANSI 59N(DC), 50N(DC))
Hydro generators or gas turbines are started via starting-
frequency converters. A ground fault in the intermediate circuit
of the starting-frequency converter results in the direct-voltage
shift and thus a direct current. Because zero point or grounding
transformers have a lower ohmic resistance than the voltage
transformers, most of the direct current flows through them.
There is therefore a danger of destruction from thermal over-
load. The direct current is detected via a shunt converter (meas-
uring transducer or special transformer). Depending on the
variant of the measuring transducer, currents or voltages are fed
to the SIPROTEC 7UM85.
The measuring algorithm filters out the DC component and
takes the threshold-value decision. The protection function is
active starting at 0 Hz. If a voltage is transmitted by the meas-
uring transducer for the protection device, the connection must
be designed in an interference-immune and short manner.
Transmission as a 4-mA to 20-mA signal brings advantages
because applied currents are insensitive to disturbances and at
the same time broken-wire detection is possible.
The function can also be used for special applications. There-
fore, for the quantity present at the input, the RMS value can be
evaluated over a broad frequency range.
90 % Stator Ground-Fault Protection (ANSI 59N, 67Ns)
With generators that operate on an isolated basis, a ground fault
is expressed by the occurrence of a residual voltage. In a unit
connection, the residual voltage is a selective protection crite-
rion. If generator and busbar (bus connection) are directly
connected to each other, the direction of the flowing ground
current must also be evaluated for a selective sensitive ground-
fault detection. The protection function measures the residual
voltage either at the generator neutral point via a voltage trans-
former or neutral-point transformer at the derivation via the
broken-delta winding of a voltage transformer or grounding
transformer. Alternatively, the residual voltage (zero-sequence
voltage) can also be calculated from the phase-to-ground
voltages. 85 % to 95 % of the stator winding of a generator can
be protected depending on the selected load resistor.
For the ground-current measurement, a sensitive ground-
current input is used. It should be connected to a core balance
SIPROTEC 5 System
3.2

current transformer. The direction of the error is determined
from residual voltage and ground current. The vector can easily
be adapted to the plant conditions. Effective generator protec-
tion in bus connection is realized in this way. During startup, the
residual-voltage measurement must also be activated because in
some cases, the ground-current source (connected power
system or loading device on the busbar) is absent. The stator
ground-fault protection function is realized in such a way that it
has different stage types. These are to be loaded in the devices
depending on the application (block or bus connection).
Stage types:
• Residual-voltage measurement (evaluation of the zero-
sequence voltage) V0>
• Directional 3I0 stage with φ (V0, 3I0) measurement (freely
adjustable direction straight line)
• Non-directional 3I0 stage
Stator Ground-Fault Protection with 3rd Harmonic
(ANSI 27TH/59TH, 59THD)
Due to design constraints, a generator can produce a 3rd
harmonic voltage that forms a zero-sequence system. It is
detectable via a broken-delta winding on the generator lead or
via a voltage transformer or neutral-point transformer on the
generator neutral point. The voltage amplitude depends on the
machine and operation.
A ground fault near the neutral point results in the voltage shift
of the 3rd harmonic voltage (drop within the neutral point and
increase on the derivation). In combination with the 90 % stator
ground-fault protection (V0>), 100 % of the stator winding can
be protected.
The protection function is designed in such a way that different
methods of measurement can be selected for different applica-
tions are possible.
• A 3rd harmonic undervoltage protection at the generator
neutral point
• A 3rd harmonic overvoltage protection at the generator lead.
• A 3rd harmonic differential voltage protection (with measur-
ands of the neutral point and the derivation)
A typical application is the 3rd harmonic undervoltage protec-
tion at the generator neutral point. The protection function can
only be used with a unit connection.
To avoid overfunctions, a release is issued if a minimum active
power is exceeded and the generator voltage is within the
permissible voltage range.
The final protection setting can only be made through a primary
testing of the generator. If the magnitude of the 3rd harmonic is
too small, the protection function cannot be used.
100 % Stator Ground-Fault Protection with 20-Hz Coupling
(ANSI 64S)
The coupling of a 20-Hz voltage has proven to be a safe and reli-
able method for detecting errors in the neutral point or in the
near of generator neutral point in unit connection. In contrast to
the 3rd harmonic criterion, it depends on the generator proper-
ties and the operating mode. Moreover, a measurement during
plant standstill is possible. The protection function is designed in
such a way that it detects ground faults in the entire generator
(true 100 %) as well as in all electrically connected plant compo-
nents.
The protection function detects the coupled 20-Hz voltage and
the flowing 20-Hz current. The interfering quantities, for
example, the stator capacitances, are eliminated and the ohmic
fault resistance is determined using a mathematical model. This
ensures, on the one hand, a high responsivity and, on the other
hand, the use of generators having ground capacitances, for
example, in hydropower plants.
Angle errors or contact resistances through the grounding trans-
former or neutral-point transformer are detected during
commissioning and corrected in the algorithm. The protection
function has a warning and tripping stage. In addition, there is a
measuring-circuit supervision and the detection of an outage of
the 20-Hz generator. Furthermore, the protection function has
an independent frequency measurement function and in plants
that are started via frequency converter (for example, gas
turbines), the protection function can control the function in
such a way that an overfunction is prevented.
Independent of the ground-resistance calculation, the backup
protection function additionally evaluates the magnitude of the
current RMS value.
If a parallel load resistor (grounding transformer with load
resistor on the undervoltage side of the generator transformer)
is also present in plants with generator switches, this is auto-
matically corrected. The control is done via a binary input that
receives its signal from the circuit-breaker auxiliary contact.
Current-Unbalance Protection for Capacitor Banks (ANSI 60C)
Capacitor banks are often implemented in so-called H-bridge
configurations (see Figure 3.2/10). In a variant of this kind, the
outage of a single C-element generates an unbalance in the
bank and subsequently leads to a low unbalance current via the
cross-connection.
The function measures the unbalanced current in the cross-
connection in a phase-segregated manner. The overcurrent-
protection stage is activated when a threshold value is
exceeded, and is triggered after a time delay. The counter stage
generates an alarm or a tripping when a certain number of
defective C-elements has been detected.
In order to detect even the smallest unbalance currents – as a
result of a defective C-element –, operational unbalances, which
also cause unbalance currents must be compensated. The func-
tion allows both static and dynamic compensation. The latter
must be used if dynamic environmental influences such as
temperature fluctuations already generate relevant operational
unbalances.
In addition, the measured unbalance can optionally be normal-
ized using the current of the capacitor bank in order to ensure a
constant responsivity even with different power.
SIPROTEC 5 System
3.2

[dw_CapBank_SLE_vereinfacht, 2, en_US]
Figure 3.2/10 Protection of an H-Bridge Capacitor Bank
Measuring-Voltage Failure Detection (ANSI 60FL)
This function monitors the voltage-transformer secondary
circuits:
• For non-connected transformers
• For pick up of the voltage-transformer circuit breaker (in the
event of short circuits in the secondary circuit)
• For broken conductor in one or more measuring loops.
All these events cause a voltage of 0 in the voltage-transformer
secondary circuits. This can lead to failures of the protection
functions.
The following protection functions are automatically blocked in
the case of a measuring-voltage failure:
• Distance protection
• Directional negative-sequence protection
• Ground-fault protection for high-impedance faults in
grounded systems.
Rotor Ground-Fault Protection (ANSI 64F)
The protection function detects ground faults in the rotor
(including rotor circuit). High-impedance faults are already
signaled by a warning stage. The operational crew can respond
accordingly (for example at the slip rings). When there is a low-
impedance ground fault, tripping occurs and the machine is
halted. Thus, the critical case of a 2nd ground fault that is a
turn-to-turn fault of the rotor winding is prevented. The turn-to-
turn fault can produce magnetic unbalances that result in a
destruction of the machine due to the extreme mechanical
forces.
Depending on the application, you can select from 3 different
implementations.
Rotor ground-current measurement I>, fn
In this method, a power-frequency voltage (50 Hz, 60 Hz) is fed
into the rotor circuit via a coupling device (7XR61 + 3PP1336).
Through the protection function, the current threshold is moni-
tored via a sensitive current input. 2 current stages can be set
(warning, tripping). In addition, the rotor circuit is monitored for
interruption by an undercurrent stage.
Rotor resistance measurement R<, fn
In this method, a power-frequency voltage (50 Hz, 60 Hz) is also
fed into the rotor circuit via a coupling device
(7XR61 + 3PP1336). In addition to the current measurement via
the sensitive current input, the coupled voltage is also evalu-
ated. The rotor ground resistance is calculated using a mathe-
matical model. This procedure eliminates the interfering influ-
ence of the rotor ground capacitance and increases the respon-
sivity. In the case of interference-free excitation voltage, fault
resistances of up to 30 kΩ can be detected. The function has a
two-stage design (warning and tripping stages). In addition, the
rotor circuit is monitored for ubterruption by an undercurrent
stage.
Rotor resistance measurement R<, 1 Hz to 3 Hz
In this method, a low-frequency, square-wave voltage (typi-
cally, 1 Hz to 3 Hz) is coupled into the rotor circuit through an
injection unit (7XT71) and resistor device (7XR6004). With this
method, the interfering influence of the rotor ground capaci-
tance is eliminated and a good signal-to-noise ratio is achieved
for the harmonic components (for example, 6th harmonic) of
the excitation machine. A high responsivity in the measurement
is possible. Fault resistances of up to 80 kΩ can be detected. The
rotor ground circuit is monitored for continuity by evaluation of
the current during polarity reversal.
Due to the high responsivity, this function is recommended for
larger generators.
The function requires a hardware configuration of the
SIPROTEC 7UM85 with an IO210.
Restart Inhibit (ANSI 66)
The restart inhibit prevents restarting of the motor if the permis-
sible temperature limit would be exceeded as a result.
In normal operation, and also under increased load conditions,
the rotor temperature of a motor is far below the permissible
temperature limit. The high starting currents required during
motor startup increase the risk of the rotor being damaged by
overheating instead of the stator. This is related to the short
thermal constant of the rotor. To prevent the circuit breaker
being tripped by several attempts to start the motor, the motor
must be prevented from restarting if it is obvious that the
temperature limit of the rotor would be exceeded during the
start attempt (Figure 3.2/11).
[Dw_PrReLo_02, 1, en_US]
Figure 3.2/11 Temperature Curve of the Rotor and Repeated Attempts
to Start the Motor
SIPROTEC 5 System
3.2

Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases and Ground
(ANSI 67, 67N)
The directional overcurrent protection functions for phases and
ground detect short circuits on electric equipment. The direc-
tional overcurrent protection allows the application of devices
also in systems where selectivity of protection depends on
knowing both the magnitude of the fault current and the direc-
tion of energy flow to the fault location. This is the case with
parallel lines fed from one side, in lines fed from 2 sides, or in
lines connected in rings.
2 definite-time overcurrent protection stages and an inverse-
time overcurrent protection stage are preconfigured. Addi-
tional definite-time overcurrent protection stages and 1 stage
with a user-defined characteristic curve can be configured
within this function.
For the inverse-time overcurrent protection stages, all usual
characteristic curves according to IEC and ANSI/IEEE are avail-
able.
Figure 3.2/12 shows the free configurability of the directivity of
the ground function. The characteristic can be rotated for the
phase function.
[dw_DwDirRot, 1, en_US]
Figure 3.2/12 Directivity of the Ground Function
Apart from the characteristics, the stages are structured identi-
cally.
• Blocking options for the stage: in the event of measuring-
voltage failure, via binary input signal or by means of other
functions (automatic reclosing, cold-load pickup detection).
• Each stage can be stabilized against over-responding because
of transformer inrush currents
• The directional mode can be set for each stage.
• The stage can optionally be used for directional comparison
protection. Hence both a release procedure and a blocking
method can be implemented.
• Each stage can be operated as an alarm stage (no operate
indication)
• You can select either the measurement of the fundamental
component or the measurement of the RMS value for the
method of measurement.
• The ground function evaluates the calculated zero-sequence
current (3I0) or the measured ground current
• Logarithmic-inverse characteristics are also available for the
ground stages.
Directional Ground-Fault Protection with Phase Selector for
High-Impedance Ground Faults (ANSI 67G, 50G, 51G)
In grounded systems, line-protection responsivity may not be
sufficient to detect high-impedance ground faults. The line
protection device therefore offers different protection levels for
this type of fault.
Multiple stages
The ground-fault overcurrent protection can be used with 6 defi-
nite-time stages (DT) and 1 inverse-time stage (IDMTL).
The following inverse-time characteristics are provided:
• Inverse acc. to IEC 60255-3
• ANSI/IEEE inverse
• Logarithmic-inverse
• V0inverse
• S0inverse
Appropriate direction decision modes
The direction decision can be determined by the zero-sequence
current I0 and the zero-sequence voltage V0 or by the negative
sequence components V2 and I2. Using negative-sequence
components can be advantageous in cases where the zero-
sequence voltage tends to be very low due to unfavorable zero-
sequence impedances.
In addition or as an alternative to the direction determination
with zero-sequence voltage, the ground current of a grounded
power transformer may also be used. Dual polarization applica-
tions can therefore be fulfilled. Alternatively, the direction can
be determined by the evaluation of zero-sequence system
power. Each stage can be set in forward or reverse direction, or
both directions (non-directional).
High responsivity and stability
The SIPROTEC 5 devices can be provided with a sensitive neutral
(residual) current transformer input. This feature provides a
measuring range for the ground current (fault current)
from 5 mA to 100 A with a rated current of 1 A and from 5 mA
to 500 A with a rated current of 5 A. Thus, the ground fault
overcurrent protection can be applied with extreme sensitivity.
The function is equipped with special digital filter algorithms,
thereby eliminating higher harmonics. This feature is particu-
larly important for low ground-fault currents which usually have
a high content of 3rd and 5th harmonics.
Dynamic setting change
A dynamic setting change of pickup threshold and runtime
settings can be activated depending on the status of the auto-
SIPROTEC 5 System
3.2

matic reclosing function. An instantaneous switch onto fault is
active for each stage.
Phase selector
The ground-fault protection is suitable for 3-pole and, option-
ally, for 1-pole tripping by means of a sophisticated phase
selector. It may be blocked during the dead time of 1-pole auto-
reclosing cycles or during pickup of a main protection function.
Directional Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection (ANSI 67Ns,
ANSI 51Ns, 59N)
The directional sensitive ground-fault detection function detects
ground faults in isolated and arc-suppression-coil-ground
systems. Various function stages are available for this purpose
that can also be used in parallel. Thus, the working method of
the function can be perfectly adapted to the conditions of the
power system, the user philosophy, and different manifestations
of the error:
Overvoltage protection stage with zero-sequence system/
residual voltage
The zero-sequence voltage (residual voltage) is evaluated in
relation to threshold-value violation. In addition, the faulty
phase can be determined when the phase-to-ground voltages
are connected.
Directional ground-current stage with direction determination
using cos φ and sin φ measurement
This is the "classical" watt-metric (cos φ, in the arc-suppression-
coil-ground system) or var-metric (sin φ, in the isolated power
system) method of measurement for the direction determina-
tion of static ground faults. For direction determination, the
current component which is perpendicular to the set direction-
characteristic curve (= axis of symmetry) is decisive (3I0dir.), see
Figure 3.2/13. The stage can be adapted to the power-system
conditions by a corresponding setting (position of the direction-
characteristic curve). Therefore, highly sensitive and precise
measurements are possible.
[dwcosphi-171012-01.tif, 3, en_US]
Figure 3.2/13 Direction Determination with cos φ Measurement
Directional sensitive ground-fault detection via harmonics
The function is used for fault localization in stationary ground
faults, particularly in connection with restriction circuits in
circuited medium-voltage rings. It is based on a continuous
measurement with direction determination. This is determined
by means of the phasors of the 3rd, 5th, or 7th harmonic of the
zero-sequence voltage V0 and of the zero-sequence
current 3I0 (Figure 3.2/14).
The advantages of this method are the simple difference
between "faulty" and "healthy" in the directional areas and the
reliable directional result independent of the measuring toler-
ances.
[dw_dir-sens-gnd-fault-detect_harm, 1, en_US]
Figure 3.2/14 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection via Harmonics
Directional ground-current stage with direction determination
using φ (V, I) measurement
This method can be applied as an alternative to the cos φ or sin
φ method if this is desired because of user philosophy. The
direction is determined by determining the phase angle
between the angle-error compensated ground current and the
rotated zero-sequence voltage V0. To take different system
conditions and applications into account, the reference voltage
can be rotated via an adjustable angle. This moves the vector of
the rotated reference voltage close to the vector of the ground
current 3I0com. Consequently, the result of direction determina-
tion is as reliable as possible (see also Figure 3.2/12).
Sensitive ground-fault detection via pulse-pattern detection
The pulse-pattern detection function is used when a pulsating
ground-fault current is generated for fault localization by
connecting and disconnecting a capacitor arranged in parallel to
the arc-suppression coil. The function then detects a faulty
feeder using the pulse pattern during a stationary ground fault
in overcompensated systems.
Transient ground-fault method
This transient method operates only during the
first 1 to 2 periods after fault inception. It determines the direc-
tion via the evaluation of the active energy of the transient
process. It is especially appropriate if direction information is
required for errors that expire again very quickly (after 0.5 to a
few periods). Thus, parallel use to the stage with cos φ measure-
ment or harmonic methods is appropriate.
This method can also be operated in meshed power systems. It
is also especially well-suited for closed rings because circulating
SIPROTEC 5 System
3.2

zero-sequence currents are eliminated. Due to additional logic,
the function can also optionally clear a static error.
Non-directional ground-current stage
If necessary, a simple, non-directional ground-current stage can
be configured.
Stabilization in the event of intermittent ground faults (starting
with V8.0)
Stabilization in the event of intermittent ground faults
Functions for the detection of stationary ground faults (for
example, cosφ function) can react adversely in the event of
intermittent ground faults: Message and fault-record flooding is
possible. This can be effectively avoided by automatic blocking
of these functions in the event of intermittent ground faults.
Power-Swing Blocking (ANSI 68)
Dynamic transient incidents, for instance short-circuits, load
fluctuations, automatic reclosing, or switching operations can
lead to power swings in the power system. During power
swings, large currents along with small voltages can cause
unwanted tripping of distance protection. The power-swing
blocking function avoids uncontrolled tripping of the distance
protections. Power swings can be detected under symmetric
load conditions as well as during 1-pole autoreclosing cycles
(Figure 3.2/15).
No settings required
The function requires no settings as an optimal functioning is
always obtained by automatic adaptation. During a power-swing
blocking situation, all swing properties are constantly super-
vised. A subsequent system incident is reliably detected and
results in a phase-segregated reset of the distance-protection
blocking by the power-swing blocking.
[sc_Pendelsperre, 1, en_US]
Figure 3.2/15 Power-Swing Blocking During 1-Pole Tripping
Trip-Circuit Supervision (ANSI 74TC)
The circuit-breaker coil and its feed lines are monitored via 2
binary inputs. If the trip circuit is interrupted, and alarm indica-
tion is generated.
Out-of-Sep Protection (ANSI 78)
In electric power transmission systems, electrical stability is
always required. If system conditions arise that threaten the
stability, measures must be taken to avoid an escalation. These
measures can be realized, for example, with an out-of-step
protection. The out-of-step protection function is available as
individual protection function or can be integrated into more
complex systems for supervision and load control, for example
system integrity protection systems (SIPS).
The out-of-step protection function constantly evaluates the
impedance course of the positive-sequence impedance. The
characteristic curve is defined by impedance zones in the R-X
plane. Accumulators are incremented depending on the point at
which the impedance course enters or exits the associated
impedance zone. Tripping or signaling occurs when the set
accumulator limits are reached. The out-of-step protection
provides up to 4 independent impedance zones which can be
adjusted and tilted according to the requirements of the loss of
stability in the power system (see Figure 3.2/16).
[dw_impedance_zone, 1, en_US]
Figure 3.2/16 Impedance Zones for Out-of-Step Protection
Automatic Reclosing (ANSI 79)
About 85 % of the arc faults on overhead lines are extinguished
automatically after being tripped by the protection function. The
overhead line can therefore be put back into operation. Reclo-
sure is performed by an automatic reclosing function (AR). Each
protection function can be configured to start or block the auto-
matic reclosing function.
Basic features and operating modes
• Tripping-controlled start with or without action time
• Pickup-controlled start with or without action time
• 3-pole automatic reclosing for all types of faults; different
dead times are available depending on the type of fault
• Multiple-shot automatic reclosing
• Cooperation with external devices via binary inputs and
outputs or via serial communication with GOOSE message in
IEC 61850 systems
SIPROTEC 5 System
3.2

• Control of the integrated automatic reclosing function by an
external protection
• Cooperation with the internal or external synchrocheck
• Monitoring of the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts
• Dynamic change of the settings of the overcurrent protection
functions depending on the automatic reclosing status
2 automatic reclosing functions
For applications with 2 circuit breakers per feeder, for
example, 1 1/2 circuit breaker, ring bus, or double circuit-
breaker applications, the devices can be configured to operate
with 2 independent automatic reclosing functions.
1-pole automatic reclosing
In electricity-supply systems with grounded system neutral
points where the circuit-breaker poles can be operated individu-
ally, a 1-pole automatic reclosing is usually initiated for 1-phase
short circuits.
The 1-pole automatic reclosing functionality is available in
SIPROTEC 5 devices with 1-pole tripping capability.
The following operating modes are provided in addition to the
features mentioned in the preceding sections:
• 1-pole automatic reclosing for 1-pole short circuits, no
reclosing for multiphase short circuits
• 1-pole automatic reclosing for 1-phase short circuits and
for 2-phase short circuits without "touching ground", no
reclosing for multiphase short circuits
• 1-pole automatic reclosing for 1-pole fault and 3-pole auto-
matic reclosing for multiphase short circuits
• 1-pole automatic reclosing for 1-phase short circuits and
for 2-phase short circuits without "touching ground" and 3-
pole automatic reclosing for other faults
• Appropriate behavior in the event of evolving faults
• 3-pole coupling (positive 3-pole tripping) in case of circuit-
breaker pole discrepancy
Voltage-dependent supplementary functions
The integration of automatic reclosing in the feeder protection
allows evaluation of the line-side voltages.
A number of voltage-dependent supplementary functions are
thus available:
• Dead-line check
By means of a dead-line check, reclosure is triggered only
when the line is de-energized (prevention of asynchronous
pickup), if no synchrocheck can be used
• ASP
The adaptive dead time is used only if automatic reclosing at
the opposite end was successful (reduction of stress on equip-
ment).
• RDT
Reduced dead time is used together with the automatic
reclosing function where no teleprotection scheme is used:
When faults within the overreach zone, but outside the
protected line, are switched off for short-time interruption,
the RDT function decides on the basis of the measured of the
reverse polarity voltage from the opposite end which has not
tripped whether to reduce the dead time.
Frequency Protection (ANSI 81)
Frequency deviations are caused by an unbalance between
generated and the consumed active power. This is caused by,
for example, load shedding, network disconnections, increased
need for active power, generator failures, or faulty functioning
of the load-frequency control. The frequency protection detects
frequency deviations in the power system or in electric
machines.
It monitors the frequency band and outputs alarm indications. In
case of critical power frequency, entire power units can be
isolated or networks can be decoupled. To ensure network
stability, load shedding can be initiated.
Different frequency-measuring elements with high accuracy and
short pickup times are available. Tripping by frequency-meas-
uring elements can be triggered either at the local circuit
breaker or at the opposite end by automatic remote tripping.
The following measuring elements are available:
• Overfrequency protection (ANSI 81O)
Two-stage designs can be increased up to 3 stages. All stages
are of identical design.
• Underfrequency protection (ANSI 81U)
Three-stage design (default), can be increased up to 5 stages.
All stages are of identical design.
Each frequency-measuring element provides 2 different
methods of measurement:
• Angle difference method: Angle change of the voltage phasor
over a time interval
• Filter method of measurement: Evaluation of instantaneous
voltage values with special filters
The DIGSI 5 library provides the corresponding protection func-
tion for every method of measurement.
Rate-of-Frequency Change Protection (ANSI 81R)
With the rate-of-frequency change protection, frequency
changes can be detected quickly. The function can prevent
system states that are not secure, caused by an unbalance
SIPROTEC 5 System
3.2

between the generated and the consumed active power. For
this purpose, it is integrated into power-system decoupling and
load-shedding measures.
The function offers 2 stage types:
• df/dt rising
• df/dt falling
A maximum of 5 stages of each stage type can be applied in the
function.
Either the measuring accuracy or the pickup time can be opti-
mized for the specific application by defining the measuring-
window length.
The function is automatically blocked in the event of undervol-
tages, in order to rule out imprecise or incorrect measurements.
Teleprotection Scheme for Distance Protection (ANSI 85/21)
A teleprotection scheme is available for fast fault clearing of up
to 100 % of the line length.
For conventional signal transmission, the required send and
receive signals can be distributed freely to binary inputs and
outputs. The signals can also be transmitted via the protection
interface, a system-wide feature of the SIPROTEC 5 product
family. Transmission via GOOSE messages with
IEC 61850 system interfaces is provided as well, if the available
communication structures in the switchgear fulfill the require-
ments in accordance with IEC 61850-90-1.
The following teleprotection schemes are available for the
distance protection:
• Distance protection with underreaching (permissive under-
reach transfer trip)
– Grading-time reduction with overreaching zone (transfer
tripping via expanded measuring range)
– Grading-time reduction with pickup (intertripping via
pickup)
– Intertripping scheme (intertripping underreach protection)
• Distance protection with underreaching (permissive overreach
transfer trip)
– Overreaching zone (permissive overreach transfer trip
scheme)
– Directional comparison with directional pickup
• Unblocking method
– Each scheme in permissive mode can be extended with an
unblocking logic
• Blocking method
• Reverse interlocking
• Bus-section protection
The send and receive signals are available as general signals or
as phase-segregated signals. The phase-segregated signals are
advantageous as they warrant reliable 1-pole disconnection,
especially if 1-phase short circuits occur on different power
lines. The protection schemes with automatic remote tripping
are suitable also for power lines with more than 2-ended lines,
for example teed-feeder lines. Up to 6-ended configurations are
possible.
Transient blocking (current reversal monitoring) is provided for
all release and blocking methods in order to suppress interfer-
ence signals during tripping of parallel lines.
Weak or no Infeed: Echo and Tripping (ANSI 85/27)
To prevent delayed tripping of the distance-protection function
and of the ground-fault directional comparison scheme during
situations with weak or no infeed, an echo function is provided.
If no fault detector is picked up at the weak-infeed end of the
line, the signal received here is returned as echo to allow accel-
erated tripping at the strong-infeed end of the line. It is also
possible to initiate phase-segregated tripping at the weak-infeed
end. A phase-segregated 1-pole or 3-pole tripping is issued if a
send signal is received and if the measured voltage drops corre-
spondingly. This function is available for all permissive under-
reach and overreach schemes. As an option, the weak-infeed
logic can be equipped according to a French specification.
Teleprotection for Directional Ground-Fault Protection
(ANSI 85/67N)
For fast fault clearing of up to 100 % of the line length, the
directional ground-fault protection can be expanded with a tele-
protection scheme.
The following schemes are available:
• Directional comparison
• Blocking
• Deblocking
The send and receive signals are available as general signals or
as phase-selective signals in combination with the phase
selector of the directional ground-fault protection. For conven-
tional signal transmission, the send and receive signals can be
assigned freely to binary inputs and outputs. The signals can
certainly be transmitted via the serial protection interface, a
SIPROTEC 5-wide system feature. Transmission via GOOSE
messages with IEC 61850 system interfaces is provided as well,
if the available communication structures in the switchgear
fulfill the requirements in accordance with IEC 61850-90-1.
The transient blocking function can be activated in order to
suppress the interference signals during tripping of parallel
lines. Communication of the teleprotection functions for
distance protection and ground-fault protection can use the
same signaling channel or separate and redundant channels.
Line Differential Protection (ANSI 87L, 87T)
Line differential protection is a selective short-circuit protection
for overhead lines, cables, and busbars with single-side and
multi-side infeed in radial, looped, or meshed power systems. It
can be used at all voltage levels. The line differential protection
works strictly phase-segregated and allows instantaneous trip-
ping of 1-phase or 3-phase short circuits at up to 6 line ends.
Depending on the device variant, 1-pole/3-pole (7SD87/7SL87)
or only 3-pole tripping (7SD82/7SD86/7SL82/7SL86) is possible.
The devices in a differential-protection topology communicate
with each other via protection interfaces (protection communi-
cation). The flexible use of available communication media
saves investment in communication infrastructure and guaran-
tees the protection of lines of all lengths.
SIPROTEC 5 System
3.2

SIPROTEC 5 line differential protection devices can also be used
in configurations with SIPROTEC 4 line protection devices. This
ensures that individual SIPROTEC 4 devices of an existing
topology can be easily replaced or an existing SIPROTEC 4
topology can be expanded by one or more SIPROTEC 5 devices.
Adaptive measurement
An adaptive measurement method ensures a maximum of
responsivity to detect internal faults under all conditions. To
guarantee highest stability, any measurement or communica-
tion errors are taken into account (see Figure 3.2/17).
Simple settings and supervision functions shorten time of engi-
neering and commissioning:
• A sensitive measurement stage (Idiff>) detects high-impedance
errors. Special algorithms ensure high stability even with
high-level DC-components in the short-circuit current. The
tripping time of this stage is about 30 ms when standard
output contacts are used.
• A high-current differential stage (Idiff>>) offers high-speed
fault clearance with very short tripping times when high-
speed contacts are used.
• No external matching transformers are needed by taking
different current-transformer ratios into consideration.
• With the setting of current-transformer error data, the differ-
ential protection device calculates the restraint current auto-
matically and sets its permissible responsivity. Thus, the user
does not need to parameterize the protection characteristics.
Only Idiff> (sensitive stage) and Idiff>> (high-current differential
stage) must be set according to the charging current of the
line/cable.
• Enhanced communication features guarantee stability and
accuracy even under disturbed or interrupted connections on
all kinds of transmission media, like optical fibers, control
lines, telephone cables, or communication networks.
• Monitoring and display of differential currents and restraint
currents during normal operation
• High stability during external short circuits, even with
different current-transformer saturation levels.
• When long lines or cables get switched on, large transient
charging-current peaks occur. To avoid higher settings and
less sensitivity of the Idiff>> differential current stage, the
pickup threshold of the Idiff> stage may be increased for a
settable time interval. This offers higher responsivity under
normal load conditions.
[dw_ausl_seChar, 1, en_US]
Figure 3.2/17 Operate Curves
Charging-current compensation
Particularly with long cables and very long extra-high voltage
lines, ground capacitances can cause considerable, permanently
flowing capacitive load currents. These must be taken into
account by the tripping threshold of the sensitive differential
protection stage because they generate a differential current.
• The charging-current compensation serves to improve the
sensitivity so that protection with maximum sensitivity is
possible even at high charging currents.
• The charging-current compensation requires that local
voltage transformers are connected.
• The principle of distributed compensation guarantees
maximum availability, since with local measuring-voltage fail-
ures of a device, the remaining devices continue to warrant
their part of the compensation.
Transformer in the protection range
Apart from normal lines, the line differential protection can also
protect lines with a transformer in unit connection. The current
transformers delimit the protection range selectively.
• A separate transformer protection device can therefore be
omitted, since the line differential protection acts as trans-
former protection with measuring points that may lie far away
from one another.
• With few additional transformer parameters, for example,
rated apparent power, primary voltages, vector groups, and
any neutral-point groundings of the respective windings, no
external matching transformers are necessary.
• The responsivity of differential protection can be further
increased by detecting the ground currents of grounded
neutral-point windings.
• The inrush-current detection function stabilizes the differen-
tial protection against tripping due to transformer inrush
currents. This can occur in a phase-segregated or in a 3-phase
way by means of the crossblock function.
SIPROTEC 5 System
3.2

Breaker-and-a-half layouts
The differential protection can be integrated easily into
the breaker-and-a-half layout. With the corresponding hardware
extension (see standard variants), two 3-phase current inputs
per device are configurable. Thus, topologies of up to 12 meas-
uring points with 6 devices can be configured. The protection of
a STUB-BUS can be assumed by the separate STUB differential
protection.
Enhanced communications features
The line differential protection uses the protection interfaces in
the Differential protection configuration (Type 1, see Protec-
tion communication). Different communication modules and
external converters allow the interfacing and use of all available
communication media.
• The direct data transmission via fiberglass cables is immune to
electromagnetic disturbances and offers the highest transmis-
sion rate to achieve the shortest tripping times.
• External communication converters enable communication
via existing control cables, telephone lines, or communication
networks.
The data required for the differential calculations are exchanged
cyclically in full-duplex mode in the form of synchronous, serial
telegrams between the protection devices.
Comprehensive supervision functions ensure stability in opera-
tion in any communication environment:
• Telegrams are secured with CRC checksums to detect trans-
mission errors immediately. The differential protection
processes only valid telegrams.
• Supervision of all communication routes between the device
without the need for additional equipment
• Unambiguous identification of each unit is ensured by the
assignment of settable communication addresses for each
unit within a differential-protection topology.
• Detection of telegrams reflected back to the sending device in
the communication network
• Detection of time-delay changes in communication networks
• Dynamic compensation of runtimes in the differential meas-
urement and supervision of the maximum permissible signal-
transit time
• Indication of disturbed communication links. Counters of
faulty telegrams are available as operational measured values.
• Switched communication networks can lead to unbalance in
the runtimes in receive and transmit directions. The resulting
differential current is taken into account by the adaptive
measuring techniques of the differential protection.
• With a high-precision 1-s pulse from a GPS receiver, the device
can be synchronized with an absolute time at each line end. In
this way, time delays in the receive and transmit path can be
measured exactly. Thus, the differential protection can also be
used in communication networks with a maximum of sensi-
tivity even under massive runtime unbalance conditions.
[dw_ring, 2, en_US]
Figure 3.2/18 Differential Protection in Ring Topologies
[dw_Ketten, 2, en_US]
Figure 3.2/19 Differential Protection in Chain Topologies
Phase-segregated circuit-breaker intertripping and remote trip/
indications
• Normally, the differential current is calculated for each line
end at the same time. This leads to fast and uniform tripping
times. Under weak infeed conditions, especially when the
differential protection function is combined with an overcur-
rent pickup, a phase-segregated circuit-breaker intertripping
offers a tripping of all line ends. Therefore high-speed
transfer-trip signals get transmitted to the other line ends.
These transfer-trip signals can also be initiated by an external
device via binary inputs. Therefore, they can be used to indi-
cate, for example, a direction decision of the backup distance
protection.
• The protection interfaces can exchange freely configurable,
binary input and output signals and measured values with
each other (see protection communication).
SIPROTEC 5 System
3.2

Communication topologies/modes of function
Differential protection devices may be arranged in a ring or
chain topology. A test mode offers advantages during commis-
sioning and service operations.
• In a ring topology, the system tolerates the outage of a data
connection. The ring topology is converted within 20 ms into
a chain topology, so that the differential protection function
continues to work without interruption.
• When a chain topology is specified by the communication
infrastructure, cost-effective relays with only one protection
interface can be used at both chain ends.
• For important 2-end lines, a hot standby transmission is
possible by a redundant communication link to ensure high
availability. When the main connection is interrupted, the
communication switches over from the main path to the
secondary path.
• For service or maintenance reasons, individual differential
protection devices within multi-end topologies can be
removed from the differential-protection topology using a
binary input. Switch positions and load currents get checked
before such a "logout" takes effect. The remaining devices can
continue to operate in this reduced topology.
• The whole configuration can be shifted into a differential-
protection test mode. All functions and indications continue
to be available, but the circuit breakers do not trip. In this
way, the local relay can be tested with disconnection or inter-
tripping of the other relays.
STUB Differential Protection (ANSI 87 STUB)
Stub differential protection is a fully fledged line differential
protection, but without communication between the line ends.
It is used with a teed feeder or a 1 1/2 circuit breaker layout,
when a feeder of the line section can no longer be protected
selectively by opening the disconnector (for example, distance
protection).
The tub differential protection is activated by the feedback of
the disconnector-switch position. The SIPROTEC 5 line protec-
tion device must be equipped with two 3-phase current inputs
in its hardware for this. Regarding the structure and the setting
parameters, the Stub differential protection corresponds to the
line differential protection (ANSI 87L) in all regards, with the
exception of protection communication. It guarantees the selec-
tive protection of the remaining line section and fast tripping
times up to 10 ms.
Transformer Differential Protection (ANSI 87T)
The transformer differential protection is a selective short-circuit
protection for power transformers of different designs (standard
transformers as well as auto transformers) and different
switching types. The number of protectable windings (sides)
and the number of usable measuring points depends on the
device type (see the variants mentioned in the preceding
sections).
In the protection function, the following properties become
important:
• Error-current stabilized operate curve with freely adjustable
characteristic-curve sections in accordance with Figure 3.2/20
• Integrated adaptation to the transformer ratio with considera-
tion of different current-transformer rated currents (primary
as well as secondary)
• Flexible adaptation to the different transformer switching
groups.
• Adaptive adaptation of the operate curve by recording the
transformer tap position.
• Additional consideration of the neutral-point currents with
grounded winding and hence one-third increase in respon-
sivity.
• Redundant stabilization procedure (2nd harmonic + wave
shape analysis) in order to a sensitivity rising by a third at the
transformer
• Further stabilization options by evaluating the 3rd or 5th
harmonics in the differential current. The 5th harmonic is well
suited to reliably detect a stationary overexcitation of the
transformer and hence to avoid an overfunction.
• Additional stabilization procedure against external errors with
current-transformer saturation. The 1st procedure reacts to
high-current errors and monitors the history of the differential
current (time-limited occurrence of a differential current from
the additional stabilization area, see Figure 3.2/20). A shift to
an internal error is reliably detected. The 2nd procedure works
for low-current errors. The DC component in the short-circuit
current and the remanence of the current transformer can
lead to phase-angle rotations in the secondary current. If
jumps in the restraint current occur and if DC components are
simultaneously detected in the differential current, an eleva-
tion of the operate curve is carried out on a time-limited basis.
• If asynchronous motors are connected to transformers,
distorted transmission of the starting current may result in
differential currents. Due to a startup detection (jump within
the restraint current and DC component evaluation), the
operate curve is raised.
• High-current internal errors are detected reliably and quickly
by the high-current stage Idiff-fast (see Figure 3.2/21). In
order to prevent an overfunction by quadrature-axis current
components (for example, use in breaker-and-a-half layouts),
the instantaneous values from the differential and restraint
currents are evaluated. In a few milliseconds, interior and
exterior errors are reliably differentiated.
For the protection of auto transformers, the protection function
has been adapted to the special conditions of the auto trans-
former. The pure nodal-point protection can be used as addi-
tional sensitive protection for the auto winding. The nodal point
protection works in parallel to the classic differential protection.
With auto-transformer banks, this ensures high sensitivity to
ground faults and turn-to-turn faults. Figure 3.2/22 shows the
underlying concept.
SIPROTEC 5 System
3.2

[dwdifaus-030912-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 3.2/20 Error-Current Stabilized Operate Curve of the Function
Idiff
[dwidfast-300114-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3.2/21 Characteristic Curve of the Function Idiff-Fast
[dw_spartrafobank, 1, en_US]
Figure 3.2/22 Protection of an Auto-Transformer Bank by 2 Differential
Protection Functions in one Device
Differential Protection for Phase-Angle Regulating
Transformers (ANSI 87T)
The Differential protection for phase-angle regulating trans-
formers (PAR) function supplements the existing Transformer
differential protection function (ANSI 87T).
Phase-angle regulating transformers are used to control the
reactive-power flow and active-power flow in high-voltage
power systems. The objective is to achieve voltage stability and
uniform load dispatching in parallel transmission lines, and to
prevent unbalanced current in the meshes of the transmission
systems. The main function of the phase-angle regulating trans-
former is to alter the effective phase displacement between the
input and output voltage of a transmission line. This function
controls the amount of current that can be transmitted by a
single line. In order to apply an introduced voltage boost to
influence the active-power flow, phase-angle regulating trans-
formers are integrated into the electrical power system in series.
This situation arises, for example, if an increase in the transmis-
sion capacity is required due to the installation of an additional
line. By using selective control of the angle between the current
and the voltage in a line, both lines can be used up to their
projected load limit. The control of the power flow or the energy
flow direction at the tie-point of 2 electrical power systems is
another typical application.
[dw_PST_DIFF_01, 1, en_US]
Figure 3.2/23 Power Distribution between 2 Lines when Using Different
Phase-Angle Values
3 function blocks are available for the adaptation of the differ-
ential protection to the various types of phase-angle regulating
transformers:
• Single-core PSTs are phase-angle regulating transformers with
a max. phase shift of 60°.
• Two-Core PSTs are transformers with quadrature regulation,
with a phase shift of 90°.
• Special transformers are transformers with a fixed circuiting
of the windings. This will result in a vector-group number that
is not an integer value (for example, SG 0.25 = 7.5°). They can
be used, for instance, as inverter transformers.
The transformer differential protection automatically considers
the resulting absolute-value and angle changes. Therefore, the
changes do not need to be taken into consideration in the
pickup-characteristic settings for the differential protection. The
switch makes it possible to change between negative and posi-
tive no-load phase displacement even under full load. In this
SIPROTEC 5 System
3.2

case, blocking of the I-DIFF stage of the differential protection is
adjustable.
Restricted Ground-Fault Protection (on the Transformer)
(ANSI 87N T)
The longitudinal differential protection can detect ground faults
close to the neutral point of a grounded star winding only to a
limited extent. The restricted ground-fault protection assists you
with this. The neutral-point current and the calculated zero-
sequence current of the phase currents are evaluated according
to Figure 3.2/24 and Figure 3.2/25. Overfunction in response to
external ground faults is prevented by stabilizing measures. In
addition to the differential and restraint currents, based on the
zero-sequence variables, the phase angles of the zero-sequence
currents are monitored between each other. The tripping vari-
able is the zero-sequence current in the neutral point.
[dwgrdpri-170712-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 3.2/24 Restricted Ground-Fault Protection Basic Principle
[dwausken-170712-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 3.2/25 Operate Curve
For use in auto transformers, an additional measure was
adopted in order to prevent a failure in response to external
ground faults. The protection function independently deter-
mines the side of the auto winding that is necessary for reliable
operation of the protection function. A measuring point is
selected that results in the greatest restraint current (see also
Figure 3.2/26).
This method is also used if multiple 3-phase current measuring
points are present on the neutral side, such as in breaker-and-a-
half layouts (see Figure 3.2/24 and Figure 3.2/25).
In the differential protection devices, other protection functions
are available that can be used as supplemental protection and
monitoring functions and backup protection for the upstream
and downstream power system. It is also possible to monitor
limiting values.
[dw_fault_M1 side, 2, en_US]
Figure 3.2/26 Measuring-Point Selection for Multiple Infeeds on the
Neutral Side
Motor Differential Protection (ANSI 87M)
The Differential motor protection
• Detects ground faults and multiphase short circuits in motors
• Detects short circuits during the operation of motors on
power systems with a grounded neutral point
• Is stable during startup processes with current-transformer
saturation through intelligent saturation recognition methods
• Triggers safely in case of internal high-current faults through
an additional high-current stage
and is based on a comparison of currents (Kirchhoff's current
law). The basic principle is that the currents add up to zero in
the protected object when it is in the undisturbed operating
state. If a current difference occurs, this is a sure sign of a fault
within the protected object.
The calculation of the difference is determined through the
current direction definition. The direction of current is defined
as positive to the protected object. The current difference results
from the vector addition of the currents.
SIPROTEC 5 System
3.2

important:
characteristic curve sections in accordance with Figure 3.2/21
for low-current errors. Due to the DC component in the short-
circuit current and remanence of the current transformer,
phase angle rotations in the secondary current can result. If
tion of the operate curve is carried out on a time limited basis.
• In the case of asynchronous motors, distorted transmission of
the starting current may result in differential currents. Due to
a startup detection (jump within the restraint current and DC
component evaluation), the operate curve is raised.
• High-current internal errors are reliably and quickly detected
order to prevent an overfunction by quadrature-axis current
components (for example, use in breaker-and-a-half layouts),
the instantaneous values from the differential and restraint
currents are evaluated. In a few milliseconds, interior and
exterior errors are reliably differentiated.
Generator Differential Protection (ANSI 87G)
The generator differential protection is a selective short-circuit
protection for different generator variants. It processes the
currents from the 3-phase neutral-point transformers and
feeder-side current transformers (see Figure 3.2/27).
[dw_anschaltung, 1, en_US]
Figure 3.2/27 Generator Differential Protection Connection
important:
characteristic curve sections in accordance with Figure 3.2/20
• Automatic correction of a current-transformer mismatch
for low-current errors. Due to the DC component in the short-
circuit current and remanence of the current transformer,
phase angle rotations in the secondary current can result. If
tion of the operate curve is carried out on a time limited basis.
• Jump monitoring in the restraint current (typically during
startup operations for motors) can also be used to prevent
overfunction in response to external errors. If a jump is
detected, the operate curve is raised on a time-limited basis.
• High-current internal errors are reliably and quickly detected
order to prevent an overfunction, the instantaneous values
from the differential and restraint currents are evaluated. In a
few milliseconds, interior and exterior errors are reliably
differentiated.
Busbar Differential Protection (ANSI 87B)
The busbar differential protection is a selective, safe, and fast
protection against busbar short circuits in medium-voltage
systems, high-voltage systems, and systems for very high
voltage with a large variety of busbar configurations.
The protection is suitable for switchgear with closed iron core or
linearized current transformers.
Its short tripping time is particularly advantageous in cases of
high-output short circuits or when network stability is threat-
ened.
The modular hardware system allows for the optimum adapta-
tion of the system configuration protection.
important:
• Phase-segregated measurement and display
• Selective tripping of faulty busbar sections
• Additional disconnector-independent check zone as additional
tripping criterion
• Shortest operate times (<10 ms)
• Highest stability in case of external faults, even in case of
transformer saturation, through stabilization with flowing
currents
• Operate curve with freely adjustable characteristic curve
sections according to Figure 3.2/20
• Additional, activatable sensitive operate curve for low-current
faults, for example in resistance-grounded networks in
accordance with Figure 3.2/21
SIPROTEC 5 System
3.2

• Low requirements of the saturation-free time of the current
transformers through fast detection of internal or external
faults within 2ms
• 3 interacting methods of measurement allow minimum trip-
ping times after busbar faults and ensure maximum stability
in case of large short-circuit currents.
The integrated circuit-breaker failure protection recognizes
circuit-breaker faults in case of busbar short-circuits and
provides a trip signal for the circuit breaker at the line end. The
adjacent busbar trips if a coupler circuit breaker fails.
Capacitor Bank Differential Protection (ANSI 87C)
The Capacitor bank differential protection
• Detects ground faults and multiphase short circuits in motors
on capacitor banks
• Detects ground faults during the operation of capacitors using
mains with a grounded neutral point
• Uses the necessary stabilization procedures during switching
operations
• Triggers safely and very fast in the case of internal high-
current faults through an additional high-current stage.
Voltage Differential Protection for Capacitor Banks
(ANSI 87V)
The voltage differential protection function is used to detect C-
element errors within a capacitor bank. It can be used if a
voltage tap is present within the capacitor installation. The func-
tion calculates in a phase-segregated manner the differential
voltage between the voltage advance multiplied by an adjust-
ment factor and the busbar voltage.
Fault Locator (FL)
Single ended fault locator
The integrated fault locator calculates the fault impedance and
the fault distance. The result is displayed in ohms, miles, kilome-
ters, or in percent of the line length. The influence of parallel
lines and of load currents can also be compensated.
Double-end fault locator
Due to load current, there is phase-angle displacement between
the voltages of both line ends. This angle and possible differ-
ences in the source impedance angle cause the angle displace-
ment between the currents at both ends. The angle displace-
ment of the currents affects den voltage drop at a possible fault
resistance (RF). The single ended measurement cannot compen-
sate for this.
As an option for a line with 2 ends, a fault locator function with
measurement at both ends of the line is available. The full
connectivity model is considered. Thanks to this feature, meas-
uring accuracy on long lines under high load conditions and
high fault resistances is considerably increased.
Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU)
Phasor Measurement Units (PMUs) make a valuable contribution
to the dynamic monitoring of transient processes in energy-
supply systems. On the one hand, the advantage over standard
RMS values is that the phasor values of current and voltage are
transmitted. On the other hand, each measured value includes
the exact time stamp and therefore should be assigned within
the transmission path in which it originates independent of the
time delay. The phasors and analog values are transmitted by
the PMU with a configurable repetition rate (reporting rate).
Due to the high-precision time synchronization (via GPS), the
measured values from different substations that are far away
from each other are compared, and conclusions about the
system state and dynamic events, such as power fluctuations,
are drawn from the phase angles and dynamic curves.
The PMU function transmits its data via an integrated Ethernet
module using the standardized protocol IEEE C37.118. The eval-
uation can be done with a Wide Area Monitoring System (Figure
3.2/28) for example SIGUARD PDP (Phasor Data Processor).
SIPROTEC 5 System
3.2

Figure 3.2/28 Use of SIPROTEC 5 Devices as Phasor Measurement Units on a SIGUARD PDP Evaluation System
SIPROTEC 5 System
3.2

Control
[dw_steuerung, 4, en_US]
Figure 3.3/1 SIPROTEC 5 – Functional Integration – Control
SIPROTEC 5 includes all bay level control and supervision func-
tions that are required for efficient operation of the switchgear.
The large, freely configurable graphics display for control
diagrams is available for convenient local control. Frequent
operating actions, such as starting switching sequences or
displaying the indication list, can be called up via one of
the 9 function keys. The required security is guaranteed by the
key switches for local/remote and interlocked/unlocked switch-
over.
The application templates supplied provide the full functionality
that you need for your application. Protection and control func-
tions access the same logical elements. From the perspective of
switching devices, protection and control are treated with equal
priority.
The modular, scalable hardware can be adapted to the system
conditions. You can easily put together the desired hardware
quantity structure. For example, a single SIPROTEC 5 device can
be used to control and monitor an entire breaker-and-a-half
diameter.
A new level of quality in control is achieved with the application
of the communication standard IEC 61850. For example, binary
information from the bay can be processed very elegantly and
data (such as for interlocking across multiple fields) can be
exchanged between the devices. Cross communications via
GOOSE enable efficient solutions, since here, the wiring is
replaced with data telegrams.
All devices already have up to 4 switching objects (switches,
disconnectors, or grounding conductors) via the base control
package. Optionally, additional switching objects and switching
sequence blocks (CFC switching sequences) can be activated.
Transformer Voltage Controller (ANSI 90V)
The transformer voltage controller functionality (ANSI 90V) is
used to control power transformers (two-winding transformers,
three-winding transformers, interconnecting transformers) and
auto transformers using a motor-operated tap changer. In addi-
tion, the voltage control can be used for two-winding trans-
formers connected in parallel.
This function is designed to control the following:
• For two-winding transformers: the voltage on the secondary
circuit of the power transformer
• For three-winding transformers: the voltage of the secondary
winding 1 or winding 2
• For grid coupling transformers: voltage of winding 1 or
winding 2, selectively depending on the power direction
The function provides automatic voltage control within a speci-
fied voltage range on the secondary side of the transformers or,
as an alternative, at a remote load point (Z compensation or R/X
compensation) in the network. In order to compensate for the
voltage variations in the power system, use the LDC-Z procedure
(Z compensation). For voltage drops on the line, use the LDC-X
and R procedure (R/X compensation).
The control principle is based on the fact that a higher or lower
command to the tap changer, depending on the voltage change
(ΔV) per stage, causes a voltage increase or decrease.
The voltage control operates on a tap-for-tap basis and
compares the measured actual voltage (Vact) with the specified
target voltage (Vset). If the difference is greater than the set
bandwidth (B), a higher or lower command is sent to the tap
changer once the set time delay (T1) has elapsed.
The voltage controller function also monitors the currents on
the upper voltage side and the low voltage side to block the
controller during impermissible operating states (overcurrent/
undercurrent/overvoltage/undervoltage, reverse power).
The voltage controller function can also be used for parallel
control of up to 8 two-winding transformers in different groups.
You can carry out parallel control based on the Master-Follower
method or using circulating reactive current minimization
method.
SIPROTEC 5 System
Control
3.3

[dw_two-winding-appl-voltage, 1, en_US]
Figure 3.3/2 Application Example: SIPROTEC 7UT85 with Differential Protection and Voltage Controller
SIPROTEC 5 System
Control
3.3

Point-on-Wave Switching (PoW)
Point-on-wave and phase-segregated switching is a new func-
tion in the modular SIPROTEC 5 device range and can be added
to any device from the DIGSI function library.
Point-on-wave switching can be used in various ways:
• Stand-alone device for point-on-wave switching: type 6MD86
• Bay-control and point-on-wave switching in a single device:
type 6MD86
• Protection, control, and point-on-wave switching in a single
device: for example, 7SJ85 (protection of capacitor banks)
Switch applications for point-on-wave switching:
• Common-mode reactor
• Capacitors
• Transformers
• Simple power lines and cables (no compensation lines)
Point-on-wave and phase-segregated circuit-breaker switching
minimizes electrodynamic and dielectric loads on equipment
(overvoltages and inrush surge currents).
[dw_Appl_point-on-wave-switching, 1, en_US]
Figure 3.3/3 Application Example: Point-on-Wave on and off Switching for a Reactance Coil
Properties:
• A reactance coil is switched off using point-on-wave switching
to prevent overvoltages and arc reignitions.
• A reactance coil is switched on using point-on-wave switching
to prevent inrush currents.
• Switching accuracy on the device contact < 50 μ by using
solid-state outputs (IO209)
• Receiving and compensating for process and environment
influences - via 0-mA to 20-mA inputs (IO212), which influ-
ence the switching time: Recording the control voltage of the
closing and trip circuit, the temperature, and the hydraulic
pressure, if required.
• Recording reference contacts for Siemens circuit breakers
(IO212) for high-precision detection of circuit-breaker pole
mechanical contact and disconnection.
SIPROTEC 5 System
Control – Point-On-Wave Switching (PoW)
3.3

• Recording the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts for non-
Siemens circuit breakers via normal binary inputs for accurate
detection of circuit-breaker pole mechanical contact and
disconnection.
• The function is cost-effectively integrated into a protection or
electronic control unit. This ensures that the use of 2 physical
devices, a) for controlled switching and b) for bay device func-
tionality, can be avoided.
Module Connections Use
IO202 4 x I, 4 x V: Current and voltage measurement • As a reference voltage
• For switching monitoring/recording
2 x IO209 With 8 x high-speed contacts for switching accu-
racy < 50 μ
• For supervised circuit-breaker opening and closing
IO212 With 8 x quick measuring-transducer inputs (0 mA
to 20 mA)
• 3 inputs as a Siemens circuit-breaker reference contact
• 2 inputs for circuit-breaker opening and closing (control voltage)
• 1 input for temperature measurement
Optional 1 plug-in module with 4 additional standard
measuring-transducer inputs
• 3 inputs for hydraulic circuit-breaker pressure
Hints:
• All measuring-transducer inputs are passive and require an external DC 24-V power supply.
• The circuit-breaker control voltage must be converted into 4 mA to 20 mA externally.
Table 3.3/1 Device Specification for Point-on-Wave Switching
SIPROTEC 5 System
Control – Point-On-Wave Switching (PoW)
3.3

Automation
[dw_automation, 4, en_US]
Figure 3.4/1 SIPROTEC 5 – Functional Integration – Automation
The integrated CFC (Continuous Function Chart) graphical auto-
mation editor enables you to create logic diagrams clearly and
simply. DIGSI 5 supports this with powerful logic blocks based
on the standard IEC 61131-3. All devices already have a
powerful base automation package. This makes it easy to
provide specific functions for automation of a switchgear.
Various stages of expansion for the CFC function charts are
available for the realization of your solutions:
• Function chart (CFC) basic
• Function chart (CFC) arithmetic
With the basic function chart (CFC) package, you can link all
internal digital information graphically, such as internal protec-
tion signals or operating states, directly to the logic blocks and
process them in real time. With the arithmetic function chart
(CFC) package, you can also link measured values or monitor
them regarding to limiting values.
Examples of automation applications are:
• Interlocking checks
• Switching sequences
• Message derivations or the tripping of switching operations
• Messages or alarms by linking available information
• Load shedding in a feeder
• Administration of decentralized energy infeeds
• System switchovers depending on the network status
• Automatic grid separations in the event of grid stability prob-
lems
Of course, SIPROTEC 5 provides a substation automation system,
such as SICAM PAS/PQS, with all necessary information, thus
ensuring consistent, integrated, and efficient solutions for
further automation.
Using macros makes it possible to reuse CFC subplans simply
and clearly, in the device, project, or in other projects. CFC
online monitoring makes it possible to track and check the
sequence of the plans in the device. Corrections can therefore
be made in a fast and efficient way.
SIPROTEC 5 System
Automation
3.4

Monitoring
[dw_Monitoring, 4, en_US]
Figure 3.5/1 SIPROTEC 5 – Functional Integration – Monitoring
SIPROTEC 5 devices can take on a wide variety of monitoring
tasks.
These can be divided into the following groups:
• Self monitoring
• Monitoring power-system stability
• Monitoring of equipment (condition monitoring)
• Monitoring power quality
Self-Monitoring
SIPROTEC 5 devices are equipped with many monitoring proce-
dures. These procedures detect faults, internal as well as
external, in secondary circuits, store them in logs, and report
them. This information is used to record the device fault and
helps to determine the cause of the error in order to take appro-
priate corrective actions.
Monitoring power-system stability
Grid Monitoring combines all of the monitoring systems that are
necessary to assure power-system stability during normal opera-
tion. SIPROTEC 5 provides all necessary functionalities, such as
fault recorders, continuous recorders, fault locators, and
synchrophasor measurement (Phasor Measurement Units, PMU)
for Grid Monitoring. This functionality allows to monitor power
system limit violations (for example, stability monitoring via
load-angle control) and to trigger the appropriate responses
actively. This data in the network control systems can also be
used as input variables for online power-flow calculation and
enable a significantly faster response in case of status changes
in the power system.
Monitoring of equipment (condition monitoring)
Condition monitoring is an important tool in asset management
and operational support from which both the environment and
the company can benefit. Equipment that typically requires
monitoring includes for example: circuit breakers, transformers,
and gas compartments in gas-insulated switchgear (GIS).
The measuring-transducer inputs (0 mA to 20 mA) enable
connection to various sensors and monitoring of non-electrical
variables, such as gas pressure, gas density, and temperature.
Thus, SIPROTEC 5 enables a wide range of monitoring tasks to
be carried out.
SIPROTEC 5 provides the process interfaces, buffers, recorders,
and automation functions necessary for monitoring equipment:
• Process values are stored together with a time stamp in the
operational log
• The circuit-breaker statistics provide essential data for condi-
tion-based maintenance of switchgear
• Process variables (for example, pressure, SF6 loss, speed, and
temperature) are monitored for limit violations via measuring
transducers connected to the sensors.
• Using external 20 mA or temperature measurement devices
that are connected serially or by Ethernet, other measured
values can be captured and processed.
Monitoring power quality
Besides availability, the ultimate consumers demand also a high
quality concerning the electrical energy (power quality). This is
dependent on process management and the responsibility of
the power utilities and consumers among other factors. The
increasing use of power electronic components (for example,
nonlinear motor drives, renewable infeeds) can have loading
effects on power quality. Switching operations in the electrical
power system can result in brief voltage dips. An inadequate
power quality can lead to interruptions of supply, damages,
production outages, and high follow-up costs. Consequently, a
reliable measurement of the appropriate power quality features
becomes more and more important.
Starting with V8.40, SIPROTEC 5 offers platform-wide5 basic
detection and recording of some power-quality data with PQ
Basic:
• Voltage changes (overvoltage, dips, interruption) and voltage
unbalance according to IEC 61000-4-30 Class S
• Harmonic voltages and currents up to the 20th harmonic, THD
and TDD
Many applications do not require detections according to the
most stringent PQ standards. PQ-Basic offers a cost-effective,
simple solution without having to install and operate additional
power-quality devices. In this way, you can quickly get an over-
view of your PQ status for the entire power system since all the
installed SIPROTEC 5 devices can simply be upgraded via a firm-
ware update without having to install additional hardware. You
can then, for example, perceive trends and be warned if the
power quality has reached problematic limits at sensitive points.
This can be used to detect weak points early so that corrective
measures can be taken.
5 without 7KE85 because, in this case, an extended detection of PQ measured values has been implemented.
SIPROTEC 5 System
Monitoring
3.5

If a detection and evaluation of the power-system quantities is
necessary as per the entire scope of grid codes, such as the
EN 50160 standard, SIPROTEC 5 provides appropriate power-
quality recorders such as the SIPROTEC 7KE85. A SICAM PQS
system provides centralized data archiving and an elegant evalu-
ation of the weekly reports as per, for example, EN 50160,
among others.
Power Quality – Basic (PQ-Basic)
Voltage Unbalance
In a 3-phase power system, the voltages are normally balanced,
as well as the connected loads. In some cases, however, the
balanced conditions can be disturbed due to various influences.
Voltage unbalances can be caused by various factors:
• Unbalanced load, for example, caused by different consumers
in the individual phases
• Phase failure, for example, due to a tripped 1-phase fuse or a
broken conductor
• Faults in the primary system, for example, at the transformer
The function Voltage unbalance:
• Detects the voltage-unbalance conditions in the distribution
and industrial power systems.
• Monitors the voltage-unbalance conditions.
In the function Voltage unbalance, the following stage types
are available:
• V2/V1: ratio of the negative-sequence voltage to the positive-
sequence voltage
• V0/V1: ratio of the zero-sequence voltage to the positive-
sequence voltage
All the measured values are displayed under Power quality
basic > Voltage unbalance of a specific function group in the
HMI.
The specific function group in which the function Voltage
unbalance is instantiated must be connected to the 3-phase
voltage measuring point.
The values are recorded according to the standard for voltage
quality IEC 61000-4-30 class S.
Voltage Variation
The function Voltage variation is used for measuring and moni-
toring short-duration variations of the voltage in distribution
and industrial power systems. The power-quality events such as
voltage dips, swells, and interruptions in 3-phase systems are
detected.
This measuring function provides the RMS value of the voltage
for the minimum value in the event of a voltage dip, the lowest
residual voltage in the event of an interruption or the highest
swell, as well as the duration of the event.
All events can be logged in operational or user-defined logs.
They can enable the fault recorder via binary warning indica-
tions, and write their values as tracks.
The values are recorded according to the standard for voltage
quality IEC 61000-4-30 class S.
[dw_PQ_VoltVar_event_duration, 1, en_US]
Figure 3.5/2 Duration of a Voltage Dip or Overvoltage Event
THD and Harmonics
At the connection point to the public power system, the allowed
total harmonic distortion (THD) is limited according to the
power-quality related standards. The function THD and
harmonics can be used to monitor the THD value.
The function THD and harmonics serves for the calculation of
the following values:
• THD values of the 3-phase currents and 3-phase voltages
• Aggregated THD values of the 3-phase voltages
If the aggregated THD value exceeds the threshold, a warning
is generated.
• 2nd to 20th harmonics of the 3-phase currents and 3-phase
voltages
The calculated THD values and harmonics are displayed under
Power quality basic > THD and harmonics of a specific func-
tion group in the HMI or via the DIGSI Online-Editor. If routed,
the calculated THD values and harmonics are available in the
communication protocols and in the fault record. Abnormal
values can be logged in the operational or user-defined log if
routed.
Total Demand Distortion
At the connection point to the public power system, the allowed
total demand distortion (TDD) is limited according to the
power-quality related standards. The function Total demand
distortion can be used to monitor the TDD value.
The function Total demand distortion serves for calculating the
following values of the 3-phase currents:
• 3-s TDD value
• TDD value within an interval
If the TDD value TDD intvl. exceeds the threshold value, a
warning is generated.
The TDD values are displayed under Power quality basic > TDD
of a specific function group in the HMI or via the DIGSI Online-
Editor. If routed, the TDD values are available in the communica-
SIPROTEC 5 System
Monitoring
3.5

tion protocols and the fault records. Abnormal values can be
logged in the operational log or user-defined logs.
General Properties, Power Quality – Basic:
Values of the 3 phases (phases-selectively) can
• be viewed on the device display as well as remotely using
DIGSI 5 and even used with CFC
• be transmitted using the protocols supported by SIPROTEC 5
(typically, as per IEC 61850) for additional use or for docu-
mentation
• optionally be recorded in the fault record; started via CFC (it is
possible to configure one binary input to an external start
condition of the fault recorder).
• All events and anomalous PQ data can be logged in opera-
tional logs or user-defined logs with a time stamp and they
can be displayed on the HMI and in the DIGSI 5 information
list. The data is stored in non-volatile memories (and are not
lost in case of a power failure). You can also export data to a
file with DIGSI.
• If limiting values are exceeded, warning signals can be gener-
ated.
• Statistical values such as meters and previous maximum
values can be reset via the HMI, BI, or remotely via DIGSI or via
the protocol (resetting via the protocol should be done using
the CFC and a user-defined signal)
• PQ-Basic is a SIPROTEC 5 platform-wide feature and can thus
be used for all devices (except for the 7KE). Older firmware
versions can simply be upgraded, a hardware change is not
necessary.
SIPROTEC 5 System
Monitoring
3.5

[dw_data, 4, en_US]
Figure 3.6/1 SIPROTEC 5 – Functional Integration – Data Acquisition
and Logging
The recorded and logged bay data is comprehensive. It repre-
sents the image and history of the bay. It is also used by the
functions in the SIPROTEC 5 device for monitoring, substation
automation, and multibay automation tasks. Thus, they repre-
sent the basis both for the functions available today and for
future applications.
Measurement and PMU
A large number of measured values are derived from the analog
input variables, which supply a current image of the process.
Depending on the device type, the following basic measured
values are available:
• Operational measured values
• Fundamental phasor and symmetrical components
• Protection-specific measured values, such as differential and
restraint current for differential protection
• Mean values
• Minimum values and maximum values
• Energy measured values
• Statistical values
• Limiting values
Besides the basic measured values, synchrophasor measured
values can also be activated in the devices (application as PMU,
Phase Measurement Unit)
Synchrophasor measured values support a range of applications
for monitoring grid stability. For this purpose,
SIPROTEC 5 devices aquire the necessary PMU data. These high-
precision, time-stamped phasors indicate power frequency and
the change in the power frequency. They can be transmitted to
central analysis systems via the high-performance communica-
tion systems.
Measured values are displayed as primary and secondary values
and as reference values. These values are also available for other
applications, for example, transmission to the systems control or
automation tasks.
Up to 40 analog inputs can be supplied for each device. Up
to 80 analog inputs are supported in the busbar protection
SIPROTEC 7SS85.
The analog inputs of the SIPROTEC 5 devices can be selected
with a corresponding accuracy class and dynamic range suitable
for connection to both protections and measurement cores. The
innovative current-terminal technology enables these to be
simply adaptedlater on-site if needed. All analog inputs are
factory-calibrated and thereby ensure maximum accuracy.
The following accuracies are typical:
• V, I ≤ 0.1% at frated
• V, I ≤ 0.3% in the expanded frequency range
(frated -10Hz, frated+10Hz)
• P ≤ 0.3% at frated
• P ≤ 0.5% in the expanded frequency range
• Q ≤ 1.0% at frated
• Q ≤ 1.5% in the expanded frequency range
Separate measuring transducers (analog inputs) are therefore
unnecessary. The high-precision measured data enables
extended energy management and makes commissioning much
easier.
SIPROTEC 5 thus provides the following measured values for
analysis and further processing:
• The basic measured values with high dynamic range and high
accuracy (protection-class current transformer)
• The basic measured values with very high accuracy (instru-
ment transformer)
• Synchrophasor measured values with high-precision time
stamping for subsequent tasks such as grid stability moni-
toring.
• Detection of current and voltage signals up to the 50 th
harmonic with a high accuracy for selected protection func-
tions (for example thermal overload protection, peak over-
voltage protection for capacitors) and operational measured
values.
Recorder
In SIPROTEC 5, recorders are able to record large volumes of
data. They feature a large number of analog and binary inputs,
and a high sampling frequency. An extremely wide range of
records can be converted, either continuously or via various
trigger criteria.
Besides storing the data on internal mass storage, a transmis-
sion to central analysis systems is possible. Consequently, you
are able to monitor systems regarding typical characteristics.
SIPROTEC 5 System
3.6

Fault Recorder
The fault recording in protection devices and bay controllers
stores analog and binary data during a fault event, for example,
in case of short circuits or ground faults, and preserves the
records, including high-precision time stamps for subsequent
analysis. Calculated measurands such as power or frequency can
also be incorporated into the fault recording function. Analysis
takes place after the data is read out from the device by DIGSI
using SIGRA. Recorded data is archived to prevent data loss in
the case of supply voltage failure. Analog and binary signal
traces to be recorded are freely configurable, and pre-trigger
and post-trigger record duration can be programmed within a
very wide range. SIPROTEC 5 fault recording provides long
recording times with outstanding accuracy.
Features of the fault recorders:
• Recording of all analog channels
• Sampling frequencies from 1 kHz to 8 kHz
• High recording capacity for individual records of 20 s
for 24 channels at an 8 kHz sampling frequency
• Storage capacity for up to 128 fault records
• The recording duration for all records is limited by the avail-
able storage capacity of the device, and depends on the
number of configured channels and sampling frequency.
Example
- Line protection with 8 analog channels (4 I, 4 V),
- Sampling frequency 1 kHz, 6 measured-value channels,
and 20 binary channels: resulting recording capacity of the
device about 890 s!
• Up to 100 freely configurable binary tracks and 50 additional
measured-value tracks
• Due to the high number of up to 120 measured values, a
different record duration results for SIPROTEC 7SS85.
• The SIPROTEC 7KE85 fault recorder has yet more
properties:
– Expanded trigger criteria: Gradient trigger (ΔM/Δt), binary
trigger, network trigger, GOOSE trigger, trigger on
harmonics via CFC, etc.
– Higher sampling frequency of 16 kHz for up to 40 analog
channels
– Substantially longer record duration due to the additionally
installed mass storage.
You can find the descriptions for the fast-scan, slow-scan,
and continuous recorder as well as for the trigger functions
in the chapter "SIPROTEC 7KE85 fault recorder".
Time synchronization
To be able to compare the measured values and recordings of
the devices at different locations to each other, a very exact
time synchronization of all devices is necessary. Thus, the time
synchronization is an important property and must be done with
a high degree of accuracy. In particular, the use of the Phasor
Measurement Unit (PMU) function and the applications with the
process bus require a precise time stamping,Figure 3.6/2.
The time synchronization can be done using 1 or 2 timers.
Depending on the time source, an accuracy from 1 ms to 1 μs is
achieved. Events are logged with a date and time with 1-ms
resolution.
The time synchronization is optionally realized via:
• DCF77 signal
• IRIG-B signal
• SNTP protocol
• Substation automation protocol (for example,
IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 61850)
• IEEE 1588 protocol (accuracy: 1μs)
• Seconds pulse (for special high-precision applications)
• DIGSI 5 protocol (not cyclical)
• Timing master of a protection communication
• Internal time with integrated quartz crystal
Time synchronization in the device has a battery-buffered. Thus,
the internal clock continues to run with the quartz accuracy of
the device even in case of an auxiliary-voltage failure.
[Time_settings, 1, --_--]
Figure 3.6/2 Time Settings in DIGSI 5
GPS time signal receiver for IRIG-B, DCF77
The recommended GPS receiver from Meinberg (Figure 3.6/3)
synchronizes the internal time of all connected protection
devices. The internal clock of the protection devices are updated
using the respective telegram (IRIG-B, DCF77). Optical fiber can
also be used to transmit time signals (telegrams or second inter-
vals) without interference even over larger distances and in elec-
tromagnetically polluted environments. SIPROTEC 5 devices
generally support redundant time synchronization. The time
information can be provided by 2 external timers. One timer
functions as the primary time source. If it fails, a switchover to
the second (secondary) timer is performed.
SIPROTEC 5 System
3.6

[dw_7KE85_GPS, 2, en_US]
Figure 3.6/3 SIPROTEC 5 Device with IRIG-B or DCF77 Time Synchroniza-
tion
Event-log buffer
Event-log buffers mark important events with a time stamp
(accurate to 1 ms) for subsequent analysis.
The long recording length is achieved with large event-log
buffers and separate logs for different event categories. The
events to be logged are freely configurable and provide
improved manageability. Configuration of user-specific event-
log buffers for cyclical or event-driven recording is also
supported.
Convenient, complete analysis
Event-log buffers of different categories enable easier, targeted
analysis. Changes to parameters and configuration data are
recorded.
Maintainability
Hardware and software are constantly monitored and irregulari-
ties are detected immediately. In this way, extremely high levels
of security, reliability, and availability are achieved at the same
time. Important information about essential maintenance activi-
ties (for example, battery supervision), hardware defects
detected by internal monitoring, or compatibility problems are
recorded separately in the device-diagnosis log. All entries
include specific instructions. The following table provides an
overview of the typical logs.
The log entries and fault records are retained even in case of an
auxiliary-voltage and battery-voltage failure.
Type of Log Number of
Messages
Property
Operational log 2000 messages Cyclical logging of operational
indications (for example,
control processes)
Fault log 1000 messages per
fault
Event-driven recording of
faults. A maximum
of 128 faults can be stored. A
maximum of 1000 messages
can be recorded for each
fault.
User-specific
buffer
200 messages Option of cyclical or event-
driven recording of user-
defined signals
Ground-fault log 100 messages per
ground fault
Event-driven recording of
ground faults. A maximum
of 10 ground faults can be
stored. A maximum
of 100 messages can be
recorded for each ground
fault.
Parameterization
history log
(cannot be
deleted)
200 messages Logging of all parameter
changes and configuration
downloads
Communication
log
500 messages Logging the status of all
configured communication
links (such as disturbances
that arise, testing and diag-
nostic operation, and commu-
nication loads)
Security log
(cannot be
deleted)
500 messages Logging the successful and
unsuccessful attempts to
access restricted areas of the
device
Device-diagnosis
log
500 messages Logging and display of
specific instructions in case of
necessary maintenance (for
example, battery supervision),
detected hardware defects, or
compatibility problems
Table 3.6/1 Overview of Typical Logs
SIPROTEC 5 System
3.6

SIPROTEC 5 devices are equipped with high-performance,
pluggable communication interfaces and thus support
optimal migration concepts in system modernizations.
These interfaces are integrated or extendable via plug-in
modules to offer a high degree of flexibility. The concept
of plug-in modules and loadable protocols enables exchan-
geability and retrofitting.
Communication
[dw_Communication, 4, en_US]
Figure 3.7/1 SIPROTEC 5 – Functional Integration – Communication
SIPROTEC 5 devices are equipped with high-performance
communication interfaces . These are integrated interfaces or
interfaces that are extendable with plug-in modules to provide a
high level of security and flexibility. Various communication
modules are available.
Particular importance was given to the realization of full
communication redundancy:
• Several serial and Ethernet-based communication interfaces
• A large number of serial and Ethernet-based protocols (for
example, IEC 60870-5-103, DNP3 serial and TCP, Modbus TCP,
IEC 60870-5-104, PROFINET, and IEC 61850 Edition 1,
2.0, and 2.1)
• IoT interface via the OPC UA PubSub protocol for integration
in cloud systems such as MindSphere
• Full availability of the communication ring when the switch-
gear is enabled for servicing operations by means of separate
auxiliary power supply of the communication module CB202
• Ethernet redundancy protocols PRP and HSR, in particular for
process bus and high-availability station communication
• A large number of plug-in modules with various communica-
tion protocols.
Plug-In Module Position of the Device
The base module can be extended via module slots E and F. All
available modules can be installed there. The expansion module
CB202 is designed for 3 additional plug-in modules if the 2 slots
in the base module are not sufficient. Any additional plug-in
modules can be installed in slots N and P. Analog expansion
modules can be plugged into slot M. This slot does not support
serial or Ethernet modules.
Serial Plug-In Modules
Serial electrical plug-in modules are used for asynchronous serial
protocols, for example IEC 60870-5-103, DNP3. Optical 820-nm/
1300-nm and 1550-nm modules can also be configured as a
protection interface for the point-to-point connection.
Serial electrical RS485 module
This module has either 1 (USART-AB-1EL) or 2 (USART-AC-2EL)
RS485 interfaces. The use of RJ45 sockets allows for the
assembly of an economical serial RS485 bus with patch cables,
which are simply looped through. This saves wiring time and
cable costs. Figure 3.7/2 shows an electrical serial module
with 2 interfaces on which 2 independent serial protocol appli-
cations are executed.
[E_CC_USART-AC-2EL_sRGB, 1, --_--]
Figure 3.7/2 Serial Electrical Double Module (USART-AC-2EL)
Serial optical 820-nm module
This module exists with 1 (USART-AD-1FO) or 2 (USART-AE-2FO)
optical 820-nm interfaces (Figure 3.7/3), with which distances
of 1.5 km to 2 km can be bridged via 62.5/125 μm multimode
optical fibers. The optical connection is made via ST connectors.
Apart from serial protocols, the synchronous serial protection
interface can be operated on the module and enables optical
direct connections via multimode optical fibers. 2 devices can
thus either exchange data, for example of the differential
protection via a short direct connection, or they can be
connected through communication networks via
a 7XV5662 converter. Additionally, the module can be
connected directly with an optical multiplexer input in accord-
ance with standard IEEE C37.94.
SIPROTEC 5 System
Communication – Plug-In Modules
3.7

[E_CC_USART-AE-2FO_sRGB, 1, --_--]
Figure 3.7/3 Serial Optical 820-nm Double Module (USART-AE-2FO)
Serial optical 1300-nm/1550-nm modules for unidirectional
data exchange
Long-distance modules are used for synchronous serial data
exchange of protection communication via multimode or single-
mode optical fibers. They are available with 1 or 2 interfaces
(Table 3.7/1). The optical connection is made via duplex LC
plugs.
Optical
Wavelength
Module Designation
with 1 or 2 Interfaces
Application
1300 nm USART-AF-1LDFO, USART-
AU-2LDFO
Max. 24 km via 2 single-
mode optical fibers or
max. 4 km via 2 multimode
optical fibers
1300 nm USART-AG-1LDFO, USART-
AV-2LDFO
Max. 60 km via singlemode
optical fiber
1550 nm USART-AK-1LDFO, USART-
AY-2LDFO
100 km via singlemode
optical fiber
Table 3.7/1 Distance Modules for Different Distances for Point-to-Point
Connections with 2 Fibers
Serial optical 1300-nm/1550-nm modules for bidirectional data
exchange
Special modules enable bidirectional data exchange via one
optical fiber. This saves one fiber per data connection on fiber-
optic lines, without functional limitations in comparison with
connections with 2 fibers. These modules transmit at 1300 nm
or 1550 nm, but must be used in pairs (see Table 3.7/2 and
Figure 3.7/4). The optical connection is made via LC simplex
plugs.
Optical
Wavelength
Module Designation
with 1 or 2 Interfaces
Application
1300 nm
1550 nm
USART-AH-1LDFO <->
USART-AJ-1LDFO
USART-AX-2LDFO <->
USART-AY-2LDFO
Max. 40 km via one single-
mode optical fiber (with
integrated fiber-optic multi-
plexer)
Table 3.7/2 WAN Modules for Point-to-Point Connections with One
Fiber
[E_CC_USART-BB-2FO-2LDFO_sRGB, 1, --_--]
Figure 3.7/4 Serial, Optical Double Module for Wide-Range Connections
via Optical Fibers (for Module Designation, see Tables
"Long-distance Modules")
Plug-In Modules for Ethernet
Ethernet modules are used for Ethernet-based protocol applica-
tions, for example, IEC 61850, IEC 60870-5-104, DNP3 TCP,
PROFINET, time synchronization via SNTP, network management
via SNMP, DIGSI 5 via TCP etc. Several applications can run in
parallel, whereby unused applications can be switched off for
security reasons.
Electrical Ethernet module
The ETH-BO-2EL module (Figure 3.7/5) has 2 RJ45 interfaces
(Figure 3.7/5). It can be configured with or without an inte-
grated switch. The maximum electrically permitted distance via
CAT 5 patch cables is 20 m.
[E_CC_ETH-BA-2EL_sRGB, 1, --_--]
Figure 3.7/5 Electrical Ethernet Module (ETH-BO-2EL)
SIPROTEC 5 System
3.7

Optical Ethernet module
The ETH-BB-2FO module (Figure 3.7/6) has 2 optical duplex
LC 1300-nm interfaces (Figure 3.7/6). It can be configured with
or without an integrated switch. The maximum optically
permitted distance via 50/125 µm or 62.5/125 µm multimode
optical fibers is 2 km. The optical transmission and receiving
level is measured in the module and can be displayed with
DIGSI 5.
[E_CC_ETH-BB-2FO_sRGB, 1, --_--]
Figure 3.7/6 Optical Ethernet Module (ETH-BB-2FO)
Optical Ethernet Module for the Process Bus
The ETH-BD-2FO module (Figure 3.7/7) has 2 optical duplex
LC 1300 nm interfaces (multimode). It can be configured with or
without an integrated switch. The maximum optically permitted
distance via 50/125 µm or 62.5/125 µm multimode optical fibers
is 2 km. In addition, the module has a pluggable connection for
SFP. Using this, the physical communication medium can also
be an electrical interface with RJ45 or a 9/125 µm fiber-optic
interface with a range of 24 km.
The optical transmission and receiving level is measured in the
module and can be displayed with DIGSI 5.
[E_CC_ETH-BD-2FO_sRGB, 1, --_--]
Figure 3.7/7 Optical Ethernet Module (ETH-BD-2FO)
SIPROTEC 5 System
3.7

Plug-In Modules for the Communication
Port or Plug-In Module
Front
Interface
Port
G:
Time
Synchronization
Port
J:
Integrated
Ethernet
Module
Type:
USART-AB-1EL
Module
Type:
USART-AC-2EL
Module
Type:
Plug-In
Module
USART-AD-1FO
Module
Type:
USART-AE-2FO
Module
Type:
ETH-BA-2EL
Module
Type:
ETH-BB-2FO
Module
Type:
ETH-BD-2FO
6
Physical Connection
USB ■
9-pin D-sub socket ■
1 x electrical Ethernet 10/100 Mbit/s, RJ45 ■
1 x electrical serial RS485, RJ45 ■
1 x optical serial, 820 nm, ST connector, 2 km via 62.5/125 μm
multimode optical fiber
■
2 x optical serial, 820 nm, ST connector, 2 km via 62.5/125 μm
■
2 x electrical Ethernet 10/100 Mbit/s, RJ45, 20 m ■ ■7
2 x optical Ethernet 100 Mbit/s, 1300 nm, LC connector, 24 km via
9/125 μm singlemode optical fiber
■7
2 x optical Ethernet 100 Mbit/s, 1300 nm, LC connector, 2 km via
50/125 μm or 62.5/125 μm multimode optical fiber
■ ■
Applications
DIGSI 5 protocol ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
IRIG-B, DCF77, PPS ■
IEC 61850-8-1 server (including GOOSE, reporting to 6 clients) ■ ■ ■ ■
IEC 61850-9-2 Merging Unit ■
IEC 61850-9-2 Process-Bus Client ■
IEC 60870-5-103 ■ ■ ■ ■
IEC 60870-5-104 ■ ■ ■
DNP3 serial ■ ■ ■ ■
DNP3 TCP ■ ■
Modbus TCP ■ ■
Synchrophasor (IEEE C37.118 - PMU) ■ ■ ■
Protection interface (Sync. HDLC, IEEE C37.94) * ■ ■
PROFINET IO ■ ■ ■8
SUP Serial (Slave Unit Protocol) for connecting external tempera-
ture- or 20-mA measuring devices
■ ■ ■
SUP Ethernet SUP (Slave Unit Protocol) for connecting external
temperature- or 20-mA measuring devices
■ ■ ■
Diagnostic homepage ■ ■ ■ ■
Additional Ethernet protocols and services
DHCP, DCP (automatic IP configuration) ■ ■ ■ ■
Line Mode ■ ■ ■
PRP (Ethernet ring redundancy) ■ ■ ■
HSR (Ethernet ring redundancy)9 ■ ■ ■
6 For modular devices only (not for 7ST85 and 6MD89)
7 For the 2 x electrical Ethernet and 2 x optical Ethernet over 24 km function, separate SFPs are necessary. These can be ordered as accessories.
8 PROFINET IO is available in the ETH-BD-2FO module with S2 redundancy and SOE functionality for V8.30 and higher.
9 HSR is available in the ETH-BD-2FO module for V8.30 and higher, without supporting the IEEE 1588v2 transparent clock.
SIPROTEC 5 System
3.7

Port or Plug-In Module
Front
Interface
Port
G:
Time
Synchronization
Port
J:
Integrated
Ethernet
Module
Type:
USART-AB-1EL
Module
Type:
USART-AC-2EL
Module
Type:
Plug-In
Module
USART-AD-1FO
Module
Type:
USART-AE-2FO
Module
Type:
ETH-BA-2EL
Module
Type:
ETH-BB-2FO
Module
Type:
ETH-BD-2FO
6
RSTP (Ethernet ring redundancy) ■ ■ ■
SNTP (time synchronization via Ethernet) ■ ■ ■ ■
SNMP V3 (network management protocol) ■ ■ ■10
IEEE 1588v2 (PTP protocol via Ethernet – ms accuracy) ■ ■
IEEE 1588v2 (PTP protocol via Ethernet – µs accuracy)11 ■
IEEE 802.1q (VLAN) ■
Table 3.7/3 Communication Applications and Plug-In Modules
i
i
NOTE
The USART and ETH plug-in module types can be
used in slots E and F in the base module as well
as in slots N and P in the CB202 expansion
module. They are not intended for use in slot M in
the CB202 expansion module.
* Additional plug-in modules for protection inter-
face: see next table
10 Available for V8.30 and higher
11 With optional RJ45, the SFP accuracy is 1 ms.
SIPROTEC 5 System
3.7

Plug-In Modules for the Communication
Plug-In Module
USART-AB-1EL
USART-AC-2EL
USART-AD-1FO
USART-AE-2FO
ETH-BA-2EL
ETH-BB-2FO
ETH-BD-2FO
12
USART-AF-1LDFO
USART-AW-2LDFO
USART-AG-1LDFO
USART-AU-2LDFO
USART-AK-1LDFO
USART-AV-2LDFO
USART-AH-1LDFO
13
USART-AJ-1LDFO
14
USART-AX-2LDFO
15
USART-AY-2LDFO
16
ANAI-CA-4EL
ARC-CD-3FO
Physical Connection
1 x optical serial, 820 nm, ST connector, 2 km via
62.5/125 μm multimode optical fiber
■
2 x optical serial, 820 nm, ST connector, 2 km via
■
2 x electrical Ethernet 100 Mbit/s, RJ45, 20 m ■ ■
17
2 x optical Ethernet 100 Mbit/s, 1300 nm, LC
connector, 24 km via 9/125 μm singlemode optical
fiber
■
17
2 x optical Ethernet 100 Mbit/s, 1300 nm, LC
connector, 2 km via 50/125 μm or 62.5/125 μm
■ ■
1 x optical serial, 1300 nm, LC connector, 24 km via
9/125 μm singlemode optical fiber or 4 km via
■
9/125 μm singlemode optical fiber or 4 km via
■
■
■
1 x optical serial, 1550 nm, LC connector, 100 km
via 9/125 μm singlemode optical fiber
■
2 x optical serial, 1550 nm, LC connector, 100 km
via 9/125 μm singlemode optical fiber
■
1 x optical serial, bidirectional via 1 common optical
fiber, 1300 nm/1550 nm (Tx/Rx), 2 x LC simplex
plug, 40 km via 9/125 μm singlemode optical
fiber13
■
fiber, 1550 nm/1300 nm (Tx/Rx), LC simplex plug,
40 km via 9/125 μm singlemode optical fiber14
■
fiber15
■
fiber16
■
8-pin screw-type terminal spring ■
13 USART-AH-1LDFO only in connection with USART-AJ-1LDFO or USART-AY-2LDFO
14 USART-AJ-1LDFO only in connection with USART-AH-1LDFO or USART-AX-2LDFO
15 USART-AX-2LDFO only in connection with USART-AJ-1LDFO or USART-AY-2LDFO
16 USART-AY-2LDFO only in connection with USART-AH-1LDFO or USART-AX-2LDFO
17 For the 2 x electrical Ethernet and 2 x optical Ethernet over 24 km function, separate SFPs are necessary. These can be ordered as accessories.
SIPROTEC 5 System
3.7

Plug-In Module
USART-AB-1EL
USART-AC-2EL
USART-AD-1FO
USART-AE-2FO
ETH-BA-2EL
ETH-BB-2FO
ETH-BD-2FO
12
USART-AF-1LDFO
USART-AW-2LDFO
USART-AG-1LDFO
USART-AU-2LDFO
USART-AK-1LDFO
USART-AV-2LDFO
USART-AH-1LDFO
13
USART-AJ-1LDFO
14
USART-AX-2LDFO
15
USART-AY-2LDFO
16
ANAI-CA-4EL
ARC-CD-3FO
3 x optical (for point sensor) ■
Application
DIGSI 5 protocol ■ ■ ■
IEC 61850-8-1 server
You can find more information (whether GOOSE or
MMS reporting) in the Communication protocols
manual, chapter IEC 61850.
■ ■ ■
IEC 61850-9-2 Merging Unit ■
IEC 61850-9-2 Process-Bus Client ■
IEC 60870-5-103 ■ ■ ■ ■
IEC 60870-5-104 ■ ■ ■
DNP3 serial ■ ■ ■ ■
DNP3 TCP ■ ■
Modbus TCP ■ ■
Synchrophasor (IEEE C37.118 - PMU) ■ ■ ■
Protection interface (Sync. HDLC) ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Protection interface (IEEE C37.94) ■ ■
PROFINET IO ■ ■ ■1
8
SUP Serial (Slave Unit Protocol) for connecting
external temperature- or 20-mA measuring devices
■ ■ ■ ■
SUP Ethernet (Slave Unit Protocol) for connecting
external temperature or 20-mA measuring devices
■ ■
Diagnosis: Ethernet module homepage (http) ■ ■ ■
Measuring transducer, 4 inputs, DC ±20 mA ■
Arc protection ■
Additional Ethernet protocols and services
DHCP, DCP (automatic IP configuration) ■ ■ ■
Line Mode ■ ■ ■
PRP (Ethernet ring redundancy) ■ ■ ■
HSR (Ethernet ring redundancy)19 ■ ■ ■
RSTP (Ethernet ring redundancy) ■ ■ ■
SNTP (time synchronization via Ethernet) ■ ■ ■
SNMP V3 (network management protocol) ■ ■ ■
20
IEEE 1588v2 (PTP protocol via Ethernet – ms accu-
racy)
■ ■
18 PROFINET IO is available in the ETH-BD-2FO module with S2 redundancy and SOE functionality for V8.30 and higher.
19 HSR is available in the ETH-BD-2FO module for V8.30 and higher, without supporting the IEEE 1588v2 transparent clock.
20 Available for V8.30 and higher
SIPROTEC 5 System
3.7

Plug-In Module
USART-AB-1EL
USART-AC-2EL
USART-AD-1FO
USART-AE-2FO
ETH-BA-2EL
ETH-BB-2FO
ETH-BD-2FO
12
USART-AF-1LDFO
USART-AW-2LDFO
USART-AG-1LDFO
USART-AU-2LDFO
USART-AK-1LDFO
USART-AV-2LDFO
USART-AH-1LDFO
13
USART-AJ-1LDFO
14
USART-AX-2LDFO
15
USART-AY-2LDFO
16
ANAI-CA-4EL
ARC-CD-3FO
IEEE 1588v2 (PTP protocol via Ethernet – µs accu-
racy)21
■
IEEE 802.1q (VLAN) ■
Table 3.7/4 Plug-In Modules for Applications with the Protection Interface and for Other Applications
i
i
NOTE
The USART and ETH plug-in module types can be
used in slots E and F in the base module as well
as in slots N and P in the CB202 expansion
module. They are not intended for use in slot M in
the CB202 expansion module.
The plug-in modules of types ANAI and ARC can
be used in both slots in the base module (ports E
and F), as well as in all slots in the expansion
module CB202 (ports M, N, and P).
21 SFP accuracy is 1 ms with optional RJ45
SIPROTEC 5 System
3.7

Protocols
Plug-in modules are delivered without a protocol application.
According to the tables Table 3.7/3 and Table 3.7/4, a module
can be initialized via DIGSI 5 with a protocol application. Every
interface is assigned the desired application via DIGSI 5. Assign-
ments can be removed and reconfigured. This enables a high
degree of flexibility when configuring the modules.
DIGSI 5 Protocol
The DIGSI 5 protocol works with TCP services, which can be
routed via IP networks. Worldwide remote access to devices via
secure connections is an integral component of the communica-
tion concept. The protocol is available on the USB interface and
all Ethernet interfaces. Optionally, DIGSI 5 can also be operated
via its own Ethernet module if substation controller functions
and access for operation and maintenance are to be kept strictly
separate.
IEC 61850-8-1 Client-Server Communication
Integrated Ethernet interface (Port J)
Besides DIGSI 5, this interface supports 6 client-server associa-
tions with reporting function and GOOSE messages, as well as
the SUP protocol. Messages, measured values, and fault records
can be read from an IEC 61850 client. Parameters in the device
can be changed via the client and the time of the device can be
set via an SNTP server.
Ethernet plug-in module
Messages, measured and metered values can be transmitted via
the client-server communication in static and dynamic reports to
a maximum of 6 clients (substation controllers). Dynamic
reports are created and read by the client without resetting the
parameters of the device. The static reports are created via
the IEC 61850 system configurator and are permanently saved
in the device as indication lists. Fault records can also be
retrieved in binary COMTRADE format. Extensive control func-
tions are available from the client, such as for the safe switching
of a circuit breaker. The setting parameters of the device can be
read and also changed via the IEC 61850 protocol. The devices
can be integrated in interoperable, intelligent Smart Grids
without difficulty. Changing the device parameter settings
during operation is possible through substation-controller equip-
ment in order to adapt selected setting parameters to the oper-
ating conditions. Redundant solutions can be realized
with 2 Ethernet modules.
IEC 61850-8-1 GOOSE
GOOSE has been established as a worldwide standard for cross
communication between devices in order to transmit messages
and measured values between devices. In addition to GOOSE
between devices within switchgear, GOOSE is also supported
between devices in different switchgears. The exchanged infor-
mation is described in data terms via standard-conforming SCL
files, which were defined in Edition 2 of IEC 61850. The
exchange itself occurs via high-performance IP network connec-
tions or Ethernet network connections. This data exchange can
also be realized via an Ethernet module used exclusively for this
purpose.
GOOSE messages can be used to exchange time-critical informa-
tion that must be transmitted in a few milliseconds. In this case,
GOOSE connections replace transmission via contacts and
binary inputs; for protection signals, transmission times
under 10 ms are required, and under 20 ms for switch positions
and interlockings. Measured and metered values are transmitted
in less than 100 ms. GOOSE applications are generated in the
system configurator for this purpose. This data is exchanged by
the devices in a high-performance manner via GOOSE
messages.
Receivers of GOOSE messages can constantly monitor the
receipt of indications and measured values for an outage of the
connection. The state of missing indications is automatically
updated at the receiver in order to attain a secure state. This
allows a constant, high-quality monitoring of GOOSE communi-
cation to be realized. GOOSE messages transmitted during the
test mode of a device are ignored by the receivers if these are in
normal operation. A test of a device can be performed without
disconnection from the communication network.
[dw_SIP5-0046, 3, en_US]
Figure 3.7/8 Separate Client-Server and GOOSE Communication via
IEC 61850 with Another Serial Connection to an
IEC 60870-5-103 Master
IEC 61850-9-2 Process Bus
For process bus solutions, the current and voltage is recorded in
the merging unit. It is an interoperable interface between the
primary and secondary equipment in accordance with IEC 61869
and IEC 61850-9-2 standards.
The measured values are digitized and converted into standar-
dized, Ethernet-based measured value telegrams (SMV) with a
selectable sampling rate, transmitted to the protection devices
(process-bus clients) via optical Ethernet connections, and are
processed by protection algorithms there.
Sampling Rate Number of ASDUs per Frame Notes
4000 Hz 1 Compatible to IEC 61850-9-2 LE for 50-Hz electrical power systems
4800 HZ 1 Compatible to IEC 61850-9-2 LE for 60-Hz electrical power systems
SIPROTEC 5 System
Communication – Protocols
3.7

Sampling Rate Number of ASDUs per Frame Notes
4800 HZ 2 Preferred sampling rate in compliance with IEC 61869-9 for general measurement and
protection functions, irrespective of the power frequency
12 800 HZ 8 Compatible to IEC 61850-9-2 LE for 50-Hz electrical power systems
14 400 HZ 6 Preferred sampling rate in compliance with IEC 61869-9 for Power Quality and fault
recording, irrespective of the power frequency
15 360 HZ 8 Compatible to IEC 61850-9-2 LE for 60-Hz electrical power systems
Table 3.7/5 Selectable Sampling Rates in Accordance with IEC 61869
A prerequisite for using the process bus is a high-precision time
synchronization to allow the measured-value samples from the
individual merging units to be processed at the same time base
in the protection device (process-bus client). The SIPROTEC
6MU85 merging units as well as all other modular SIPROTEC 5
protection devices support time synchronization for this purpose
via IEEE 1588v2/PTP, PPS22, or IRIG-B22, as well as the PRP and
HSR22 redundancy processes (IEC 62439).
The integrated Web server and full support of IEC 61850-8-1
GOOSE and MMS enable process-bus technologies to be fully
integrated into station automation systems of complete digital
switchgears.
[Sip5_Prozessbusloesung_front, 2, --_--]
Figure 3.7/9 Process-Bus Solution according to IEC 61850-9-2:
SIPROTEC 5 Device with Merging Units SIPROTEC 6MU85
Supporting IEC 61850 Edition 2.1
SIPROTEC 5 supports IEC 61850 Edition 2.1 from version 8. This
standard edition introduces a common reference to
IEC 61869-9, which governs interoperability of protection func-
tionality when using a process bus (IEC 61850-7-4 and
IEC 61850-9-2).
If previous editions are used (IEC 61850 Edition 2.0), compati-
bility between the merging unit and process-bus client, and
thereby a proper protection function cannot be fully guaran-
teed.
Availability, even if global time synchronization is missing
The merging units and process-bus clients must be synchronized
with one another in process-bus systems. IEC 61850 Edition 2.1
makes changes to the information on sampled measured value
time synchronization available. The option of specifying the
grandmaster ID (GmID) for the IEEE 1588 time source can also
be added. The merging-unit functionality and the process-bus
client support entering and using the GmID to reduce depend-
ency on a satellite signal during time synchronization. Uninter-
rupted protection-device operation is achieved by comparing
the GmIDs of the streams and those of the protection device. As
long as the GmIDs are identical, the protection remains active,
irrespective of whether the IEEE 1588 time source has been
synchronized globally or locally.
Merging Unit
The SIPROTEC 6MU85 merging unit has been universally
designed based on the flexible SIPROTEC 5 system for conven-
tional and non-conventional instrument transformers (LPIT)23.
Wiring expenditure and the risk of open current transformer
circuits can be kept to a minimum by digitizing all primary data
close to the process.
22
23 In preparation
SIPROTEC 5 System
3.7

[dw_6MU85_Digital_all_prim-data_close_process, 1, en_US]
Figure 3.7/10 Digitizing All Primary Data
The modularity and flexibility of the SIPROTEC 5 system enables
a wide range of solutions and migration concepts for new and
existing systems. For instance, this means that backup protec-
tion functions or double power supplies can be used in the
merging units, and a wide range of redundancy concepts can be
implemented. In addition to recording the current and voltage
measured values, the merging unit can also activate switch
contacts and record virtually all signals and information of a bay
close to the process, and provide them to the substation auto-
mation technology.
The merging-unit functionality can be scaled by using various
ETH-BD-2FO plug-in modules and the SIPROTEC 5 expansion
modules, which in turn increases the number of streams to be
sent or allows the quantity structure of binary inputs, binary
outputs, voltage-transformer and current-transformer inputs to
be adjusted to the application. IEC 61850-9-2 LE as well as flex-
ible streams according to IEC 61869-9 can be used.
Merging-Unit Functionality
Stream type IEC 61850-9-2 LE IEC 61869-9
Analog channels per stream 8 (fix24) Max 3225
Streams per ETH-BD-2FO 226
Merging-Unit Functionality
Max. ETH-BD-2FO to be
used for merging-unit func-
tionality
4
Analog channels per device Max. 40
Table 3.7/6 Merging-Unit Functionality
Process-bus client
Every modular SIPROTEC 5 protection device with the ETH-
BD-2FO plug-in module can be used as a process-bus client. The
fact that these plug-in modules can be easily retrofitted also
ensures that existing SIPROTEC 5 devices can be incorporated
into process-bus solutions.
Using several ETH-BD-2FO plug-in modules per device ensures
that the network traffic can be distributed to several process-bus
networks, which means that up to 80 measured-value channels
(sampled measured values) can be physically split up among
different networks, received and processed for each SIPROTEC 5
device.
Process-Bus Client Functionality
Stream type IEC 61850-9-2 LE IEC 61869-9
Streams per ETH-BD-2FO 16
24 IEC 61850-9-2 LE defines 4 currents and 4 voltages (IA, IB, IC, IN, VA, VB, VC, VN)
25 IEC 61869-9 limits the max. analog values per data stream to 24, this must be considered in interoperability scenarios
26 With V8.30
SIPROTEC 5 System
3.7

Process-Bus Client Functionality
Analog channels per stream 8 (fix27) Max 3228
Analog channels per ETH-
BD-2FO
6429
Max. ETH-BD-2FO to be
used for the PB client func-
tionality
3
Analog channels per device 40 (80 for 7SS85)
Table 3.7/7 Process-Bus Client Functionality
Sampled measured value (LSVS) reception is supervised in the
same way as GOOSE (LGOS) in accordance with IEC 61850, and
the errors are reported accordingly. This is carried out via addi-
tional information on the status of the sampled measured
values and GOOSE signals alongside the elements that are
required by the standard. This ensures supervised and effective
operation of a process-bus system and simple troubleshooting
and diagnostics during commissioning.
Parallel operation of a conventional and digital (process bus)
instrument-transformer connection
A simple protection for a feeder can be used to test the process
bus. Modular expansion is possible for modern protection
devices such as the SIPROTEC 5 range. For example, an existing
SIPROTEC 7SJ85 overcurrent protection device can be extended
by process-bus inputs. This enables cost-effective piloting.
Another major advantage of modern protection devices is their
ability to protect more than one protected object effectively. For
example, the SIPROTEC 7SJ85 allows up to 9 feeders to be
protected with one device. These 2 properties and the fact that
the overcurrent protection requires only the currents from one
merging unit permit effective parallel operation here.
If a system with less than 7 feeders is protected in one device,
this device still has free capacities. This permits parallel opera-
tion of process bus and conventional connection. For this
purpose, an ETH-BD-2FO plug-in module is added to the device
and the current from a feeder is additionally measured in a
merging unit. The measured current of the merging unit is then
connected to the protection device via the process bus. This
gives the protection device twice the measured current values.
On the one hand, it measures the values itself, and on the other
hand, it receives the current values via the process bus. The
protection function is doubly instantiated. The protection device
protects the same feeder conventionally and via the process
bus. This permits direct comparison between the process bus
and the direct measurement.
[dw_prozessbus_eines_wdl_7sj85_200115, 3, en_US]
Figure 3.7/11 Parallel Operation of Conventional and Digital (Process
Bus) Connection to an Instrument Transformer
Mixed operation with a process bus and measured values that
have been directly recorded
For economic reasons, it may be necessary to not just record the
measured values via the process bus, but also to do so directly
using the current and voltage transformers, which are directly
connected to the protection device, particularly in the context of
line or transformer differential protection. A mixed operation
like this is controlled by a SIPROTEC process-bus client by
buffering the measured values that have been directly recorded
and synchronizing them with the measured values that have
been received from the process bus.
[dw_line-diff-prot_SIP5-config, 1, en_US]
Figure 3.7/12 Line Differential Protection in Mixed Operation
27 IEC 61850-9-2 LE defines 4 currents and 4 voltages (IA, IB, IC, IN, VA, VB, VC, VN)
28 IEC 61869-9 limits the max. analog values per data stream to 24, this must be considered in interoperability scenarios
29 Theoretical limit, the analog-channel limit of the device defines the real limit
SIPROTEC 5 System
3.7

[dw_appl-exampl_micro-central-prot, 2, en_US]
Figure 3.7/13 Transformer Differential Protection in Mixed Operation
[dw_02_config_decentr-busbar_IEC61850, 1, en_US]
Figure 3.7/14 Distributed Busbar Protection
IEC 60870-5-103
The serial protocol is transmitted via RS485 or an optical 820-
nm interface. The compatible IEC 60870-5-103 protocol specifi-
cally extended for Siemens is supported. The implementation is
compatible with existing solutions, for example with
SIPROTEC 4 devices, which will enable a trouble-free exchange
and extension of devices even in the very long term. In addition
to indications, measured values, and fault records, metered
values, and customer-specific defined indications of systems
control are also available in protocol extensions. Control
commands for switching devices can also be transmitted via the
protocol. Setting values in the device can also be read or
changed via the generic services of the protocol. Information
about the device can be routed to the protocol interface by the
user with DIGSI 5. Information types and function numbers can
be freely configured here. This enables adaptation to existing
solutions and the interchangeability of devices without changes
in the systems control. This is an important contribution to
investment security.
IEC 60870-5-104
The station and network control protocol IEC 60870-5-104 is
supported via the electrical and optical Ethernet module.
Besides the transmission of messages (single-point and double-
point indications), measured values, metered values to 1 master
or 2 (redundant) masters, 3 masters (controlling stations) which
are sent the same information are also possible. Furthermore,
IEC 60870-5-104 data transmission is supported and fault
records can be read from the device in the COMTRADE format.
In command direction, secure switching of switching objects is
possible via the protocol. Time synchronization can take place
via the IEC 60870-5-104 master or via SNTP via the network,
redundant time servers being supported.
SUP – Slave Unit Protocol
This Siemens-specific protocol is used to read external 20-mA
devices (SICAM AI-Unit 7XV5674) or temperature measuring
devices (RTD unit 7XV5662-_AD10) in series or via Ethernet.
These devices are available as accessories for extension of
SIPROTEC 5 devices with analog interfaces. The measured values
of these devices can be further processed in the
SIPROTEC 5 device or are used for protection functions such as
overload protection or transformer hotspot calculation.
Serial DNP3 or DNP3 TCP
DNP3 is supported as a serial protocol via RS485 or an
optical 820-nm interface and as an Ethernet-based TCP variant
via the electrical or optical Ethernet module. A redundant optical
or electrical ring can be implemented simply by means of the
switch integrated in the Ethernet module. Information about a
device and the fault records of the device can be routed and
transmitted using the DNP3 protocol. Switching commands can
be executed in control direction. DNP3 TCP can support up
to 2 masters (Figure 3.7/15).
Redundant connection to 2 serial substation controllers can be
established via 2 modules or 1 serial double module. With
Ethernet, for a redundant connection, 2 Ethernet modules that
can work independently from one another via 1 or 2 networks
are to be provided. Settings values in the device cannot be read
or changed via the protocol.
For DNP3, the network topologies shown in Figure 3.7/29 to
Figure 3.7/33 can also be used for Ethernet-based or serial
communication.
SIPROTEC 5 System
3.7

[dw_SIP5-0057, 3, en_US]
Figure 3.7/15 DNP3 TCP/IEC 60870-5-104 Communication with Further
Serial Connection with an IEC 60870-5-103 Master
Modbus TCP
The Modbus TCP communication protocol is supported via the
electrical and optical Ethernet module. Modbus TCP and
Modbus RTU are very similar to one another. However, Modbus
TCP uses TCP/IP packets for data transmission.
Modbus TCP can be used to transmit messages (single-point and
double-point indications), measured values, metered values to
1 or 2 (redundant) masters. In command direction, switching of
switching objects is possible via the protocol.
Time synchronization can take place via SNTP or IEEE 1588 via
the network, redundant time servers being supported.
PROFINET IO
PROFINET IO is an Ethernet-based communication protocol that
can be used in all areas of communication automation.
The data exchange of PROFINET IO follows the Provider/
Consumer model. A configured PROFINET IO system has the
same look and feel as in PROFIBUS.
[dw_COM_PRO_IO, 2, en_US]
Figure 3.7/16 Communication Paths for PROFINET IO
The following device classes are defined for PROFINET IO:
• PROFINET IO controller
A PROFINET IO controller is typically the programmable logic
controller (PLC) on which the automation program runs. The
PROFINET IO controller provides output data to the configured
IO devices in its role as provider and is the consumer of input
data of IO devices.
• PROFINET IO supervisor
A PROFINET IO supervisor can be a Programming Device (PD),
a personal computer (PC), or a human-machine interface
(HMI). It serves for commissioning or diagnostic purposes and
corresponds to a class-2 master in PROFIBUS.
• PROFINET IO device
A PROFINET IO device is a distributed IO field device that is
connected to one or more IO controllers via PROFINET IO. It is
comparable to the function of a slave in PROFIBUS. The
PROFINET IO device is the provider of input data and the
consumer of output data. The SIPROTEC 5 device works as the
IO device.
System-level redundancy (S2) can only be achieved with the
new ETH-BD-2FO module with additional support of transmis-
sion of sequence of events to the IO controller.
PROFINET IO S2 Redundancy and SOE (Sequence of Events)
The ETH-BD-2FO system redundancy supports the redundancy
on the system level for the PROFINET IO protocol. System redun-
dancy is the redundancy of the IO controller or of the communi-
cation interface of the input/output device. Figure 3.7/17 shows
an example in which 1 input/output device is connected to
2 different IO controllers. The input/output device maintains the
active communication with one of the IO controllers as the
primary controller and with the other as the standby controller.
[dw_Profinet-IO-S2-redundancy, 1, en_US]
Figure 3.7/17 Connection of an Input/Output Device to 2 Different IO
Controllers
The PROFINET IO S2 redundancy is only available with the ETH-
BD-2FO module that can also be equipped with electrical RJ45
SFPs.
The ETH-BD-2FO module also supports SOE functionality in
which the digital signals can be queried from the input/output
device (SIPROTEC 5) and can be relayed to the IO controller with
accurate time stamps and a FIFO buffer having a capacity of
500 signals.
SIPROTEC 5 System
3.7

VLAN according to IEEE 802.1q
VLAN according to IEEE 802.1q is the standard in which various
applications on the same physical Ethernet network can be
disconnected or isolated. This improves the security, availability
and performance in the network and, at the same time, ensures
cost efficiency.
In a VLAN-capable network, you mark the Ethernet frames that
belong to the different application domains so that the other
switches or receivers either transmit a package with the desired
priority or discard the package due to security policy.
[dw_SIP5_ IEEE802-1q_VLAN, 1, en_US]
Figure 3.7/18 1 Physical Medium for 3 Applications
The SIPROTEC 5 family supports VLAN only with ETH-BD-2FO
modules. As shown in the example figure above, the SIPROTEC 5
device uses only one single physical medium for 3 different
applications with 3 different IP interfaces. The switches control
the telegrams to be transmitted in accordance with their setting.
Devices can only receive those telegrams for which they are
configured.
IEEE C37.118 (Synchrophasor)
SIPROTEC 5 devices optionally calculate synchrophasors and
work as a Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU). These measured
values, which are synchronized across large geographic areas
with high precision, allow for assessment of power system
stability. These values are transmitted via an Ethernet network
with the IEEE C37.118 protocol to a data concentrator. The
transmission occurs via an optical or electrical Ethernet module
(Figure 3.7/19)
SIPROTEC 5 System
3.7

[dw_central.vsd, 1, en_US]
Figure 3.7/19 Central Evaluation of Fault Records and Phasors
Further Ethernet-based Protocols and Services
Besides the actual protocol application, these services can run in
parallel on an Ethernet module. They can be switched on and off
by the user with DIGSI 5.
Ethernet redundancy with RSTP, PRP, HSR
The electrical and optical Ethernet module supports the building
of redundant ring structures in Ethernet with the redundancy
protocol (RSTP, HSR). With HSR, an uninterrupted ring redun-
dancy is achieved with up to 50 devices in the ring. PRP can be
used to communicate without interruption via parallel networks.
These procedures can be activated by means of parameters.
They are independent of the substation automation protocol or
the selected additional services.
Time Synchronization with SNTP Protocol
The device can poll the absolute time from 1 or 2 time servers
via an SNTP server. In redundant operation, both servers are
read and the time of the 1st server is used for setting the device
clock with an accuracy of 1 ms. If this server fails, the time is
synchronized by the 2nd server. In addition to Ethernet
modules, SNTP can also be used via the integrated Ethernet
interface (Port J).
Time Synchronization Using IEEE 1588
The IEEE 1588 protocol is available for greater time-synchroniza-
tion accuracy via Ethernet30. A high accuracy of 1 µs is required
to synchronize measured values for process-bus applications,
PMU data synchronization, and to stabilize unbalanced protec-
tion communications31 for line differential protection applica-
tions. It can be activated on electrical or optical Ethernet
modules. A prerequisite is that the power-system components
(for example switches) also support the protocol and special
IEEE 1588 time servers are available in the network. With
IEEE 1588, a runtime measurement for the time-synchronous
telegrams in the Ethernet network is carried out so that the
terminal devices (for example SIPROTEC 5) receive time informa-
tion corrected by the runtime, which is more precise than with
SNTP. Both the Power Utility Profile (IEC 61850-9-3) and the
Power Profile32 IEEE C37.238 are supported with the devices
working as ordinary slave clock (terminal device) in the network.
For the high-precision time synchronization via Ethernet
IEEE 1588, the ETH-BD-2FO Ethernet module and a suitable
router, for example, from Ruggedcom, are used.
Optical PPS (Pulse Per Second) Reception
SIPROTEC 5 devices can be synchronized using an optical PPS
(pulse per second) with the 820 nm serial plug-in modules
30 Use with the HSR and RSTP protocols in preparation
31 Planned with V8.50
32 With V8.30
SIPROTEC 5 System
3.7

(USART-AD-1FO and USART-AE-2FO). This allows existing
merging units to be replaced with SIPROTEC 5-based modern
merging units or existing process-bus plants based on a PPS
synchronization of the merging units to be extended. As a
result, it is not necessary to also install IEEE 1588v2/PTP-capable
network devices and station clocks. The existing PPS infrastruc-
ture remains in use.
Furthermore, the optical PPS, as an alternative to the electrical
PPS using interface G of the SIPROTEC 5 device, can be used to
stabilize unbalanced protection communication.
Network Monitoring with SNMP
The device can be integrated in network monitoring or power-
management systems via the SNMP protocol V3. Extensive
monitoring variables, for example the state of the Ethernet
interfaces, their data throughput etc. can be made known to the
monitoring system via MIB (Management Information Base)
files. These variables are described in data-specific terms in MIB
files and can be cyclically read out and monitored by the moni-
toring system. No values can be changed in the device via
SNMP. It serves exclusively as a diagnosis interface.
Transmission of Data via the Protection Communication
The protection interface and protection topology enable data
exchange between devices via synchronous serial point-to-point
connections from 64 kbit/s to 2 Mbit/s. These connections can
be directly via optical fiber or via other communication media
such as via dedicated lines in communication networks.
A protection topology consists of 2 to 6 devices, which form
point-to-point operative connections via communication links
Figure 3.7/20), and operative connections can have different
bandwidths within a topology. A certain amount of binary infor-
mation and measured values can be transmitted bi-directionally
between the devices depending on the bandwidth. The connec-
tion with the lowest bandwidth establishes this quantity. The
user can route the information with DIGSI 5.
This information has the following tasks:
• Topology data and values are exchanged for monitoring and
testing the connection.
• Protection data, for example, differential protection data or
directional comparison data of the distance protection, is
transmitted.
• The devices can be synchronized in time via the connection,
whereby a device of the protection topology assumes the role
of the timing master.
• The link is continuously monitored for data faults and
outages, and the runtime of the data is measured.
[dw_wirkkom-diff-BI, 1, en_US]
Figure 3.7/20 Protection Communication of the Differential Protection
and Transmission of Binary Signals
Operative connections integrated in the device have previously
been used for differential protection (Figure 3.7/20) and for the
teleprotection for the distance protection. In addition to these
protection applications, you can configure operative connec-
tions in all devices for SIPROTEC 5. At the same time, any binary
information and measured values can be transmitted between
the devices. Even connections with low bandwidth, such
as 64 kbit/s, can be used for this. Operative connections that
mainly serve for the power transmission of data for differential
protection are designated as type 1 links and are used in the
SIPROTEC 7SD8 and 7SL8 devices. Connections for the transmis-
sion of any data that can be configured in the other devices (for
example, SIPROTEC 7SA8, 7SJ8) are of type 2. The protection
interfaces must be of the same type on both sides.
The figures Figure 3.7/21 to Figure 3.7/27 show possible
communication variants for establishing protection communica-
tions.
[dw_Wirkkom-IEEE-interface-lwl-anschl, 2, en_US]
Figure 3.7/21 Protection Communication via a Communication
Network with X21 or G703.1 (64 kbit/s / G703.6 (2 Mbit))
Interface
SIPROTEC 5 System
3.7

[dw_Wirkkom-Kupferverbindung, 3, en_US]
Figure 3.7/22 Protection Communication via a Copper Connection
[dw_Wirkkom-IEEE-interface-lwl-anschl, 2, en_US]
Figure 3.7/23 Protection Communication via an IEEE C37.94 (2 Mbit/s)
Interface – Direct Fiber-Optic Connection to a Multiplexer
[dw_multimediale_Schutzdatenkommunikation, 1, en_US]
Figure 3.7/24 Multimedia Protection Communication
[dw_Wirkkom-Singlemodefaser-Repeater.vsd, 2, en_US]
Figure 3.7/25 Protection Communication via Singlemode Optical Fiber
and Repeater
[dw_Wirkkom-direkt-lwl-verb.vsd, 2, en_US]
Figure 3.7/26 Protection Communication via Direct Fiber-Optic Connec-
tions
[dw_Wirkkom-Singlemodefaser.vsd, 2, en_US]
Figure 3.7/27 Protection Communication via a Singlemode Optical
Fiber
Figure 3.7/28 shows the interfacing to multiprotocol label
switching (MPLS) IP networks via router line cards with VPN
tunnel and jitter butter, as well as with the interfaces
C37.94 (optical fiber module) and E1 (G703.6) via an external
converter.
SIPROTEC 5 System
3.7

[dw_MPLS_Schutzdatenkommunikation, 1, en_US]
Figure 3.7/28 Protection Communication via IP-MPLS Networks
Compatibility between SIPROTEC 5 Line Protection and
SIPROTEC 4 Line Protection
Introducing the firmware version V7.90 in the SIPROTEC 5 line
protection means that now, for the first time, mixed configura-
tions comprising line protection devices from the SIPROTEC 5
series and the old SIPROTEC 4 series can be operated.
See Compatibility between SIPROTEC 5 Line Protection and
SIPROTEC 4 Line Protection, Page 94 in the Line Protection
section.
Ethernet Redundancy – Network Topologies
Regardless of the selected protocol (IEC 61850, DNP3 TCP), the
electrical and optical Ethernet modules support different
network topologies.
If such a module works without an integrated switch that can be
switched off via DIGSI 5, it is connected to external switches
individually or redundantly. In the case of a double connection,
only one interface processes the protocol applications (for
example, IEC 61850). The 2nd interface works in hot standby
and the connection to the switch is monitored. In the case of an
outage of interface 1, a switch is made to interface 2 within just
a few milliseconds (Figure 3.7/29).
[dw_SIP5-0031, 4, en_US]
Figure 3.7/29 Single or Redundant Connection to External Switches
The Ethernet module can be plugged into the device one or
more times. This allows the same or different protocol applica-
tions to be executed multiple times. For IEC 61850, several
networks are possible, for example, one for client-server
communication to the systems control and a second for the
GOOSE connections between the devices that can potentially be
assigned to the process (Figure 3.7/30). Through the client-
server architecture of IEC 61850, a server (device) can simulta-
neously send reports to a maximum of 6 clients. The doubling of
the interfaces on the Ethernet module enables the operation of
redundant network structures, for example, optical rings or the
redundant connection to 2 switches.
[dw_SIP5-0046, 3, en_US]
Figure 3.7/30 Separate Client-Server and GOOSE Communication via
IEC 61850 with Another Serial Connection to an
IEC 60870-5-103 Master
Redundancy in a Ring Using RSTP (Rapid Spanning Tree
Protocol)
With an integrated switch, electrical or optical rings with a
maximum of 40 devices can be established (RSTP) (Figure
3.7/31). Both interfaces of the module transmit and receive
simultaneously. Mixed operation with SIPROTEC 4 devices is
possible in the ring with up to 30 devices. A special ring redun-
dancy process, based on RSTP, ensures short recovery times in
case of a failure of a device, so that the protocol applications
continue running nearly interruption-free. This configuration is
also independent of the protocol application that runs on the
Ethernet module.
[dw_SIP5-0032, 3, en_US]
Figure 3.7/31 Ring Operation with Integrated Switch and Ring Redun-
dancy
Seamless Redundancy with PRP and HSR
New technologies decisively shorten the time for the reconfigu-
ration of communication networks in the event of interruptions.
SIPROTEC 5 System
3.7

These technologies include:
• PRP = Parallel Redundancy Protocol
• HSR = High Available Seamless Ring Redundancy
Both systems operate according to the same principle and
conform to the standard IEC 62439-3.
The same information (Ethernet telegram) is thus transmitted
via 2 different information routes. The receiver uses the 1st tele-
gram that arrives and discards the 2nd. If the 1st telegram does
not arrive, the 2nd one is still available and is used. This mecha-
nism is based on the Ethernet stack, which assigns the same
MAC address to the 2 telegrams.
• The PRP protocol uses 2 physically separated networks to
transmit the 2 identical telegrams. Although this doubles the
effort and cost for the network equipment, the PRP protocol
provides greater availability of the Ethernet system compared
to the HSR protocol.
• HSR operates according to the same principle, but the 2 iden-
tical telegrams are distributed in 2 directions on one Ethernet
ring. The cost for the Ethernet network infrastructure is less,
but HSR handles N-1 errors – however, evolving faults result
in a communication failure in parts of the HSR ring.
The procedures can be activated via setting parameters and do
not have any other parameters. They are therefore easy to set
up. The number of network users is limited in both procedures
to a maximum of 512.
HSR and PRP can be combined using so-called RedBoxes (redun-
dancy boxes).
This cost-efficient solution according to IEC 62439-3 can be
designed in the following manner:
• 2 switches in the control center
• 2 switches in the bay
• 2 RedBoxes (RB) per HSR ring
• Up to 50 devices per HSR ring
• Easy extension using 2 additional PRP switches
[dw_stossfreie-n-1-struktur, 3, en_US]
Figure 3.7/32 Economical Seamless n-1 Structure with 1 Time Source
Serial Redundancy
Redundant connection to 2 substation controllers, for example,
SICAM PAS, is possible via 2 independent, serial plug-in modules
or a serial double module. For example, the serial protocol
IEC 60870-5-103 or the serial protocol DNP3 can run on the
modules. Mixed operation is also possible. Figure 3.7/33 shows
a serial optical network that connects each of the serial protocol
interfaces of the device to a master. The transmission occurs
interference-free via optical fibers. For the
IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, special redundancy processes are
supported in the device. Thus, a primary master can be set that
is preferred over the 2nd master in the control direction. The
current process image is transmitted to both masters.
[dw_SIP5-0033, 2, en_US]
Figure 3.7/33 Redundant Optical Connection of Devices to
IEC 60870-5-103 or DNP3 Master (for example,
SICAM PAS)
SIPROTEC 5 System
3.7

Redundancy in Serial Communication
You as the user can implement different levels of redundancy.
The number of independent protocol applications running in
parallel is limited by the 4 plug-in module positions.
A serial protocol can be run 2 times on a dual-channel module.
The doubling of serial protocols can, however, also be imple-
mented on 2 separate modules. Different serial protocols can be
run in the device simultaneously, for example, DNP3 and
IEC 60870-5-103. Communication occurs with one or more
masters.
Operative connections can be implemented in double. If there is
an outage, a switch is made to the 2nd connection.
Integrated Setting of Communication in DIGSI 5
A communication protocol is configured with DIGSI 5.
Depending on the module type, DIGSI 5 offers the user the
selection of the respective permissible protocols/applications.
The protocol parameters are set (for example baud rate, IP
address). Then the module is initialized with the protocol appli-
cation and, for example, a serial module with the
IEC 60870-5-103 protocol and the communication settings are
loaded.
For an application template of a device, there is an appropriate
communication mapping (Figure 3.7/34). In a communication
matrix, the user modifies this mapping and deletes and adds his
own information. This mapping file is finally loaded into the
device with DIGSI 5, and determines the scope of information
that is provided via the protocol. Protocol mappings can be
copied between devices, if they contain the same functions, and
can be exported into substation control applications.
[Kom_Communication Mapping_en-US_W, 1, --_--]
Figure 3.7/34 Communication Assignment with DIGSI 5 for the Protocol
IEC 60870-5-103
SIPROTEC 5 System
3.7

[dw_example protection_substation_com, 3, en_US]
Figure 3.7/35 Communication Protocols in the Substation Automation Technology and in Network Control Systems
Design to communicate
• Adaptation to the topology of your communication struc-
ture using settings (ring, star, or network)
• Scalable redundancy in hardware and software (proto-
cols to match your requirements)
• Pluggable and upgradeable communication modules
• Extensive routines for testing connections, functions,
and operating workflows
SIPROTEC 5 System
3.7

Safety for personnel and equipment are first priority, but
availability is also critically important. As the plant land-
scape becomes more open and complex, conventional
security mechanisms are no longer adequate.
For this reason, a security concept has been implemented
in the SIPROTEC 5 device architecture that is designed to
address the multidimensional aspects of security in a
holistic approach.
Multilayer safety mechanisms in all links of the system
security chain provide you with the highest possible level
of safety and availability.
Safety and cybersecurity includes:
• Security concept in device design
• Information security against IT attacks (IT threats from
outside)
Safety
Multilayer safety mechanisms
Safety comprises all aspects of protection for personnel and
primary equipment installations. The devices and
DIGSI 5 support this from the functional point of view. Cyberse-
curity ensure secure operations in networks. The manufacturer
can support the user with these measures. The responsibility to
implement a comprehensive cybersecurity concept lies with the
operator of the system. The concept must consider all system
components regarding to all technical aspects of cybersecurity.
Safety in the hardware design
• The device system consisting of configured hardware building
blocks, each with its own cooling system, reduces thermal
load, prolongs service life, and allows error-free operation in a
wide ambient temperature range.
• High availability is achieved with the auxiliary power supply
concept. Central wide-range supply ensures the provision of a
common voltage to all components. Individually required
voltage levels are created in the modules concerned. Thus,
the possible outage of a local voltage level causes only one
module to failure, not the entire device. This selective outage
is reported.
• Crossover wiring of internal analog/digital transformers allows
to monitor the analog inputs of the device effectively and to
block potentially threatened functions early, in a similar
manner to differential protection if a current channel fails.
• Storage of calibration data in the analog acquisition modules
allows completely safe exchange or extensions within the
module unit.
• Fully pluggable terminals and plug-in modules mean that a
wiring test is no longer necessary when devices or modules
are replaced.
• Now that the current transformer is integrated in the terminal
block (Safety CT-Plug), open secondary current circuits cannot
occur anymore during replacement of a device or a module.
When the terminal is pulled out, the transformer is always
opened on the safe, secondary circuit.
• The device does not need to be opened to adjust binary-input
thresholds or to adapt to the rated current of the transformer
(1 A, 5 A). The device does not need to be opened to replace
the battery or to change the plug-in modules.
[dw_safety-security, 1, en_US]
Figure 3.8/1 Differentiation of Safety/Security
SIPROTEC 5 System
3.8

Monitoring functions
Comprehensive monitoring functions ensure secure operation
by fast detection of irregularities and automatic initiation of
appropriate measures to avert incorrect responses. Depending
on the severity of the irregularity detected, a warning may be
issued, the functions concerned be blocked, or the entire device
may be isolated by disconnecting the life contact. In all cases,
the device-diagnosis log shows the cause and issues an appro-
priate instruction.
Hardware monitoring
All hardware in the device is continuously monitored.
This includes, for example, the CPU, the auxiliary voltage, the
battery status, the internal clock, the storage modules, the
analog inputs, the bus connections, the expansion and commu-
nication modules.
Monitoring the analog inputs
As a data source for the protection functions, monitoring of the
analog inputs is assured in multiple stages. Some monitoring
functions are primarily dedicated to the commissioning (incor-
rect or missing connections) and only generate a warning indi-
cation.
These include:
• Current and voltage balance
• Current and voltage sum
• Phase-rotation supervision
Other monitoring functions detect outages during operation
and initiate blocking of the affected functions rapidly:
• Measuring-voltage failure detection (loss of voltage)
• Fast current-sum supervision and broken-wire detection for
the power circuits.
In addition, the proper working method of all analog/digital
transformers is assured by a plausibility check at the sampling
level.
Trip-circuit supervision (ANSI 74TC)
The circuit-breaker coil and its lines are monitored via 2 binary
inputs. If the trip circuit is interrupted, and alarm indication is
generated.
Communication links
Telegrams are monitored for correct transmission. Faults are
reported via warning messages. Data associated with protection
and control is transmitted via protection interfaces and
IEC 61850 GOOSE messages. The transmitted information is also
monitored constantly on the receiving side.
Monitoring of protection interfaces
• 32-bit CRC checksum monitoring compliant with CCITT/ITU for
detecting corrupted telegrams
• Invalid telegrams are flagged and not used by the protection
system
• Sporadic interference is ignored, persistent interference trig-
gers blocking of the affected protection (differential protec-
tion) and control functions.
• Propagation times are measured and taken into account for
purposes of differential protection and protection communi-
cation.
• The topology of the protected area is monitored. Outages in
the communication links lead to an automatic trigger
switching to other communication paths (ring to chain opera-
tion or hot standby), or to blocking the entire protected area.
The same applies if an outage of a device in the topology is
detected.
Monitoring of IEC 61850 GOOSE messages
• Cyclic redundancy check checksum monitoring, sequence
number monitoring and repetition time monitoring, for
detecting wrong or missing telegrams
• Applications detect corrupt GOOSE messages or GOOSE
messages transmitted under test conditions and switch to
safe operating mode.
SIPROTEC 5 System
3.8

[dw_ueberw-analog-eingang-bei-ADU, 1, en_US]
Figure 3.8/2 Monitoring of Analog Input Circuits for Malfunctions during Analog-Digital Conversion
Load Management
The free configurability of protection functions and function
charts (CFC) allows them to be adapted to different applications.
During engineering with DIGSI 5, the integrated load model
calculates the resulting device load. This ensures that only viable
configurations can be loaded into the device.
Consistent Administration of Device Modes
Test modes and the health state of information are forwarded
and handled uniformly and consistently throughout the entire
system. Analysis functions consider the modes and warrant
secure operation. This is particularly critical when data related to
protection and control is transmitted via protection interfaces
and IEC 61850 GOOSE messages. But it applies equally for signal
processing in the function charts (CFC).
Cybersecurity
[dw_cyber-security, 4, en_US]
Figure 3.8/3 SIPROTEC 5 – Functional Integration – Cybersecurity
With the increasing integration of bay devices in Ethernet-based
communication networks, communication must be secured
against internal disturbances and attacks from outside. Stand-
ards and directives such as IEC 62443, IEC 62351, NERC CIP
(North American Electric Reliability Corporation – Critical Infra-
structure Protection), and the BDEW Whitepaper (Requirements
for Secure Control and Telecommunications Systems of the
Bundesverband der Energie- und Wasserwirtschaft e.V) contain
requirements for the secure operation of devices in the critical
communications infrastructure, and are addressed to at both
manufacturers and operators.
Cybersecurity must be incorporated into the design of devices
right from the start. This has been carried out systematically in
SIPROTEC 5 System
Safety and Security Concept – Cybersecurity
3.8

the case of SIPROTEC 5. Measures in the hardware ensure that
key material for protecting the communication and datasets of a
device is stored in absolute security. Communication stacks that
are hardened against cyberattacks, a multistage role-based
access concept in operation, and logging of events relevant to
cybersecurity provide the operator with a high degree of cyber-
security when the devices are integrated in the network of the
operator.
By default only the connection of DIGSI 5 is enabled in the
device. All other Ethernet services and their ports are deacti-
vated by default in the device and can be enabled with DIGSI 5.
If, for example, only the ring redundancy protocol RSTP is used,
then you as the user enable this with DIGSI 5 (Figure 3.8/5). The
secure standard configuration provides no open interfaces to a
potential attacker and only services that are really in use are
activated in a network.
Cybersecurity at communication level
Secure authentication takes place between the device and the
communication partner (for example DIGSI 5, Web monitor or
cloud). This prevents an unauthorized program accessing the
devices and reading or writing data there. Through this trans-
mission protocol secured by Transport Layer Security (TLS), the
integrity and confidentiality of the transmitted data are ensured.
This prevents manipulation and unauthorized access of the data.
TLS security is the basis for future communication routes and
certificate management, both across stations (for example
IEC 61850-MMS) and in the direction of cloud systems (for
example, IoT connectivity to MindSphere).
More operational security (safety) by means of confirmation ID
If Role-Based Access Control (or RBAC) is not activated, confir-
mation ID entering the confirmation ID is required for safety-crit-
ical actions (safety), such as changing parameters, in order to
obtain write access to the device. These confirmation IDs can be
configured by the user and may be different for different fields
of application.
Establishing connection after password verification
Optionally, if RBAC is not activated, a connection password can
be set up on the device. Remote access via the Ethernet does
not take place until the user enters the predefined password.
The user has read and write access to the device only after the
connection has been established. This connection password
conforms to the cybersecurity requirements for assigning pass-
words defined in NERC CIP. It has 8 to 30 characters and must
include upper-case and lower-case letters, digits, and special
characters. Through this secure transmission protocol, the integ-
rity and confidentiality of the transmitted data are ensured. This
prevents manipulation and unauthorized access of the data.
Establishing of the connection after central authentication and
authorization of the user
As a new option, the device supports role-based access control
(RBAC). With this option, the device can authenticate and
authorize the users by means of centrally managed login data
and user accounts. Authentication means that the device checks
with the central user management system whether the user
name and password combination entered by the user is valid.
After successful authentication, the device tests the permitted
roles of the user (authorization). Depending on the role
assigned to the user, he can only perform authorized operations
on the device.
The main advantages of this option for power utilities are:
• Central maintenance of user accounts and roles in RADIUS/
Microsoft Active Directory Server
• Protection against unauthorized access to the device via
DIGSI 5, Web browser, and on-site operation thanks to built-in
RADIUS authentication and authorization option
• Support for standard roles and rights according to standards
and directives such as IEC 62351-8, IEEE 1686, and BDEW
Whitepaper
• Emergency-access options in the case of a RADIUS server
connection outage
Logging of events relevant to cybersecurity
Events relevant to cybersecurity, such as login attempts or
device restarts, are recorded and optionally transmitted to a
central server via the standardized Syslog UDP protocol. The
device-internal log entries are secured to prevent deletion and
protected against anonymous access with the RBAC option. The
events can additionally be transmitted to the substation auto-
mation unit and archived there.
Integrity assurance of firmware and cybersecurity settings
SIPROTEC 5 device-firmware files are digitally signed. In this
way, corruption from outside by viruses or trojans, for example
by manipulated firmware files, is reliably prevented. In addition,
the cybersecurity settings of a device configured with
DIGSI 5 are stored in an encrypted way and thus protected
against manipulation and disclosure.
Secure standard configuration
By default, only the connection of DIGSI 5 is enabled in the
device. All other Ethernet services and their ports are deacti-
vated by default in the device and can be enabled with DIGSI 5.
If, for example, only the ring redundancy protocol RSTP is used,
then you as the user enable this with DIGSI 5 (Figure 3.8/5). The
secure standard configuration provides no open interfaces to a
potential attacker and only services that are really in use are
activated in a network.
It is generally not desirable to have to enter login data, connec-
tion passwords, or confirmation IDs during the configuration
and testing phase. During operation, however, the focus is on
the reading of data. Complete access protection can be deacti-
vated in the device until commissioning has been completed
and can then be activated again for operation.
Differentiation of the various network accesses
In SIPROTEC 5, the IP attack interface of the SIPROTEC 5 devices
can be reduced effectively.
• Setting the IP-based access per device port (mainboard RJ45,
slot F/E/P/N)
• Setting options: Full access, read access, or no access
• Adjustable for DIGSI 5 engineering, IEC 61850-MMS process
communication, or Web monitor access
These settings function independently of RBAC.
SIPROTEC 5 System
3.8

[dw_cyber-security_syslog_protocol, 1, en_US]
Figure 3.8/4 Role-Based Access Control (RBAC) with Central User Management
(1) User requests device access (with user name & password)
(2) Authentication request via RADIUS
(3) Authentication & authorization (role) by RADIUS
(4) Success/rejection response from device to user
(5) Role-based user session initiated or rejected
[sc_onlyRSTP_de, 1, en_US]
Figure 3.8/5 Isolatable Communication Services during Access via
Ethernet Networks
Product Security Blueprint
You can find valuable hints on the integration and on secure
operation of devices in your network in the Product Security
Blueprint and in the Application Note – SIP5-APP-009 for
SIPROTEC 5 devices. An overall security concept should be
drawn up and maintained in a Spanning Security Blueprint.
This documents typical network configurations, the services
used, and their ports. Measures for updating the components
that are critical for cybersecurity, password protection, and anti-
virus protection are also described.
Figure 3.8/6 shows a recommendation of this kind for
protecting switchgear. The SIPROTEC 5 devices are integrated in
optical Ethernet rings via switches. In these rings, each Ethernet-
based substation automation protocol, for example,
IEC 61850 or DNP3 TCP, runs together with the systems control
without loss of performance. Accesses from a non-secure
external network are allowed via a gateway that is responsible
for safeguarding the network. The accessing party is authenti-
cated, for example, by DIGSI 5, in the gateway and the commu-
nication is encrypted via VPN. This is fully supported by the
communication services of DIGSI 5.
SIPROTEC 5 System
3.8

[dw_schaltanlage-mit-remote-zugriff, 3, en_US]
Figure 3.8/6 Secure Operation of Devices within a Switchgear with
Remote Access from an External Network
The systems-control network and the network for remote access
can also be separated entirely by selection of an independent
Ethernet port for communication between the device and
DIGSI 5. This falls within the scope of the philosophy of the
operator. With their concept of pluggable modules, the devices
also allow solutions with separate power systems. An extensive
range of cybersecurity features have been integrated in
SIPROTEC 5 and DIGSI 5.
Security-Patch Management (Security Updates) for
SIPROTEC 5 and DIGSI 5
According to the requirements for protecting power plants,
patch management was introduced for SIPROTEC 5 and
DIGSI 5. This means that regular security updates for the soft-
ware components from third-party vendors integrated into
SIPROTEC 5/DIGSI 5 or used by SIPROTEC 5/DIGSI 5 are tested for
compatibility with SIPROTEC 5 and DIGSI 5. A corresponding list
with the last Microsoft Windows Security Updates tested and
hints on the compatibility with DIGSI 5 is provided for down-
loading from the Internet and is updated every month.
Device Authentication Using IEEE 802.1x
IEEE 802.1x is the standard protocol that can be used to connect
only to cryptographically authorized network devices as
members of the IEEE 802.1x network. The standard defines
2 main roles where the terminal devices that are to be members
of a network act as Supplicants and the basic network respon-
sible for the switching procedure acts as the Authenticator.
In IEEE 802.1x-capable networks, supplicants (SIPROTEC 5 or
other terminal devices) must provide their cryptographic iden-
tity which is then reported to the authenticators (normally
switching devices). Then, the authenticator compares the
requested login data to the centralized user directory (in this
case, this is the RADIUS server) and activates or deactivates the
access to this port according to the validity of the login data of
the supplicant.
If you use IEEE 802.1x in your OT network, you can individually
control which devices should be part of the network and block
all undesired third-party devices through the use of certificate
authorities or user certificates in the SIPROTEC 5 family.
Safety and Cybersecurity means:
• Long-lasting, rugged hardware with regarding EMC
immunity and resistance to weather and mechanical
loads
• Sophisticated self-monitoring routines identify and
report device faults immediately and reliably
• Compliant with the strict cybersecurity requirements in
accordance with international cybersecurity standards
and directives
• Effective and efficient role-based access control (RBAC)
with central user management in the SIPROTEC 5 device
• Automatic logging of cybersecurity-critical events
• Reduction of the IP attack interface of the device
SIPROTEC 5 System
3.8

SIPROTEC 5 devices are equipped with extensive test and
diagnostic functions. These are available to users in
SIPROTEC 5 together with DIGSI 5, and they shorten the
testing and commissioning phase significantly.
The DIGSI 5 Test Suite offers:
• Simulation of binary signals and analog sequences by
integrated test equipment
• Hardware and wiring test
• Testing device functionality and protection functions
• Circuit-breaker test and automatic reclosing test func-
tions
• Communication test including loop test
• Analysis of function charts
DIGSI 5 Test Suite
The objective of the extensive test and diagnostic functions that
are provided to the user with SIPROTEC 5 together with
DIGSI 5 is to shorten testing and commissioning times. All test
functions are integrated in DIGSI 5. This enables engineering
including the device test to be carried out with one tool. The
most important functions are listed as examples here. There are
also other specific test functions depending on the device type.
[dw_test_and_diagnosis, 3, en_US]
Figure 3.9/1 SIPROTEC 5 – Functional Integration – Test
Integrated test sequencer
The integrated test sequencer enables functions to be tested via
the test sequencer integrated in the device. Normally, the device
receives analog and binary signals from the process or from an
external secondary test equipment.Until now, the protection
functions and communication were tested with variables such
as these. With SIPROTEC 5 devices, in the simulation mode,
these variables can now be substituted with values supplied
from an integrated test equipment. For this, the analog and
binary inputs are decoupled from the process and connected to
the integrated test sequencer.
The tester uses DIGSI 5 to create a test sequence, for example, a
short-circuit sequence, loads it into the device, and runs it in
simulation mode. The test sequencer in DIGSI 5 is capable of
combining up to 6 test items in one test sequence. When loaded
into the device, this test sequence is run in real time and simu-
lates the functions of the device like a real process at binary and
analog inputs. Protection functions, control, logic functions, and
communication can thus be tested in real time without secon-
dary test equipment.
The test sequence is started manually from DIGSI 5 or controlled
via a binary input. This also makes it possible to test the interac-
tion between several devices.
Hardware and Wiring Test
In the hardware test, the state of the binary inputs can be read
out by DIGSI 5 and contacts and LEDs can be switched or set
through DIGSI 5 for test purposes.
The parameters measured at voltage and current inputs are
represented in phasor diagrams – divided according to absolute
value and phase angle (Figure 3.9/2). Thus it is easy to detect
and check if the connections in the measurand wiring are
inverted, as well as the vector group or the direction between
current and voltage. In devices that are connected via operative
connections, even analog measuring points of remote phasor
ends can be represented as vectors. This makes it easy to check
the stability of a differential protection.
In the wiring test, the wiring connections between devices are
tested. If the devices are connected to a network via Ethernet,
this test can be carried out with unprecedented ease. For this,
the contact on a device is closed with the aid of DIGSI 5. This
contact is connected to a binary input of one or more
SIPROTEC 5 devices via a wire connection. These automatically
send a report to DIGSI 5 to the effect that the binary input has
been picked up by the closing operation of the contact. The
tester can then log this test and check the wiring between the
devices.
[sc_Analog_Inputs, 1, en_US]
Figure 3.9/2 Display of Analog Measuring Points in Phasor Diagrams
SIPROTEC 5 System
3.9

Testing Device Functionality and Protection Functions
The graphical representation of characteristic curves or
diagrams of protection functions helps not only the engineer
who parameterizes the test functions, but also the engineer
who tests them (Figure 3.9/3). In this test, the operating point
of a protection function is represented graphically in the
diagrams, for example the calculated impedance of a distance
protection in the zone diagram. Additionally, messages relating
to the protection function are logged, for example pickup or
tripping. This test can be carried out with signals from the
process or with the test equipment integrated in the device.
[sc_Schutzfunktionspr, 1, en_US]
Figure 3.9/3 Test of Protection Function with Operating Point of the
Protection Function in the Pickup Characteristic
Circuit-breaker testing and automatic reclosing test function
Switching sequences can be initiated via DIGSI 5 to test the
automatic reclosing (AREC). However, this is only possible if
remote switching via the key switch is permitted. In addition, a
security prompt (confirmation ID) must be entered for switching
authorization via DIGSI 5. There are additional security prompts
for non-interlocked switching. This provides protection against
unauthorized use or inadvertent actuation during operation.
The test logs the closing operation of the switch including the
interlocking and feedback signals at the binary inputs. A circuit-
breaker test can also be deactivated and activated without an
interlocking check.
Communication Testing
Since communication is an integral component of the devices
and they are connected either directly or via systems control,
they must be thoroughly tested at commissioning and moni-
tored continuously during operation. The integrated test tools
support the user in the testing and monitoring of communica-
tion routes.
Loop test for communication links (loop test)
This test is launched by DIGSI 5 for a communication module
and a selected interface if a protection communication is config-
ured at a remote line end. It is used to detect disturbances in
subsections when inspecting the physical connection of the
communication paths (Figure 3.9/4). Test telegrams are sent
from the transmitting side Tx of an interface, and these are
measured again at the receiving Rx interface. The user thus has
the capability to insert loops at various points in the communi-
cation network and to test the connection of the loop. The
number of telegrams sent, received, and corrupted is displayed
continuously in DIGSI 5, so that the quality of the connection
can be monitored.
[dw_loop-test, 2, en_US]
Figure 3.9/4 Loop Test for Operative Connections (Loop Test)
Online monitoring of communication links
The data flow at communication interfaces can be monitored
constantly. To do this, the number of telegrams that are sent,
received, and corrupted per time unit for serial connections and
Ethernet interfaces during operation is measured and displayed
constantly . If faults occur, an alarm can be issued. A network
management and monitoring system performs detailed moni-
toring of Ethernet modules via the SNMP protocol.
For operative connections, the transmission time of the signals
is also monitored, and it is calculated during synchronization by
means of a high-precision second pulse in the transmit and
receive directions. Additionally, the communication topology is
also monitored constantly there and displayed in DIGSI 5.
GOOSE connections can be monitored permanently at the
receiving site during operation. This means that an outage is
detected within a few seconds.
Protocol test
For the protocol test, specific signal values are set and reset
using DIGSI 5 (Figure 3.9/5). The test mode itself is configurable.
The device sends the selected value to the client using the
configured communication protocol, for example IEC 61850. In
this case, a report is generated or a GOOSE message is sent
automatically when this information is routed correspondingly.
The device can be used to test systems control information for
all protocols (for example, IEC 61850, IEC 60870-5-103, serial
DNP3, DNP3 TCP) without the effortful generation of signal
states with test equipment. Signals that are transmitted across
operative connections can also be tested.
SIPROTEC 5 System
3.9

[sc_Protokolltest, 1, en_US]
Figure 3.9/5 Protocol Test for Substation Automation Technology or for
GOOSE and Operative Connections
Test and Display of External Timers
If the system time of the device is set externally using
1 or 2 timers, this time can be read out in the device or with
DIGSI 5. When the time protocol returns these values, it indi-
cates which timer is setting the system time and issues a state-
ment regarding the quality of the time source. Synchronization
via external clocks can thus be monitored and displayed during
operation (Figure 3.9/6).
[sc_DIGSI5_TimeSynch, 1, en_US]
Figure 3.9/6 Test of External Timers
Analysis of Function Charts (CFC Debugging)
Function charts generated in the form of function charts (CFCs)
can be tested offline in DIGSI 5. To this end, test sequences can
be generated with the DIGSI 5 sequencer that act on logical
inputs of the function chart or on the analog and binary inputs
of the device. This makes it possible to test not only the function
chart but also its interaction with upstream and downstream
functions. During this test, the values of variables are displayed
and their changes over time are logged in records that can be
analyzed at a later date, for example, with SIGRA. This enables
even complex temporal dependencies to be analyzed with ease.
Function charts (CFC) can thus be created offline in the office
and tested without needing a device.
[sc_Interlocking, 1, en_US]
Figure 3.9/7 Easy Analysis of Function Charts
Using the DIGSI 5 Test Suite means:
• Considerably shorter testing and commissioning time
• Having commissioning support personnel in the adjacent
substation is not absolutely necessary
• All test routines performed are documented.
• Testing using secondary test equipment is for the most
part dispensable.
SIPROTEC 5 System
3.9

SIPROTEC 5 System
3.9

4

In project engineering with SIPROTEC 5, your workflow is in
the center of interest – beginning with the single-line
diagram of the primary system on to ordering, engineering
and parameter setting all the way through to testing and
commissioning. For you, this means: less errors, higher
quality, and higher efficiency.
Holistic workflow means optimal, integrated support for all
project phases:
• Project specification
• Device engineering
• System engineering
• Commissioning
• Operation and service
Product Selection via the Order Configurator
The SIPROTEC 5 configurator assists you in the selection of
SIPROTEC 5 products. The configurator is a Web application that
can be used with any browser. The SIPROTEC 5 configurator can
be used to configure complete devices or individual compo-
nents, such as communication modules or expansion modules.
At the end of the configuration process, the product code and a
detailed presentation of the configuration result are provided. It
clearly describes the product and also serves as the order
number.
All functions from the library
The SIPROTEC 5 devices always have a basic functionality avail-
able depending on device type. You can extend these flexibly
with any desired functions from the library. Additional functions
are paid with your credit balance, which is reflected in function
points. The function points calculator assists you in finding the
correct function points value for your application. This guaran-
tees that the selected device has the required functionality.
In the SIPROTEC 5 system, the main function is determined by
the selection of the device type, while the scope of the addi-
tional functionality is determined by a single property, the func-
tion points value. This means that the functionality does not
have to be fixed in detail during product selection. In the later
engineering phase, any optional additional function can be
selected from the device-specific function library. You must
simply ensure that the function-point credit ordered for the
device is not exceeded. Extra function points can simply be reor-
dered at any time.
Clearly Presented Result Representation
The successful configuration of a device is represented on a
clearly organized result page. You can also save the result as
a .pdf file (see Figure 4/1 and Figure 4/2). The specified product
code can then be adopted directly into the information system
or the ordering system or DIGSI 5 (www.siemens.com/siprotec).
[Konfiguration_1, 3, en_US]
Figure 4/1 Example: Representation of a Configuration Result (Hard-
ware Details)
4

[Konfiguration_2, 3, en_US]
Figure 4/2 Extract from the Representation of a Configuration Result
(Functional Scope)
4

Operation Using the Web UI
Apart from the use of an engineering tool such as DIGSI 5 or
SICAM TOOLBOX II for configuration and maintenance,
SIPROTEC 5 devices provide a Web front end that can be used
with a standard Web browser. The browser-based user inter-
face is a comprehensive commissioning and monitoring tool
that provides an easy-to-understand display of the most impor-
tant measured data. You can operate the device remotely or
locally using the browser-based user interface and a Web
browser.
The browser-based user interface can be used via a communi-
cation network:
• During commissioning
– Checking and adjusting the values of a specific setting
– Comparing the values of 2 or more devices
– Checking a setting value against a user-defined setting to
verify whether the setting value differs from the default
value specified by Siemens
• During an inspection
– Querying a value in order to adjust a test case, for example
to preset the tripping current
– Viewing all types of measured values, for example func-
tional measured values and derived values such as the
minimum/maximum and mean values
– Displaying the deviation of the expected measured-value
quality.
• While operating the device
The browser-based user interface is especially optimized for
the protection system and provides comprehensive support
during testing and commissioning from the PC or laptop
computer.
All relevant device information and setting options are displayed
graphically on the screen.
Application Options
You can also use the browser-based user interface for the
following applications, for example:
• Checking and adjusting the values of a specific setting
• Comparing the values of 2 or more devices
• Checking a setting value against a user-defined setting as to
whether the setting value differs from the default value speci-
fied by Siemens
• Querying a value to adjust a test case, for example, to preset
the tripping current
• Viewing all types of measured values, for example functional
measured values and derived values such as the minimum/
maximum and mean values
• Displaying the deviation of the expected measured value
quality.
[scwebmonitor1, 5, en_US]
Figure 4.1/1 Buttons for the Browser-Based User Interface
[scwebmonitor2, 2, en_US]
Figure 4.1/2 Device Information
[sc_faultrec-ke, 1, en_US]
Figure 4.1/3 Additional Buttons on the 7KE85
[scAlarmAndWarningList, 1, en_US]
Figure 4.1/4 Alarm List
Additional Information
For more information on Operation with a browser-based user
interface, please refer to the latest device manual for
SIPROTEC 5 Operation – C53000-G5000-C003 under SIOS.
SIPROTEC 5 Web UI
4.1

Description
DIGSI 5 is the versatile engineering tool for parameterization,
commissioning, and operating all SIPROTEC 5 devices. Its inno-
vative user interface includes context-sensitive user instructions.
Simple connection to the device via USB enables you to work
with a device easily and efficiently. The full capabilities of
DIGSI 5 are revealed when you connect it to a network of
protection devices: Then you can work with all of the devices in
a substation in one project. DIGSI 5 offers superior usability and
is optimized for your work processes. Only the information you
actually need to carry out your tasks is shown. This can be
reduced further via expanded filter mechanisms. Consistent use
of sophisticated and standardized mechanisms in the user inter-
faces requires less training.
Functions
Using a PC or laptop computer, you can set parameters for the
devices using the interfaces and export the fault data.
DIGSI 5 is available in different variants (Compact, Standard and
Premium) with various functionalities:
• Using the Single-Line Editor, you can visually define a substa-
tion and the primary equipment. Connect these elements
with the protection function of your protection devices.
• The visual display of the SIPROTEC devices can be configured
and edited with the Display Editor or with a graphics program.
Take your single-line diagram and convert it into a display
image. You can also define your own icons.
• You can configure additional functions like interlocking of the
devices graphically with the function block diagrams editor
(CFC).
• Using the Siemens IEC 61850 System Configurator, you can
configure and set parameters for IEC 61850 stations. Using
this tool, you can administer subnetworks, network users and
their IP addresses and link the information of various partici-
pants.
• The DIGSI 5 test suite provides extensive test tools, which
accelerate commissioning and support you with operation.
One of the test functions enables you to compile and execute
test sequences, to test devices without external test equip-
ment.
• SIGRA for simple, fast and convenient analysis of fault records,
such as those recorded during faults in power plants by fault
recorders.
Languages:English, German, French, Italian, Portuguese,
Spanish, Turkish, Czech, Polish and Russian (selectable)
DIGSI 5 is available in 3 different functional scopes:
• DIGSI 5 Compact
Software for configuration and operation of individual
SIPROTEC 5 protection devices including transmission of
process data from the device. Includes a graphical editor for
Continuous Function Charts (CFC). Integrated test and
commissioning functions, including the possibility of creating
test sequences and their execution in the protection device
without external test equipment. Projects may only contain a
single SIPROTEC 5 protection device.
• DIGSI 5 Standard
Like DIGSI 5 Compact, but without constraint with regard to
the number of supported SIPROTEC 5 devices per project, incl.
IEC 61850 System Configurator. Contains additional graphical
editors for single-line diagrams, device display pages and the
network topology. SIGRA for professional fault-record analysis
is available as an option.
• DIGSI 5 Premium with SIGRA
Same as DIGSI 5 Standard, but with enhanced functionality
for IEC 61850, for example, flexible engineering and func-
tional naming. Contains SIGRA for a professional analysis of
fault records.
• DIGSI 5 for SIPROTEC 5 Compact
– For purely SIPROTEC 5 Compact projects
– Prospective scope equivalent to Premium with SIGRA
[sc_DIGSI 5_SplashScreen, 2, --_--]
DIGSI 5
4.2

[dw_digsi-bo, 1, en_US]
Figure 4.2/1 Structure of the DIGSI 5 User Interface
Product Code
The product code calculated with the SIPROTEC 5 configurator
can be adopted directly into the engineering program DIGSI 5. In
this way, you create your selected devices directly in DIGSI 5.
Since all device characteristics are unambiguously specified via
the product code, engineering work with DIGSI 5 starts on a
consistent basis without the need to reenter the device charac-
teristics which would take much time.
From Planning to Engineering up to Testing – DIGSI 5
The engineering tool DIGSI 5 assists you in your workflow from
planning to operation of your systems with SIPROTEC 5 devices.
With DIGSI 5, you have full control over the engineering. The
functional scope of the tool covers all tasks – from device
configuration and device setting to commissioning and evalua-
tion of fault data.
This is how a modern, efficient engineering process looks in
short form:
In the rough planning, the system layout is documented using
CAD. This system layout is prepared as the basis for the detail
planning in the Single-Line Editor. Depending on the applica-
tion, the required functionality (protection functions, control
and automation scope as well as auxiliary functions) is defined
and a device is selected. In the next step, the device is assigned
an appropriate application template. You can use your own
personally created, exactly matching application templates or
standard application templates here. Function adaptations are
possible at any time after the selection of the application
template. The high-performance copy functions with consis-
tency checks allow fast project engineering. Then, you must
configure the system (routings, implementation of corre-
sponding logic into function charts (CFC)) and set the parame-
ters.
The new program structure of DIGSI 5 is designed to support the
required work steps during a project optimally. The application-
oriented engineering approach guarantees that you are always
aware of the workflow. DIGSI 5 makes you more productive –
from design to engineering and even with installation, commis-
sioning, and operation.
The Project View Guides You Through the Entire Workflow
In DIGSI 5, processing and maintenance of all components of
IEDs and of all associated data is carried out in a project-oriented
way. This means that the topology, devices, parameter values,
communication settings, process data, and much more are
stored in one project.
All devices are available in one central location. Just open the
device in the project tree and the entire content is provided.
When you begin with a device, you can edit your tasks in a
simple and intuitive way.
The user interface of DIGSI 5 is divided into several sections
(Figure 4.2/1). The project tree on the left displays everything
DIGSI 5
4.2

that belongs to your project, for example, devices and global
settings. Double-clicking an entry opens an Editor in the main
section of the window. This can be, for example, an editor for
changing protection parameters, for configuring communica-
tion mappings, or for creating function charts (CFC).
In the lower section of the screen view, you can access the prop-
erties of all elements (for example, for circuit breakers or
signals) quickly and conveniently. This section also contains lists
with warnings and errors.
The libraries are particularly important in DIGSI 5. They are
located on the right and contain everything that is used in the
editors. Here, you select the required scope and insert it into
your project. When configuring the hardware, you can select
different hardware components, for example, a communication
module. On the other hand, if you are working with function
charts (CFC), you select the corresponding logical building
blocks and select the required functionality while configuring
the protection scope. For this purpose, you drag the elements to
the position of the editor where you need them.
Visual Definition of the Primary Topology in Single Lines
The single-line diagram describes the primary topology of your
system (Figure 4.2/2). For this, simply select the correct single-
line template from the library. Further processing, for example,
an extension, is possible without difficulty. DIGSI 5 contains a
library with elements that are familiar to you from the ANSI and
ISO standards.
[sc_SLE_two_bays, 1, en_US]
Figure 4.2/2 Graphical Definition of the Topology of a Substation in the
Single-Line
From the Application to the Solution: Application Templates
and Their Modification
After the topology has been defined, the next step is to add the
required device. You simply use the ordering code from the
configurator in DIGSI 5 and your device specification is already
known. In the next step, you select the application template
appropriate for your application and adapt it according to your
requirements. Remove functions that are not needed and add
the desired functions. The library offers you an extensive selec-
tion that you can use for this. The consistency of the device
configuration is continually checked. Finally, you can connect
the application template with the primary elements of the
single-line diagram (voltage and current transformers as well as
circuit breakers) graphically. Thus, a topological reference is
created. Setting values of the transformers (primary and secon-
dary rated values, as well as the neutral-point formation for
current transformers) can then be adopted from the single-line
diagram.
If you have created a suitable device type, you can save it as
your own application template and use it in other devices of the
same device family. To do this, export the application template
with DIGSI 5 in UAT format (User-defined Application Template).
Design of User-Defined Control Displays
With the Display Editor, you can create or change the factory-set
displays, known as control displays. The editor assists you in a
typical workflow. You simply decide which fields of the single-
line diagram your already created are to be used for the display
pages – and that is all. Of course, the displays can also be
completely newly created or imported. To do this, drag a signal
from the library to a dynamic element in the display and the
connection is created. Besides the use of icons in accordance
with the IEC and ANSI standards, you can create your own static
or dynamic icons in an icon editor.
Routing and Assignment
The routing matrix is one of the most important functionalities
of DIGSI 5. It is conveniently divided between 2 editors: Infor-
mation routing and Communication mapping. Both views are
designed in such a way that you can complete your task quickly.
With pre-defined or user-defined filters, you reduce the
displayed information to a minimum. As in Excel, you can select
which information is to be displayed for each column (Figure
4.2/4).
In the matrix, all signals are sorted according to function and
function groups. Sources and targets are displayed as columns.
The scope reaches from the compressed form of representation
to a detailed representation of information in which you can
view and change each piece of information (routing to binary
inputs and outputs, LEDs, buffers, etc.) in different columns. In
this way, all information can be configured very simply.
For communication mapping, all necessary settings are already
predefined for the selected protocol. You can adapt these to
your needs in a fast and simple way.
With a large selection of filters and the option to open and close
rows and columns, you will find it easy to display only the infor-
mation you need.
Saving time is a priority with DIGSI 5. All table-based data
displays provide the functionality to fill adjacent cells with a
single mouse-click – in the same way you know from Excel.
DIGSI 5
4.2

[sc_change CT ratio, 1, en_US]
Figure 4.2/3 Graphical Linkage of Primary and Secondary Equipment
[sc_Information_routing_long, 1, en_US]
Figure 4.2/4 The Entire Flexibility of the Information Routing Editor
Automation and Switchgear Interlocking Protection
A PLC (Programmable Logic Controller) is integrated in
SIPROTEC 5 devices. In this PLC, automation functions, logic for
switchgear interlocking protection, and lots more can be
executed. If you want to change or adapt these, use the func-
tion-chart (CFC) editor that is included as a component in
DIGSI 5 Standard and Premium. Thanks to the fully graphical
user interface, even users without programming knowledge can
fully utilize the functional scope and thus adapt the functionality
of the device (Figure 4.2/5) flexibly.
For this, an entire library is available to you with building blocks
that are compatible with IEC 61131-3. This library contains
simple logical operators, such as AND, but also complex func-
tions such as timers, command chains for switching sequences,
and much more.
The use of the editor is more efficient than ever before. You
thus need less building blocks in order to achieve your objec-
tives. This improves the readability of the function-chart (CFC)
decisively. New display modes also increase clarity. The new
modes offer you a compressed view of the building blocks and
connection points, so that you can see all the information you
need without having to scroll through it.
Use macros (chart in chart) to reuse recurring tasks clearly and
in a pre-checked manner.
Even the use of signals in a function-chart (CFC) is designed to
be simpler. Drag a signal via drag and drop from the signal
library to the input or output port of a building block – and you
are finished. Created logic plans can be tested even without
devices (offline) with DIGSI 5. This ensures the necessary quality
for commissioning and saves time.
The logic sequence with DIGSI 5 can be monitored and analyzed
online in the device as well.
[sc_CFC, 1, en_US]
Figure 4.2/5 Simple Creation of Automations with the CFC Editor
Setting the Parameters of the Device
All parameter settings are represented in the same way. This
occurs in the parameter editor, which displays all parameters of
a function. Here, you can select between different views of the
settings. On the one hand, there is a primary view where you
can directly enter the primary setting values.
In this way, you can avoid using transformer ratios which can
lead to setting errors. The same applies for the "per unit" view
where setting parameters refer to object rated values. If you opt
for the secondary view, the setting parameters must be
converted to secondary values.
For setting special protection characteristics, the graphical
representation of the characteristics is advantageous. In the
parameter editor, all characteristic variants of the function are
represented. In this way, you can check the effects of changes in
the settings immediately in the graphic. Setting values of
different settings groups can be compared in a common
window in a fast and easy way, differences can be detected and
compensated (Figure 4.2/6).
DIGSI 5
4.2

[sc_Function Settings_with_diagram, 1, en_US]
Figure 4.2/6 Easy Parameter Setting
Cooperating in Teams
Improve your engineering performance by cooperating in
teams. Using extensive export and import functions, one team
can define the protection parameters and work on the routing
settings while others set system-interface parameters. The indi-
vidual sections can be updated at any time with the new input
of colleagues. For example, when the protection-parameter
crew has updated its data, this data can be adopted into the
project.
Comprehensive Testing Support During Commissioning and
Operation
The testing and diagnostic functions support you in the commis-
sioning phase. You can thus quickly and simply test the wiring
or observe the effect that a message transmitted via the system
interface has in the superordinate station. The error messages
that are recorded in the relay in case of a disturbance of the
protected object are listed in DIGSI 5 and can be displayed,
saved, and printed for documentation purposes.
The new testing options are an innovation. Multi-level test
sequences can be defined (even for phasor factors) via a
sequence functionality. These are loaded into the device with
DIGSI 5 and simulate the physical inputs there. These are then
executed in the device via the integrated test sequencer, which
simulates the analog process values. In this way, you can define
and execute complex checks for testing your project engi-
neering and logic at an early stage.
With the test and diagnostic functions, extensive test equipment
is no longer necessary or its tests are reduced to a minimum.
You can find processes that were developed for testing special
protection principles, for example, for line differential protec-
tion, in the appropriate device manual. The function-chart (CFC)
editor also offers new analysis functions. DIGSI 5 thus allows
offline debugging of logic plans as well as tracing of measured
values – both in the representation of the logic chart and in the
representation of lists. This reduces overall testing effort during
commissioning. The results of the function-chart (CFC) analysis
can also be represented after completion of the test sequence,
for example, with SIGRA. Thus, even complex runtime relations
can easily be analyzed.
[sc_Test sequence, 1, en_US]
Figure 4.2/7 Definition of Test Sequences for Comprehensive Tests of
Device Configurations
[sc_Grafische_Konfiguration, 1, en_US]
Figure 4.2/8 Graphical Configuration of Network Connections between
Devices
Direct Online Access of all Accessible Devices
DIGSI 5 also assists you in your workflow if your devices engi-
neered offline are connected to the devices in your plant in your
system. In DIGSI 5, all devices accessible via communication
interfaces are displayed immediately next to your offline
devices. The preferred communication in networks is Ethernet.
Of course, you can individually access devices via a USB inter-
face. In order to work with a physical device, connect the online
device and offline configuration via drag and drop, and you are
done.
Besides transmitting the device configuration to individual
devices, you can also transmit all device configurations to your
devices automatically.
DIGSI 5
4.2

Besides online access, in addition to reading fault records and
logs, you can also display measured values and messages. You
can save snapshots of measured values and messages in
archives for subsequent analysis or for documenting tests of
temporary operating states or commissioning.
Openness Through Import and Export
DIGSI 5 offers a broad spectrum of exchange formats. These
include the standard formats of IEC 61850 as well as the
uniform data exchange format TEA-X of Siemens tools. This
XML-based format is the basis for all import-export scenarios
and ensures efficient workflows in the engineering process.
Since data must only be entered once, engineering effort is
reduced and you profit from consistent data quality at all levels
of automation.
Besides efficient data exchange for the levels of power automa-
tion, the XML data format also supports easy exchange of data
with other applications.
Via the import interface, you can read data from other applica-
tions into DIGSI 5. Thus, this enables external project engi-
neering of the devices. Similarly, you can export the settings
data to other applications for further processing. It is therefore
easy to exchange data with other power-distribution applica-
tions: for example, network calculation, protection-data admin-
istration/evaluation, and data for the protection-function test.
[dw_engineering_appl, 2, en_US]
Figure 4.2/9 Open Exchange Formats Allow Reuse of Data at all Tiers
DIGSI 5
4.2

Overview of Functions
Compact Standard Premium
Project processing
Maximum number of devices per project 1 Unlimited Unlimited
Copy and paste ■ ■ ■
Multilingualism is supported ■ ■ ■
Single-line diagrams and device displays
Single-Line Editor with ANSI - and IEC standard icons available – ■ ■
Device display editor permits creation of user-defined displays and icons – ■ ■
Setting parameters and routing
Information routing including filtering and sorting ■ ■ ■
Graphical visualization of protection parameters – ■ ■
Comparison of devices (offline/offline – offline/online) 33 ■ ■
Continuous function charts (CFC)
Graphic continuous function chart editor (CFC) available ■ ■ ■
Communication
Assignment of communications to system interface ■ ■ ■
Assignment of communications to various protocols ■ ■ ■
Graphical network view of devices – ■ ■
Inter-device communication (via IEC 61850 System Configurator) – ■ ■
IEC 61850
IEC 61850 Edition 2 is fully supported – ■ ■
IEC 61850 structure editor for flexible engineering and functional naming – – ■
Access and communication
Via USB and Ethernet ■ ■ ■
Access to communication partners via system interface ■ ■ ■
Online
Measured values (current values, minimum, maximum, average values) and storage in
the project as snapshots
■ ■ ■
Messages (and storage in the project as snapshots) ■ ■ ■
Protocols and records ■ ■ ■
Display fault records ■
COMTRADE Viewer
■
COMTRADE viewer
34
■
SIGRA
Loading settings for the selected device ■ ■ ■
Commissioning and testing
Creating and running multistage test sequences, no external equipment necessary ■ ■ ■
Test views for testing the device configuration ■ ■ ■
Analysis/debugging of continuous function charts (CFCs) in offline and online mode ■ ■ ■
Export and import
SCL formats (IEC 61850– ICD/IID/MICS) – ■ ■
Device configurations (full and partial) ■ ■ ■
Single-line diagrams/topology – ■ 35 ■
Display pages – ■ ■
Test object definition (RIO) ■ ■ ■
Documentation
Printing and exporting project documentation ■ ■ ■
Creation of user-defined print formats ■ ■ ■
Safeguarding and security
Authorization of access to devices with NERC CIP-compatible password ■ ■ ■
33 only offline/online
34 (SIGRA available as optional package)
35 WMF export only
DIGSI 5
4.2

Compact Standard Premium
Secure connection to the device ■ ■ ■
Configuration data protected from alteration ■ ■ ■
Confirmation IDs for safeguarding critical activities (for example, switching) ■ ■ ■
DIGSI 5
4.2

DIGSI 5 Order Variants
DIGSI 5 Compact DIGSI 5 Standard DIGSI 5 Premium with SIGRA
Description • Software for the configuration and
operation of individual
SIPROTEC 5 protection devices,
including transmission of process data
from the device.
• Includes a graphical editor for Contin-
uous Function Charts (CFC)
• Integrated test and commissioning
functions, including the possibility of
creating test sequences and executing
them in the protection device without
external test equipment
• Projects may only contain a single
SIPROTEC 5 protection device.
• Like DIGSI 5 Compact, but without
constraint with regard to the number
of supported SIPROTEC 5 devices per
project, incl. IEC 61850 System
Configurator
• Contains additional graphical editors
for single-line diagrams, device
display pages and the network
topology
• SIGRA for professional fault-record
analysis is available as an option
• Same as DIGSI 5 Standard, but with
enhanced functionality for IEC 61850,
for example, flexible engineering and
functional naming
• Contains SIGRA for a professional
analysis of fault records
Product features All features are listed in the Overview of Functions, Page 381 table.
Authorization No license key necessary Authorization required using the license key; can be used on one computer per
license.
Available interface
languages
German, English, Portuguese, Spanish, Italian, French, Russian, Polish, Czech, and Turkish (selectable)
Contained in the scope
of delivery of the DVD
version
• Program, device drivers, and online
documentation on DVD-ROM
• USB stick including a 30-day test
license for a free test of
DIGSI 5 Premium
• Product information
• USB cable for connecting a PC/laptop
computer and all SIPROTEC 5 device
types
• USB stick with the number of licenses
ordered. The program can be used on
one computer per license.
• Includes a 30-day test license for a
free test of DIGSI 5 Premium
types
• USB stick with the number of licenses
ordered. The program can be used on
one computer per license.
types
DIGSI 5 can also be ordered and delivered via online software delivery (OSD). The delivery of the DVD and USB cable is unnecessary.
The program is offered for downloading. The license can be loaded online on the Automation License Manager.
DIGSI 5
4.2

Selection and Ordering Data
Versions Number of Licenses Delivery Form Order no.
(Short Designa-
tion)
DIGSI 5 Compact Unlimited P1V178
DIGSI 5 Standard without SIGRA (with COMTRADE
viewer) 1 single license
DVD/USB
Download
P1V24
P1X338
5 single licenses
DVD/USB
Download
P1V48
P1X347
10 single licenses
DVD/USB
Download
P1V376
P1X356
DIGSI 5 Standard with SIGRA
1 single license
DVD/USB
Download
P1V246
P1X365
5 single licenses
DVD/USB
Download
P1V31
P1X374
10 single licenses
DVD/USB
Download
P1V253
P1X383
DIGSI 5 Premium with SIGRA
1 single license
DVD/USB
Download
P1V123
P1X426
5 single licenses
DVD/USB
Download
P1V185
P1X435
10 single licenses
DVD/USB
Download
P1V130
P1X444
DIGSI 5 Premium Trial (Premium full version for
30 days)36 Unlimited
P1V192
DIGSI 5 Premium Scientific (only for technical
colleges) 10 single licenses
DVD/USB
Download
P1V55
P1X453
DIGSI 5 Premium Sales (only for Siemens sales and
distribution Dept.) 10 single licenses
DVD/USB
Download
P1V62
P1X462
Upgrade from DIGSI 5 Standard to Premium
1 single license
DVD/USB
Download
P1V369
P1X392
5 single licenses
DVD/USB
Download
P1V215
P1X408
10 single licenses
DVD/USB
Download
P1V383
P1X417
Upgrade from DIGSI 4 Professional to DIGSI 5 Standard
10 single licenses
DVD/USB
Download
P1V86
P1X471
Upgrade from DIGSI 4 Professional to DIGSI 5 Premium
10 single licenses
DVD/USB
Download
P1V390
P1X480
Upgrade from DIGSI 4 Professional + IEC 61850 to
DIGSI 5 Standard 10 single licenses
DVD/USB
Download
P1V93
P1X499
Upgrade from DIGSI 4 Professional + IEC 61850 to
DIGSI 5 Premium 10 single licenses
DVD/USB
Download
P1V208
P1X505
SIGRA option package for DIGSI 5 Standard36 1 single license P1V154
5 single licenses P1V406
10 single licenses P1V161
Table 4.2/1 DIGSI 5 Selection and Ordering Data
36 Physical delivery only (DVD/USB)
DIGSI 5
4.2

Description
The IEC 61850 System Configurator is the manufacturer-inde-
pendent solution for the interoperable engineering of
IEC 61850 products and systems. It supports all devices with
IEC 61850, not just Siemens products – like SIPROTEC 5,
SIPROTEC 4, SIPROTEC Compact, Reyrolle, SICAM RTUs, SICAM
IO/AI/P85x/Q200 – but also devices from other Siemens divisions
(such as SITRAS PRO) or from third parties.
The IEC 61850 System Configurator supports the SCL configura-
tion files (substation configuration language) from the
IEC 61850-6 through import or export of all formats
(ICD/IID/CID/SCD/SSD/SED). Thus, IEC 61850 devices can be
added and a complete IEC 61850 station is available for substa-
tion automation technology.
IEDs from the IEC 61850 standard of Edition 1, 2.0, or 2.1 are
supported. The possible engineering therefore includes not only
GOOSE communication and client-server configuration via MMS
reporting, but also system topology, process bus communica-
tion with SMV (sampled measured values) and
IEC 60870-5-104 addresses for the gateway to the network
control center via IEC 61850-8-1.
Simple engineering thanks to customer-friendly workflows and
the universal display of IEC 61850 addresses as well as customer
description texts. Users with basic or expert IEC 61850 knowl-
edge find the desired level of detail. For documentation
purposes, the engineering can be displayed in the Web browser
in a customer-friendly form. Harmonized interfaces of the tool,
such with DIGSI 4 and DIGSI 5, reduce the engineering effort for
Siemens plants even more.
Benefits
• Comprehensive – one tool for configuring all digital
IEC 61850 devices
• Simple extension and adaptation of plants by using
IEC 61850 Edition 1 and 2 in a project
• Customer-specific IEC 61850 structures (flexible engineering)
permit the implementation of customer standards
• Easy to understand by using application-oriented signal
names instead of the specific IEC 61850 language (logical
nodes, etc.)
• Proven by experience from worldwide standardization activi-
ties and engineering of more than 500 000 devices
• Facilitated engineering by means of integrated interfaces to
DIGSI, SICAM SCC, SICAM PAS, SICAM protocol test system
and IEC 6150 browser
Applications
• Interoperable engineering of IEC 61850 (MMS; GOOSE; SMV)
• Import and export of all SCL formats, such as ICD, IID, CID,
SCD, SSD or SED
• Supporting of Editions 1, 2.0, and 2.1 of IEC 61850
• Engineering with IEC 61850-80-1
• Engineering independent from manufacturers
[sc_IEC 61850 SysConf, 2, --_--]
Figure 4.3/1 Splash Screen for the IEC 61850 System Configurator
4.3

[One IEC 61850, 3, --_--]
Figure 4.3/2 One IEC 61850 System Configurator for all Devices in the Station
IEC 61850 – Ethernet-Based Substation Automation Protocol
IEC 61850 is more than just a substation automation protocol.
The standard comprehensively defines data types, functions,
and communication in station networks. In Edition 2, the influ-
ence of the standard is extended to more sectors of the energy-
supply industry. Siemens actively participated in designing the
process of adapting Edition 1 to Edition 2 for the purposes of
the standardization framework. Edition 2 fills in certain omis-
sions and defines additional applications. As a global market
leader with Edition 1 SIPROTEC 4 devices, Siemens has resolved
the issues of interoperability, flexibility, and compatibility
between Editions 1 and 2: Cooperation with Edition 1 devices is
possible without difficulties.
• Converting the complexity of the IEC 61850 data model into
your familiar user language
• Integrated, consistent system and device engineering (from
the single line of the plant to device parameterization on the
basis of the IEC 61850 data model)
• Flexible object modeling, freedom in addressing objects, and
flexible communication services warrant the highest possible
degree of interoperability and effective exchange and expan-
sion concepts.
• Full compatibility and interoperability with IEC 61850 Editions
1, 2.0, and 2.1
The internal structure of SIPROTEC 5 devices conforms to
IEC 61850. The result is that for the first time, an integrated,
consistent system and device engineering, from the single line
of the plant o device parameterization, conforming to the
guiding principles of IEC 61850 is possible.
4.3

[IEC_Change_CT_ratio, 1, --_--]
Figure 4.3/3 System Specification and Configuration in DIGSI 5 – the
Complexity of IEC 61850 is Transparent
DIGSI 5 with integrated IEC 61850 engineering covers the
complexity of the standard with a sophisticated user interface.
In standard engineering, you as the user will not be required to
deal with the details of IEC 61850; you get to use your user
language.
In the user language, distance protection is distance protection
with zones and dependent functions, not a collection of logical
nodes. Reports are message lists in which information about the
systems control is configured. In the system configurator,
GOOSE connections are simply configured in a table with source
and target information. You work in your language, with func-
tions and messages associated with a device. If you wish, you
can view the assigned IEC 61850 objects in the
IEC 61850 protocol language. This bilingualism is supported
throughout the user interface by DIGSI 5 and the export files on
the systems control. As the user, you can even add helpful notes
to the data points you define in your language and then export
them for data purposes in the ICD and SCD description.
[sc_DIGSI_catalog, 1, en_US]
Figure 4.3/4 Creating an IEC 61850 Station
Flexible engineering offers IEC 61850 experts a wide range of
freedom to design their own IEC 61850 structure, including with
user-defined functions and objects. Flexible object modeling,
freedom in addressing objects, and flexible communication serv-
ices warrant the highest possible degree of interoperability and
effective exchange and expansion concepts.
The name of the logical device (ldName) is freely editable. For
example, the standard-conforming name CTRL can be changed
to CONTROL. Structural changes can also be made by changing
the logical device (LD), so that the interface structure can be
adapted flexibly to the requirements of the user. Rigid manufac-
turer specifications are a thing of the past. Prefix and instance
(inst) of the logical node (LN) can also be edited.
The standard defines the length and rules that are checked by
DIGSI 5 when they are entered.
Stages of functions of a device, which the standard maps to
logical nodes (LN), can be deleted, copied, and extended with
objects of the user. Messages can be added to a switching
object such as the LN XCBR, for example, monitoring messages
for a circuit breaker that have not been defined in the original
LN. You as a user, you can route all of the information associ-
ated with a given switching object into a logical node (LN).
Logical nodes (LN) can be added from a library. These instruc-
tions can be supplemented with your own objects. You can also
define and create generic nodes. For example, there are logical
nodes (LN) whose functionality you as the user create for your-
self through logic functions. These user-defined functions can
be loaded into the device and run there. Monitoring functions
can be created and expanded as required.
A high degree of flexibility in communication is offered for
configuration of GOOSE messages and reports.
Addresses, dataset names, etc. can be set by you, the user.
Flexible engineering offers a high degree of design freedom on
many levels, enhancing interoperability for more complete
communication interchangeability. This in turn safeguards
investments in model devices in accordance with IEC 61850.
With the single-line diagram, you as the user can view the topo-
logical structure of the system. DIGSI 5 has been prepared so
that it can export this topological structure of a system to the
SSD file conforming to the standard. This description, as an
extension of the SCD file, represents the primary system for
technical data purposes. In the future, the objects of the device
with which processes of the primary system are controlled can
be adapted flexibly to reflect the specifications of the customer.
Flexible engineering is the key to bringing the system view into
harmony with the IEC 61850 structure of the device.
4.3

[structure_editor, 1, --_--]
Figure 4.3/5 Editor for Adapting the IEC 61850 Structure in the
SIPROTEC 5 View
4.3

Description
SIGRA user program supports you in analyzing failures in your
electrical power system. It graphically analyzes data recorded
during the failure and calculates additional supplemental quan-
tities such as impedances, powers or RMS values, from the
supplied measured values, making evaluation of the fault record
easier.
The quantities can be shown as desired in the diagrams of the
following views: time signals, phasor diagrams, locus
diagrams and harmonic components and fault locators and
represented in the table view.
After a system incident, it is especially important to quickly and
completely analyze the error, so that the respective measures
can be derived immediately from the cause analysis. This will
enable the original network status to be recovered and the
down time to be reduced to an absolute minimum.
As well as the usual time signal display of the recorded meas-
ured quantity, the current version is also set up to display
vector, pie and bar charts to show the harmonics and data
tables. From the measured values recorded in the fault records,
SIGRA calculates further values, for instance missing quantities
in the 3-phase electrical power system, impedances, outputs,
symmetrical components, etc. Using 2 measurement cursors,
the fault current can be easily and conveniently evaluated. With
the aid of SIGRA however, further fault record can also be
added. The signals from another fault record (for example, from
the opposite end of the line) are added to the current signal
pattern using drag and drop.
SIGRA facilitates the display of signals from various fault records
in one diagram as well as a fully automated synchronization of
these signals on a common time base. As well as the precise
determination of the individual factors of the line fault, the fault
location is also of particular interest.
A precise determination of the fault location saves time which
the user can use for an on-site inspection of the error. This func-
tion is also supported by SIGRA using the offline fault location
function. SIGRA can be used for all fault records in COMTRADE
file format.
The functions and advantages of SIGRA can only be optimally
displayed directly on the product. Consequently, SIGRA is avail-
able as a 30-day test version.
Functions
• Evaluation of fault records
• One-sided and two-sided offline fault location
• Synchronized display of various diagram types, such as time
signal display, locus diagrams, bar charts
• 6 diagram types:
– Time-signal representation (standard)
– Locus diagram (for example for RX)
– Vector diagram (reading of angles)
– Bar chart (for example for visualizing harmonics)
– Table (with values of several signals at the same point in
time)
– Fault-location determination (display of fault location)
• Calculation of additional values, such as positive-sequence
impedances, RMS values, symmetrical components, phasors
• 2 measuring cursors that are synchronized in all views
• High-performance panning and zoom functions (for example,
section enlargement)
• User-friendly project engineering via drag and drop
• Innovative signal routing in a clearly structured matrix
• Time-saving user profiles, which can be assigned to individual
relay types or series
• Addition of further fault records and synchronization of
multiple fault records with a common time base
• Simple documentation through copying of the diagrams for
example, into MS Office programs
• Offline fault-location determination
• Commenting of fault records, and commenting of individual
measuring points in diagrams and free placement of these
comments in diagrams
• Application of mathematical operations to signals.
Hardware requirements
• Pentium 4 with 1 GHz processor or similar
• 1 GB RAM (2 GB recommended)
• Graphic display with resolution of 1024 × 768
pixels (1280 × 1024 recommended)
• 50 MB available hard disk space
• DVD ROM drive
• Keyboard and mouse
Software requirements
• MS Windows 7 Ultimate, Enterprise and Professional
• MS Windows 8.1 Enterprise
• MS Windows Server 2008 R2
[sc_SIGRA_Splash, 1, --_--]
Figure 4.4/1 Fault-Record Analysis with SIGRA
SIGRA
4.4

[sc_TimeSignalsDiagram, 1, en_US]
Figure 4.4/2 SIGRA Time Signals
[sc_VectorDiagram, 1, en_US]
Figure 4.4/3 SIGRA Phasor Diagram
[sc_circle diagram, 1, en_US]
Figure 4.4/4 SIGRA Locus Diagrams
[sc_Oberschwingung, 1, en_US]
Figure 4.4/5 SIGRA Harmonics
DIGSI 5, IEC 61850, and SIGRA support you in an optimal
and holistic manner for your SIPROTEC 5 project:
• Powerful and effective analysis of fault records
• Integrated system and device engineering
• Graphical user interface simplifies and accelerates
project engineering
• Application templates and function groups as images of
the primary application and the primary objects, such as
the line or circuit breaker, warrant a user-oriented
working method and perspective
• Test and simulations tools offer optimal plausibility
checks
SIGRA
4.4

Description
The SIPROTEC DigitalTwin is the virtual, digital twin of a real
SIPROTEC 5 device, including the interfaces, functions, and algo-
rithms.
The new, innovative, cloud-based SIPROTEC DigitalTwin
ensures that the performance, safety, and availability of
SIPROTEC 5 devices can be extensively tested as part of the
power automation system - 24/7, from anywhere, and without
any hardware.
3 steps to success:
• Uploading engineering data and test cases
• Simulating and testing the automation system in the cloud
• System test reports
Application Areas
• Training in device operation
• Process-data simulation
• Testing the protection functions, the automation logics, and
the customer-specific applications
• Testing the functionality of the SIPROTEC 5 device inside the
power automation
• Online testing with the DIGSI 5 operating program
• Integration into SICAM PAS, SICAM PQS, SICAM SCC substa-
tion automation systems
• IEC 61850 GOOSE communication between devices, for
example, for interlocking systems
• Protection-data communication
• Error analysis, for example, fault-record playback
Customer Benefit
• Testing the power-automation system 24/7 without any hard-
ware, without any additional expenditure, and regardless of
location.
• Simulating and validating product properties
• The new systems can be added more quickly due to shorter
project lead times.
• Reduced OPEX with shorter downtimes ensure high availa-
bility due to improved pretesting (incl. patches)
• Efficient, scalable, practical training sessions
• Quick and realistic error analysis due to easy reproducibility of
the product and system behavior
[sc_DigitalTwin_SplashScreen, 1, --_--]
4.5

SIPROTEC DigitalTwin Application Areas
[SIPROTEC DigitalTwin_Appl, 1, en_US]
Figure 4.5/1 Application Areas
4.5

Transparency Increases Efficiency
Protection relays sit at the very heart of our power grid infra-
structure. They operate silently inside substations and listen to
the AC 50 Hz or AC 60 Hz heartbeat of the power lines. Once
they come into action however, literally every millisecond
counts to initiate switching operations to avert disaster and alert
the grid operator about a specific fault situation. This is where
the SIPROTEC Dashboard comes into play.
As part of our Grid Diagnostic Suite, the cloud-based SIPROTEC
Dashboard application benefits from a new communication
architecture. SIPROTEC 5 devices communicate not only to the
substation automation level but also to the new SICAM GridEdge
node, and from there to the MindSphere cloud. This way we can
unlock the best of two worlds: Full data transparency on the
Edge level and a grid-wide data overview in the cloud while
adhering to state-of-the-art cyber security standards through the
decoupling of field devices from the cloud.
Empowerment of Maintenance Crews
The SIPROTEC Dashboard empowers operational crews in their
task to troubleshoot faults in the power grid. Instead of waiting
for information from the control center they can now directly
access key data like fault logs and fault records of a given
protection relay that initiated a trip – even before going on-site.
The new SIPROTEC Dashboard enables different views for all
relays in the grid, including a map view, station view and device
view.
Furthermore, the Dashboard offers additional insights into
compact condition monitoring parameters like the switched
fault current (I2t) or temperature hotspots of transformers or
switchgear – all very helpful indications for an early assessment
of the situation on the ground.
One source of complexity when troubleshooting the behavior of
protection relays is related to firmware versions. Are all devices
on the same version? Is the latest version deployed everywhere?
Through our new firmware cross-check functionality, firmware
versions can be analyzed at a glance within the context of a
substation or even across the entire grid.
In summary the SIPROTEC Dashboard is an innovative new
offering for our SIPROTEC devices and offers insightful views on
your protection fleet at a glance.
Advantages at a Glance
• Simplifies workflows for faster response times
• Increases grid availability and service quality
• Full support for SIPROTEC and Reyrolle relays as well as cross-
vendor support for IEC 61850 enabled protection devices
• Compliant with industry cyber-security standards
Main Features
Monitor the status of your protection relay fleet:
Multiple Views
• Map view, substation view, device and measurement data
views
• Drill down option for each event
Fault Analysis
• Automated fault record and fault log retrieval
• Fault record visualization
Device Management
• Firmware cross-check on station and grid-level
• Settings monitoring on station and grid-level
SICAM GridEdge
• Full data transparency via direct device access
• Cross-vendor compatible for IEC 61850 enabled protection
relays
• Modular extensible functionality via containerized applica-
tions
• Secure decoupling from relays to the cloud
Condition Monitoring Views
• Circuit breaker I2t statistics
• Hotspot measurements for transformers and switchgear
• Transformer tap position statistics
[IoT, 1, --_--]
Figure 4.6/1 Grid Diagnostic Suite
SIPROTEC Dashboard
4.6

[sc_SIPROTEC_Dashboard, 1, --_--]
Figure 4.6/2 IoT Architecture for Power Automation Systems
SIPROTEC Dashboard
4.6

5

The SIPROTEC 5 Hardware building blocks offer a freely
configurable device model. You have the choice: Either you
use a pre-configured device with a quantity structure
already tailored to your application, or you build a device
yourself from the extensive SIPROTEC 5 hardware building
blocks to exactly fit your application.
The flexible hardware building blocks offer you:
• Base modules and expansion modules with different
input/output modules
• Various On-site Operation Panels
• A large number of modules for communication, meas-
ured value conversion and memory extension
Hardware Design – Flexible and Modular
With SIPROTEC 5, Siemens has also taken a new path with the
design. Proven elements have been improved and innovative
ideas have been added. When looking at the new devices,
surface mounting is evident. In this way, the scope of the
process data can be adapted flexibly to the requirements in the
switchgear. You can select: Either you use a preconfigured
device with a quantity structure already tailored to your applica-
tion, or you build a device yourself from the SIPROTEC 5 hard-
ware design to exactly fit your application. Preconfigured
devices can be extended or adapted as needed.
For the SIPROTEC devices 7xx85, 7xx86 and 7xx87, you can also
combine different base and expansion modules, add communi-
cation modules and select an installation variant that fits the
space you have available. The SIPROTEC 7xx82 devices cannot
be expanded with expansion modules.
With this modular principle, you can realize any quantity struc-
tures you desire. In this way, hardware that is tailored to the
application can be selected. Figure 5.1/1 shows a modular
device consisting of a base module and 4 expansion modules.
[SIP5 GD_SS_LED_LED_oLED_W3, 2, --_--]
Figure 5.1/1 Example of a Modular SIPROTEC 5 Device
SIPROTEC 5 – Advantages of the Modular Design
The SIPROTEC 5 modular hardware design provides the cumula-
tive experience of Siemens in digital protection devices and bay
controllers. In addition, specific innovations were realized that
make the application easier for you, such as recorder and PQ
functionalities.
The SIPROTEC 5 modular hardware design offers:
• Durability and reliability
– Tailored hardware extension
– Robust housings
– Excellent EMC shielding in compliance with the most recent
standards and IEC 61000-4
– Expanded temperature range: -25 °C to +70 °C
– Redundant power supply
• Modular device technique
– Freely configurable and extendable devices
– Large process data range (up to 40 current and voltage
transformers for protection applications and up to 80 for
central busbar protection; more than 200 inputs and
outputs for recording applications possible)
– Operation panel that is freely selectable for all device types
(for example, large or small display, with or without key
switches, detached operation panel)
– Identical wiring of flush-mounting and surface-mounting
housings
• User-friendly operation panel
– 9 freely assignable function keys for frequently required
operator control actions
– Separate control keys for switching commands
– Context-sensitive keys with labeling in the display
– Complete numeric keypad for simple input of setting values
and easy navigation in the menu
– Up to 80 LEDs for signaling, 16 of which are in 2 colors
• User-friendly design
– No opening of device necessary for installation and serv-
icing
– Easy battery replacement on the back of the device
– Simple replacement of communication modules with
plug-in technology
– Electronically settable (no jumpers) threshold for binary
inputs
– Rated current (1 A/5 A) of current transformer inputs
configurable electronically
– Removable terminal blocks
– Prewiring of terminals is possible
– Simple replacement of current transformers, for example
with sensitive ground-current transformers for network
conversions
– Increased safety, since open current-transformer circuits
are no longer possible (safety CT plug)
Hardware Modules
5.1

Conformal Coating – The Highest Degree of Availability,
Even Under Extreme Environmental Conditions
Conformal Coating refers to the coating of electronic modules.
This coating ensures protection against extreme humidity,
corrosive gases, and high levels of dust, or a combination of
these. In addition, the coating offers mechanical protection
against improper handling and external influences. The
Conformal coating extends the life of your devices, particularly
under extreme environmental conditions.
SIPROTEC devices offer very high availability and a long life even
without the additional Coating. More than 2 million devices are
in use worldwide. When developing our devices, we place
utmost priority on adhering to the relevant product standards,
demonstrated by the type testing we undertake, such as the
cyclic damp and heat test in accordance with IEC 60068-2-30,
injection with mixed gases, sulfur dioxide SO2, or hydrogen
sulfide H2S.
The new coating offers you an additional level of security for
SIPROTEC devices used in especially harsh environmental condi-
tions, such as:
• H2S gas, which occurs in certain industrial environments and
can attack surface-mounted device components even at
concentrations of just 10 ppm
• Prolonged exposure to silver sulfide. These can result in silver
whiskers on the surface of surface-mounted device compo-
nents.
• These negative impacts are intensified by a high level of
humidity.
In extreme cases, this can result in short circuits or interruptions
on the module and thus place constraints on the functionality of
the device or cause its outage.
Qualified Production Process
The Conformal coating used on SIPROTEC modules has been
developed using a high quality, tried and trusted method.
In this method, the modules are coated and then hardened
automatically by a robot.
Type Test of Coated Modules
SIPROTEC protection and automation devices are tested and
certified by independent and accredited test institutes.
The SIPROTEC device undergoes various test complexes as part
of this.
For example, in test complex A the device is exposed first to
corrosive gases and then to extreme heat and humidity. Unlike
separate tests, these combinations simulate the harshest
possible environmental conditions.
Test Complex A: Corrosion and Climatic Tests
• Corrosive gas SO2, in accordance with IEC 60068-2-42
• Corrosive gas H2S, in accordance with IEC 60068-2-43
• Mixed corrosive gases, in accordance with IEC 60068-2-60
• Corrosion test with mixed gases in accordance with
ISA 71.04:2013-08, G3 (Harsh) (SIPROTEC 5)
• Humidity, thermal energy, cyclical, in accordance with
IEC 60068-2-30 and LR test specification § 14
Test Complex B: Climatic and Mechanical, Dynamic Tests
• Temperature: +55 °C permanent, +70 °C for 96 hours
• Rapid temperature change -40 °C <-> +85 °C in accordance
with IEC 60068-2-14
• Vibration and shock stress, in accordance with IEC 60068-2-6,
IEC 60255-21-1
• Damp and heat, cyclical, in accordance with IEC 60068-2-30
Test Complex C: Hygroscopic Dust
• Dust and sand, Arizona test dust, duration of 24 hours, in
accordance with IEC 60068-2-68
• Damp and heat, cyclical, in accordance with IEC 60068-2-30
Test Complex D: Salt Mist
• Special, additional test for the simulation of offshore condi-
tions
• Salt mist in accordance with IEC 60068-2-52, Kb test with
increased Lloyd’s Register specification parameters
SIPROTEC Devices with Conformal Coating
• SIPROTEC 5
– 7SJ81, 7SJ82, 7SK82, 7SA82, 7SD82, 7SL82, 7UT82
– 6MD85, 6MD86, 6MD89, 7SJ85, 7SJ86, 7SK85, 7SA86,
7SA87, 7SD86, 7SD87, 7SL86, 7SL87, 7UT85, 7UT86,
7UT87, 7VK87, 7UM85, 7KE85, 7SS85
Benefits
• Highest service life and availability of SIPROTEC devices even
under extreme environmental conditions
• Increased protection against harmful environmental influ-
ences such as corrosive gases and salts
• Additional mechanical protection against dust, abrasion and
insects
• Reliable prevention of “dendrite growth” between individual
components
[ph_Lackierlinie für Abnahme, 1, --_--]
Figure 5.2/1 Qualified Coating System
Conformal Coating
5.2

• Increased protection of modules against humidity
• Highest quality of coating using a qualified production
process
[chemiefabrik-sideshot5, 1, --_--]
Figure 5.2/2 Chemical Industry
[Offshore, 1, --_--]
Figure 5.2/3 Offshore Platform
Conformal Coating
5.2

Base and Expansion Modules
A SIPROTEC 5 device consists of a base module, up to 9 expan-
sion modules and a power supply module for the optional
second row. Base and expansion modules are distinguished
firstly by their width. The base module is 1/3 x 19" wide. Located
on the rear panel are process connections and space for up to 2
plug-in modules. The expansion modules and the power supply
for the second row are each 1/6 x 19" wide.
If you want to equip a SIPROTEC 5 device with a redundant
power supply, you need the power-supply module PS204. For
devices with a 2nd row, the PS203 module must be supple-
mented with a 2nd PS204 module.
Expansion modules can provide either additional process
connections or communication connections and are available
for the devices 7xx85, 7xx86, 7xx87, and 6MD8.
Figure 5.3/1 shows the rear panel of a device consisting of a
base module in which the power supply, the CPU board, and an
input/output CPU module are permanently installed, as well
as 4 expansion modules for extending the input/output quantity
structure, and communication modules. Each expansion module
contains an input/output module. The components are
connected by bus connector plugs and mechanical interlock-
ings.
Such a device can be ordered pre-configured from the factory. In
this context, you can select between the standard variants
predefined by Siemens and the devices you have combined
yourself. Every SIPROTEC 5 device can also be converted or
extended according to your wishes. The modular concept abso-
lutely ensures that the final device meets all standards, particu-
larly with regard to EMC and environmental requirements.
[E_CC_SIP5_19Zoll_KomMod, 1, --_--]
Figure 5.3/1 Rear View of Base Module with 4 Expansion Modules
On-Site Operation Panel
The on-site operation panel is a separate component within the
SIPROTEC 5 modular system. This allows you to combine a base
or expansion module with a suitable on-site operation panel,
according to your requirements. The modular system
offers 3 different on-site operation panels for selection for base
modules and also for expansion modules.
The following variants are available for base modules:
• With a large display, keypad and 16 two-colored LEDs
• With a small display, keypad, and 16 two-colored LEDs
• 16 two-colored LEDs
[SIPROTEC 5 Moduls, 2, --_--]
Figure 5.3/2 Operation Panels with (from Left) Large and Small Display, and Operation Panel without Display
Modules
5.3

The following variants are available for expansion modules:
• Without operating or control elements
• With 16 LEDs (single-colored)
• With 16 LEDs (single-colored) and key switch
[le_4 expansion modules, 1, --_--]
Figure 5.3/3 Variants of the Expansion Modules
(1) Labeling strips
(2) 16 monochrome LEDs
(3) 2 key switches
(4) 8 monochrome LEDs
(5) 8 push-buttons
[le_operation panel, 2, --_--]
Figure 5.3/4 Operation Panel SIPROTEC 5
(1) Graphic display
(2) Labeling field for LEDs
(3) 16 LEDs (green or red, settable parameters)
(4) 16 LEDs (red)
(5) LED-Reset
(6) USB interface
(7) Labeling field for function keys
(8) Numerical keys and function keys
(9) Control/command keys
(10) Context-sensitive keys
(11) Navigation keys
(12) Key switch S5 "Remote/Local"
(13) Key switch S1 "Interlocking Off/Normal"
The SIPROTEC 5 module is flexible with regard to selection of the
operation panel. You can order any device type with a large
graphical display or with a smaller economical standard display.
For applications without device control, an operation panel
without display is also available. The operation panel with a
small display provides 7 rows for measured values or menu texts
and the graphical representation of, for example, a single
busbar. All operation and control keys are available to the user,
that is, he can also control switching devices.
Elements of the on-site operation panels
The operator elements are illustrated with the example of the
on-site operation panel with a large display.
The central element is the generously sized display for text and
graphics. With its high resolution, it has ample space for icons in
graphical representations.
Below the display there is a 12-key block. In combination
with 4 navigation keys and 2 option keys, you have everything
you need to navigate conveniently and quickly through all infor-
mation that is shown in the display. 2 LEDs on the upper border
Modules
5.3

of the operation panel inform you about the current device
operating state.
16 additional LEDs, to the left of the keypad, ensure quick,
targeted process feedback. The USB interface enables fast data
transmission. It is easily accessible from the front and well
protected with a plastic cover.
[sc_Display, 1, en_US]
Figure 5.3/5 Display Images – Measured Value and Control Display
The operation panel with large display can also show a complex
control display and thus offers more room for measured values
and the display of event lists. This operation panel is therefore
the first choice for bay controllers, busbar protection or
combined protection and electronic control units.
As a third option, an economical variant is available without
keypad and display. This variant is appropriate for devices that
are seldom or never used by the operational crew.
The keys O and I (red and green) for the direct control of equip-
ment, a reset button for the LEDs, and the CTRL key for acti-
vating the system diagram complete the operation panel.
Options
You can order any SIPROTEC 5 device, regardless of its individual
configuration, in 3 different installation variants:
• As a flush-mounting device
• As a surface-mounted device with integrated on-site opera-
tion panel
• As a surface-mounted device with the on-site operation panel
detached.
The construction of the flush-mounting devices will be recogniz-
able from the previous sections. We would like to briefly intro-
duce you to the 2 other variants here.
A surface-mounted device with integrated on-site operation
panel
For wall-installation, the SIPROTEC 5 devices can be ordered in
the surface-mounting housing (Figure 5.3/6 and Figure 5.3/7).
Thanks to a new concept, these devices have terminal diagrams
that are identical to the corresponding flush-mounting devices.
This is achieved by installing the devices using the principle
"with the face to the wall" and then attaching the operation
panels to the terminal side. With the distance frames that are
used, sufficient space remains for the wiring, which can be
routed away upward and downward.
[ph_surface mounting, 2, --_--]
Figure 5.3/6 Device in the Surface-Mounting Housing with Integrated
Operation Panel for Modular Devices
[ph_Assembly frame, 2, --_--]
Figure 5.3/7 Device in the Surface-Mounting Housing with Integrated
Operation Panel for Modular Devices (7xx82)
Modules
5.3

[ph_SIP5_abgesetztes_display, 1, --_--]
Figure 5.3/8 Device with Detached Operation Panel
A surface-mounted device with the on-site operation panel
detached
If the operation panel is to be installed detached from the
device, it can be installed as a separate part and connected to
the device with a 2.5 m or 5 m long connecting cable (Figure
5.3/8). In this way, the SIPROTEC 5 device can be situated, for
example, in the low-voltage fixture and the operation panel can
be installed precisely at the correct working height in the
cabinet door. In this case, the device is fastened like a surface-
mounted device to the cabinet wall. An opening must be
provided in the door for the operation panel.
Modules
5.3

Hardware Properties 7SJ81 7xx82 7xx85, 86, 87, 6MD8
Hardware expandable (modular) No No yes
Binary inputs 11/16/18 11/23 Flexible
Binary outputs 9/11/14 9/16 Flexible
Analog measuring-transducer inputs (20 mA) 0 to 4 0 to 8 Flexible, 0 to 12
Light sensor inputs 0 to 3 0 to 6 0 to 12
Current inputs 4 4/8 Flexible
Voltage inputs 4/0 4/0 Flexible
Housing (x 19") 1/3 1/3 1/3 to 2/1
Flush-mounting device Yes Yes Yes
Surface-mounting device with integrated on-
site operation panel
Yes, with assembly frame Yes, with assembly frame Yes
Surface-mounting device with detached on-
site operation panel
No No Yes
Small display (rows) 8 8 8
Large display (pixels) 320x240 320x240 320x240
Function Keys None 9 9
Key switch No No Optional
LEDs 12 16 Flexible, 16 to 80
Power supply DC 24 to 48 V and
DC 60 to 250 V/AC 115 to 230 V
Redundant power supply No No Yes
Table 5.3/1 Hardware Properties
Modules
5.3

USB connections on the front side
The device can be accessed with the operating program
DIGSI 5 by plugging a standard USB cable into the USB-B socket
on the front side of the base module. The complete configura-
tion and setting of the device can be carried out via this point-
to-point connection.
Integrated interfaces on the rear panel of the base module
The base module offers various, permanently installed interfaces
on the rear panel. For even greater flexibility, 2 slots are avail-
able for plug-in modules. For this, please observe the connec-
tion plans in the attachment.
[Rückansicht_Basis_CB202, 1, --_--]
Figure 5.4/1 Rear View of the Device with Integrated Interfaces and
Module Slots (left: Base Module, Right: CB202)
Integrated Ethernet interface (port J)
This electrical RJ45 interface serves to connect DIGSI 5 via a local
Ethernet network. In this way, several devices can be operated
from DIGSI 5 via one external switch. DIGSI 5 detects the devices
even without an IP configuration on the local network and can
then assign them IP addresses.
Optionally, the protocol IEC 61850 can be activated on this
interface for connections with up to 6 clients. With
the 7Sx82 devices and SIPROTEC 5 devices with CP300, GOOSE
messages are also supported on this interface.
Time-Synchronization Interface (port G)
Via the 9-pole D-sub socket (connection compatible with
SIPROTEC 4), the time in the device can be synchronized. The set
clock telegram IRIG-B005 (007) of a GPS receiver can be fed
with 5 V, 12 V, or 24 V levels. In addition, the Central European
DCF77 format with summer and standard time changes is
supported. An additional, second pulse input enables micro-
second-precise synchronization of the device from a highly
precise time source, for example a special GPS receiver. This
accuracy is needed for special protection and measuring tasks.
In this way, devices can be precisely synchronized to the micro-
second across stations. For this, Siemens provides a prefabri-
cated complete solution with time receiver, FO converters, and
appropriate connecting cables.
Connecting a detached operation panel (port H)
A detached operation panel provided together with the
connecting cable can be connected to this interface. The
maximum distance is 2.5 m or 5 m.
Connecting the expansion unit CB202 (port K)
The base module offers slots for 2 plug-in modules. If more
plug-in modules are needed, these can be provided via a special
expansion module CB202. This module is connected via port K.
The expansion module is delivered with an appropriate cable
and is connected with the base module via port L. The
CB202 has its own wide-range power supply unit. A great
advantage here is that the switch integrated in an Ethernet
module can execute its data forwarding function for neigh-
boring devices even if the power supply of the base device is
switched off, provided the CB202 is still powered. Thus, an
Ethernet ring is not broken when one device is in service.
Via plug-in modules, the devices can be extended with protocol
interfaces and analog inputs. The devices can be ordered with
assembled modules or be extended with modules retroactively.
An expansion module CB202 (right photo in Figure 5.4/1) can
also be assembled with plug-in modules. The modules are easy
to service and can be plugged in without having to open the
device. Since the modules have their own processor, the basic
functions of the device, for example, the protection functions
and the protocol application, are largely independent.
Modules are delivered without configured protocols or applica-
tions. One or more appropriate modules are suggested in the
order configurator corresponding to the desired protocol on a
module. There are serial modules with 1 or 2 electrical and
optical interfaces. Different applications can run on both inter-
faces, for example, synchronous protection communication of a
differential protection on one interface and an
IEC 60870-5-103 protocol on the second interface. Electrical and
optical modules for Ethernet are still available. For example, the
IEC 61850 protocol as well as auxiliary services may be executed
for each module.
5.4

The SIPROTEC 5 Terminals
Innovative terminals were developed for the SIPROTEC 5 family.
All terminals are individually removable (Figure 5.5/1). This
enables prewiring of the systems, as well as simple device
replacement without costly rewiring.
[E_CC_Close_up_AB-03_sRGB, 1, --_--]
Figure 5.5/1 Removed Current Terminal Block
Current terminals
The 8-pole current terminal with 4 integrated current trans-
formers is available in 3 variants:
• 4 protection-class current transformers
• 3 protection-class current transformers + 1 sensitive protec-
tion-class transformer
• 4 instrument transformers.
The terminal design provides the following advantages for the
connection of currents:
• Exchange of the current transformer type also possible retro-
actively on-site (for example, protection-class current trans-
formers for instrument transformer, sensitive for normal
ground-current transformers in cases of network conversions)
• Additional safety during tests or device replacement since the
secondary current transformer circuits always remain closed.
Voltage terminal
The voltage transformers and the binary input and output
signals are connected via the 14-pole voltage terminal. The
cable route away from the device enables clear terminal wiring.
Jumpers precisely matching the current and voltage terminals
are available for connecting to common potential (see spare
parts and accessories, chapter Attachment).
[terminal blocks, 1, --_--]
Figure 5.5/2 Voltage and Current Terminal Block with Jumpers
Terminals
5.5

Selection of the Input/Output Module
Which and how many process connections a base or expansion
module has depends on the choice of a particular input/output
module. The modular building block concept includes different
input/output modules.
The IO202 input/output module (Figure 5.6/1) is used, for
example, as a base measuring module. By equipping several
modules with this module, you can achieve up to 40 measuring
channels per SIPROTEC 5 device.
In the module, there are connections for:
• 4 voltage transformers
• 4 current transformers, optional protection-class current
transformer, sensitive protection transformer, or instrument
transformer
• 8 binary inputs (BI)
• 6 binary outputs (BO), designed as 4 fast speed (type F) make
contacts and 2 fast speed change-over contacts.
The connections are distributed over:
• 1 x 8-pole current terminal block
• 3 x 14-pole voltage terminal blocks
Select the modules suitable for your purposes so that you can
build the SIPROTEC 5 device that precisely matches your applica-
tion. An overview of the modules that are available and their
quantity structures can be found in Table 5.7/1.
[IO202, 1, --_--]
Figure 5.6/1 Rear View of an Expansion Module IO202
2. device row
Should the quantity structure of a device with 4 expansion
modules not suffice, it can be expanded by a 2nd row. A
PS203 power supply is required for this in the first mounting
position of the 2nd row. The remaining 5 positions can be filled
with expansion modules from the SIPROTEC 5 modules. Excep-
tion: The CB202 must always be positioned in the 1st row and
can only be used once per device.
CB202 module
The CB202 module represents a special case. The
CB202 provides 3 plug-in module positions for up to 2 commu-
nication modules or up to 3 measuring-transducer modules.
Combinations are also possible, for example, 2 communication
modules and one measuring-transducer module.
The power supply is integrated, so that the CB202 can be
powered independently of the master unit. Communication
with the master unit is assured via an RJ45 connector and the
bus connection on the front of the module.
[CB202, 1, --_--]
Figure 5.6/2 Expansion Module CB202
Measuring Ranges of the Current Transformer Modules
The measuring range (full modulation) of the current trans-
formers can be set to different values electronically – depending
on the field of application. In all cases, you can choose between
protection and instrument transformers. Due to the wide
dynamic range, only protection-class current transformers
should be considered for busbar protection. The possible meas-
uring ranges according to rated current are shown in Table 5.6/1
"Measuring ranges according to rated current".
A large dynamic range is necessary for network protection appli-
cations, so that short circuit currents can be recorded without
distortion. A value of 100 × Irated has proven optimal. For 5 W
transformers, this corresponds to a transformer rated current
setting of 500 A, and consequently of 100 A for 1 A trans-
formers. For applications in generator protection, while it is true
that there are very large primary currents, a dynamic range
of 20 × Irated is still quite sufficient. Thus, a measuring range
of 100 A is obtained for a setting of Irated= 5 A and a measuring
range of 20 A for Irated= 1 A.
A smaller dynamic range means that greater measuring accu-
racy is achieved in the rated current range. Consequently, the
dynamic range for instrument transformers and sensitive protec-
tion-class current transformer input for ground fault currents is
extremely limited. In this case, limited means that the input
current is truncated on the analog side. Of course, the inputs in
this case are protected against overdriving.
5.6

Rated current
Irated
Measuring
range
Measuring
range
7xx82 devices
Protection-class
5 A 500 A 250 A
1 A 100 A 50 A
Instrument trans-
formers
5 A 8 A 8 A
1 A 1.6 A 1.6 A
Sensitive ground-
current input
5 A 8 A 8 A
1 A 1.6 A 1 A
Table 5.6/1 Measuring Ranges according to Rated Current
5.6

Plug-In Modules
Plug-in modules are available for communication or analog
inputs and arc protection. The communication modules are
described in the Communication chapter.
Measuring-transducer module ANAI-CA-4EL
The module has four 20-mA inputs. It can be plugged into one
of the slots in the PS201 or CB202. Multiple measured value
modules can be used with each device (one in each available
slot). The connections are created via an 8-pole screw terminal
block Figure 5.7/1).
The technical data for the measuring-transducer module is
provided in the manual "SIPROTEC 5, Description, Hardware". An
extract from the technical data can also be found in the catalog
in the chapter Attachment – Technical data.
[ANAI-CA-4EL, 1, --_--]
Figure 5.7/1 Measuring-Transducer Module ANAI-CA-4EL
Arc protection module ARC-CD-3FO
Up to 3 optical point or line sensors per arc protection plug-in
module (Figure 5.7/2) can be connected. This yields a maximum
number of up to 15 sensors for modular SIPROTEC 5 devices.
The point sensors can be ordered with line lengths from 3 m
to 35 m. Line sensors detect arcs along the entire sensor length.
Lengths from 5 m to 40 m are available. Line sensors are
connected via a line to the arc protection module. The power
line can be ordered in lengths from 3 m to 10 m.
[ARC-CD-3FO, 1, --_--]
Figure 5.7/2 Arc Protection Module ARC-CD-3FO
Plug-In Modules
5.7

Quantity Structure of the Modules for Non-Modular Devices
– 7xx81 and 7xx82
Module Description
V
Input
I
Input
BI
(Isolated)
BI
(Connected
to
Common
Potential)
BO,
Make
Contact
Temperature
Inputs
BO,
Change-Over
Contact
BO,
Change-Over
Contact
Type
F*
Fast
Measuring
Transducer
20
mA/10
V
BO
Power
Relay
Number
of
Slots
for
Plug-In
Modules
Available
in
Base
Module
Available
in
the
Expansion
Module
Power
Supply
Usable
in
Device
Row
PS101 Power supply module for all 7xx82 devices – – – 3 1 – 2 1) – – – 2 ■ – ■ 1
IO101 Base module for all 7xx82 devices that
require current measurement
– 4 1 7 4 – 2 – – – – ■ – – 1
require current and voltage measurement
4 4 1 7 4 – 2 – – – – ■ – – 1
require current measurement
– 8 – 4 4 – – – – – – ■ – – 1
IO110 Module for additional binary input and
output for all 7xx82 devices
– – – 12 7 – – – – – – ■ – – 1
IO111 Input module for all 7xx82 devices from
V7.50
– – – – – 12 – – – – – ■ – – 1
1) Of these, 1 life contact
The connection diagrams of the individual modules are included in the chapter Attachment.
Table 5.7/1 Quantity Structure of the Modules for Non-Modular Devices (7xx81 and 7xx82)
Plug-In Modules
5.7

Quantity Structure of the Modules for All Modular Devices -
7xx85, 7xx86, 7xx87, and 6MD8
Module Description
V
Input
I
Input
BI
(Isolated)
BI
(Connected
to
Common
Potential)
BO,
Make
Contact
BO,
Make
Contact
Type
F*
BO
Make
Contact
Type
HS**
BO,
Change-Over
Contact
BO,
Change-Over
Contact
Type
F*
Fast
Measuring
Transducer
20
mA/10
V
BO
Power
Relay
Number
of
Slots
for
Plug-In
Modules
Available
in
Base
Module
Available
in
Expansion
Module
Power
Supply
Can
be
used
in
Device
Row
PS201 Power supply module for first device row – – – 3 1 – – 2 1) – – – 2 ■ – ■ 1
PS203 Power supply module for the 2nd printed
circuit board assembly row
– – – – – – – – – – – – – ■ ■ 2
PS204 Power supply module for redundant power
supply
– – – – – – – – – – – – – ■ ■ 1.2
CB202 Printed circuit board assembly with 3 addi-
tional slots for modules and an inde-
pendent power supply
– – – – – – – – – – – 3 – ■ ■ 1
IO201 Base module for protection applications
that do not require voltage measurement
– 4 8 – – 4 – – 2 – – – ■ ■ – 1.2
IO202 Base module for all devices that require
current and voltage measurement
4 4 8 – – 4 – – 2 – – – ■ ■ – 1.2
IO203 Printed circuit board assembly for devices
that require numerous current inputs
– 8 4 – – 4 – – – – – – ■ ■ – 1.2
IO204 This printed circuit board assembly
contains 4 power relays for direct control
of the operating mechanism motors of
grounding conductors and disconnectors
– – 10 – 4 – – – – – 4 – – ■ – 1.2
IO205 For applications with binary inputs and
binary outputs
– – 12 – 16 – – – – – – – – ■ – 1.2
IO206 For applications with binary inputs and
binary outputs
– – 6 – 7 – – – – – – – – ■ – 1.2
IO207 Geared toward bay controllers due to the
predominant number of binary inputs
– – 16 – 8 – – – – – – – – ■ – 1.2
IO208 Typical printed circuit board assembly for
protective applications. In contrast to the
IO202, it is equipped with more relay
outputs
4 4 4 – 3 6 – – 2 – – – ■ ■ – 1.2
IO209 This printed circuit board assembly is used
when extremely fast tripping times
(4 make contacts, 0.2 ms pickup time) are
required, such as in extra-high voltage
protection
– – 8 – – – 4 – – – – – – ■ – 1.2
IO210 Input and output module with 4 fast meas-
uring transducer inputs for current or
voltage
4 3 7 – – – – – – 4 – – – – – –
IO211 This printed circuit board assembly is for
devices that require numerous voltage
inputs
8 – 8 – 8 – – – – – – – – ■ – 1.2
IO212 Printed circuit board assembly for very fast
detection of measuring transducer signals
(20 mA or 10 V) with a main field of appli-
cation for the recording of interference
signals and monitoring
– – 8 – – – – – – 8 – – – – – 1.2
*Type F – fast relay with monitoring (operating time < 5 ms) / **Type HS – high-speed relay (contact with solid-state bypass) with monitoring (operating time < 0.2 ms)
1) Of these, 1 life contact / 2) 10 V voltage inputs for RC dividers with high impedance
Plug-In Modules
5.7

Module Description
V
Input
I
Input
BI
(Isolated)
BI
(Connected
to
Common
Potential)
BO,
Make
Contact
BO,
Make
Contact
Type
F*
BO
Make
Contact
Type
HS**
BO,
Change-Over
Contact
BO,
Change-Over
Contact
Type
F*
Fast
Measuring
Transducer
20
mA/10
V
BO
Power
Relay
Number
of
Slots
for
Plug-In
Modules
Available
in
Base
Module
Available
in
Expansion
Module
Power
Supply
Can
be
used
in
Device
Row
IO214 Typical printed circuit board assembly for
protective applications. In contrast to the
IO202, it has a reduced quantity structure
4 4 2 – – 4 – – 4 – – – ■ ■ – 1.2
IO215 Special module for connection of special
high-impedance voltage dividers via 10-V
voltage inputs
42) 4 8 – – 4 – – 2 – – – – ■ – 1.2
IO216 Input module for special binary inputs
with maximized robustness against elec-
trical disturbances
– – 16 – – – – – – – – – ■ – 1.2
IO230 Printed circuit board assembly for
receiving great volumes of information,
such in the bay controllers or busbar
protection. The process connection is
made via special terminals
– – – 48 – – – – – – – – – ■ – 1.2
IO231 Printed circuit board assembly for
receiving and the output of great volumes
of information, such in the bay controllers
or busbar protection. The process connec-
tion is made via special terminals
– – – 24 24 – – – – – – – – ■ – 1.2
IO233 Input module with special version for
binary inputs.
– – – 48 – – – – – – – – – – – –
IO240 Input module for low-power instrument
transformer (LPIT) from Siemens Energy
4 4 – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
*Type F – fast relay with monitoring (operating time < 5 ms) / **Type HS – high-speed relay (contact with solid-state bypass) with monitoring (operating time < 0.2 ms)
1) Of these, 1 life contact / 2) 10 V voltage inputs for RC dividers with high impedance
Table 5.7/2 Quantity Structure of the Modules for All Modular Devices (7xx85, 7xx86, 7xx87 and 6MD8)
Plug-In Modules
5.7

Standard Variants
To make it easier to select the correct devices, Siemens offers
you pre-configured devices called standard variants. These
combinations of a base module and one or more expansion
modules are intended for specific applications. In this way, you
can order exactly the right device with a single order number.
The standard variants can also be modified easily and quickly
with additional expansion modules. Thus, it is just as easy to add
modules as it is to replace certain modules with others. The
available standard variants are listed in the order configurator.
[SIP5_GD_SS_W3, 2, --_--]
Figure 5.8/1 Standard Variant for SIPROTEC 7SL87
Figure 5.8/1 shows one possible standard variant for
SIPROTEC 7SL87.
This variant describes a 2/3 x 19" wide device having the
following quantity structure.
• 15 binary inputs
• 20 binary outputs
• 8 current inputs
• 8 voltage inputs.
The modules used in the device can be seen on the results page
of the SIPROTEC 5 configurator (see chapter Engineering
Product Selection via the Order Configurator, Page 372 for more
details).
In our example, the following modules are used in posi-
tions 1 to 3:
• Position 1: IO208
• Position 2: PS201
• Position 3: IO202.
The individual terminals are defined by the mounting position of
the module and the terminal designations of the module (see
section: Attachment – connection diagrams).
As an example, the terminals of the first 4 current inputs, which
are on the IO208 at position 1, are designated as follows:
• I1: 1A1 and 1A2
• I2: 1A3 and 1A4
• I3: 1A5 and 1A6
• I4: 1A7 and 1A8.
The additional 4 current inputs are at the 3rd mounting position
on the IO202 module, and are designated as follows:
• I1: 3A1 and 3A2
• I2: 3A3 and 3A4
• I3: 3A5 and 3A6
• I4: 3A7 and 3A8.
Regardless of whether you choose a standard variant or
configure your devices freely – you always receive a thoroughly
tested, complete device.
[dwbgrpos-170713-01.tif, 3, en_US]
Figure 5.8/2 Connector Designations and Counting Method
(1) Current terminal A
(2) Voltage terminal A, B, C, D
(3) Connector for time synchronization G
(4) Plug-in module E, F
(5) Connector for detached on-site operation panel H
(6) Battery compartment
(7) Connector for integrated Ethernet interface J
(8) Connector for COM link K
(9) 2-pole terminal to connect power supply
(10) Base module 1/3 of 19"
(11) Expansion module 1/6 of 19"
(12) Connecting cable between 1st and 2nd device row
Standard Variants
5.8

Advantages of the flexible hardware module:
• With the flexible hardware module range, you conven-
iently configure the optimal hardware scope for your
application.
• For many applications, the appropriate device specifica-
tion is already pre-defined as a standard variant.
• The hardware design is appropriate for your switching
cell.
• The innovative SIPROTEC 5 terminal with integrated
current transformers offers increased safety in systems
testing and flexibility when exchanging the transformer
type.
Standard Variants
5.8

Standard Variants
5.8

Appendix
6

Group Accessories Article per packaging unit Order no. (short designa-
tion)
Terminal Voltage terminal, terminal block, 14-pole 8 P1Z499
Terminal Voltage terminal (power supply)
Terminal block, 2-pole1
2 P1Z505
Terminal Type A current terminal, 4 x protection 2
(for modular devices)
1 P1Z512
Terminal Type A current terminal, 3 x protection and 1 x measurement2
1 P1Z529
Terminal Type A current terminal, 4 x measurement2
1 P1Z536
Terminal Type B current terminal, 4 x protection3
(for non-modular devices)
1 P1Z1869
Terminal Type B current terminal, 3 x protection and 1 x measurement3
(for non-modular devices)
1 P1Z1647
Terminal 2-pole cross connector for current terminal 3 P1Z543
Terminal Terminals for IO110, IO112, IO1131 2 P1Z1656
Terminal Terminals and shielding for IO1111, 4, 5 2 P1X240
Terminal Terminal set for IO23x1 only 1 P1Z1841
Terminal 2-pole cross connector for voltage terminal 6 P1Z550
Terminal Cover for current terminal block 1 P1Z567
Terminal Cover for voltage terminal block 8 P1Z574
Terminal Transport safety, current terminal 2 P1X222
Terminal Transport safety, voltage terminal 10 P1X231
Terminal Terminal set for direct connection to 400 V low voltage 4 P1X301
Accessories USB covers (10 pieces each for CP 100, 200, 300) 30 P1X213
Accessories Cable, integrated operation panel, 0.43 m 1 P1Z666
Accessories Cable, detached operation panel, 2.50 m (for retrofitting surface-
mounting housing with integrated operation panel in surface-
mounting housing with detached operation panel)
1 P1Z1878
Accessories Cable, detached operation panel, 5.00 m (for retrofitting surface-
mounting housing with integrated operation panel in surface-
mounting housing with detached operation panel)
1 P1Z2132
Accessories Cable set, COM link cable 1 P1Z673
Accessories Set of angle rails 2 P1Z1850
Accessories Labeling strips, LEDs/function keys 10 P1Z697
Accessories Labeling strips, push-buttons 5 P1Z2752
Accessories Set of parts, mounting bracket 1/2 2 P1Z703
Accessories Screw cover 1/3, type C11 4 P1Z901
Accessories Cover plate for unused plug-in module positions 1 P1Z680
Accessories Cover panel 1/6 5
Accessories Bus termination plate 2 P1Z1496
Accessories Panel surface mounting assembly frame (for mounting a 7xx81 or
7xx82 device in the panel surface mounting)
1 P1X73
Accessories SDHC memory card for 7KE85 1 P1Z2530
Accessories Battery holder 10 P1X91
Accessories Connecting cable for 2nd row 1 P1Z2655
Accessories DIGSI 5 USB 2.0 cable 1 P1Z2859
Accessories SFP RJ45, 10 units 10 P1Z3201
Appendix
6.1

Group Accessories Article per packaging unit Order no. (short designa-
tion)
Accessories SFP Single-mode, 24 km, 10 units 10 P1Z3210
Sensors for arc protection Point sensor with line length of 3 m 1 P1X19
Sensors for arc protection Line sensor, length 3 m 1 P1X107
Sensors for arc protection Supply line for line sensors 3 m 1 P1X152
Table 6.1/1 Accessories
1 Recommended tightening torque when screwing down the terminal on the rear plate: 0.3 Nm
2 For all modular SIPROTEC 5 devices, not for non-modular devices 7xx81 and 7xx82
3 For all non-modular SIPROTEC 5 devices 7xx82 (light), starting from V07.40
4 The set comprises terminals and shielding for IO111 for the terminal positions M and N.
5 Only for non-modular devices 7xx82
Appendix
6.1

[tdps201x-270812-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6.2/1 Connection Diagram PS201
[tdps203x-030713-01.tif, 2, en_US]
[tdps204x, 1, en_US]
[tdcb202x-100713-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 6.2/4 Connection Diagram CB202
[tdio201x-290812-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6.2/5 Connection Diagram IO201
Appendix
Connection Diagrams – Modular Devices
6.2

[tdio202x-240812-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[tdio203x-110313-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[tdio204x-201112-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Appendix
6.2

[tdio205x-240812-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[tdio206x-050313-02.tif, 1, en_US]
[tdio207x-300812-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Appendix
6.2

[tdio208x-300812-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[tdio209x-270812-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[td_io210, 3, en_US]
Appendix
6.2

[tdio211x-211112-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[tdio212x, 2, en_US]
[tdio214x-270812-01.tif, 1, en_US]
IO215
The terminal and connection diagram of the IO215 is identical
to the input and output module IO202 (Figure 6.2/6) in the
expansion module.
Appendix
6.2

Appendix
6.2

[td_tdio231x, 1, en_US]
[td_io233x, 1, en_US]
Appendix
6.2

[td_io240x, 3, en_US]
Appendix
6.2

[tdps101x-210513-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[tdio101x-220513-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[tdio102x-220513-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[tdio103x-01.vsd, 1, en_US]
Appendix
Connection Diagrams – for Non-Modular Devices (7xx81 and 7xx82)
6.2

[tdio110x-220513-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[td_io111, 1, en_US]
Appendix
6.2

Appendix
6.2

Flush-Mounting Device
[dw_z1_1-3, 2, en_US]
Figure 6.3/1 Cut-Out Widths and Drilling Pattern – 1/3 Device, 1st
Device Row
[dw_z1_1-2, 2, en_US]
Device Row
[dw_z1_2-3, 2, en_US]
Device Row
[dw_z1_5-6, 2, en_US]
Device Row
Appendix
Assembly Dimensions
6.3

[dw_z1_1-1, 3, en_US]
Device Row
All drillings in the area of the specific device cut-out widths (see
Table 6.3/1) must comply with the dimensions in the corre-
sponding figures.
[dw_z2_2-6, 2, en_US]
Figure 6.3/6 Cut-Out Widths and Drilling Pattern – 1/3 Device, 2nd
Device Row
[dw_z2_3-6, 2, en_US]
Device Row
[dw_z2_4-6, 2, en_US]
Device Row
Appendix
Assembly Dimensions
6.3

[dw_z2_5-6, 2, en_US]
Device Row
[dw_z2_6-6, 3, en_US]
Device Row
[dw_first and second device row, 1, en_US]
Figure 6.3/11 Drilling Pattern – 1/1 Devices, 1st and 2nd Device Row
Siemens recommends a drilling space of at least 55 mm (2.17
in) between the 1st and 2nd device row. Due to the connecting-
cable length, the maximum space may be approx. 80 mm
(3.15 in). The length of the cable is 890 mm (35.04 in) from the
center of the plug to the center of the plug.
[dw_angle rail, 1, en_US]
Figure 6.3/12 Angle Rail for Connection of the 1st and 2nd Device Row
Width of the Assembly Opening in
mm (in Inches)
1/3 device (base module) 146+2 mm (5.75+0.08)
1/2 device (base module with one
expansion module)
221+2 mm (8.7+0.08)
2/3 device (base module with 2
expansion modules)
296+2 mm (11.65+0.08)
expansion modules)
371+2 mm (14.61+0.08)
expansion modules)
447+2 mm (17.6+0.08)
Table 6.3/1 Cut-Out Widths
Dimension a
Housing Widths in mm (in Inches)
(Total Width: Housing Width +
4.6 mm (0.18 in))
1/3 device 145 (5.71)
1/2 device 220 (8.66)
2/3 device 295 (11.61)
Appendix
Assembly Dimensions
6.3

Dimension a
Housing Widths in mm (in Inches)
(Total Width: Housing Width +
4.6 mm (0.18 in))
5/6 device 370 (14.57)
1/1 device 445 (17.52)
Table 6.3/2 Variable Housing Widths
[dw_surface_mounting_in, 2, en_US]
Figure 6.3/13 Flush-Mounting Devices, Dimensions from the Side and
Front Views
Surface-Mounted Devices with Detached On-Site Operation
Panel
You can find more information on the drilling patterns for the
devices in section Surface-Mounted Devices with Integrated On-
Site Operation Panel (Modular Device) , Page 433.
[dw_z1_osop_1-3, 1, en_US]
Figure 6.3/14 Drilling Pattern of the On-Site Operation Panel of the 1/3
Device
Device
Device
Device
Appendix
Assembly Dimensions
6.3

Device
[dwosopab-070211-01.tif, 3, en_US]
Figure 6.3/19 Surface-Mounted Device with Detached On-Site Opera-
tion Panel, Dimensions in the Side and Front Views
Refer to Table 6.3/2 for the variable dimension a.
The drilling patterns correspond to the figures Figure 6.3/23 to
Figure 6.3/32.
The cable length for the detached operation panel is up to 5 m
(196.85 in).
i
i
NOTE
Cables with a length of 5 m (196.85 in) are only
specified for PCs and laptop computers with a
USB2 connection. These cables are not specified
for PCs and laptop computers with a USB3
connection.
Cables with a length of 2.5 m (98.43 in) are
specified for USB2 and USB3 connections.
[dw_angel-bracket_without_relief-cutouts, 1, en_US]
Figure 6.3/20 Angle Rail with Assembly Dimensions
Surface-Mounted Devices with Integrated On-Site Operation
Panel (Non-Modular Device)
[dw_console side view.vsd, 3, en_US]
Figure 6.3/21 Non-Modular Surface-Mounted Device with Integrated
On-Site Operation Panel, Dimensions from the Side and
Front Views
Surface-Mounted Devices with Integrated On-Site Operation
Panel (Modular Device)
[dwosopin-070211-01.tif, 3, en_US]
Figure 6.3/22 1/3 Surface-Mounted Device with Integrated On-Site
Operation Panel, Dimensions in the Side and Front Views
Appendix
Assembly Dimensions
6.3

i
i
NOTE
For surface-mounted devices, make sure that the
drillings fit for a screw of the size M6.
[dwbohrge-1_3.vsd, 2, en_US]
Figure 6.3/23 Drilling Pattern of a 1/3 Surface-Mounted Device – 1st
Device Row
Device Row
Device Row
Device Row
Appendix
Assembly Dimensions
6.3

[dwbohrge-070211-01.tif, 3, en_US]
Device Row
[dw_z2_bohr_1-3.vsd, 2, en_US]
Figure 6.3/28 Drilling Pattern of a 1/3 Surface-Mounted Device – 2nd
Device Row
Device Row
Device Row
Appendix
Assembly Dimensions
6.3

Device Row
Device Row
Appendix
Assembly Dimensions
6.3

Measured Value Description
Grouping of Base Measured Values
Operational measured values RMS value calculation and power calculation as per the definition
Phase currents IA, IB, IC
Ground current IN, INS (sensitive)
Phase-to-ground voltages VA, VB, VC
Phase-to-phase voltages VAB, VBC, VCA
Residual voltage VNG
Frequency f
Power P, Q, S (3-phase and phase-specific)
Power factor f
Fundamental and symmetrical components Calculation of phasor variables with Fourier filter or according to transformation rule
Phase currents IA, IB, IC
Ground current IN, INS (sensitive)
Phase-to-ground voltages VA, VB, VC
Phase-to-phase voltages VAB, VBC, VCA
Residual voltage VNG
Symmetrical components I0, I1, I2, V0, V1, V2
Protection-specific measured values Measured values that are especially calculated for individual protection functions, such as:
Distance protection (reactances and resistances of conductor loops)
Differential protection (differential and restraint current, charging currents per phase)
…
Energy values Metered values are determined for active and reactive energy. Restore time, restore interval and
counting mode are adjustable. Restoring can also be initiated via a binary input. The following
metered values are available:
Active energy Wp+ (release), Wp– (uptake)
Reactive energy Wq+ (release), Wq– (uptake)
Statistical values The following statistical values are formed as follows:
Total number of initiated trippings of the circuit breaker
Number of initiated trippings of the circuit breaker, separated per switch pole
Total sum of primary breaking currents
Sum of the primary breaking currents, separated for each switch pole
Grouping of Advanced Measured Values
Mean values Mean values can be calculated on the basis of the operational measured values and the symmetrical
components. The time slot for demand calculation and the output interval are parameterizable.
Minimum values and maximum values The minimum/maximum values can be generated on the basis of operational measured values,
symmetrical components, and selected measured values (for example, from mean values). The
display of minimum and maximum values contains the time of their occurrence. The calculation is
stabilized against smaller value fluctuations in currents and voltages.
Appendix
Grouping Measured Values
6.4

The following is an extract from the technical data for
SIPROTEC 5. You can find more information in the current
manual SIPROTEC 5 Description Hardware under
Voltage Input
All current, voltage, and power data are specified as RMS values.
Rated frequency frated 50 Hz, 60 Hz
16.7 Hz (for rail devices only)
Input and output
modules
IO102, IO202, IO208,
IO211, IO214
IO215
Measuring range 0 V to 200 V 0 V to 7.07 V
Burden < 0.1 VA < 0.01 VA
Thermal rating 230 V continuously 20 V continuously
Measuring-Transducer Inputs (via Module ANAI-CA-4EL)
Insulation class SELV (Safety Extra Low Voltage) (according to
IEC 60255-27)
Connector type 8-pin terminal spring
Differential current
input channels
4
Measuring range DC -25.6 mA to +25.6 mA
Fault < 0.5 % of the measuring range
Input impedance 140 Ω
Conversion principle Delta-sigma (16 bit)
Permissible potential
difference between
channels
DC 20 V
Galvanic separation
from ground/housing
DC 700 V
Permissible overload DC 100 mA continuously
Measured-value repe-
tition
200 ms
Inputs for Optical Sensors for Arc Protection (via Module
ARC-CD-3FO)
Connector type AVAGO AFBR-4526Z
Number of trans-
ceivers
3
Fiber type Plastic Optical Fiber (POF) 1 mm
Receiver
Maximum -10 dBm ± 2 dBm
Minimum -40 dBm ± 2 dBm
Spectrum 400 nm to 1100 nm
Attenuation In the case of plastic optical fibers, you can
expect a path attenuation of 0.2 dB/m. Addi-
tional attenuation comes from the plug and
sensor head.
Optical budget37 Minimal 25 dB
Analog sampling rate 16 kHz
ADC type 10-bit successive approximation
Transmitter
Type LED
Wavelength λ = 650 nm
Transmitter power Minimum 0 dBm
Maximum 2 dBm
Numerical aperture 0.5 38
Signal rate connection
test
1 pulse per second
Pulse duration connec-
tion test
11 μs
37 All values in combination with sensors approved by Siemens.
38 Numerical aperture (NA = sin θ (launch angle))
Appendix
Technical Data – Analog Inputs
6.5

Integrated Power Supply
For modular devices, the following modules contain a power supply:
PS201 – Power supply of the base module and of the 1st device row
PS203 – Power supply of the 2nd device row
PS204 – Redundant power supply
CB202 – Plug-in module assembly with integrated power supply, for
example, to accommodate communication modules
Permissible
voltage ranges
(PS201, PS203,
PS204, CB202)
DC 19 V
to DC 60 V
DC 48 V to DC 300 V
AC 80 V to AC 265 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz
Auxiliary rated
voltage VH
(PS201, PS203,
PS204, CB202)
DC 24 V/DC 48 V DC 60 V/DC 110 V/DC 125 V/
DC 220 V/
DC 250 V or
AC 100 V/AC 115 V/AC 230 V,
50 Hz/60 Hz
Permissible
voltage ranges
(PS101)
Only for non-
modular devices
DC 19 V
to DC 60 V
DC 48 V to
150 V
DC 88 V
to DC 300 V
AC 80 V to
AC 265 V, 50 Hz/
60 Hz
Auxiliary rated
voltage VH
(PS101)
Only for non-
modular devices
DC 24 V/DC 48 V DC 60 V/DC
110 V/
DC 125 V
DC 110 V/ DC
125 V/
DC 220 V/DC
250 V
or
AC 100 V/AC
115 V/
AC 230 V, 50 Hz/
60 Hz
Superimposed
alternating
voltage, peak-to-
peak,
IEC 60255-11,
IEC 61000-4-17
≤ 15 % of the DC auxiliary rated voltage (applies only
to direct voltage)
Inrush current ≤ 18 A
Recommended
external protec-
tion
Miniature circuit breaker 6 A, characteristic C
according to IEC 60898
Internal fuse
– DC 24 V
to DC 48 V
DC 60 V to DC
125 V
DC 24 V
to DC 48 V
AC 100 V to AC
230 V
PS101
Only for non-
modular devices
4 A inert,
AC 250 V,
DC 150 V,
UL recognized
SIBA
type 179200 or
Schurter
type SPT 5x20
2 A time-lag, AC 250 V, DC 300 V,
UL recognized
SIBA type 179200 or Schurter
type SPT 5x20
Integrated Power Supply
PS201, PS203,
CB202
(to device
version xA)
4 A inert,
AC 250 V,
DC 150 V,
UL recognized
SIBA
type 179200 or
Schurter
type SPT 5x20
2 A time-lag, AC 250 V, DC 300 V,
UL recognized
type SPT 5x20
PS201, PS203,
PS204
(Device version
xB and higher)
4 A inert,
AC 250 V,
DC 150 V,
UL recognized
SIBA
type 179200 or
Schurter
type SPT 5x20
3.15 A time-lag, AC 250 V, DC
300 V, UL recognized
type SPT 5x20
Power consumption (life relay active)
– DC AC 230 V/50 Hz AC 115 V/50 Hz
1/3 module,
non-modular
Without plug-in
modules
7 W 16 VA 12.5 VA
1/3 base
module,
modular
Without plug-in
modules
13 W 55 VA 40 VA
1/6 expansion
module
3 W 6 VA 6 VA
1/6 plug-in
module
assembly
without plug-in
modules
(modules
CB202)
3.5 W 14 VA 7 VA
Plug-in module
for base module
or plug-in
module
assembly (for
example,
communication
module)
< 5 W < 6 VA < 6 VA
Stored-energy time for auxiliary
voltage outage or short circuit,
modular devices
IEC 61000-4-11
IEC 61000-4-29
For V ≥ DC 24 V ≥ 50 ms
For V ≥ DC 110 V ≥ 50 ms
For V ≥ AC 115 V ≥ 50 ms
Stored-energy time for auxiliary
voltage outage or short circuit,
non-modular devices
IEC 61000-4-11
IEC 61000-4-29
For V ≥ DC 24 V ≥ 20 ms
For V ≥ DC 60 V ≥ 50 ms
For V ≥ AC 115 V ≥ 200 ms
Appendix
Technical Data – Supply Voltage
6.5

Standard Binary Input
Rated voltage range DC 24 V to 250 V
The binary inputs of SIPROTEC 5 are bipolar,
with the exception of the binary inputs on the
modules IO230, IO231, and IO233.
Current consumption,
excited
Approx. DC 0.6 mA to 2.5 mA (independent of
the control voltage)
Power consumption,
max.
0.6 W
Pickup time Approx. 3 ms
Dropout time39 Capacitive load
(supply-line capaci-
tance)
Dropout time
< 5 nF < 4 ms
< 10 nF < 6 ms
< 50 nF < 10 ms
< 220 nF < 35 ms
Control voltage for all
modules with binary
inputs, except
module IO233
Adapt the binary-input threshold to be set in
the device to the control voltage.
Range 1 for 24 V, 48
V, and 60 V
Control voltage
Vlow ≤ DC 10 V
Vhigh ≥ DC 19 V
Range 2 for 110 V and
125 V
Control voltage
Vlow ≤ DC 44 V
Vhigh ≥ DC 88 V
Range 3 for 220 V and
250 V
Control voltage
Vlow ≤ DC 88 V
Vhigh ≥ DC 176 V
Control voltage for
binary inputs of the
IO233 module
Range for 125 V
Control voltage
Vlow ≤ DC 85 V
Vhigh ≥ DC 105 V
Maximum permitted
voltage
DC 300 V
The binary inputs contain interference suppression capacitors. To
ensure EMC immunity, use the terminals shown in the terminal
diagrams/connection diagrams to connect the binary inputs to the
common potential.
39 For time-critical applications with low-active signals, consider the specified dropout times. If necessary, provide for active discharge of the binary input
(for example, a resistor in parallel to the binary input or using a change-over contact).
Appendix
Technical Data – Binary Inputs
6.5

Standard Relay (Type S)
Making capacity Max. 1000 W (L/R = 40 ms)
Max. 3600 VA (power factor ≤
0.35, 50 Hz to 60 Hz)
Breaking capacity Max. 30 W (L/R = 40 ms)
Max. 360 VA (power factor ≤ 0.35,
50 Hz to 60 Hz)
AC and DC contact voltage 250 V
Permissible current per contact
(continuous)
5 A
(switching on and holding)
30 A for 1 s (make contact)
Short-time current across closed
contact
250 A for 30 ms
Total permissible current for
contacts connected to common
potential
5 A
Switching time OOT (Output
Operating Time)
Additional delay of the output
medium used
Make time: typical: 8 ms;
maximum: 10 ms
Break time: typical: 2 ms;
maximum: 5 ms
Max. rated data of the output
contacts in accordance with UL
certification
DC 24 V, 5 A, General Purpose
DC 48 V, 0.8 A, General Purpose
AC 240 V, 5 A, General Purpose
AC 120 V, 1/6 hp
AC 250 V, 1/2 hp
B300
R300
Interference suppression capaci-
tors across the contacts
4.7 nF, ± 20 %, AC 250 V
Fast Relay (Type F)
0.35, 50 Hz to 60 Hz)
50 Hz to 60 Hz)
(continuous)
5 A
contact
250 A for 30 ms
potential
5 A
Operating Time)
medium used
Make time: typical: 4 ms;
maximum: 5 ms
Break time: typical: 2 ms;
maximum: 5 ms
Rated data of the output contacts
in accordance with UL certification
DC 24 V, 5 A, General Purpose
AC 250 V, 0.5 hp
B300
R300
4.7 nF, ± 20 %, AC 250 V
Supervision 2-channel activation with cyclic
testing (only for make contact)
High-Speed Relay with Semiconductor Acceleration (Type
HS)
0.35, 50 Hz to 60 Hz)
50 Hz to 60 Hz)
Contact voltage AC 200 V, DC 250 V
(continuous)
5 A (according to UL certification)
10 A (no UL certification; AWG 14 /
2.5-mm2 (0.0039-in2) copper
conductors necessary)
contact
250 A for 30 ms
Operating Time)
medium used
Make time, typical: 0.2 ms;
maximum: 0.2 ms
Break time, typical: 9 ms;
maximum: 9 ms
B150
Q300
Power Relay (for Direct Control of Motor Switches)
Switching power for permanent and periodic operation
250 V/4.0 A
220 V/4.5 A
110 V/5.0 A
60 V/5.0 A
48 V/5.0 A
24 V/5.0 A
1000 W
1000 W
550 W
300 W
240 W
120 W
In order to prevent any damage,
the external protection circuit
must switch off the motor in case
the rotor is blocked.
Turn on switching power for 30 s, recovery time until switching on
again is 15 minutes.
For short-term switching operations, an impulse/pause ratio of 3 %
must be considered.
Appendix
Technical Data – Relay Outputs
6.5

100 V/9.0 A
60 V/10.0 A
48 V/10.0 A
24 V/10.0 A
1000 W
600 W
480 W
240 W
Continuous and inching operation
is not permitted.
In order to prevent any damage,
the external protection circuit
must switch off the motor in case
the rotor is blocked.
Permissible continuous current per
contact
5 A
30 A for 1 s
contact
250 A for 30 ms
potential
5 A
Operating Time)
medium used
≤ 16 ms
DC 300 V, 4.5 A – 30 s ON, 15 min
OFF
DC 250 V, 1 hp motor – 30 s ON,
15 min OFF
DC 110 V, 3/4 hp motor – 30 s ON,
15 min OFF
DC 60 V, 10 A, 1/2 hp motor – 30 s
ON, 15 min OFF
DC 48 V, 10 A, 1/3 hp motor – 30 s
ON, 15 min OFF
DC 24 V, 10 A, 1/6 hp motor – 30 s
ON, 15 min OFF
4.7 nF, ± 20 %, AC 250 V
The power relays operate in interlocked mode, that is, only one relay of
each switching pair picks up at a time thereby avoiding a power-supply
short circuit.
Appendix
Technical Data – Relay Outputs
6.5

Base Module
Status Color Quantity
RUN Green 1
ERROR Red 1
Routable (adjustable
with DIGSI 5)
Only the defined color
can be used in opera-
tion.
2-colored: red or green 16
Expansion Module
Status Color Quantity
Routable Red 16 optional
Appendix
Technical Data – Light-Emitting Diodes in the On-Site Operation Panel
6.5

User Interface, Front Side
You can find a USB connection of type B for the connection to a
laptop computer or to a PC on the front side of the device. A
protection cover protects this USB connection against pollution
and humidity.
USB User interface
Connection USB type B
Insulation class PELV (Protective Extra Low Voltage) (according
to IEC 60255-27)
Time-Synchronization Interface (Port G)
The terminal for time synchronization is located on the D-sub 9
interface (position G). Time synchronization signals for DC 5 V,
DC 12 V, and DC 24 V can be processed as an option.
Time Synchronization External synchronization sources, for example,
DCF77
IRIG B signal
Connection Rear
D-sub 9
Rated signal voltages DC 5 V, DC 12 V, or DC 24 V (optional)
Test voltage AC 500 V at 50 Hz
Insulation class SELV (according to IEC 60255-27)
Max. line length 10 m (0.39 in)
On-Site Operation Panel for Surface-Mounting Housing (Port
H) (Available only for Modular Devices)
The terminal for the on-site operation panel of surface-mounted
devices is located on the D-sub 15 interface (position H). The on-
site operation panel of surface-mounted devices with integrated
or detached on-site operation panel is connected to this inter-
face.
User interface Detached on-site operation panel
Connection On the rear side
D-sub 15
Insulation class PELV (according to IEC 60255-27)
Integrated Ethernet Interface (Port J)
This terminal is used to load the device with DIGSI 5 using
Ethernet. This terminal also enables IEC 61850 Ethernet commu-
nication or communication with another protocol via Ethernet,
for example, for connecting an external RTD unit.
Interface Integrated Ethernet interface
Connection
(1) LED 1: Yellow
(2) LED 2: Green
Connector type 1 x RJ45
Baud rate 100 Mbit/s
Max. line length 20 m with Ethernet patch cable CAT 6 S/FTP, F/
FTP, or SF/FTP
Insulation class SELV (acc. to IEC 60255-27)
Interface design Corresponds to IEEE 802.3, 100Base-TX
Appendix
Technical Data – Communication Interfaces
6.5

Electrical Tests
Standards
IEC 60255 (product standard)
IEEE Std C37.90
UL 508
Additional standards are listed for the individual tests.
Voltage-Immunity and Safety Tests
Standards IEC 60255-27
Voltage test (routine test), current measure-
ment inputs, voltage measurement inputs,
relay outputs
AC 2.5 kV
50 Hz
Voltage test (routine test),
Auxiliary voltage, binary inputs
DC 3.5 kV
Voltage test (routine test), only isolated
communication and time-synchronization
interfaces and analog inputs (module position
E, F, M, N, and P)
DC 700 V
Surge immunity test (type testing), all circuits
except communication and time-synchroniza-
tion interfaces and analog inputs, class III
5 kV (peak value)
1.2 µs/50 µs
0.5 J
3 positive and 3 nega-
tive impulses at inter-
vals of 1 s
Insulation resistance > 100 MΩ @ DC 500 V
Resistor of protective-equipotential-bonding < 0.1 Ω @ DC 12 V,
30 A after 1 min.
EMC Immunity Tests (Type Tests, Test under Mounting
Conditions)
Standards IEC 60255-1 and -26 (product standards)
EN 61000-6-2 (generic standard)
Electrostatic discharge
test
IEC 61000-4-2
Contact discharge:
• Front-side modular and non-modular
devices 8 kV
• Rear panel modular devices 8 kV
• Rear panel non-modular devices 6 kV
Air discharge 15 kV
Both polarities
150 pF
Ri = 330 Ω
Radiated electromag-
netic field immunity
Frequency sweep
IEC 61000-4-3
20 V/m, 80 MHz to 1 GHz
10 V/m, 1 GHz to 6 GHz
80 % AM
1 kHz
Radiated electromag-
netic field immunity
Spot frequencies
IEC 61000-4-3
20 V/m, 80 MHz/160 MHz/380 MHz/450 MHz/
900 MHz
10 V/1.85 GHz/2.15 GHz
80 % AM
1 kHz
Dwell time ≥ 10 s
Electrical fast tran-
sient/burst immunity
IEC 61000-4-4
4 kV
5 ns/50 ns
5 kHz
Burst length 15 ms
Repetition rate 300 ms
Both polarities
Ri = 50 Ω
Test duration ≥ 1 min
High-energy surge
voltages
IEC 61000-4-5
Pulse: 1.2 µs/50 µs
Auxiliary voltage Common mode: 4 kV,
12 Ω, 9 µF
Differential mode:
2 kV, 2 Ω, 18 µF
(device version xB and
higher)
Differential mode:
1 kV, 2 Ω, 18 µF
(to device version xA)
and non-modular
devices
Measuring inputs,
binary inputs, and
relay outputs
Common mode: 4 kV,
42 Ω, 0.5 µF
Differential mode:
2 kV, 42 Ω, 0.5 µF
or varistor
Conducted RF, amplitude-modulated
IEC 61000-4-6
10 V, 150 kHz to
80 MHz, 80 % AM,
1 kHz
Conducted RF, amplitude-modulated
IEC 61000-4-6
Spot frequencies
27 MHz/68 MHz at 10
V, dwell time ≥ 10 s
80 % AM, 1 kHz
Power frequency
magnetic field
immunity test
IEC 61000-4-8
100 A/m (continuous)
1000 A/m for 3 s
Pulsed magnetic field
IEC 61000-4-9
1000 A/m, 8 µs/20 µs
Appendix
Technical Data – Electrical and Mechanical Tests
6.5

Standard for Surge
Withstand Capability
(SWC)
IEEE Std C37.90.1
2.5 kV (peak value)
1 MHz
τ = 15 µs
400 impulses per s
Test duration ≥ 10 s
Ri = 200 Ω
Common mode and differential mode test
Standard for Fast Tran-
sient Surge Withstand
Capability
IEEE Std C37.90.140
4 kV
5 ns/50 ns
5 kHz
Burst length 15 ms
Repetition rate 300 ms
Both polarities
Ri = 50 Ω
Test duration 60 s
Common mode and differential mode test
Standard for With-
stand Capability or
Relay Systems to Radi-
ated Electromagnetic
Interference from
Transceivers (Keying
test)
IEEE Std C37.90.2
20 V/m
80 MHz to 1 GHz
Pulse modulation (not valid for IO216)
Damped oscillatory
wave immunity test
IEC 61000-4-18
100 kHz, 1 MHz, 2.5 kV (peak value)
3 MHz, 10 MHz, 30 MHz, 2 kV (peak value)
Test duration ≥ 60 s
Power-frequency
disturbance variables
at binary inputs
IEC 61000-4-16
Zone A
150 V (differential mode)
300 V (common mode)
EMC Electromagnetic Emission Tests (Type Tests, Test under
Mounting Conditions)
Standards IEC 60255-26 (product
standard)
IEC 61000-6-4
(generic standard)
Conducted emission on auxiliary-voltage lines
CISPR 22
150 kHz to 30 MHz
limit class A
Radiated emission CISPR 11 30 MHz to 1 000 MHz
limit class A
CISPR 22 1 GHz to 6 GHz limit
class A
Loading effect in electricity-supply systems,
harmonics
Harmonic current emissions
Does not apply!
(see EN 61000-3-2,
section 7, power
consumption < 75 W)
Loading effect in electricity-supply systems,
voltage fluctuations
Flicker
Does not apply!
(see EN 61000-3-3,
section 6, no signifi-
cant voltage fluctua-
tions)
Mechanical Tests
Vibration and Shock Stress in Stationary Use
Standards IEC 60255-21 and IEC 60068
Vibration Test (sinusoidal)
IEC 60255-21-1, class 241
and
IEC 60068-2-6
Sinusoidal 10 Hz to 60 Hz: ± 0.075 mm
amplitude
60 Hz to 150 Hz; 10 m/s2 acceleration
Frequency sweep 1 octave/min
20 cycles in 3 axes perpendicular to one
another
Shock Test
IEC 60255-21-2, class 1
Semi-sinusoidal
Acceleration 50 m/s2
Duration 11 ms
3 shocks each in both directions of the
3 axes
Seismic Tests
IEC 60255-21-3, class 2 and
IEC 60068-3-3
Sinusoidal 3 Hz 42 to 35 Hz:
1 cycle in 3 axes perpendicular to one
another
3 Hz to 8 Hz: ± 7.5 mm amplitude (hori-
zontal axes)
3 Hz to 8 Hz: ± 3.5 mm amplitude (vertical
axis)
8 Hz to 35 Hz: 20 m/s2 acceleration (hori-
zontal axes)
8 Hz to 35 Hz: 10 m/s2 acceleration
(vertical axis)
Vibration and Shock Stress During Transport
Standards IEC 60255-21 and IEC 60068
Vibration Test (sinusoidal)
IEC 60255-21-1, class 243
and
IEC 60068-2-6
Sinusoidal 5 Hz to 8 Hz: ± 7.5 mm ampli-
tude
8 Hz to 150 Hz: 20 m/s2 acceleration
20 cycles in 3 axes perpendicular to one
another
40 If a module ETH-BD-2FO is installed on a PS201 in the top slot (plug-in module position E in ), the immunity for this module is currently restricted to
3.5 kV.
41 The non-modular devices in the assembly frame meet class 1.
42 For technical reasons, the frequency range is raised from 1 Hz to 3 Hz at the lower limit.
43 The non-modular devices in the assembly frame meet class 1.
Appendix
6.5

Shock Test
IEC 60068-2-27
Semi-sinusoidal
Duration 11 ms
3 axes
Continuous shock
IEC 60068-2-27
Semi-sinusoidal
Duration 16 ms
3 axes
Appendix
6.5

Temperatures
Type test, in operation
(in compliance with IEC 60068-2-1
and IEC 60068-2-2, test Ad for
16 h and test Bd for 16 h)
-25 °C to +85 °C
Temporarily permissible during
operation (tested for 96 h)
-25 °C to +70 °C
Load conditions for the non-
modular devices: With tempera-
tures above 55 °C, no more than
50 % of the binary inputs and relay
outputs per printed circuit board
assembly are allowed to be contin-
uously active.
Readability of the display may be
impaired below -10 °C and above
+55 °C.
Recommended for uninterrupted
duty
(in compliance with IEC 60255-1)
-10 °C to +55 °C
Temperatures for continuous
storage
-25 °C to +55 °C
Type test, transport and storage
for 16 h
-40 °C to +85 °C
Heat-related limitations for the binary inputs on the IO216 input
module (modular devices)
Switching
thresholds
Up to 55 °C Up to 70 °C
220 V operating
voltage
All 16 binary inputs
usable for uninterrupted
duty
10 binary inputs usable
for uninterrupted duty
Switching
thresholds
Up to 40 °C Up to 55 °C Up to 70 °C
Range 1 for
24 V, 48 V, and
60 V operating
voltage
All 48 binary
inputs usable for
uninterrupted
duty
All 48 binary
inputs usable for
uninterrupted
duty
All 48 binary
inputs usable for
uninterrupted
duty
Range 2 for 110
V and 125 V
operating
voltage
All 48 binary
inputs usable for
uninterrupted
duty
All 48 binary
inputs usable for
uninterrupted
duty
36 binary inputs
usable for unin-
terrupted duty
(max. 3 in each
group of 4 at the
same time)
Range 3 for 220
V and 250 V
operating
voltage
36 binary inputs
usable for unin-
terrupted duty
(max. 3 in each
group of 4 at the
same time)
24 binary inputs
usable for unin-
terrupted duty
(max. 2 in each
group of 4 at the
same time)
12 binary inputs
usable for unin-
terrupted duty
(max. 1 in each
group of 4 at the
same time)
i
i
NOTE
At an ambient temperature of 55 °C to 70 °C, a
maximum of 36 relays per row can be switched
on simultaneously.
Switching
thresholds
Range 1 for
24 V, 48 V, and
60 V operating
voltage
All 24 binary
inputs usable for
uninterrupted
duty
All 24 binary
inputs usable for
uninterrupted
duty
All 24 binary
inputs usable for
uninterrupted
duty
Range 2 for 110
V and 125 V
operating
voltage
All 24 binary
inputs usable for
uninterrupted
duty
All 24 binary
inputs usable for
uninterrupted
duty
18 binary inputs
usable for unin-
terrupted duty
(max. 3 in each
group of 4 at the
same time)
Range 3 for 220
V and 250 V
operating
voltage
18 binary inputs
usable for unin-
terrupted duty
(max. 3 in each
group of 4 at the
same time)
12 binary inputs
usable for unin-
terrupted duty
(max. 2 in each
group of 4 at the
same time)
6 binary inputs
usable for unin-
terrupted duty
(max. 1 in each
group of 4 at the
same time)
Switching
thresholds
Range 2 for 110
V and 125 V
operating
voltage
All 48 binary
inputs usable for
uninterrupted
duty
All 48 binary
inputs usable for
uninterrupted
duty
36 binary inputs
usable for unin-
terrupted duty
(max. 3 in each
group of 4 at the
same time)
UL-Listed/UL-Approved
Base module and 1/3 base module IND. CONT. EQ. 69CA
Expansion module IND. CONT. EQ. 69CA
Appendix
Technical Data – Environmental Conditions – Approval
6.5

Further Documentation
[dw_product-overview_catalog_SIP5, 1, en_US]
• Device manuals
Each Device manual describes the functions and applications
of a specific SIPROTEC 5 device. The printed manual and the
online help for the device have the same informational struc-
ture.
• Hardware manual
The Hardware manual describes the hardware building blocks
and device combinations of the SIPROTEC 5 device family.
• Operating manual
The Operating manual describes the basic principles and
procedures for operating and assembling the devices of the
SIPROTEC 5 range.
• Communication protocol manual
The Communication protocol manual contains a description
of the protocols for communication within the SIPROTEC 5
device family and to higher-level network control centers.
• Security manual
The Security manual describes the security features of the
SIPROTEC 5 devices and DIGSI 5.
• Process bus manual
The process bus manual describes the functions and applica-
tions specific for process bus in SIPROTEC 5.
The Product information includes general information about
device installation, technical data, limiting values for input
and output modules, and conditions when preparing for oper-
ation. This document is provided with each SIPROTEC 5
device.
• Engineering Guide
The Engineering Guide describes the essential steps when
engineering with DIGSI 5. In addition, the Engineering Guide
shows you how to load a planned configuration to a
SIPROTEC 5 device and update the functionality of the
SIPROTEC 5 device.
• DIGSI 5 online help
The DIGSI 5 online help contains a help package for DIGSI 5
and CFC.
The help package for DIGSI 5 includes a description of the
basic operation of software, the DIGSI principles and editors.
The help package for CFC includes an introduction to CFC
programming, basic examples of working with CFC, and a
reference chapter with all the CFC blocks available for the
SIPROTEC 5 range.
• SIPROTEC 5/DIGSI 5 Tutorial
The tutorial on the DVD contains brief information about
important product features, more detailed information about
the individual technical areas, as well as operating sequences
with tasks based on practical operation and a brief explana-
tion.
Appendix
6.6

• SIPROTEC 5 catalog
The SIPROTEC 5 catalog describes the system features and the
devices of SIPROTEC 5.
• Selection guide for SIPROTEC and Reyrolle
The selection guide offers an overview of the device series of
the Siemens protection devices, and a device selection table.
Appendix
6.6

Indication of Conformity
This product complies with the directive of the Council of
the European Communities on harmonization of the laws
of the Member States concerning electromagnetic
compatibility (EMC Directive 2014/30/EU), restriction on
usage of hazardous substances in electrical and elec-
tronic equipment (RoHS Directive 2011/65/EU), and elec-
trical equipment for use within specified voltage limits
(Low Voltage Directive 2014/35/EU).
This conformity has been proved by tests performed
according to the Council Directive in accordance with the
product standard EN 60255-26 (for EMC directive), the
standard EN 50581 (for RoHS directive), and with the
product standard EN 60255-27 (for Low Voltage Direc-
tive) by Siemens.
The device is designed and manufactured for application
in an industrial environment.
The product conforms with the international standards
of IEC 60255 and the German standard VDE 0435.
Disclaimer of Liability
Subject to changes and errors. The information given in this
document only contains general descriptions and/or perform-
ance features which may not always specifically reflect those
described, or which may undergo modification in the course of
further development of the products. The requested perform-
ance features are binding only when they are expressly agreed
upon in the concluded contract.
Document version: 07
Release status: 11.2020
Version of the product: V8.40
Copyright
Copyright © Siemens AG. All rights reserved.
The disclosure, duplication, distribution and editing of this docu-
ment, or utilization and communication of the content are not
permitted, unless authorized in writing. All rights, including
rights created by patent grant or registration of a utility model
or a design, are reserved.
Trademarks
SIPROTEC, DIGSI, SIGRA, SIGUARD, SIMEAS SAFIR, SICAM, and
MindSphere are trademarks of Siemens. Any unauthorized use is
prohibited.
Appendix
Legal Notices
6.7

Appendix
Legal Notices
6.7

1,2,3 ...
309, 340, 341
A
Arc protection module ARC-CD-3FO 408
Assembly dimensions
Flush-mounting device 429
Surface-mounted devices variant of non-modular
devices 433
Surface-mounted devices with detached on-site operation
panel 432
Surface-mounted devices with integrated on-site operation
panel 433
B
Bay Controllers 258
Browser-based user interface 374
Busbar protection 246
Busbar Protection 247
C
Circuit Breaker Management Device 158
Communication interfaces 339
Conformal coating 397
Cybersecurity 363
D
Device Types 12
DIGSI 5 375
Distance Protection 99
Drilling pattern
Flush-mounting device 429
Surface-mounted devices variant of non-modular
devices 433
Surface-mounted devices with detached on-site operation
panel 432
Surface-mounted devices with integrated on-site operation
panel 433
E
EMC test 445, 446
Event-log buffer 338
F
Fault recorders 279
Fault Recorders 280
Function
ANSI - 24 Overexcitation protection 304
ANSI - 87M Motor differential protection 324
ANSI 21, 21N - Distance protection with reactance method
(RMD) 302
ANSI 21, 21N – Distance Protection 301
ANSI 21T - Impedance Protection for Transformers 303
ANSI 25 - Synchrocheck 304
ANSI 25 – Adjusting commands for autom. synchro. 304
ANSI 27 - Undervoltage protection 304
ANSI 27TH/59TH, 59THD - Stator ground-fault protection
with 3rd harmonic 313
ANSI 32 dP/dt; 27, 50 - Power-plant disconnection 306
ANSI 32, 37 – Power Protection 305
ANSI 32R – Reverse-power protection 306
ANSI 37 - Undercurrent protection 306
ANSI 38 - Temperature supervision 306
ANSI 40 - Underexcitation protection 306
ANSI 46 - Unbalanced-load protection 307
ANSI 46, 67 - Overcurrent protection, negative-sequence
system with direction 307
ANSI 48 – Starting time supervision 308
ANSI 49H - Hotspot calculation 308
ANSI 49S - Stator overload protection 309
ANSI 50 - Startup overcurrent protection 309
ANSI 50/27 - Inadvertent energization protection 311
ANSI 50/51, 50N/51N - Overcurrent protection, phases and
ground 310
ANSI 50BF – Circuit-breaker failure protection 309
ANSI 50EF - End-fault protection 309
ANSI 50GN - Shaft-current protection 311
ANSI 50HS - Instantaneous high-current tripping 309
ANSI 50L – Load-jam protection 310
ANSI 50N/51N - Overcurrent protection, 1-phase 310
ANSI 50Ns/51Ns – Sensitive ground-current protec-
tion 310
ANSI 50RS - Circuit-breaker restrike protection 309
ANSI 51V - Voltage-controlled overcurrent protection 311
ANSI 59, 47, 59N - Overvoltage protection functions 308
ANSI 59C - Peak overvoltage protection for capacitors 312
ANSI 59N (IT) - Turn-to-turn fault protection 312
ANSI 59N, 67Ns - 90 % Stator ground-fault protection 312
ANSI 59N(DC), 50N(DC) - Direct-voltage/direct-current
protection 312
ANSI 60C - Current-unbalance protection for capacitor
banks 313
ANSI 60FL - Measuring-voltage failure detection 314
ANSI 64F - Rotor ground-fault protection 314
ANSI 64S - 100 % Stator ground-fault protection 313
ANSI 66 - Restart inhibit 314
ANSI 67, 67N – Directional overcurrent protection, phases/
ground 315
ANSI 67G, 50G, 51G - Directional ground-fault protection
with phase selector 315
ANSI 67Ns, ANSI 51Ns, 59N - Directional sensitive ground-
fault detection 316
ANSI 74TC – Trip-circuit supervision 317
ANSI 78 - Out-of-step protection 317
Index
7

ANSI 79 - Automatic reclosing 317
ANSI 81 – Frequency protection 318
ANSI 81R - Rate-of-frequency change protection 318
ANSI 85/21 - Teleprotection scheme for distance protec-
tion 319
ANSI 85/27 - Weak or no infeed 319
ANSI 85/67N – Teleprotection for directional ground-fault
protection 319
ANSI 87 STUB - STUB differential protection 322
ANSI 87 V – Voltage differential protection for capacitor
banks 326
ANSI 87B - Busbar differential protection 325
ANSI 87C - Capacitor bank differential protection 326
ANSI 87G - Generator differential protection 325
ANSI 87L, 87T - Line differential protection 319
ANSI 87N T - Restricted ground-fault protection 324
ANSI 87T - Differential protection for phase-angle regu-
lating transformers 323
ANSI 90V - Transformer voltage controller 328
Arc Protection 311
External trip initiations 309
Fault locator (FL) 326
Instantaneous tripping at switch-onto fault (SOFT) 309
Intermittent ground-fault protection 311
Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU) 326
Point-on-wave switching (PoW) 330
QU protection 305
Reactive-power undervoltage protection (QU protection)
305
G
Generator Protection Device 222
Generator protection devices 221
Grid Diagnostic Suite 393
H
HSR = High Available Seamless Ring Redundancy 358
I
IEC 61850 – Ethernet-based substation automation
protocol 386
IEC 61850 System Configurator 385
IEEE 802.1x 366
Insulation test 445
Interfaces 404
Detached operation panel (port H) 404
Expansion unit CB202 (port K) 404
Integrated Ethernet interface (port J) 404
Time-synchronization interface (port G) 404
L
Line Differential and Distance Protection 138
Line Differential Protection 119
Line protection devices 92
Log 338
M
Measuring-transducer module ANAI-CA-4EL 408
Modules
Base and expansion modules 399
Hardware Properties 403
Modular devices 411
Non-modular devices - 7xx81, 7xx82 409
Motor protection devices 206
O
Overcurrent protection 163
Overcurrent protection devices 66
P
P1V 384
P1X 384
Paralleling Device 234
Paralleling Devices 233
Plug-in modules 339
Arc protection module ARC-CD-3FO 408
Electrical Ethernet module (ETH-BO-2EL) 340
Long-distance fiber optical modules 340
Measuring-transducer module ANAI-CA-4EL 408
Optical Ethernet module (ETH-BB-2FO) 341, 341
Plug-in modules for Ethernet 340
Serial electrical RS485 module 339
Serial optical 820-nm module 339
Serial plug-in modules 339
USART-AB-1EL 339
USART-AC-2EL 339
USART-AE-2FO 340
USART-Ax- 340
Point-on-wave switching (PoW) 330
Power Quality – Basic (PQ-Basic) 334
PROFINET IO S2 redundancy 352
Protection communication 355
Protocols 347
Ethernet redundancy with RSTP, PRP, HSR 354
IEC 60870-5-103 351
IEC 60870-5-104 351
IEC 61850-8-1 Client-server communication 347
IEC 61850-8-1 GOOSE 347
IEC 61850-9-2 Process bus 347
IEEE C37.118 (Synchrophasor) 353
Modbus TCP 352
Serial DNP3 or DNP3 TCP 351
Index
7

SNMP 355
SUP – Slave Unit Protocol 351
PRP = Parallel Redundancy Protocol 358
R
Recorder 336
Redundancy 359
Seamless redundancy with PRP and HSR 357
Serial redundancy 358
S
Safety 361
SIGRA 389
SIPROTEC 6MD85 259
SIPROTEC 6MD86 265
SIPROTEC 7KE85 280
SIPROTEC 7SA82 99
SIPROTEC 7SA86 105
SIPROTEC 7SA87 112
SIPROTEC 7SD82 119
SIPROTEC 7SD86 124
SIPROTEC 7SD87 131
SIPROTEC 7SJ81 67
SIPROTEC 7SJ82 73
SIPROTEC 7SJ85 81
SIPROTEC 7SJ86 163
SIPROTEC 7SK82 207
SIPROTEC 7SK85 214
SIPROTEC 7SL82 138
SIPROTEC 7SL86 144
SIPROTEC 7SL87 151
SIPROTEC 7SS85 247
SIPROTEC 7UM85 222
SIPROTEC 7UT82 171
SIPROTEC 7UT85 177
SIPROTEC 7UT86 187
SIPROTEC 7UT87 195
SIPROTEC 7VE85 234
SIPROTEC 7VK87 158
SIPROTEC Dashboard 393
SIPROTEC DigitalTwin 391
Standards 445
Surface-mounted device components 397
T
Terminals 405
Current terminals 405
Voltage terminals 405
Time synchronization 337
Time synchronization using IEEE 1588 354
Time synchronization with SNTP protocol 354
Transformer differential protection devices 169
V
VLAN 353
W
Web UI 374
Index
7

Published by

Siemens AG 2020
Smart Infrastructure
Digital Grid
Automation Products
Humboldtstr. 59
90459 Nuremberg, Germany
Customer Support Center
Our Customer Support Center provides a 24-hour service.
Siemens AG
Smart Infrastructure – Digital Grid
Customer Support Center
Tel.: +49 911 2155 4466
E-Mail: energy.automation@siemens.com
Article No. SIDG-C10059-00-7600
CA 112020_455_pdf_EN
For all products using security features of OpenSSL the
following shall apply:
This product includes software developed by the
OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit.
(http://www.openssl.org)
This product includes cryptographic software written
by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com )
This product includes software written
by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com)
This product includes software developed
by Bodo Moeller.

SIPROTEC-5-Catalog-EN .pdf

More Related Content

Similar to SIPROTEC-5-Catalog-EN .pdf (20)

Recently uploaded (20)

SIPROTEC-5-Catalog-EN .pdf